INSTRUCTORS’ GUIDE 
FOR 
MEDICAL DEPARTMENT 
MOBILIZATION TRAINING PROGRAM 8-1 
FOR 
MEDICAL UNITS OR INSTALLATIONS 
UNO 
MEDICAL DEPARTMENT TECHNICIANS 
Prepared under direction of 
THE SURGEON GENERAL 
SEPTEMBER 1942 TABLE OF CONTENTS 
Paragraph Page 
CHAPTER, 1, Medical Department Mobilization Training Program 8-1* 
SECTION I. General 
Authorization 1 3 
Purpose 2 3 
Application 3 3 
Modification 4 3 
Scope of Instruction 5 3 
II. Training Programs 
Master Program 6 6 
Detailed Programs 7 8 
Basic 7a 8 
Technical 7b 8 
Tactical and Logistical 7c 10 
Medical or Surgical Technicians, Basic 8 12 
Dental Technician, Basic (Chair Assistant) 9 13 
Veterinary Technician, Basic 10 14 
Sanitary Technician 11 15 
III. Programs for Common Specialists’ Training- 
Bandsman (021) 12 16 
Clerk (052) and (055) 13 17 
Supply Sergeant and Receiving and Shipping 
Clerk (186) 14 18 
Mess Sergeant (124) and Cook (060) 15 19 
Truckmaster (068), Foreman Mechanic (086) 
and Automobile Mechanic (014) 16 20 
Truckdriver (245) and Motorcyclist (678) 17 21 
CHAPTER 2. Programs for Medical Department Technicians 
Dental (067) 18 25 
Laboratory (Medical and Veterinary) (051) 19 27 
Medical (123) 20 29 
Pharmacy (149) 21 31 
Sanitary (196) 22 34 
Surgical (225) 23 36 
X-Ray (264) 24 39 
Veterinary, medical (250) 25 42 
Veterinary, surgical (226) 26 43 
Veterinary, Meats and Dairy Hygienists (120) 27 44 
CHAPTER 3. Instructors’ Guide for Medical Department 
Mobilization Training Program 8-1 
Introduction 51 
SECTION I. Basic Military Training 
Military Courtesy and Discipline 52 
Personal Hygiene and First Aid 71 
Equipment, Clothing and Shelter Tent Pitching 77 
Individual Defense Against Chemical Attack 97 
Individual Defense Against Air, Parachute and 
Mechanized Attack 105 
Interior Guard 112 
Dismounted Drill 116 
Marches and Bivouacs 147 
Physical Training 157 
* The contents of Chapter 1 supersede that portion of MTP 8-1, September 9, 1940, 
which relates to Medical Department Unit Training Centers. 11. Technical Training 
Hasty Entrenchments and Shelter (Camouflage) 160 
Elementary Anatomy and Physiology 165 
Nomenclature and Care of Organizational Equipment 185 
Field Medical Records 189 
Treatment of Gas Casualties 193 
Litter Drill, including Ambulance Loading and 
Unloading, and Passage of Obstacles 205 
Field Sanitation and Sanitary Appliances 212 
Materia Medica and Pharmacy 227 
Medical and Surgical Nursing 237 
Heavy Tent Pitching 249 
Organization and Function of the Arms 260 
Organization and Function of Medical Units 268 
Medical Aid 273 
111. Tactical and Logistical Training 
Movement by Motor 327 
Movement by Rail 330 
Scouting and Patrolling, Use of Cover and 
Concealment 333 
Map and Aerial Photograph Reading 337 
Orientation in Night Combat 346 
Communications in Combat 350 
Technical and Tactical Employment of Medical Field 
Units, Medical Detachments, Battalions and Regi- 
ments 358 
Troop Movements by Motors 483 
Inspections 485 
IV. Instructors’ Guide for Veterinary Units 487 
Elementary Anatomy and Physiology 488 
Field Veterinary Records 494 
Ambulance (Animal) Loading and Unloading 497 
Medical and Surgical Nursing (Animal) 500 
Medical Aid (Spints and Splinting; Bandages and 
Dressings) 507 
Technical and Tactical Employment of Veterinary 
Units 521 
Appendix I. List of Text References 541 
Appendix II. List of Instructional Aids, Basic Training- 543 
Appendix III. List of Instructional Aids, Technical Training- 545 
Appendix IV. List of Instructional Aids, Tactical and Logistical 
Training 549 
Appendix V. List of Instructional Aids, Veterinary Training 551 CHAPTER 1 
MOBILIZATION TRAINING PROGRAM 
8-1 CHAPTER 1 
SECTION I 
GENERAL 
1. Authorization. This Mobilization Training Program is issued 
in compliance with MR 3-1. 
2. Purpose. The purpose of this program is to furnish a general 
guide for the balanced training of Medical Department units so that 
they may be prepared to take the field on short notice. 
3. Application, a. The training programs apply to all types of 
medical units and installations. Based upon these programs training 
schedules will be prepared by the responsible unit commanders. 
b. The instruction day is 8 hours with 4 hours on Saturday. 
More time per day may be utilized when desirable, especially in con- 
nection with marches, field exercises, and the like. The open time 
will be used to compensate for interruptions; to bring individuals or 
units up to standard; to provide refresher training; or for purposes 
of mass athletics, competitive games, and morale building in general. 
c. In order to obtain the latest references it is essential to con- 
sult the most recent edition of FM 21-6, which contains a list of training 
publications, training films (sound and silent), and film strips. This 
manual is frequently revised. Ordinarily, field and technical manuals, 
training films and film strips will contain sufficient instructional matter 
for training purposes. Army Regulations should also be used. 
4. Modifications. The programs may require modification to adapt 
them to training for the type of medical unit in which the individuals 
are being trained; to shorten or lengthen the time of training in order 
to conform to the time available; to make the best use of existing 
facilities and of training expedients; and to conform to the climatic 
or other conditions affecting the training situation. Progressive and 
balanced training in subjects essential to accomplish the training mis- 
sion must, however, be observed at all times. 
5. Scope of instruction, a. General training will be conducted in 
accordance with the doctrine prescribed in FM 21-5, TF 7-295, and TM 
1-1000- 
b. First or basic period (1st and 2d weeks for all men). The 
preliminary training of the individual enlisted man will be stressed. 
At the end of this period he should be able to wear properly, display, and 
care for his uniform and equipment; understand and correctly practice 
indoor and outdoor military courtesy; and have an applicatory knowl- 
edge of the essentials of all basic subjects prescribed in this program. 
c. Technical period (3d - 10th weeks, inclusive). Training of 
the individual enlisted man continues, but emphasis is placed upon 
fundamental technical subjects which will fit him for actual practice or 
further training in a medical unit or installation. In addition to the 
3 technical subjects, specialist (common or administrative specialties) 
training, tactical and logistical training is begun. 
d. Tactical period (11th - 13 weeks, inclusive). This period 
should be devoted largely to field and applicatory exercises. At the 
end of this period personnel intended for tactical medical units should 
be able to march and execute tactical movements with facility, establish 
and operate stations, collect and treat casualties in the field during 
day or night, operate battalion or regimental aid stations, and partici- 
pate with the associated arms both in field exercises and under combat 
conditions. Generally, personnel intended for professional units or instal- 
lations should be able to qualify as ward attendants, either medical or 
surgical, and have sufficient technical knowledge to act as basic tech- 
nicians in Medical Department specialties. It is not contemplated 
that training under these programs will qualify either medical or surgi- 
cal technicians for the higher ratings in the Medical Department. For 
individuals qualified to receive further training in Medical Department 
specialties, such as dental, laboratory, pharmacy, veterinary, x-ray, 
medical, and surgical technicians, application may be made to The 
Surgeon General for attendance at the Medical Department enlisted 
technicians’ school for enlisted specialists courses. Men so qualified 
may be selected by the end of the 8th to 10th week of training. 
e. Subjects. (1) Basic period. The essential minimum of mili- 
tary training consists of the following instruction, the foundation of 
which must be completed within the first two (2) weeks: 
(a) Military courtesy and discipline. An understanding of 
the necessity for discipline, the punitive Articles of War, the penalties 
for violation, and the methods of administering military justice. In- 
struction in the essentials of correct military conduct should be sup- 
plemented by continuous attention to its application during all subse- 
quent training. 
(b) Personal hygiene, sanitation and first aid. An under- 
standing of the importance of personal hygiene (including sex hygiene), 
the prevention of venereal disease; group sanitation and the rules for 
maintaining sanitary conditions, particularly in the field; an under- 
standing of the proper rendering of first aid to the wounded and gassed, 
and practice in the use of the first aid packet, splints and tourniquets. 
(c) Equipment, clothing, and tent pitching. Practical 
knowledge of the correct manner of displaying clothing and equipment; 
the care and preservation of arms, equipment and clothing; the as- 
sembling and adjusting of the pack, and care of individual equipment; 
the pitching and striking of shelter tents; and inspection of formations. 
(d) Physical training. Participation in group calisthenics 
for improving the physical condition of the individual. 
(e) Interior guard and drill for foot troops. Ability to 
execute individual movements and those of close and extended order 
formations, with reasonable precision; to have a practical knowledge 
of the duties of a sentry on interior guard duty. 
4 (f) Nomenclature and care of organizational equipment. 
This time is to be utilized in familiarizing individuals with equipment 
and supplies peculiar to the Medical Department and with the proper care 
of equipment. 
(g) Marches and bivouacs. An understanding of march 
discipline and technique; ability to march with a unit carrying full 
field equipment, and to occupy and break bivouac. During this train- 
ing opportunities should be created for supplementing and practicing 
the instruction contained in (b), (c), (e), and (b). 
(h) Individual defense measures. Practice in the use and 
wearing of the gas mask. Identification and means of defense against 
hostile chemical agents; elementary knowledge of how and when the 
enemy may use such agents. Knowledge of the essentials of scouting 
and patrolling, and the use of cover and concealment. An understand- 
ing of the location and construction of individual shelter and the use 
of camouflage. A knowledge of the markings identifying friendly and 
hostile aircraft and armored troops, and measures for antiparachute, 
antiaircraft, and antimechanized defense. 
(2) Technical, tactical, and logistical. Technical and tactical 
employment of a medical field unit including establishment and opera- 
tion of stations; collection and treatment of casualties in the field; the 
operation of regimental and battalion dispensaries; and the prepara- 
tion for participation with the associated arms in field exercises and 
under combat conditions. See Section II for subjects, hours, and text 
references. 
(3) Specialists. In so far as is practicable, administrative 
(common) specialists will receive instruction concurrently with the 
instruction of the training unit as a whole, and proportionately with 
the rates of occurrence of such specialists, as determined and published 
from time to time by the War Department. At the discretion of the 
commanders of units, administrative specialists will be excused from 
instruction in subjects not particularly allied to their intended or con- 
templated specialty, provided they have been thoroughly qualified in 
the basic subjects. For detailed programs, common or administrative 
specialists, see Section III. 
5 SECTION II 
TRAINING PROGRAM 
6. Master Program 
Subject 
Nonspecialist (521) 
Basic Medical or Surgical Technician 
(521) |K 
Basic Dental Technician (Chair As- £ 
sistant) (521) 
Basic Veterinary Technician (521) 
o 
Junior Sanitary Technician (196) £ 
CD 
d to 
oq 
o 
£ 
d 
E 
W 
£ 
d 
PQ 
Clerk (052) and (055) « 
Supply Sergeant and Receiving and & 
Shipping Clerk (186) r„ 
! P 
Mess Sergeant (124) and Cook (060) 
Truckmaster (068) Foreman Mechanic o 
(086), and automobile mechanic (014) 
Truckdriver (068) (245) (345) 
Motorcyclist (678) 
Military courtesy and discipline 
6 
6 
6 
6 
6 
6 
6 
6 
6 
6 
6 
Personal hygiene, Sanitation and first aid. 
5 
5 
5 
5 
5 
5 
5 
5 
5 
5 
5 
Equipment, clothing, and tent pitching.... 
9 
9 
9 
9 
9 
8 
8 
8 
8 
8 
8 
Individual defense against chemical attack 
6 
6 
6 
6 
6 
6 
6 
6 
6 
6 
6 
Individual defense against air, parachute, 
and mechanized attack 
5 
5 
5 
4 
4 
2 
2 
2 
2 
2 
2 
Interior guard 
3 
3 
3 
3 
3 
2 
2 
2 
2 
2 
2 
Dismounted drill 
29 
29 
23 
19 
21 
15 
15 
12 
12 
12 
21 
Marches and bivouacs 
45 
45 
29 
21 
29 
15 
15 
12 
12 
12 
31 
Physical training 
39 
39 
27 
21 
27 
15 
15 
6 
6 
6 
27 
Hasty entrenchments and shelter 
(camouflage) 
12 
12 
4 
4 
8 
4 
4 
12 
Elementary anatomy and physiology 
21 
21 
13 
6 
6 
8 
Nomenclature and care of organization 
equipment 
6 
6 
6 
4 
4 
2 
2 
2 
2 
2 
2 
Field medical records 
5 
5 
5 
3 
3 
. 3 
3 
3 
3 
3 
3 
Treatment of gas casualties 
8 
8 
4 
4 
4 
4 
Litter drill, including ambulance loading 
and unloading; and passage of obstacles 
10 
10 
10 
8 
8 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
Field sanitation and sanitary appliances .. 
20 
20 
12 
6 
6 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
9 
Materia medica and pharmacy 
12 
12 
10 
7 
7 
2 
Medical and surgical nursing 
16 
16 
12 
8 
8 
2 
2 
2 
2 
2 
6 
Heavy tent pitching 
6 
6 
6 
4 
4 
2 
2 
2 
2 
2 
2 
Organization and function of the arms .. 
9 
9 
7 
4 
4 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
3 
Organization and function of the medical 
unit 
9 
9 
9 
4 
4 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
Medical aid (splints and splinting; 
bandages and dressings) 
60 
60 
33 
20 
31 
8 
8 
2 
2 
2 
35 
Movement by motor 
4 
4 
2 
2 
2 
Movement by rail 
4 
4 
2 
2 
4 
2 
2 
4 
Scouting and patrolling, use of cover and 
concealment 
6 
rT 
6 
6 
6 
3 
3 
3 
3 
3 
3 
6 Subject 
Nonspecialist (521) 
Basic Medical or Surgical Technician 
(521) m 
Basic Dental Technician (Chair As- £ 
sistant) (521) m 
Basic Veterinary Technician (521) 
Junior Sanitary Technician (196) 
I to 
r-H 
O 
£ 
a 
m 
£ 
w 
Clerk (052) and (055) g 
Supply Sergeant and Receiving and P* 
Shipping Clerk (186) m 
P 
Mess Sergeant (124) and Cook (060) c? 
Truckmaster (068) Foreman Mechanic o 
(086), and automobile mechanic (014) 
Truckdriver (068) (245) (345) 
Motorcyclist (678) 1 
Map and aerial photograph readingt .... 
15 
13 
15 
Orientation in night combat 
14 
6 
8 
4 
8 
4 
4 
10 
Communications in combat 
10 
5 
5 
5 
10 
5 
5 
10 
Technical and tactical employment 
of medical field units 
95 
68 
65 
85 
65 
65 
92 
Troop movements by motors 
16 
16 
16 
16 
16 
16 
16 
Inspections 
17 
17 
11 
8 
11 
5 
5 
2 
2 
2 
11 
Open time 
50 
50 
34 
26 
34 
18 
18 
6 
6 
6 
34 
Total hours 
572 
433 
396 
308 
396 
220 
220 
88 
88 
88 
396 
(General, basic, technical, tactical, and 
logistical training) 
Training in Specialty (see detailed pro- 
gram; pars. 8-17 inclusive) 
Basic 
16 
24 
16 
28 
28 
34 
44 
44 
16 
Technical 
139 
144 
216 
144 
292 
292 
406 
396 
396 
144 
Open time 
16 
24 
16 
32 
32 
44 
44 
44 
16 
Total 
572 
572|572|572|572|572|572|572|572|572)572 
t This instruction applies especially to chauffeurs, 
motorcyclists, messengers, 
liaison 
agents, and any other individuals of Medical 
Battalions 
or 
Eegiments, 
as 
determined 
by the Commanding Officer. For other individuals, 
this 
time may 
be utilized 
for 
ad- 
ditional instruction in any subjects. 
7 7. Detailed programs. 
Hours per week 
Subject 
References 
To- 
tal 
hrs. 
1 Basic 
1 train 
mg' 
Technical, tactical, 
and logistical training 
I 
1 2 
3 
4 
5 
1 6 
7 
8 
i 9 
10 
11 
12 
13 
a. Basic. 
1 
(1) Military 
courtesy and 
discipline 
EM 21-50, 21-100, 22- 
5, 26-5; AE 600-25, 
600-355 and 615-290; 
AW 110; MCM; TF 
11-157, and TF 11-235 
6 
4 
2 
(2) Personal 
hygiene, and 
first aid. 
Chs. 6 and 8-10, FM 
21-10; FM 21-100, TM 
8-220; FS 8-6, FS 8-7, 
FS 8-8, TF 8-33 and 8- 
150 (40 min.) ; TF 8- 
154 and 8-155 (30 
min.) 
4 
i 
(3) Equipment, 
clothing, and 
shelter tent 
pitching. 
Secs. I-V, FM 21-15; 
FM 22-5; AR 615-40; 
FS 8-24 
9 
4 
4 
1 
(4) Individual de- 
fense against 
chemical 
attack. 
Secs. I-V, FM 21-40; 
FM 21-45 ; FS 3-1, 3-2, 
3-3, 3-4, 3-5, 3-6, 3-7; 
TM 3-205, 3-215, 8-220, 
8-285 ; TC No. 3, W.D., 
1942; TF 3-216, 3-217, 
3-218, 8-304 
6 
2 
4 
(5) Individual de- 
fense against 
air, parachute, 
and mechaniz- 
ed attack 
Sec. VII, Ch. 3, FM 
25-10; pars. 245-262, 
FM 100-5 ; TF 5-145, 5- 
146, 5-147, 5-148, and 
5-149 (55 min), TF 7- 
35, 7-109 (18 min), TF 
7-110 (7 min) ; FS 4- 
2; TC 10, WD, 1940, 
TC 31, WD, 1941, TC 
47, WD, 1941, TC 73, 
WTD, 1941; FM 21-45 
5 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
(6) Interior Guard 
Pars. 1-31, FM 26-5 
3 
1 
1 
1 
(7) Dismounted 
Drill 
FM 22-5 ; TF 7-143. 7- 
144, 7-248, 7-249; FS 
7-23 
29 
6 
6 
2 
2 
2 
2 
2 
2 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
(8) Marches and 
Bivouacs 
1 
Ch. 8, FM 21-10, ch. 3, 
FM 25-10, 21-25, chs. 9 
and 10, FM 100-5 ; FS 
4-2 ; TF 5-146, 5-147. 
45 
4 
8 
3 
3 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
3 
(9) Physical 
training 
Chs. 1-3, FM 21-20; 
AR 605-110; TF 11-184 
39 
3 
3 
3 
3 
3 
3 
3 
3 
3 
3 
3 
3 
S 
8  
Hours per 
Week 
Subject 
References 
To- 
tal 
hrs. 
Basic 
train 
ing 
Technical, tactical, 
and logistical training 
1 
2 
3i 
4| 
5 
6 
7 
81 
9 
101 
11[ 
12 
13 
b. Technical. 
j 
1 
1 
1 
I 1 
(10) Hasty en- 
trenchments 
and shelter 
(camouflage) 
Secs. I, VIII, and IX | 
PM 5-15 ; Secs. 1-4, F- 
M 5-20; TF 7-35 (30 j 
min) ; FS 5-3. 
12 
4i 
4 J 
4 
(11) Elementary 
anatomy and 
physiology 
Ch. 2, TM 8-220 j 
21 
3 
3 
3 
4 
4 
4 
(12) Nomenclature 
and care of 
organization 
equipment 
App MD Sup Cat; T/ j 
BA 8, App I II, and 
111; FM 8-10; TM 8- 
220. 
6 
1 
2 
1 
21 
2 
1 
(13) Field medical 
records 
FM 8-45; Ch. 6, TM 
8-220 ; AR 40-1025. 
5 
i 
21 
2 
(14) Treatment of 
gas casualties 
Ch. 7 ,TM 8-220 ; TM ' 
3-205, TM 8-285; FM 
21-40; TC No. 3 and 
4, WD, 1942; FS 3-1; 
TF 8-304. 
8 
4 
2 
2 
(15) Litter drill in- 
cluding ambu- | 
lance loading 
and unloading; 
and passage of 
obstacles. 
Chs. 3 and 4, FM 8- 
35 ; FS 8-16 ; TF 8-33 
10 
2 
2 
2 
2 
2 
(16) Field sanita- 
tion and sani- 
tary appliances 
FM 8-40; FM 21-10; 
Ch. 5, TM 8-220; FS 
8-1 to 8-5 ; FS 8-9 to 
8-12, inch 
20 
1 
3 
2 
2 
4 
4 
4 
(17) Materia 
Medica and 
Pharmacy. 
TM 8-233 ; 8-220 
12 
4 
3 
3 
2 
(18) Medical and 
surgical 
nursing. 
Ch. 4, TM 8-220; 8- 
260; 8-500; FM 8-45; 
AR 40-1005; 40-1025, 
40-590 
16 
1 
1 
2 
4 
2 
2 
2 
2 
(19) Heavy tent 
pitching. 
App I, FM 8-5; Sec 
VI, FM 21-15; FS 8-39 
6 
1 
2 
2 
2 
1 
(20) Organization 
and function of 
the arms. 
Ch. 2, FM 4-5 ; Secs. I- 
IV FM 5-5; Secs. I 
and II, FM 6-5 ; App. 
II, FM 7-5 ; appropri- 
ate T/O’s; FM 8-10; 
100-5; 101-5; 101-10; 
TF 7-236 
9 
1 
3 
3 
2 
(21) Organization 
and function of 
the medical 
unit. 
FM 8-5, FM 8-10, T/O 
8-series 
9 
1 
1 
1 
2 
3 
2 
(22) Medical aid 
(splints and 
splinting; ban- 
dages and 
dressings). 
FM 8-50; Ch. 10, FM 
21-10; Ch. 3, TM 8- 
220; FS 8-7; 8-15; 8- 
25 to 8-31 incl; 8-35 
to 8-37 incl; TF 8-33 ; 
8-150. 
60 
1 
2 
7 
5 
6 
i 
7 
8 
8 
5 
6 
4 
2 
9  
1 
Hours 
per Week 
Subject 
References 
To- 
tal 
hrs. 
Basic 
train 
ing 
Technical, tactical, 
and logistical training 
1 
1 2 
3 
4 
5 
6 
7 
8 
9 
10 
1111IS113 
c. Tactical and 
Logistical. 
(23) Movement by 
motor (prac- 
tice in entruck- 
ing and de- 
trucking, only 
2 hrs. daylight, 
2 hrs. dark) 
Par. 190, FM 22-5 ; Sec. 
V, FM 25-10; Ch. 9, 
FM 100-5 
4 
2 
2 
(24) Movement by 
rail, entraining 
and detraining 
Sec. I, Ch. 6, TM 5-400 ; 
25-10; Sec. I, Ch. 3, 
FM 100-10; AR 30- 
910, 30-920, 30-945, W 
D Cir. No. 56, 1940 
4 
2 
2 
(25) Scouting and 
patrolling, use 
of cover and 
concealment 
Pars. 201, 206, 215, 231- 
233, and 286, FM 7-5 ; 
pars. 222, 224, 231 and 
232, FM 21-100; FM 
30-30; FS 5-3; 5-10; 
TF 7-234; FM 21-45 
6 
3 
3 
(26) Map and aerial 
photograph 
reading* 
FM 21-25, 21-30; FM 
21-26; FS 5-1; FS 5-2; 
TF 5-12, 7-233 
15 
15)* 
2 
6 
7 
(27) Orientation in 
night combat* 
Par. 212, FM 7-5 ; pars 
| 587-601, FM 100-5 
14 
(8)* 
2 
2 
2 
4* 
4* 
(28) Communica- 
tions in com- 
bat* 
Ch. 8, FM 11-5 ; Chs. 2, 
3, 5 and 6, FM 24-5; 
FS 11-1; TF 7-13 
1 io 
(5)*| 
i 
1 
3 
2 
3* 
2* 
(29) Technical and 
tactical em- 
ployment of 
medical field 
units (Batta- 
lion and regi- 
mental medical 
detachments, 
medical batta- 
lions and regi- 
ments and/or 
similar regi- 
ments) t 
FM 5-20; 7-5; 8-5; 
8-10, 8-50, 8-55, 21-10, ( 
21-100, 22-5, 25-10, 100- 
5, 100-10; TM 5-400. 
8-220, 8-260, 8-285, 8- 
500, 12-250; FS 8-1, 8- 
3, 8-7, 8-9, 8-17 to 
8-22, inch, and 8-25 to 
8-31 inch 
95 f 
95)* 
1 
2 
3 
4 
10 
10 
21 
21 
23 
(30) Troop move- 
ments by 
motors* 
Ch. 3, FM 25-10; Ch. 
9, FM 100-5 
16 
16)* 
8 
8 
(31) Inspections | 
Sec. IV, FM 21-15 ; FM 
7-5, 21-5; pars. 239- 
242, FM 22-5; TM 10- 
545 ; AR 40-205 ; AMB 
No. 23, 3rd Edition 
17 
1 
1 
1 
2 
1 
2 
2 
1 
2 
1 
1 
1 
1 
Open time 
(see par. 3b) 
]50 
2 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
Total 
1572 
44 
44 
44 
44 
44 
44 
44 
44 
44 
44 
44 
44 
44 
10 NOTES 
* The time marked with parentheses ( )*, in the detailed programs, is available for 
training basic medical and surgical technicians in professional subjects. See para- 
graph 8 for the scope of this 139 hours of instruction, 
t Technical and tactical employment of field units. 
The distribution of the 95 hours marked (t) in the Detailed Program is shown in the 
following table. 
Six of the training subjects in the table below are marked with an asterisk. The 
instruction in subjects so marked will be conducted concurrently by the various ele- 
ments of the unit in which such subjects are common. 
Training Subject 
Attached 
Medical 
Headquarters 
and Service W 
2 
P 
O) 
Collecting 
Ui 
ind Ho 
be 
.2 
<D 
6 
a 
►i 
Ambulance m 
Professional 
1 ! 
29(a) Functions and combat dispositions of 
sections of headquarters and service, col- 
lecting, ambulance, or clearing elements 
15 
15 
15 
15 
29(b) Reconnaissance, use of cover and con- 
eealment. 
10 
10 
10 
10 
10 
29(c) and evacuation of casual- 
ties from the field (day and night) 
30 
30 
29(d) * Ambulance driving shuttle (day and 
night) 
15 
29(e) * Ambulance driving convoy (day and 
night) 
15 
29(f) *Nursing and ward management (see 
scope of instruction for junior medical and 
surgical technicians) (95 hours) 
30 
95 
29(g) *Transportation and supply require- 
ments 
15 
29(h) *Procurement and issue of supplies 
15 
29(i) Selection and occupation of various 
station sites, and the functioning of in- 
tegral parts of station 
15 
15 
15 
15 
15 
29 (j) Forward displacements and with- 
drawals during action 
5 
5 
5 
5 
5 
29(h) Operation of regimental and bat- 
* 
talion dispensaries 
1 15 
1 
29(1) Battalion or regimental training 
(field exercises) 
j 20 
[ 20 
20 
| 20 
20 
Total 
| 95 
| 95 
95 
95 
95 
95 
11 8. Technicians, basic (medical or surgical). 
Hours, scope of instruction, and text references. See paragraph 
7c. subjects (26) to (30) incl. for hours alloted. 
Subject 
Number 
of 
Hours 
Scope of Instruction 
References 
(Jeneral 
13 
Eesponsibility for public property; Medical De- 
partment property lists, issue, exchange and 
credit; patient’s property and effects; personal 
effects in case of death; care of linen (soiled 
and clean) ; special linen. 
Sec. Ill, 
Ch. 6, 
TM 8-220 
Ward 
M anagement 
65 
Duties of ward masters; duties of ward attend- 
ants; ward discipline; prison wards; care of 
ward supplies, medicines, narcotics, whiskey and 
poison; isolation in care of communicable 
diseases; care of, and reports in connection with, 
seriously ill and insane; care of mail and tele- 
grams. Structure and mechanism of sterilizers. 
Preparation of linens and instruments (for ster- 
ilizers) and their sterilization. Antisepsis and 
asepsis as applied in preparation of patients, 
surgeon and assistants. 
Ch. 4, 
TM 8-220. 
Care and 
treatment 
of patients 
39 
Admission and bathing of patients. Taking 
and recording pulse, temperature, and respira- 
tion ; change in appearance of patients; bed 
making and changing of linens; use of urinals 
and bed pans; alcohol rubs; care of hair, mouth, 
and nails of patients; administration of medi- 
cines, routine and special; ice bags, hot water 
bags, uses and cautions in placing them; enemas, 
all types, their composition, preparation, use and 
methods of administration. 
Ch. 4. 
TM 8-220. 
Diets 
10 
Care of dishes, set-up of trays, size of servings; 
diets, light, soft, liquid, regular, and special. 
i 
Sec. IV, 
Ch. 6, 
TM 8-500. 
Ward 
records 
12 
Admission cards, and Medical Department 55- 
series forms. Inter-ward transfer cards, diet 
lists, ward morning report, laundry lists; dis- 
position roster, seriously ill roster; patients’ 
pass list; notice of death. Duty cases. Filing 
of all records. 
Sec. I, 
Ch. 6, 
TM 8-220. 
FM 8-45. 
Total 
139 
12 9. Dental Technicians, Basic (Chair Assistant) 
(For the periods, the 1st - 6th and 11th - 13th weeks, inclusive see 
par. 7, Detailed Programs. Section II.) 
Subject 
References 
Total | 
Hours per Week 
Hours 
7 
8 
9 
10 
Basic 
Dismounted drill 
Physical training 
Inspections 
Pars. 114-158, FM 22-5 
FM 21-20; All 605-110 
Pars. 239-242, FM 22-5 
4 
4 
8 
1 
1 
2 
1 
1 
2 
1 
1 
2 
1 
1 
2 
Total Basic 
16 
4 
4 
4 
4 
Technical 
Orientation of men 
in general duties 
2 
2 
Anatomy and phys- 
iology 
Ch. 2, Sec. II, TM 8-220 
Any standard text. TM 8-225. 
12 
6 
6 
General care of a 
dental clinic 
Ch. 5, TM 8-225 
10 
6 
4 
Medical and dental 
supplies & equip- 
ment 
Ch. 6, TM 8-220; Chs. IV, VII, TM 
8-405 
10 
5 
5 
Care of equipment 
and supplies 
Ch. 5, TM 8-220 
10 
6 
4 
Duties at the chair 
Ch. 5, TM 8-220 
10 
4 
6 
Clerical duties 
Ch. 6, TM 8-220; Chs. VI, X, TM 
8-405 
10 
3 
7 
Diagnosis, dental 
first aid, materia 
medica, & thera- 
peutics 
Ch. 3, Sec. II and Ch. 4, Sec. V, 
TM 8-220; FM 8-35 
8 
6 
2 
Oral hygiene 
Ch. 5, Sec. VIII, Ch. 4, Sec. II, 
Par. 205, Sec. V, TM 8-220, Ch. 5, 
TM 8-405. 
6 
4 
2 
Transporting, set- 
ting up and pack- 
ing dental field 
equipment, MD 
Chest No. 60, & 
kits. 
Ch. 5 and 6, TM 8-220; Ch. VIII, 
TM 8-405 
10 
4 
•6 
Sterilization, dress- 
ings and band- 
ages 
Ch. 6, Sec. Ill, TM 8-225. 
6 
3 
3 
Personal hygiene 
of dental person- 
nel 
Ch. 6, Sec. I, TM 8-225 
6 
1 
3 
2 
Practical test 
40 
10 
30 
Inspections and ex- 
aminations 
4 
1 
1 
1 
1 
Total Technical 
144 
36 
36 
36 
36 
Open Time 
16 
4 
4 
4 
4 
Grand Total 
176 
44 
44 
44 
44 10. Veterinary Technicians, Basic. 
(For the Periods the 1st - 4th and 11th - 13th weeks inclusive, see 
Par. 7, Detailed Programs Section II). 
Subject 
Deferences 
Total 
Hours per Week 
Hours 
5 
6 
7 
8 
9 
10 
Basic 
Dismounted drill 
Physical training 
Inspections 
Pars. 114-158, FM 22-5 
Chs. 1-3, FM 21-20, All 605-110 
Pars. 239-242, FM 22-5 
6 
6 
12 
1 
1 
2 
1 
1 
2 
1 
1 
2 
1 
1 
2 
1 
1 
2 
1 
1 
2 
Total basic 
24 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
Technical 
Elementary Anato- 
my and Physio- 
logy 
Ch. 3, FM 25-5; Par. 4, AH 40- 
2250; appropriate text book. 
21 
9 
9 
3 
Field Veterinary 
Decords 
Sec. Ill, AD 40-2245; FM 8-5; 
AD 40-2000 series. 
5 
2 
3 
Ambulance (ani- 
mal) Loading 
and Unloading. 
None 
10 
1 
1 
1 
7 
Medical and Surgi- 
cal Nursing (ani- 
mals) 
FM 25-5; AD 40-2080; AK 40- 
2085 ; AD 40-2090 ; AD 40-2095 ; 
AD 40-2125; AD 40-2135. 
16 
8 
8 
Medical Aid (Splints 
and Splinting; 
Bandages and 
Dressings) 
Par. 137, FM 25-5. 
67 
18 
18 
18 
13 
Technical and Tac- 
tical Training 
(Veterinary Ele- 
ments) 
FM 8-5; FM 8-10; T/O 2-11; 
T/O 6-11; T/O 8-89; FM 8-15; 
T/O 8-99. 
97 
14 
16 
34 
33 
Total Technical 
216 
36 
36 
36 
36 
36 
36 
Open Time 
24 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
Grand Total 
264 
44 
44 
44 
44 
44 
44 
(See Sec. IV, Chap. 3 for the instructors guide to this training.) 11. Sanitary Technicians, Basic (Junior) 
(For the periods 1st through 4th, and 9th through 13th weeks, 
inclusive, see detailed program, Section II.) 
Subject 
Text Deferences 
Total 
Hours per Week 
| 
Hours 
5 
6 
I 
8 
Basie 
1 
Dismounted drill 
Pars. 114-158, PM 22-5 
4 
1 
1 
1 
1 
Physical training 
Chs. 1-3, FM 21-20; All 605-110 
4 
1 
1 
1 
1 
Inspections 
Pars. 239-242, FM 22-5 
8 
2 
2 
2 
2 
Total Basic 
16 
4 
4 
4 
4 
Technical 
Basic principles of 
military sanitation 
Chs. 1-2, AMB 23; Ch. 1 and Sec. 1, 
7 
7 
Ch. 2, FM 8-40; Chs. 1-2, FM 21-10 
Control of Kespira- 
Chs. 3-4, AMB 23, Sec. II, Ch. 2, FM 
9 
9 
tory diseases, and 
8-40 ; Ch. 3, FM 21-10 
housing 
Food-borne disease 
Chs. 5, 8, 9, 10, 12, 18, AMB 23 ; Sec. 
14 
14 
of the intestinal 
Ill, Chs. 2, 5, 6, 7, FM 8-40; Secs. I, 
tract and mess 
II, V, VI, Ch. 4, FM 21-10 
sanitation 
Water treatment 
Chs. 6-7, AMB 23, Ch. 3, FM 8-40; 
24 
6 
18 
and purification 
Sec. Ill, Ch. 4, PM 21-10 
Disposal of wastes 
Chs. 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, AMB 23 ; Ch. 4, 
34 
18 
16 
FM 8-40 ; Sec. IV, Ch. 4, FM 21-10 
Insect-borne di- 
Chs. 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, AMB 23 ; Chs. 
28 
20 
8 
eases and control 
8, 9, 10, FM 8-40 ; Ch. 5, FM 21-10 
of insects 
Control of venereal 
Ch. 24, AMB 23 ; Sec. V, Ch. 2, FM 
3 
3 
diseases 
8-40; Ch. 6, FM 21-10 
Mass physical ex- 
aminations and 
Ch. 27, AMB 23 ; Ch. 13, FM 8-40 
4 
4 
mass immunization 
Sanitary surveys, 
Ch. 26, AMB 23; Ch. 11, FM 8-40; 
11 
11 
reports and orders 
Sec. IT, Ch. 8, FM 21-10 
Vital statistics 
Ch. 28, AMB 23 ; Ch. 15, FM 8-40 
1 10 
10 
Total Technical 
| 144 
| 36 
| 36 
36 
36 
Open Time 
1 16 
1 4 
1 4 
4 
1 4 
Grand Total 
| 176 
| 44 
| 44 
44 
| 44 SECTION III 
PROGRAMS FOR COMMON SPECIALISTS’ TRAINING 
12. Bandsman (021). 
(For the periods 1st and 2nd, and 11th - 18th weeks inclusive 
see par. 7 Detailed Programs Section II.) 
Subject 
Deferences 
Total 
Hours per Wee] 
Hours 
3 
4 
5 
6 
7 
8 
9 
10 
Basic 
Dismounted drill 
Pars. 114-158, FM 22-5 
8 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
Physical training 
Chs. 1-3, FM 21-20; 
AE 605-110 
8 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
Inspections 
Sec. IV, FM 21-15 ; pars. 
239-242, FM 22-5 
12 
1 
2 
1 
2 
2 
1 
2 
1 
Total basic 
28 
3 
4 
3 
4 
4 
3 
4 
3 
Technical 
Field music 
Chs. I and II, FM 28-5 
12 
4 
4 
2 
2 
Military bugle music 
Ch. I, TM 20-250 
152 
15 
141 
21 
20 
20 
21 
20 
21 
Band training 
Ch. I, TM 20-250; Chs. 1 
and 2, FM 28-5 
20 
4 
4 
4 
4 
2 
2 
Bugler 
Ch. I, TM 20-250 
28 
10 
10 
2 
2 
2 
2 
Salutes and 
AE 600-30 
28 
2 
2 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
ceremonies 
Messenger 
Chs. 2 and 3, FM 24-5 
52 
2 
2 
8 
8 
8 
8 
8 
8 
Total technical 
292 
37 
36 
37 
36 
36 
37 
36 
37 
Open time 
32 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
Grand total 
352 
44 
44 
44 
44 
44 
44 
44 
44 13. Clerk (052) and (055) 
(For the periods 1st, 2nd and 11th, 12th, and 13th weeks. See par. 
7 Detailed Programs, Section II.) 
Subject 
References 
Total 
Hours per Week 
Hours 
3 
4 
5 
6 
7 
8 
9 
10 
Basic 
Dismounted drill 
Physical training 
Inspections 
FM 22-5 
FM 21-20; AR 605-110 
FM 21-15, 22-5 
8 
8 
12 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
2 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
2 
1 
1 
2 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
2 
1 
1 
1 
Total basic 
28 
3 
4 
3 
4 
4 
3 
4 
3 
Technical 
Military correspond- 
ence, authorized ab- 
breviations, filing 
AR 340-5; Ch. 20, TM 12- 
250; AR 850-150; Ch. 16, 
TM 12-250; pp. 7-23 
W.D. correspondence file 
14 
4 
5 
5 
Morning report 
AR 345-400; Ch. 5, TM 12- 
250 
22 
3 
5 
4 
5 
4 
1 
Service record 
AR 345-125 ; Ch. 4, TM 12- 
250 
12 
4 
5 
3 
Payrolls, final state- 
ment, allotments 
AR 35-5520; AR 345-155; 
AR 345-475; Ch. 12 and 
13, TM 12-250 
22 
4 
5 
3 
5 
5 
Personnel records 
(discharges certi- 
ficates, desertion, 
transfer, appoint- 
ment and reduction 
of N.C.O., rating 
and disrating of 
specialists) and 
rosters (troop and 
duty) 
AR 345- and 615-series; 
TM 12-250, Letter WD, 
AGO 320.2 (10-30-40), 
Subject “Reorganization 
of Army Personnel Sys- 
tem’- 
. 
22 
5 
2 
5 
3 
7 
Property record and 
company supply 
AR 35-6520 to 35-6700; AR 
40-1705 
8 
4 
2 
2 
Charge sheets 
P. 233, App. 3, MCM 
6 
5 
1 
War Department 
publications and 
Army Regulations 
AR 1-10, 1-15; AR 310-50; 
TM 12-250 
10 
5 
2 
3 
Medical Department 
reports (sick and 
wounded, statisti- 
cal, daily sick re- 
port, death report) 
AR 40-1025; 40-1080; AR 
| 345-415 ; AR 600-550 
18 
3 
5 
5 
5 
Company funds and 
collection sheet 
AR 210-50; TM 12-250 
6 
3 
3 
Typing (applica- 
tory) 
Standard text 
| 152 
1 
22 
16 
22 
16 
21 
17 
21 
17 
Total technical 
292 
37 
36 
37 
36 
36 
37 
36 
37 
Open time 
32 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
Grand total 
• 
352 
44 
44 144 
44 
44 
44 
44 
44 14. Supply sergeant, receiving and shipping clerk (186). 
All the individuals will for the first 2 weeks receive the same basic 
instructions. See Detailed Programs, par. 7, Section II, Training for 
the 11th - 13th weeks is to be in addition to, and after completion of, 
course of instruction (3rd through 10th weeks, inclusive) of clerk 
(055). See detailed program for clerk (055) and (052). 
Subject 
References 
Total 
Hours per Week 
Hours 
11 
12 
13 
Basic 
Dismounted drill 
Physical training 
Inspections 
Pars. 114-158, PM 22-5 
Chs. 1-3, PM 21-20; AR 605-110 
Sec. IV, PM 21-15 ; pars. 239-242, 
PM 22-5 
1 
3 
2 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
Total basic 
6 
2 
3 
1 
Technical 
Supply and equip- 
ment records, re- 
quisitions, and 
transfer 
Ch. 11, TM 12-250 
22 
22 
Care, handling and 
storage of property 
Secs. Ill, IV, and V, TM 10-250 
10 
10 
Organizational 
property 
T/BA 8 
8 
8 
Med. Dept, instru- 
ments and equip- 
ment 
MD Sup. Cat.; T/BA 8 
35 
35 
Preparation of 
Med. Dept, requisi- 
tions 
MD Sup. Cat.; T/BA 8 
16 
16 
Vehicles 
T/BA 8 
7 
7 
Unserviceable 
property 
Ch. 11, TM 12-250 
8 
4 
4 
Property records 
Ch. 11, TM 12-250 
8 
8 
Total technical 
114 
38 
37 
39 
Open time 
12 
4 
4 
4 
Grand total 
132 
44 
44 
44 
18 15. Mess sergeant (124) and cook (060) 
(All individuals for the first 2 weeks will receive the same basic 
instruction. See par. 7, Detailed Programs, Section II. Practical cook- 
ing (7th to 13th weeks) and preliminary instruction (3d to 6th weeks) 
are mutually interchangeable at times.) 
Subject 
References 
Total 
Hours per 
Week 
1 
Hours 
31 
4 
5| 6| 
7 
8 
9 
10 
11 
12 
13 
Basic 
(all individuals) 
Dismounted drill 
Physical training 
Inspections 
Pars. 114-158, FM 22-5 
Chs. 1-3, FM 21-20; 
AR 605-110 
Pars. 239-242, FM 22-5 
11 
11 
22 
1 
1 
2 
1 
1 
2 
1 
1 
2 
1 
1 
2 
1 
1 
2 
1 
1 
2 
1 
1 
2 
1 
1 
2 
1 
1 
2 
1 
1 
2 
1 
1 
2 
Total basic 
44 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
Technical 
Cook, general du- 
ties; mess sanita- 
tion 
TM 10-405; AR 40-205 
8 
8 
Care of all kinds of 
food 
TM 10-405 
8 
8 
Preparation (cook- 
ing and baking) 
of various kinds 
of food; nutrition 
TM 10-405; TM 10-410 
64 
20 
24 
20 
Meat cutting 
TM 10-405 
16 
8 
8 
Mess management; 
menus; accounts; 
all types of rations 
TM 10-405; AR 30-2210 
24 
4 
8 
12 
Field cooking 
TM 10-405 
16 
16 
Messing on trains 
and transports 
TM 10-405; Cir. 56 and 63, 
WD, 1940; Cir. 39, WD, 
1941 
8 
8 
Practical cooking 
164 
28 
28 
28 
20 
20 
20 
20 
Field exercises, 
marches, camps 
Ch. 8, FM 21-10; Chs. 9 
and 10, FM 100-5; Ch. 3, 
FM 25-10 
88 
8 
8 
8 
16 
16 
16 
16 
Total technical 
396 
36J36 
36 
36 
36(36)36 
36(36 
"36 
36 
Open time 
44 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
i 4 
4| 4 
4 
4 
Grand total 
484 
44144 
44 
44 
44144144 
44(44 
44 
44 
19 16. Truckmaster (068), foreman mechanic (086) and automobile 
mechanic (014). 
(All individuals for the first 2 weeks will receive the same basic 
instruction). (See par. 7, Detailed Programs, Section II). 
Subject 
References 
Total 
Hours 
per Week 
Hours 
3 
4 
5 
6 
7 
8 
9110 11 
12113 
Basic 
Dismounted drill 
Pars. 114-158, FM 22-5 
11 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
Physical training 
Chs. 1-3, FM 21-20; AR 
11 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
605-110 
Inspections 
Pars. 239-242, FM 22-5; 
22 
2 
2 
2 
2 
2 
2 
2 
2 
2 
2 
2 
TM 10-545 
Total basic 
44 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
Technical 
Occupational: 
Automobile repair 
FM 25-10 
8 
4 
4 
tools 
Maintenance 
AR 850-15 
4 
2 
methods 
Motor terminology, 
Secs. II, VIII, and IX, 
36 
12 
12 
12 
units and assem- 
TM 10-510; FS 10-43 
blies 
Vehicle inspection 
TM 10-545 
24 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
Driver maintenance 
Ch. 5, FM 25-10 
36 
8 
8 
10 
10 
Second echelon 
TM 10-510, 10-515, 10-540, 
252 
6 
6 
10 
22 
32 
32 
36 
36 
24 
24 
24 
maintenance 
10-550, 10-565, 10-570, 10- 
580, 10-585; FM 25-10 
Company repair 
T/BA 8 
36 
12 
12 
12 
equipment 
Total technical 
396 
36 
36 
36 
36 
36 
36 
36 
36 
36 
36 
36 
Open time 
44 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
4 
Grand total 
484 
44 i 44 
44144144 |44I44 
44 
44 
44 
44 
20 17. Truckdriver (245) and motorcyclist (678). 
(For the periods the 1st, 2d, and 7th - 13th weeks inclusive, see par 
7, Detailed programs, Section II.) 
Subject 
References 
1 
Total 
Hours 
Hoi 
3 
irs p 
4 
er Week 
5 1 6 
Basic 
Dismounted drill 
Pars. 114-158, FM 22-5 
4 
1 
1 
1 
1 
Physical training 
FM 21-20; AR 605-110 
4 
1 
1 
1 
1 
Inspections 
Pars. 239-242, FM 22-5 
8 
2 
2 
2 
2 
Total basic 
16 
4 
4 
4 
4 
Technical 
Starting engines 
FM 25-10; TM 10-510, 10-550 
2 
2 
Shifting gears 
FM 25-10; TM 10-510, 10-585 
2 
2 
Driving 
Ch. 2, FM 25-10 
40 
8 
8 
8 
16 
Brakes and braking 
FM 25-10; TM 10-510; 10-565; 
4 
4 
AR 850-15 
Traffic rules 
Ch. 2, FM 25-10 
8 
2 
2 
2 
2 
Special instruction, 
AR 850-15 ; Ch. 3, FM 25-10; FS 10-43 
4 
2 
2 
safe driving 
Lubrication 
TM 10-540 
4 
4 
Convoy operations 
Ch. 3, FM 25-10 
40 
10 
16 
14 
Care of vehicles 
TM 10-510, 10-515; FM 25-10; FS 
32 
8 
8 
8 
8 
10-38 
Trouble shooting 
TM 10-550, 10-580 
8 
2 
6 
Total technical 
144 
36 
36 
36 
36 
Open time 
16 
4 
4 
4 
4 
Grand total 
176 
44 
44 
44 
44 
21 CHAPTER 2 
PROGRAMS FOR 
MEDICAL DEPARTMENT TECHNICIANS 
23 CHAPTER 2 
PROGRAM FOR 
MEDICAL DEPARTMENT TECHNICIANS 
The detailed training programs for each specialty will be prepared 
by the Commandant, Enlisted Technicians’ School, or unit commanders 
with reference to dental, laboratory, medical, surgical, pharmacy, 
veterinary, sanitary, and x-ray technicians. The following training pro- 
grams are for Medical Department technicians selected for this train- 
ing after 4, 8, or 12 weeks’ basic training. The following paragraphs 
prescribe the scope of instruction and standards of proficiency for vari- 
ous grades and types of technicians; text references and suggested allot- 
ment of hours are included. (See also MTP 8-10.) 
18. DENTAL 
a. Scope of instruction for dental technicians. The scope of in- 
struction for laboratory technicians will include the following: 
(1) Dental anatomy. Nomenclature; surfaces and angles; up- 
per and lower teeth; bones of the head; mandible and maxilla; muscles 
of mastication. 
No. of hours—30; Text References: Ch. 2, TM 8-220; Ch. 2, TM 8-225. 
(2) Dental prosthesis. Full and partial dental prosthesis; tooth 
carving; care of laboratory equipment; composition of dental materials. 
No. of hours—220; Text References: Ch. 3, TM 8-225. 
(3) Dental roentgenology. Instructions in the use of the portable 
x-ray unit and development of films. 
No. of hours—74; Text References: Ch. 4, TM 8-225. 
(4) Dental hygiene. Structure and physiology; dental caries; 
diseases of mouth; saliva, deposits, and accretions upon teeth; dental 
prophylaxis; instrumentation and polishing; instructions to patients; 
preparations for mouth and teeth; oral bacteriology; smear prepara- 
tion; staining, micro-organisms of the mouth. 
No. of hours—70; Text References: Ch. 5, TM 8-225 
25 (5) Dental assistant. Care of dental clinic and equipment; 
sterilization of instruments, glassware, and dressings; duties at chair; 
daily routine. 
No. of hours—100; Text References: Chs, 3 & 4, TM 8-220; Ch. 6, 
TM 8-225. 
(6) Dental record clerk. General duties; forms and reports of 
dental services; register of patients; daily work sheet; clinic records; 
dental survey. 
No. of hours—34; Text References: Ch. 6, TM 8-220; Ch. 7, TM 8-225 
AR 40-1010. 
b. Standards of proficiency for various grades of dental technicians. 
(1) Technician, Dental, grade 5. 
(a) Graduate of enlisted technicians’ school or has the 
equivalent knowledge of dental laboratory procedure from civil or 
military training or experience. 
(b) Capable of constructing simple or routine prosthetic 
appliances and related work under direct supervision. 
(c) Possesses mechanical ability, manual dexterity and 
ingenuity in dental laboratory procedures. 
(d) Skilled in one or more of the following branches of 
mechanical dentistry: 
1. Bridgework; assembling, soldering and finishing. 
2. Dentures, full and partial; setting up teeth, pack- 
ing, vulcanizing and finishing. 
3. Gold and chrome alloy castings; waxing, casting 
and finishing. 
4. Wrought clasps, lingual and palatal bar bending. 
5. Dental ceramics. 
(2) Technician, Dental grade 4. 
(a) Qualified as a Dental Technician, grade 5, and in 
addition: 
(b) Possesses superior ability in the construction of rou- 
tine prosthetic appliances and related work as outlined by the Dental 
officer. 
(c) Is qualified as an assistant supervisor or instructor 
under the direction of the Dental officer in charge. 
26 (d) Is familiar with the maintenance and ordering of 
dental supplies. 
(e) Has basic knowledge of all of the standard practices 
and processes of mechanical dentistry; expert skill, or has had wide 
experience in dental laboratory procedure. 
(3) Technician, Dental, grade 3. 
(a) Qualified as a Dental Technician, grade 4, and in ad- 
dition : 
(b) Possesses expert knowledge of all standard practices 
and processes of mechanical dentistry, demonstrated during long and 
excellent service. 
(c) Is qualified as an instructor of subordinate dental tech- 
nicians. 
(d) Possesses ability to take charge of a large dental lab- 
oratory under the supervision of an officer. 
19. LABORATORY (MEDICAL AND VETERINARY) 
a. Scope of instruction for laboratory technicians (Medical and 
Veterinary). The scope of instruction for laboratory technicians will 
include the following: 
(1) Reports. Purpose; preparation; forms. 
No. of hours—8; Text References: Ch. 6, TM 8-220; Ch. 1, TM 8-227; 
AR 40-305. 
(2) Hematology. Methods of taking and making total cell 
counts; making and staining blood smears; differential counts; color 
index; coagulation time, bleeding time; clot retraction time; sedimenta- 
tion rate; platelet count; Schilling Index; Venipuncture. 
No. of hours—60; Text References: Ch. 2, TM 8-227. 
(3) Chemistry. Elementary chemistry, definitions, terms; clean- 
ing and care of glassware; solutions and titrations. 
No. of hours—30; Text References: Ch. 3, TM 8-227. 
(4) Urine. Collection and preservation of specimens; examina- 
tion—physical, routine, quantitative, chemical and microscopical. 
No. of hours—20; Text References: Ch. 4, TM 8-227. 
(5) Gastric contents. General, physical, chemical and micro- 
scopical analysis; test meals. 
No. of hours—10; Text References: Ch. 5, TM 8-227. 
27 (6) Blood Chemistry. Colorimetry, specimens for analysis; 
chemical analysis. 
No. of hours—30; Text References: Ch. 6, TM 8-227. 
(7) Bacteriology. Instruction in various items of laboratory 
equipment, their use, cleaning and sterilization; preparation of stains, 
solutions and media; care and use of the microscope; instruction in the 
use of weights and measures; culture routine specimens of sputum, 
blood, urine, feces and purulent material; recognition of common patho- 
genic bacteria; knowledge required for the preparation, shipment and 
handling of specimens; laboratory animals, care of and uses. 
No. of hours—150; Text References: Chs. 7, 8, 9, 10, TM 8-227. 
(8) Serology. The technic of obtaining blood and its preparation 
for the Wasserman and Kahn reaction; the colloidal gold test; blood 
grouping; theory, description and requirements of these tests by 
demonstration; cleaning and care of glassware used in serological tests. 
No. of hours—70; Text References: Ch. 11, TM 8-227. 
(9) Protozoology. Intestinal protozoa; blood and tissue flagel- 
lates; methods of staining and identification of plasmodia of malaria. 
No, of hours—60; Text References: Ch. 12, TM 8-227. 
(10) Helminthology. Classification; pathogenic species; ova; 
methods of examination. 
No. of hours—20; Text References: Ch. 13, TM 8-227. 
(11) Entomology. Arthropods of medical importance; handling 
and shipment of specimens. 
No. of hours—20; Text References: Ch. 14, TM 8-227. 
(12) Pathology. Care of the autopsy room; preparation of ma- 
terial for sectioning and staining; duties of an assistant. 
No. of hours—50; Text References: Ch. 15, TM 8-227, AR 40-310. 
b. Standards of proficiency for various grades of laboratory tech- 
nicians. 
(1) Technician, Laboratory, Grade 5. Graduate of a laboratory 
technicians course, enlisted technicians school, or an equivalent course 
in a civil institution or the equivalent in practical experience, and able to 
perform the following: 
(a) Cleaning and sterilization of laboratory glassware and 
equipment under direct supervision. 
28 (b) Ordinary routine laboratory procedures,, such as urin- 
alysis, blood count, preparation and staining of slides and care of cul- 
tures. 
(c) Care of laboratory animals. 
(d) Preparation of routine culture media. 
(e) Elementary bacteriology. 
(f) Agglutination and serological tests. 
(2) Technician, Laboratory, Grade 4. Qualified as a laboratory 
technician, Grade 5, and in addition be able to perform the following: 
(b) Routine procedures in any department, corps area, or 
similar laboratory. 
(a) Preparation of all stains, solutions and media. 
(c) The preservation, preparation and mounting of patho- 
logical specimens. 
(d) Ability to conduct, under supervision, quantitative and 
qualitative laboratory examinations of meat, foods, diary products and 
forage. 
(3) Technician, Laboratory, Grade 3. Qualified as a laboratory 
technician, Grade 4, and in addition able to perform the following: 
(a) Carry out, under supervision, complicated laboratory 
tests in serology, chemistry and pathology. 
(b) Train laboratory technicians in lower grades in the 
performance of routine laboratory tests. 
(c) Take charge of a corps area laboratory or equivalent, 
under the direction of an officer. 
20. MEDICAL 
a. Scope of instruction for medical technicians. Scope of instruc- 
tion for Medical Technicians will include the following: 
(1) Anatomy and Physiology. General structure and function 
of systems. 
No. of hours—4; Text Reference: Ch. 2, TM 8-220. 
(2) Medical Aid. Bandaging and dressing; splints and their ap- 
plication. 
No. of hours—16; Text References: Sec. IV, FM 8-50; Ch. 3, TM 8-220. 
(3) Nursing and Care of Patient. Admission; baths of all types 
and reasons for same; taking and recording temperature, pulse and 
respirations; change of appearance of patients; bed making and chang- 
ing linen; use and care of urinals and bed pans; alcohol rubs; care of 
29 hair, mouth, and nails; administration of medicines, routine and special; 
ice and hot water bags, uses of and placing of same; turpentine stupes; 
enemas, all types, composition, use and method of administration. Care 
of drowning, sunstroke, heatstroke, electrical shock; care of and dis- 
posal of the dead. 
No. of hours—250; Text References: FM 8-85; Ch. 4, TM 8-220; TM 
8-260; AR 40-590. 
(4) Ward Management. Responsibility for public property; care 
of linen, soiled and clean; special linen; patients’ property and effects; 
disposition of personal effects in case of death; general regulations 
of Medical Department; sanitation. 
Duties of ward master; duties of ward attendants; main- 
tenance of discipline in the ward and in prison ward; care of ward 
supplies, medicines, alcohol, narcotics, whiskies, and poisons; care of 
seriously ill cases; isolation of infectious cases; care of insane; disin- 
fection of ward, bed, furniture, and linen; disposal of human waste; 
care of mail and telegrams. 
Medical department forms, 55-series; interward transfer 
cards; diet lists; ward morning reports; laundry lists, regular and 
special; patients’ property cards; Medical Department property cards 
(issue, exchange, credit) ; disposition roster; change of diagnosis 
cards; seriously ill list; report of contagious cases; report of sick and 
wounded; register of sick and wounded cards; malarial and syphilitic 
register; patients’ pass lists; notice of death; duty cases; filing of all 
records. 
No. of hours—180; Text References: FM 8-40; Chs. 4 & 6, TM 8-220; 
AR 40-590, 40-1005, 40-1025. 
(5) Hygiene and Sanitation. Personal Hygiene; prevention and 
control of respiratory, intestinal, insect-borne, venereal, and infectious 
diseases. 
No. of hours—14; Text References: FM 8-40; Ch. 5, TM 8-220; AMB 
No. 23; AR 40-210 through 40-245 
(6) Management and Treatment of Gas Casualties. Chemical 
agents; individual and collective protection; medical care of chemical 
casualties. 
No. of hours—8, Text References: Ch. 7, TM 8-220, 8-285. 
(7) Air Raid Precautions. Methods of protecting patients from 
the hazards of aerial bombs; fire control. 
No. of hours—4;Text References: FM 21-40; TM 3-205, 3-215, 8-220. 
30 (8) Diets. Care of dishes; set-up of tray; size of servings; bed 
trays; feeding of patients; use of feeding tube; diets; liquid, soft, light, 
regular, and special; liquid nourishment, cold and hot drinks, fruit 
juices, water (ice and tap water) ; disposal of garbage. 
No. of hours—52; Text References: TM 8-220, 8-500, 
b. Standards of Proficiency for Various Grades of Medical Tech- 
nicians. 
(1) Medical technician, grade 5. 
(a) Graduate of a medical technician’s course, enlisted 
technicians school or an equivalent course in a civil institution or the 
equivalent in practical experience, and qualified to perform the follow- 
ing: 
1. Take temperature, pulse, and respirations. 
2. Cleanse and disinfect ordinary ward equipment. 
3. Care for and maintain ordinary ward property, 
linen and supplies. 
4. Sterilize ward instruments. 
5. Prepare and maintain ward records (administrative 
and professional). 
6. Give enemas and baths to patients. 
(2) Medical Technician, grade 4. 
Qualified as Medical Technicians, grade 5, and in addition 
qualified to: 
(a) Act as a nursing assistant in such special cases as acute 
infectious, contagious or neuropsychiatric cases. 
(b) Administer hypodermic medications and do catheteri- 
zations. 
(c) Set up, maintain, and operate specialized equipment. 
(d) Take charge of the ward nursing service in the tempo- 
rary absence of Army Nurse Corps personnel. 
(3) Medical Technician, grade 3. 
(a) Qualified as Medical Technician, grade 4, and in ad- 
dition to competent to assume duties of: 
1. A registered male nurse. 
21. PHARMACY 
a. Scope of Instruction for Pharmacy Technicians. The scope of 
instruction for Pharmacy Technicians will include the following: 
(1) Pharmaceutical Mathematics. Metrology, specific gravity 
and volume; density; ratio and proportion; reducing and enlarging 
formulas; calculation of doses. 
No. of hours—60; Text References: Ch. 2, TM 8-233. 
31 (2) Pharmaceutical Chemistry. Fundamental principals of 
chemistry. 
No. of hours—80; Text References: Ch. 3, TM 8-233; TM 8-220. 
(3) Pharmaceutical operation and apparatus. Care of equip- 
ment (apparatus) ; care of storeroom stock; identification; description 
and uses of all equipment used in pharmacy. 
No. of hours—48 ; Text References: Ch. 4 TM 8-233 ; TM 8-220 ; MD Sup 
Cat, 
(4) Pharmaceutical Preparations. Aquae, liquors, emulsions, 
syrups, mixtures, lotions, spirits, elixirs, liniments, oleates, infusions, 
tinctures, extracts, powders, pills, tablets, ointments. 
No. of hours—60; Text References: Ch. 5, TM 8-233. 
(5) Materia Medica. Derivations, nomenclature, and therapeut- 
ic action; posology and toxicology of drugs; solubility of drugs; care 
and storage of chemicals. 
No. of hours—54; Text References: Ch. 6, TM 8-233; TM 8-220 
(6) Prescriptions. Reading, filing, and dispensing prescriptions; 
chemical, pharmaceutical, and therapeutic incompatibilities of drugs 
and chemicals. 
No. of hours—140; Text References: Ch. 7, TM 8-233; TM 8-220. 
(7) Supply and Administration. Requisitions; records; charges 
for medicine; disposition of funds; methods of filing prescriptions and 
records of same. 
No. of hours—74; Text References: Ch. 8, TM 8-233; AR 40-590; MD 
Sup. Cat. 
(8) Alcohol, whiskey, narcotics, and poisons. Methods of stor- 
ing, dispensing, and records kept of same; narcotic register. 
No. of hours—6; Text References: Ch. 7, TM 8-233; TM 8-220; AR 
40-590. 
(9) Serums and Biological Products. Methods of storage and 
proper care. 
No. of hours—6; Text References: TM 8-220; MD Sup. Cat. 
b. Standards of Proficiency for Various Grades of Pharmacy Tech- 
nicians. 
32 (1) Pharmacy Technician, grade 5. 
(a) Graduate of a pharmacy technicians’ course, enlisted 
technicians’ school, or an equivalent course in a civil institution or the 
equivalent in practical experience, and able to perform the following: 
1. Care for and clean equipment in pharmacy. 
2. Care for stock of drugs, chemicals, and pharma- 
ceutical preparations. 
3. Dispense routine stock preparations to wards. 
4. Do simple pharmaceutical arithmetic to include the 
metric system, ratio and proportion, 
5. Perform simple pharmacy procedure, such as clari- 
fication and simple comminution processes. 
(2) Pharmacy, Technician, grade 4. 
(a) Qualified as Pharmacy Technician, grade 5, and in 
addition qualified: 
(b) To perform under supervision the following: 
1. Management of the prescription department. 
2. Preparation of stock solutions and the maintenance 
of required records. 
3. Dispensing of narcotic and alcoholic preparations 
and the maintaining of required records. 
4. Prescription compounding, including common in- 
compatibilities, with special reference to the formation of dangerous 
and toxic substances. 
5. The instruction of pharmacy technicians of the low- 
er grades. 
(3) Pharmacy Technician, grade 3. 
(a) Qualified as Pharmacy Technician, grade 4, and in 
addition: 
(b) Be expert in: 
1. Management, under supervision, of a large hospital 
pharmacy; training of pharmacy technicians in preparation of solu- 
tions for hypodermic and parenteral injections. 
2. Knowledge of pharmaceutical arithmetic in all its 
phases; pharmacy and pharmacology to include thorough knowledge 
of the principles involved in the dispensing and compounding required 
in a large hospital pharmacy. 22. SANITARY 
a. Scope of Instruction for Sanitary Technicians. The scope of in- 
struction for sanitary technicians will include the following: 
(1) Communicable diseases and their control in general. An 
outline of the type of diseases to be controlled, methods of study and 
measurement—general control measures. 
No. of hours—40; Text References: AR 40-205, 40-210; FM 8-40, 21-10. 
(2) Respiratory diseases. Familiarity with their nature; methods 
of spread and control; students must know how to apply all control 
measures. 
No. of hours—100; Text References: AR 40-220; FM 21-10, FM 8-40. 
(3) Intestinal diseases. Familiarity with their nature; methods 
of spread and control; the students to learn how to apply all control 
measures. 
No. of hours—120; Text References: AR 40-225; FM 8-40, FM 21-10. 
(4) Insect-borne diseases. Familiarity with their nature; 
methods of spread and control; students to learn how to collect and 
recognize the insects concerned and how control measures are applied. 
No. of hours—100; Text References: AR 40-230; FM 8-40, FM 21-10. 
(5) Venereal diseases. Familiarity with operation of control 
measures. 
No. of hours—20; Text References: AR 40-235; FM 8-40, FM 21-10 
(6) Miscellaneous diseases. The nature, methods of spread, and 
control of these diseases. 
No. of hours—20; Text References: AR 40-240; FM 8-40, 21-10. 
(7) Sanitary surveys and reports. Students to learn how to 
render intelligent assistance in conduct of sanitary surveys and prepara- 
tion of sanitary reports. 
No. of hours—28 ; Text References: AR 40-270, 40-275, 40-310, 40-1080, 
FM 8-40, 21-10. 
(8) Vital statistics. Preparation of statistical records, simple 
charts and graphs. 
No. of hours—10; Text References: AR 40-270, 40-275 
34 (9) Field Exercise. Applicatory exercise in the actual use of in- 
struments and tools used, the care of tools, the laying out and execution 
of work to be done in the building and maintenance of sanitary devices 
and appliances. 
No. of hours—90; Text References: FM 8-40, 21-10. 
b. Standards of Proficiency for the Various Grades of Sanitary 
Technicians. 
(1) Technician, sanitary, grade 5. A graduate of the course 
for sanitary technicians, or an equivalent course in a civilian institution, 
or the equivalent in practical experience, and qualified in the following: 
(a) Construction and operation of field sanitary devices 
for disposal of wastes. 
(b) Supervision of minor fly and mosquito control work, 
and collecting of epidemiological material for examination. 
(c) Compilation and preparation of routine statistical rec- 
ords and reports. 
(2) Technician, sanitary, grade 4. Qualified as technician, sani- 
tary, grade 5, and in addition able to perform the following: 
(a) Routine area inspections under supervision, and the 
application of control measures for at least two (2) types of communi- 
cable disease. 
(b) Supervise installation of field sanitary devices and ap- 
pliances and instruct others in their operation. 
(c) Computation of rates and preparation of graphs and 
sanitary reports. 
(3) Technician, sanitary, grade 3. Qualified as technician, sani- 
tary, grade 4, and in addition able to perform the following: 
(a) Act as assistant to sanitary inspector of a large tactical 
command or geographical area. 
(b) Direction of field measures for control of major epidemic 
diseases. 
(c) Assist in making area sanitary surveys and in making 
data for special sanitary reports. 
(d) Technical supervision of a large field sanitary force. 
23. SURGICAL 
b. Scope of Instruction for Surgical Technicians. The scope of in- 
struction for Surgical Technicians will include the following: 
(1) Anatomy and Physiology. Gross anatomy, with sufficient 
knowledge to locate and grossly identify the organs, bones, and prin- 
35 cipal structures of the body and their functions. 
No. of hours—10; Text References; Ch. 2, TM 8-220. 
(2) Minor Surgery and First Aid. Bandaging and dressing; 
splints and their application; emergency surgical treatment. 
No. of hours—10; Text References: FM 8-20; Ch. 3, TM 8-220. 
(3) Nursing and Care of Patient. Admission; baths of all types 
and reasons for same; taking and recording temperature, pulse and 
respirations; change of appearance of patients; bed making and chang- 
ing linen; use and care of urinals and bed pans; alcohol rubs; care of 
hair, mouth, and nails; routine and special; administration of medicines; 
uses of and placing of ice and hot water bags. 
No of hours—100; Text References: FM 8-35; Ch. 4 TM 8-220; TM 
8-260; AR 40-590. 
(4) Operating room technique. The cleanliness and sanitation 
of operating room and equipment; care, preservation, procurement, and 
maintenance of instruments and equipment; preparation of linen for 
sterilization; structure and mechanism of sterilizers; sterilization of 
linen and instruments; anesthesia, methods of administration, prepara- 
tion and care of patients; antisepsis and asepsis as applied in prepara- 
tion of patients, surgeon, and assistants and as carried out during op- 
erative procedures. 
No. of hours—120; Text References: Ch. 3, TM 8-220; Standard Text. 
(5) Ward Management. Responsibility for public property; 
care cf linen, soiled and clean; special linen; patients’ property and ef- 
fects ; disposition of personal effects in case of death; general regula- 
tions of Medical Department; sanitation. 
Duties of ward master; duties of ward attendants; main- 
tenance of discipline in the ward and in prison ward; care of ward sup- 
plies, medicines, alcohol, narcotics, whiskies, and poisons; care of seri- 
ously ill cases; isolation of infectious cases; care of insane; disinfection 
of ward, bed, furniture, and linens; disposal of human waste; care of 
mail and telegrams. 
Medical Department forms, 55-series; interward transfer 
cards; diet lists; ward morning reports; laundry lists, regular and 
special; patients’ property cards; Medical Department property cards 
(issue, exchange, credit) ; disposition roster; change of diagnosis cards; 
seriously ill list; report of contagious cases; report of sick and wounded; 
register sick and wounded cards; malarial and syphilitic register; pa- 
tients’ pass lists; notice of death; duty cases; filing of all records. 
No. of hours—100; Text References: FM 8-40; Ch. 4 & 6, TM 8-220; 
AR 40-590; 40-1005, 40-1025. 
36 (6) Hygiene and Sanitation. Personal hygiene; prevention and 
control of respiratory, intestinal, insect-borne, venereal, and infectious 
diseases. 
No. of hours—10; Text References; FM 8-40; Ch. 5, TM 8-220; AMB 
No. 23. 
(7) Air Raid Precautions. Methods of protecting patients from 
the hazards of aerial bombs; fire control. 
No. of hours—4; Text References: FM 21-40; TM 8-205, 3-215, 8-220. 
(8) Diets. Care of dishes; set-up of tray; size of servings; bed 
trays; feeding of patients; use of feeding tube; diets, liquid, soft, light, 
regular, and special; liquid nourishment, cold and hot drinks, fruit 
juices, water (ice and tap water) ; disposal of garbage. 
No. of hours—16; Text References: TM 8-220, 8-500 
(9) Surgical wards and clinics. Ability to perform routine tests 
and to assist in the performance of major procedures in the following 
wards and clinics; 
(a) Care, treatment, and transportation of injuries, includ- 
ing head injuries, chest injuries, and injuries to the abdominal viscera, 
particularly their emergency treatment and preparation for transpor- 
tation. 
No. of hours—30; Text References: TM 8-220; Standard Text; Medical 
History of World War. 
(b) Genito-urinary. The importance of venereal disease 
and its prophylaxis; care of special instruments and equipment. The 
technique of irrigations of genital tract; intravenous therapy; cathe- 
terization. 
No. of hours—50; Text References: TM 8-220; Standard Text 
(c) Orthopedics. The form, structure, and function of 
bones, joints, and muscle; types of fractures; bone healing and compli- 
cations of fractures, dislocations and sprains. First-aid treatment of 
fractures, including treatment of shock, immobilization, and prepara- 
tion for transportation; types of splints and their uses and application. 
Preparation and application of Plaster of Paris or cast; structure of 
Balkan frame; principles and application of traction. 
No of hours—50; Text References: FM 8-50; TM 8-220. 
(d) Septic surgery. The causes and character of wound 
infection; prevention and treatment; Dakinization; debridement. 
Methods of drainage; prevention of gas infections and tetanus, Bac- 
37 teriology of wound infections as determined by laboratory methods. 
No. of hours—14; Text References: TM 8-220; Standard Text; Medical 
History of World War. 
(e) Eye, ear, nose, and throat. Ability to perform determi- 
nations of vision, field of vision, color vision. Methods of applying hot 
and cold compresses and special dressings used in eye surgery. Re- 
moval of foreign bodies. Ability to perform hearing tests; irrigations 
of the external auditory canal; care of special instruments; preparation 
of special dressings used in E. N. T. surgery. 
No, of hours—14; Text References: TM 8-220; Standard Text. 
b. Standards of Proficiency for Various Grades of Surgical Tech- 
nicians. 
(1) Surgical Technician, grade 5. 
(a) Qualified to perform the work of a Medical Technician, 
grade 5, as applied to surgical wards. 
(b) Competent to: 
1. Act as a junior assistant in the dressing or operating 
room or in a surgical clinic, 
2. Prepare patients for operation. 
3. Take charge of the preparation and maintenance 
of records in surgical clinics. 
(2) Surgical Technician, grade 4. 
(a) Qualified to perform the work of a Medical Technician, 
grade 4, as applied to surgical ward; or 
(b) Qualified as a Surgical Technician, grade 5, and com- 
petent to: 
1. Administer routine treatments in genito-urinary dis- 
eases under the direction of a medical officer; or 
2. Take charge, under supervision, of an operating 
room and care of the equipment; or 
3. Make or modify braces or other orthopedic appli- 
ances; or 
4. Take charge of the sterilization of all instruments 
and dressings in an operating room or surgical clinic. 
(3) Surgical Technician, grade 3. 
(a) Qualified as a Medical Technician, grade 3, or a Sur- 
gical Technician, grade 4, and in addition competent, under a medical 
officer. 
1. To take charge of a dressing or operating room or 
a surgical clinic in a large hospital and administer routine treatments. 
38 24. X-RAY 
a. General Scope of Instruction for X-ray Technicians. The scope 
of instruction for X-Ray Technicians will include the following: 
(1) X-Ray Machines. Functioning principles; fundamental com- 
ponent parts; typical wiring arrangements. 
No. of hours—144; Text References: Sec. IV, TM 8-240; Sec. II & III, 
TM 8-275; MD Sup. Cat. 
(2) Calibrations. General; kilovoltage, calibrations; miliam- 
perage; timer; distance; quantity of x-radiation; grids; casettes. 
No. of hours—120; Text References: Sec. V, TM 8-240. 
(3) Trouble Analysis. General; manifestations of trouble. 
No. of hours—15; Text References: Sec. VI, TM 8-240. 
(4) Protective Measures. Electrical dangers; X-radiation haz- 
ards. 
No. of hours—20; Text References: Sec. VII, TM 8-240; Sec. IX, TM 
8-275. 
(5) Auxiliary Equipment. Diaphragms; cones; cylinders; filt- 
ers; grids; casettes. 
No. of hours—24; Text References: Sec. VIII, TM 8-240. 
(6) Darkroom Equipment & Technique. Processing room; films; 
holders; processing; solutions. 
No. of hours—50; Text References: Sec, IX, TM 8-240; Sec. Ill, TM 
8-275. 
(7) Radiographic Quality. Distortion; detail; contrast; density. 
No. of hours—10; Text Reference: Sec. X, TM 8-240. 
(8) Technical Procedure. Film size, container; position; use of 
cones, diaphragms, grids; casettes; technical factors (MA-time-dis- 
tance-KVP) ; anatomy and positioning. 
No. of hours—70; Text Reference: Sec. XI, TM 8-240. 
(9) Foreign Body Localization. Double exposure method and 
Strohl wire. 
No. of hours—12; Text References: Sec. IV & V, TM 8-275. 
39 (10) Film Handling and Filing. Unexposed and exposed films; 
loading; holders and casettes; unloading; developing; trimming; cap- 
tions and filing. 
No. of hours—15; Text References: Sec. IX, TM 8-240; Sec. VI, TM 
8-275. 
(11) Fluoroscopy. Preparation and routine handling of patient. 
No. of hours—18; Text References: Sec. VI & IX, TM 8-275. 
(12) Administration. Requisitions and care of supplies; records 
and reports; filing; periodic estimations; accountability and respon- 
sibility for property. 
No. of hours—30; Text References: TM 8-240; Sec. II, TM 8-275. 
b. Standards of Proficiency for Various Grades of X-Ray Techni- 
cians. 
(1) X-Ray Technician, grade 5. 
(a) A graduate of an X-ray technicians’ course, enlisted 
technicians’ course, or an equivalent course in a civil institution or the 
equivalent in practical experience and able to perform the following or 
competent to: 
1. Prepare chemicals and process films. 
2. Maintain the register and filing records. 
3. Take dictation of scientific phraseologies in con- 
nection with radiography and X-ray therapy. 
4. Make scientific position of patients and manipu- 
late X-ray machines. 
5. Assist with fluoroscopy. 
6. Assist with therapy machines. 
(2) X-ray Technician, grade 4. 
(a) Qualified as X-ray Technician, grade 5, and in addition 
(b) Competent to: 
1. Make repairs of X-ray equipment. 
2. Test and calibrate radiographic therapy machines. 
(3) X-Ray Technician, grade 3. 
(a) Qualified as X-ray Technician, grade 4, and in addi- 
tion : 
(b) Be expert in; 
1. Installation, maintenance, and ordering of X-ray 
equipment. 
2. Maintaining X-ray therapy records. 
3. The technique and procedure of all phases of ra- 
diology. 
4. The maintenance and operation of special equip- 
ment. 
40 25. VETERINARY (MEDICAL) 
a. Scope of Instruction for Veterinary Medical Technician. The 
scope of instruction for medical technicians will include the following: 
(1) Veterinary Hygiene and Sanitation. Stable construction, hy- 
giene and ventilation; quarantine and isolation; dipping and dipping 
vats; stable management, conditioning of animals on march and in the 
field; fitting and care of equipment. 
No. of hours—100; Text References: Field Manual 8-40 and 25-3. AR 
30-440; 30-455; 40-205; 40-2090. 
(2) Veterinary Anatomy. Anatomy of skeleton, muscles, liga- 
ments, tendons, joints, and the digestive, respiratory, urogenital, cir- 
culatory and lymphatic systems; pulse and temperature; the nervous 
system and special senses, eye, ear, nose and skin. 
No. of hours—80; Text References: FM 25-5 and TM 8-220. 
(3) Animal Nursing and First Aid. Diseases and common in- 
juries of bone, muscles, tendons, ligaments and joints; diseases of the 
digestive, respiratory, urogenital, circulatory, lymphatic and nervous 
systems; diseases of the eye, ear, nose, skin and foot. 
No. of hours—80; Text Reference: TM 8-220. 
(4) Veterinary Bacteriology. Disposition, nature and class- 
ification of bacteria; sterilization methods; preparation of culture 
media; staining methods; preparation and shipping of specimens; in- 
fection, immunity and allergy. 
No. of hours—50; Text References: TM 8-220 and 8-227. 
(5) Materia Medica, Therapeutics and Pharmacy. Metrology 
and prescription writing; dosage, administration and specific action of 
drugs; general therapeutics; recognition of poisons. 
No. of hours—50; Text References: TM 8-220 and 8-233, 
(6) Horseshoeing. Practical horseshoeing and shoeing defects 
« 
No. of hours—8; Text Reference: FM 25-5. 
(7) Roentgenology. Elementary electricity and physics; X-ray 
apparatus and safety factors; films and developers; restraints and 
positioning; fluoroscopy. 
No. of hours—40; Text References: TM 8-240 and 8-275. 
41 (8) Forage and Grain Inspection. Practical analyses of hay, 
straw and grain; storing and sampling of concentrates. 
No. of hours—50; Text References: U. S. Standards for Hay and Straw; 
Official Grain Standards of United 
States. 
(9) Meat and Dairy Hygiene. Sanitary requirements of Federal 
Specifications relating to the procurement of meats and meat products; 
poultry and poultry products; dairy and marine products. 
No. of hours—80; Text References: AR 40-2150; Military Meat & 
Dairy Hygiene, Eakins. 
(10) Administration. Veterinary reports, returns and records; 
classifications and specifications in branding and registration of public 
animals; veterinary station service; veterinary servces in the theatre 
of operation; scheme of evacuation. 
No. of hours—40; Text References: TM 8-450; FM 8-5 and 8-10. 
b. Standards of Proficiency for Various Grades of Veterinary Med- 
ical Technicians. 
(1) Technician, Veterinary, (Medical), Grade 5. Graduate of 
a veterinary technicians course, enlisted technicians school, or an equiv- 
alent course in a civil institution or the equivalent in practical experi- 
ence, and able to perform the following: 
(a) Take temperatures, pulse and respiration. 
(b) Act as a practical animal nurse, 
(c) Cleanse and disinfect ordinary dispensary equipment, 
(d) Care for and maintain ordinary veterinary ward prop- 
erty and equipment. 
(e) Prepare and feed special rations. 
(f) Administer medicines orally; apply bandages; give 
enemas and employ simple methods of restraint. 
(g) Prepare and maintain clinical records, 
(2) Technician, Veterinary, (Medical), Grade 4. Qualified as 
a veterinary medical technician, Grade 5, and in addition be able to 
perform the following: 
(a) Act as an assistant in charge of a medical or communic- 
able disease ward. 
(b) Possess practical knowledge of the dosage and admin- 
istration of drugs and of elementary therapeutics. 
(c) Administer hypodermic medications and pass the stom- 
ach tube. 
(d) Dispense stock preparations and compound ordinary 
veterinary prescriptions. 
42 (e) Maintain all veterinary records pertaining to sick and 
wounded animals. 
(3) Technician, Veterinary, (Medical), Grade 3. Qualified as 
a veterinary medical technician, Grade 4, and in addition be able to 
perform the following: 
(a) Take charge, under supervision, of the handling of 
communicable diseases," quarantines and disinfections; to assist or per- 
form, under supervision, specialized veterinary medical procedures. 
(b) Train veterinary medical technicians in lower grades 
in the performance of their routine duties. 
26. VETERINARY (SURGICAL) 
a. Scope of Instruction for Veterinary Surgical Technician. The 
scope of instruction for veterinary surgical technicians will include the 
following: 
(1) Veterinary Hygiene and Sanitation. Stable construction, 
hygiene and ventilation; quarantine and isolation; dipping and dipping 
vats; stable management, conditioning of animals on march and in the 
field; fitting and care of equipment. 
No. of hours—80; Text References: FM 8-40 and 25-5. AR 30-440; 30- 
455; 40-205; 40-2090. 
(2) Veterinary Anatomy. Anatomy of skeleton, muscles, liga- 
ments, tendons, joints, and the digestive, respiratory, urogenital, cir- 
culatory and lymphatic systems; pulse and temperature; the nervous 
system and special senses, eye, ear, nose, and skin. 
No. of hours—80; Text References; FM 25-5 and TM 8-220. 
(3) Animal Nursing and First Aid. Diseases and common in- 
juries of bone, muscles, tendons, ligaments and joints; diseases of the 
digestive, respiratory, urogenital, circulatory, lymphatic and nervous 
systems; diseases of the eye, ear, nose, skin and foot. 
No. of hours—60; Text References: TM 8-220. 
(4) Minor Surgery and Operating Room Technique. First aid; 
control of hemorrhage; classification of wounds and knowledge of their 
treatment; procurement, care, sterilization and maintenance of opera- 
ting room equipment and instruments; preparation for operation; post- 
operative care. •> 
No. of hours—80; Text References: TM 8-220; Standard Text. 
43 (5) Veterinary Bacteriology. Disposition, nature and classi- 
fication of bacteria; sterilization methods; preparation of culture 
media; staining methods; preparation and shipping of specimens; in- 
fection, immunity and allergy. 
No. of hours—40; Text References: TM 8-220 and 8-227. 
(6) Materia Medica, Therapeutics and Pharmacy. Metrology 
and prescription writing; dosage, administration and specific action of 
drugs; general therapeutics; recognition of poisons. 
No. of hours—40; Text References: TM 8-220 and 8-233, 
(7) Horseshoeing. Practical horseshoeing and shoeing defects. 
No. of hours—8; Text References: FM 25-5. 
(8) Roentgenology. Elementary electricity and physics; x-ray 
apparatus and safety factors; films apd developers; restraints and 
positioning; fluoroscopy. 
No. of hours—40; Text References: TM 8-240 and 8-275. 
(9) Forage and Grain Inspection. Practical analyses of hay, 
straw and grain; storing and sampling of concentrates. 
No. of hours—40 ; Text References: U. S. Standards for Hay and Straw; 
Official Grain Standards of United 
States. 
(10) Meat and Dairy Hygiene. Sanitary requirements of Federal 
Specifications relating to the procurement of meats and meat products; 
poultry and poultry products; dairy and marine products. 
No. of hours—20; Text References: AR 40-2150; Military Meat and 
Dairy Hygiene, Eakins. 
(11) Administration. Veterinary reports, returns and records; 
classifications and specifications in branding and registration of public 
animals; veterinary station service; veterinary service in the theatre of 
operations; scheme of evacuation. 
No. of hours—40; Text References: TM 8-450; FM 8-5 and 8-10. 
b. Standards of Proficiency for Various Grades of Veterinary Sur- 
gical Technicians. 
(1) Veterinary Surgical Technician, Grade 5. 
(a) Qualified to perform the work of a veterinary medical 
technician, Grade 5, as applied to surgical wards. 
44 1. Act as a junior assistant in the dressing or operating 
room or in a surgical ward. 
2. Prepare animals for operation. 
3. Prepare and maintain records in a surgical clinic. 
(b) Competent to: 
(2) Veterinary Surgical Technician, Grade 4. 
(a) Qualified to perform the work of a veterinary medical 
technician, Grade 4, as applied to a surgical ward, or be qualified as 
a veterinary surgical technician, Grade 5, and competent to: 
1. Act as an assistant in the dressing, operating room 
or veterinary surgical clinic, 
2. Prepare operating room and instruments and, with 
assistance, place animal on operating table. 
3. Take charge of the sterilization of all instruments 
and dressings in operating room or surgical clinic. 
(3) Veterinary Surgical Technician, Grade 3. 
(a) Qualified as a veterinary medical technician, Grade 3, 
or a veterinary surgical technician, Grade 4, and in addition competent, 
under the supervision of a veterinary officer, to 
1. Apply special bandages and appliances; do simple 
suturing of wounds and prepare fields of operation. 
2. Administer general anaesthetics to large animals. 
3. Supervise and train technicians in lower grades in 
the performance of their duties. 
27. VETERINARY (MEAT AND DAIRY HYGIENIST) 
a. Scope of Instruction for Veterinary Technician (Meat and Dairy 
Hygienist). The scope of instruction for veterinary technicians (meat 
and dairy hygienist) will include the following: 
(1) Veterinary Hygiene and Sanitation. Stable construction, 
hygiene and ventilation; quarantine and isolation; dipping and dipping 
vats; stable management, conditioning of animals on march and in the 
field; fitting and care of equipment. 
No. of hours—40; Text References: FM 8-40 and 25-5; AR 30-440; 30- 
455; 40-205; 40-2090. 
(2) Veterinary Anatomy. Anatomy of skeleton, muscles, liga- 
ments, tendons, joints, and the digestive, respiratory, urogenital, cir- 
culatory and lymphatic systems; pulse and temperature; the nervous 
system and special senses, eye, ear, nose and skin. 
No. of hours—30; Text References: FM 25-5 and TM 8-220. 
45 (3) Animal Nursing and First Aid. Diseases and common in- 
juries of bone, muscles, tendons, ligaments and joints; diseases of the 
digestive, respiratory, urogenital, circulatory, lymphatic and nervous 
systems; diseases of the eye, ear, nose, skin and foot. 
No. of hours—30; Text References: TM 8-220. 
(4) Veterinary Bacteriology. Disposition, nature and classifica- 
tion of bacteria; sterilization methods; preparation of culture media; 
staining methods; preparation and shipping of specimens; infection, 
immunity and allergy. 
No. of hours—30; Text References: TM 8-220 and 8-227. 
(5) Materia Medica, Therapeutics and Pharmacy. Metrology 
and prescription writing; dosage, administration and specific action of 
drugs; general therapeutics; recognition of poisons. 
No. of hours—20; Text References: TM 8-220 and 8-233. 
(6) Horseshoeing. Practical horseshoeing and shoeing defects. 
No. of hours—8; Text Reference: FM 25-5. 
(7) Roentgenology. Elementary electricity and physics; x-ray 
apparatus and safety factors; films and developers; restraints and 
positioning; fluoroscopy. 
No. of hours—10 ; Text References: TM 8-240 and 8-275. 
(8) Forage and Grain Inspection. Composition and food values 
of forage, feeds and grains; practical laboratory analyses of hay, straw 
and grain; analyzing and scoring timothy, alfalfa, clover, Johnson, 
prairie and Grain hays; grades and classes of oats and corn; storing and 
sampling of concentrates; practical laboratory analyses of grains. 
No. of hours—140; Text References: U. S. Standards for Hay and 
Straw; Official Grain Stand- 
ards of United States. 
(9) Meat and Dairy Hygiene. Understanding the sanitary re- 
quirements and interpretation of Federal Specifications relating to the 
procurement of meats, meat food, dairy and marine products; sanitary 
inspection of establishments; ante mortem, slaughter and post mortem; 
sanitary inspection, classification and grading fresh meats, cured, 
smoked and canned meats; rendered products, sausages, poultry, eggs, 
fish and sea foods, butter, cheese and miscellaneous products. 
No of hours—180; Text References: AR 40-2150; Military Meat & 
Dairy Hygiene, Eakins. 
46 (10) Administration. Veterinary reports, returns and records, 
with particular emphasis on the keeping and preparation of detailed 
records for Form MD 110; veterinary station service, veterinary service 
in the theatre of operations. 
No. of hours—40; Text References: TM 8-450; FM 8-5 and 8-10; and 
AR 40-2150. 
b. Standards of Proficiency for Various Grades of Meat and Dairy 
Hygienists. 
(1) Technician, Meat and Dairy Hygienist, Grade 5. Graduate 
of a veterinary technicians course, enlisted technicians school, or an 
equivalent course in a civil institution or the equivalent in practical 
experience, and able to perform the following: 
(a) Make routine inspections of meats and meat products, 
poultry and poultry products, dairy and marine products, under direct 
supervision. 
(b) Prepare routine records and reports of inspections. 
(c) Select, prepare and properly pack specimens of meat, 
poultry, dairy and marine products for shipment to food analysis lab- 
oratories. 
(2) Technician, Meat and Dairy Hygienist, Grade 4. Qualified 
as a technician, meat and dairy hygienist, Grade 5 ,and in addition; 
(a) Be capable of making routine inspections under gen- 
eral supervision, of meat and meat products, poultry and poultry prod- 
ucts, dairy and marine products at purchase, in storage, and at issue. 
(b) Be thoroughly familiar with the requirements of sani- 
tation, temperatures and ventilation of storage rooms; be familiar with 
methods of curing, canning and processing of meat, poultry, dairy and 
marine products. 
(c) Competent to make inspections, under supervision, of 
methods of curing, canning and processing of meat, poultry, dairy and 
marine products, and to evaluate the standards of sanitation main- 
tained. 
(3) Technician, Meat and Dairy Hygienist, Grade 3. Qualified 
as a technician, meat and dairy hygienist, Grade 4, and in addition, 
under supervision of a veterinary officer, be able to: 
(a) Make inspections of methods used in curing, canning, 
freezing, selecting and grading of meat and meat products, poultry and 
poultry products, dairy and marine products; make sanitary inspec- 
tions of establishments, including milk plants and dairies. 
(b) Prepare and keep all records necessary in the office 
of a depot or port veterinarian. 
(c) Train meat and dairy hygienists in lower grades. 
47 CHAPTER 3 
INTRODUCTION TO 
THE INSTRUCTORS’ GUIDE 
49 CHAPTER 3. 
Introduction to 
The Instructors’ Guide 
MEDICAL DEPARTMENT MOBILIZATION TRAINING 
PROGRAM 8-1 
This instructors’ guide has been prepared for use as an aid only in 
fulfilling the provisions of Medical Department MTP 8-1. 
Local conditions and training facilities will necessitate changes or 
substitutions from time to time. Also, experience will suggest desirable 
alterations. Notes should be kept of such changes with a view of in- 
cluding them in any subsequent revision of the “guide”. However, if the 
outlines for the subjects scheduled for the hours are followed, a satis- 
factory standard of proficiency will be attained. 
This Instructors’ Guide is based on the new MTP 8-1 dated Feb- 
ruary 23, 1942 which replaced MTP 8-1 dated August 14, 1940. Former- 
ly the Instructors’ Guides were issued in four volumes but are now re- 
placed by this single volume. Text references and other pertinent data 
have been brought up to date as of February, 1942 and include the new 
field manuals, film strips and training films. The major changes include 
additional hours on military courtesy; combining the old subjects on 
Care of Clothing and Equipment, and Equipment, Clothing and Tent 
pitching to one subject now entitled Equipment, Clothing and Shelter 
Tent Pitching and thereby reducing the number of hours required from 
eleven to nine; an additional hour on individual defense against chemi- 
cal attack; the title Military Sanitation and First Aid has been changed 
to read Personal Hygiene and First Aid; and the subdivision on Physical 
Exercise has been rewritten in a manner permitting greater flexibility 
in choice of exercises and more initiative on the part of the instructor. 
The thirty-nine hours allotted to Physical Exercise and the sixteen hours 
allotted to map and aerial photograph reading have been included in 
the total number of hours. The former subject “Unit Training” has been 
reduced from 122 to 95 hours and is now entitled “Technical and Tacti- 
cal Employment of Medical Field Units.” As an addition, Section 4, chap- 
ter 3 is nresent as a guide for the training of veterinary units. 
A thorough understanding on the part of the instructor of Medical 
Department MTP 8-1 and MR 3-1 is essential to the conduct of training. 
Each course has been given an index number which is shown in the 
upper right hand corner of each page. This index number corresponds 
to the vertical sequence of the courses as listed in MTP 8-1. 
A list of text references and instructional aids are included in the 
appendices at the back of the book. 
51 (1) 
SECTION I 
BASIC TRAINING 
MILITARY COURTESY AND DISCIPLINE 
(Military Courtesy) 
Purpose and Scope. The purpose of this course is to teach Medical 
Department enlisted men the proper method of rendering military 
courtesies on any or all occasions. 
The scope includes the courtesies rendered officers; the Na- 
tional Anthem; to the colors (standard) ; the National Flag; and 
national and regimental colors or standards. 
Actual Time Allotted: 6 hours. 
Text References. Army Regulations 600-25, as changed by the follow- 
ing Circulars: No. 114, War Department, Washington, D. C., 
October 14, 1940; No. 139 dated November 28, 1940; Army Regu- 
lations 600-355; Army Regulations 615-290; Field Manual 21-50; 
Field Manual 21-100; Field Manual 22-5 (Method of rendering a 
salute) ; Field Manual 26-5 (Courtesies by a sentinel) ; Training Film 
11-157; Articles of War 110-MCM. 
Methods of Instruction. Conference, Training Film, Demonstration (In- 
door and Outdoor), Application (Indoor and Outdoor). 
Minimum Standard of Proficiency. Each Soldier: 
1. To render smartly and correctly the hand salute. 
a. Know when the salute is given. 
b. Know the correct saluting distance. 
c. Know whom to salute, 
d. Know what is meant by “under arms,” “outdoors,” “indoors.” 
2. To render smartly and correctly the proper courtesies to officers 
on their various occasions of meeting. 
a. Occasions for the salute. 
b. Courtesies which omit the salute. 
c. Occasions when salutes and honors are not observed. 
3. To render the proper courtesy when in uniform to: 
a. The National Anthem. 
b. The colors, (standard). 
c. The National Flag. 
d. National and regimental colors or standards. 
4. To render the proper courtesy when not in uniform. 
5. To render the proper courtesies when a witness at a court- 
martial. 
6. To render the proper courtesy when at the pay table. 
52 (1) 
CONFERENCE—MILITARY COURTESIES, INDOOR & OUTDOOR 
Instructor (s) 
First Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom 
Text References. Army Regulations 600-25, as changed by Circular 
No. 114, War Department, Washington, D. C., October 14, 1940, 
and Circular No. 139 dated November 28, 1940; Field Manual 
21-50; Field Manual 21-100; Field Manual 22-5 (Method of rendering 
a salute); Field Manual 26-5 (Courtesies by a sentinel). Training 
Film 11-157; also with special reference to discipline: AR 600-355; 
AR 615-290; AW 110 MCM. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Procedure. Conference—Introductory remarks by the instructor, prin- 
cipally stressing the meaning of indoor and outdoor military court- 
esies and the reasons why military courtesies are so indispensible 
to military discipline. The following factors should be covered: 
1. The meaning of courtesy and discipline. 
2. Manner of rendering courtesies. 
8. The military salute. 
4. The correct use of titles. 
5. Courtesies to the National Anthem. 
6. Courtesies to the National Flag. 
7. Summary and conclusions as desired. Suggest that questions by 
men be witheld until subsequent periods; the motion picture 
and demonstrations will tend to clarify this preliminary con- 
ference. 
NOTE: (Under the above text references, mention is made of those especially referring 
to discipline; stress should be placed on absence without leave, desertion, and the 
offenses made punishable under the punitive articles of war). 
53 (1) 
CONFERENCE AND MOTION PICTURE—MILITARY COURTESIES 
(Indoor and Outdoor) 
Second Period: One Hour 
Instructor(s) 
Place. Theatre or suitable classroom. 
Text References. Army Regulations 600-25, as changed by Circular 
No. 114, War Department, Washington, D. C., October 14, 1940, 
and Circular No, 139 dated November 28, 1940; Field Manual 
21-50; Field Manual 21-100; Field Manual 22-5 (Method of render- 
ing a salute) ; Field Manual 26-5 (Courtesies by a sentinel). 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Movie operator. 
Equipment. Training Film No. 11-157 (running time approximately 
26 minutes). 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None 
Procedure. (Suggested outline for this Conference). 
1. Brief introductory remarks covering courtesy, discipline, and 
customs of the service. 
2. Show the Training Film No. 11-157. 
3. Summary and conclusions as desired. Suggest emphasis on 
rendering the hand salute in a precise, military manner. This 
is a good time to answer questions relative to various circum- 
stances as brought out in the actual Training Film. 
54 (1) 
DEMONSTRATION—MILITARY COURTESIES, INDOOR 
Instructor (s) 
Third Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom 
Text References. Army Regulations 600-25, as changed by Circular 
No. 114, War Department, Washington, D. C., October 14, 1940, 
and Circular No. 139 dated November 28, 1940; Field Manual 
21-50; Field Manual 21-100; Field Manual 22-5 (Method of render- 
ing a salute) ; Field Manual 26-5 (Courtesies by a sentinel). 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. 5 officers; 1 first sergeant; 1 company clerk; 6 privates. 
Equipment. 2 tables; 7 chairs; 1 deck of cards; 1 pistol and belt; 
1 typewriter; paper; 4 sets of messing equipment; 
garrison uniforms; one rifle and belt. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None 
DEFINITIONS. When the word “indoors” is used it is construed to 
mean offices, hallways, kitchens, mess halls, orderly rooms, amuse- 
ment rooms, bathrooms, dwellings, libraries, or other place of abode. 
DEMONSTRATION PROCEDURE 
1. PRELIMINARY REMARKS ABOUT MILITARY COURTESIES BY 
INSTRUCTOR. (Section I, FM 21-50) 
2. THE SALUTES. The following salutes will be explained and de- 
monstrated : 
a. The hand salute, covered. (Fig. 4 FM 21-50; Par. 20, FM 22-5). 
b. The hand salute, uncovered. (Fig. 8, FM 21-50). 
c. The salute by removing headdress. (Fig. 16, FM 21-50). 
d. The rifle salute at right shoulder arms. (Fig. 14, FM 21-50). 
e. The salute by a sentinel armed with rifle. (Fig. 12, FM 21-50). 
3. OFFICER REPORTING FOR DUTY AT A MILITARY POST. (Par. 
9 g, j, and Fig. 8, FM 21-50) 
Scenario: The adjutant is seated at his desk at post headquarters. 
The officer reporting for duty removes his hat and knocks at the door. 
Adjutant: “Come in.” 
Upon entering, he marches up to within two paces of the adjutant’s 
55 (1) 
desk, halts, salutes, and says: “Sir, Lieutenant Jones reports for duty.” 
He then presents a copy of his orders. 
The adjutant rises, returns the salute, takes the new officer’s 
shakes hands with him, welcomes him to the organization, and invites him 
to be seated. 
Adjutant: “The commanding officer is not here at present, but will 
be in at eleven o’clock and will receive you at that time.” 
The officer then rises, faces the adjutant and says: “Thank you, 
Captain. I will be here at eleven o’clock.” Holding his hat in his left hand, 
he salutes. 
After the adjutant acknowledges the salute, the new officer executes 
about face, and withdraws. 
4. CEREMONY OF CHANGING OFFICER OF THE DAY. 
Scenario: The commanding officer is seated at his desk. The old 
and the new officers of the day, the old officer of the day on the right, ap- 
pear at the door. The old officer of the day, carrying the guard report 
in his left hand, knocks. 
Commanding officer: “Come in.” 
The demonstration then proceeds as laid down in Par. 13j, FM 26-5. 
5. MILITARY COURTESIES IN COMPANY OFFICE. 
a. A soldier reports to the first sergeant in the orderly room or tent. 
Scenario: First sergeant and company clerk are seated at their 
desks. A soldier appears in the doorway and knocks. 
First sergeant; “Come in,” 
Soldier removes hat with left hand and takes position at attention 
in front of the desk of the first sergeant,. 
Soldier: “Private Smith has permission of the platoon sergeant to 
speak to the first sergeant.” 
First sergeant: “What do you want, Smith?” 
Soldier: “Fd like a pass, Sergeant, from Saturday noon till Monday 
morning.” 
First sergeant: Looking at the duty roster: ‘Til take it up with the 
company commander later in the morning, I think he’ll approve it.” 
Soldier: “Thank you, Sergeant.” 
The soldier leaves the orderly room. 
b. A soldier reports to the company commander in his office or tent. 
Scenario; First sergeant and company clerk are seated at their 
desks. The company commander is seated at the desk in his office. An 
orderly is seated near the door. 
First sergeant: “Orderly, tell Jones to report to me.” 
Orderly: “Yes, Sergeant. 
Orderly departs. 
In a few moments the orderly returns and takes his seat. 
Just behind him is another soldier who halts at the door and knocks. 
56 (1) 
First sergeant: “Come in.” 
Soldier removes hat with his left hand and takes position at attention 
before the desk of the first sergeant. 
Soldier: “Private Jones reports to the first sergeant as directed.” 
First sergeant: “You wanted to see the company commander about 
a furlough, didn’t you?” (Par. 33a, FM 21-100). 
Soldier: “Yes, Sergeant, I did.” 
First sergeant: “The company commander is in his office now. You 
have my permission to go in and see him.” 
Soldier :uThank you, Sergeant.” 
Soldier walks to the door of the company commander’s office and 
knocks. (Par. 9j, FM 21-50). 
Company commander: “Come in,” 
Soldier, still carrying hat in his left hand, enters the office, halts 
within two paces of the company commander’s desk and salutes. 
When the company commander has acknowledged the salute, the sold- 
ier reports: 
“Sir, Private Jones has the first sergeant’s permission to speak to the 
company commander.” 
Company commander: “All right, Jones, what is it you want?” 
Soldier: “Sir, I’d like to get a thirty day furlough.” 
Company commander: “Oh yes; when do you want to leave?” 
Soldier: “Next Tuesday, sir.” 
Company commander: “I will recommend your furlough to the regi- 
mental commander and I feel sure he will approve it.” 
Soldier: “Thank you, sir.” 
Soldier salutes and when the salute is acknowledged he faces about 
and leaves the office. 
c. Orderly reports to the orderly room with a message for the* 
company commander. 
Scenario: The first sergeant and company clerk are seated at their 
desks. The company commander is seated at the desk in his office. An 
orderly, wearing side arms and covered, appears in the doorway and knocks. 
First sergeant: “Come in.” 
The orderly, without removing his headdress, enters and stands in 
front of the first sergeant’s desk. 
Orderly: “Sergeant, I have a message for the company commander.” 
First sergeant: “The company commander is in his office. Deliver 
your message.” 
Orderly walks to the door of the company commander’s office and 
knocks. 
Company commander: “Come in.” 
Orderly, still covered, enters the office, halts within two paces of the 
company commander’s desk and salutes. 
When the company commander has acknowledged the salute, the 
57 (1) 
orderly reports: “Sir, the battalion commander directs that the Captain 
report to him in his office at once.” 
Company commander: “Inform the battalion commander that I will 
be in his office immediately.” 
Orderly salutes. When the company commander has acknowledged 
the salute, the orderly faces about and departs. 
d. Common errors. 
(1) Soldier reporting to company commander. 
Scenario: The first sergeant and company clerk are seated at their 
desks. The company commander is seated at the desk in his office. A 
soldier appears in the doorway. The collar band of his shirt is unbuttoned 
and his necktie has been pulled away from the collar. He is wearing his 
hat at a rakish angle. Without knocking he strolls into the orderly room. 
First sergeant: “Soldier, get but of here. You knock on that door 
whenever you want to come in here.” 
Soldier returns to the door and knocks. 
First sergeant; “Come in.” 
Soldier strolls in again and as he gazes around the orderly room he 
says to the first sergeant: 
“How about a furlough for me, Sergeant?” 
First sergeant: “Take your hat off.” 
Soldier removes hat places it on the first sergeant’s desk. 
First sergeant: “Button your shirt and fix your tie.” 
Soldier begins to button his shirt when the first sergeant notices the 
hat on his desk. 
First sergeant: “Take your hat off my desk. Face toward me. Look 
me in the eye. Now, who are you and what do you want?” 
Soldier: “Why, you know me, Sergeant. I’m Jones.” 
First sergeant: “Well what do you want?” 
Soldier: “I want a furlough.” 
First sergeant: “No, you can’t ask for a furlough until you learn 
something about military courtesy. Report to your platoon sergeant for 
such instruction.” 
The soldier backs toward the door and withdraws hurriedly. 
(2) Orderly reporting to the orderly room with a message for the 
company commander. 
Scenario : The first sergeant and company clerk are seated at their 
desks. The company commander is seated at the desk in his office. He is 
intently occupied with papers on his desk. 
An orderly strolls into the orderly room and goes to the first ser- 
geant’s desk. He leans on the desk and pushes his hat to the back of 
his head with the thumb of his left hand and asks: 
“Is the ‘old man’ in his office? I have a message for him.” 
First sergeant: “Deliver your message.” 
The orderly walks jauntily into the company commander’s office and 
58 (1) 
halts just inside the door. He executes a breezy and unorthodox salute and 
delivers this message: 
“Cap’n, the Major wants to see you in his office (brief pause) right 
away.” 
Captain: “What is your name and organization, Soldier?” 
Orderly; “Brown, ‘D’ Company, Cap’n.” 
The orderly salutes, cuts a wide swath in reaching the door and departs 
whistling. 
6. MILITARY COURTESIES IN THE HALLWAY OF BARRACKS, 
SQUAD ROOM, ETC. (Par. 30, FM 21-100) 
a. A soldier working in hallway. 
Scenario : A soldier, wearing fatigue uniform without hat, is sweeping 
the hallway. An officer approaches and passes. The soldier continues with 
his work. 
The officer returns and stopping in front of the soldier asks: “Can you 
tell me where the adjutant’s office is?” 
The soldier stops working, stands at attention with the broom in 
his left hand, salutes and replies: “Yes, sir, the adjutant’s office is up- 
stairs.” 
Officer: “Thank you.” He departs for the adjutant’s office. 
The soldier again salutes and, when the salute is acknowledged con- 
tinues with his sweeping. 
b. Several soldiers walking in a hallway as an officer passes. 
Scenario : The following men are walking down a hallway: 
A soldier in fatigue uniform, covered. 
A soldier in garrison uniform, covered, but without arms. 
An officer approaches. One soldier commands: “ATTENTION” 
(Par. 30g(3), FM 21-100). 
The soldiers halt and face the officer at attention. Both soldiers re- 
move their headdresses with their left hand. 
The officer addresses one of the soldiers: “Did you deliver that mes- 
sage to Captain Jones?” 
The soldier salutes and replies; “Yes, sir.” At the completion of the 
conversation he again salutes. 
c. A sentinel from the main guard posted indoors. 
Scenario : A soldier, armed with a pistol, is standing “at ease” on his 
post. An officer approaches. The sentinel comes to attention and executes 
the hand salute. The officer acknowledges the salute. 
d. Common errors. 
Scenario: A soldier, armed with a pistol, is standing “at ease” on his 
post. The following men appear from one end of the hall: 
A soldier in fatigue uniform, covered, 
A soldier in garrison uniform, covered, without arms. 
An officer approaches from the opposite end of the hall. One soldier 
commands: “ATTENTION.” 
59 (1) 
The sentinel on post comes to attention but does not salute. 
The soldier in garrison uniform remains covered and salutes. 
The soldier in fatigue uniform removes his hat with the right hand. 
The instructor points out to the class the errors which have been made. 
7. MILITARY COURTESIES IN A DAY ROOM. (Par. 9h, FM 21-50) 
Scenario: Four men are seated at a table playing cards. An officer 
enters. One of the men commands: “ATTENTION.” All rise and stand at 
attention. The officer approaches the group and speaks to one of the men: 
“Are you the room orderly today?” 
The soldier to whom the question is addressed salutes and replies, 
“Yes, sir.” 
Officer: “That will be all.” 
The soldier again salutes, the officer acknowledges the salute, and 
leaves. 
8. MILITARY COURTESIES IN MESS HALL. (Par. 10c, FM 21-50). 
Scenario: Four soldiers are seated at a table eating when an officer 
enters. The mess sergeant commands: “AT EASE.” All men continue eat- 
ing, but remain “at ease” until the officer directs otherwise or leaves the 
room. The officer asks one of the four men: “Sergeant Jones, are you in 
charge of quarters?” The soldier remains seated at attention and replies: 
“Yes, sir.” 
Officer: “That is all.” 
9. MILITARY COURTESIES IN THE ORDERLY ROOM OR OFFICE. 
(Par. 10, FM 21-50) 
a. In a surgeon’s office. 
Scenario: Two clerks are seated at desks. One clerk is writing, the 
other is operating a typewriter. An officer enters and speaks to the man 
at the typewriter. 
Officer: “Is this the surgeon’s office ?” 
The man stops typing and replies: “Yes, sir, it is.” He does not rise. 
Officer: “Is the surgeon in?” 
Soldier: “I don’t know, sir, but have this seat; I’ll find out.” 
The soldier indicates a chair. 
The officer sits down. The soldier leaves the room and returns after a 
moment. 
Soldier: “The surgeon is in his office, sir, and will see you now.” 
The soldier returns to his typewriter and the officer enters the sur- 
geon’s office. The other clerk, who was not addressed by the officer, has 
continued with his work without interruption. 
b. Common errors. 
Scenario: The stage is set as in par. 9a. 
An officer enters and speaks to the man at the typewriter. 
Officer: “Is this the surgeon’s office?” 
The soldier, without looking up from his work answers, “Yes, it is. 
60 (1) 
Officer: “Is the surgeon in? I wish to see him.” 
Soldier: “I don’t know. Just a minute and I’ll find out.” 
The soldier continues to type, finishing several lines before he gets up 
from his desk. 
The soldier leaves. The officer wanders around the office. After some 
time the soldier returns, sits down at his typewriter and pointing with his 
thumb, says: “Yes, the surgeon is in his office.” He then goes on typing. 
Officer: “Well, will the surgeon see me now?” 
Soldier: “I don’t know. You can go in and see for yourself.” 
Officer: “Well, I’ll be x x.” (Exit). 
10. MILITARY COURTESIES AT COURT-MARTIAL. (Par. 11, FM 
21-50) 
a. Correct method. 
Scenario : A special court-martial is in session. Three members of the 
court are seated at a long table. The judge advocate and defense counsel 
are in their positions. The prisoner is in his seat. The judge advocate rises 
and moving to the door, says; “Private Jones.” 
Private Jones wearing side arms enters, removing his hat with his left 
hand as he passes through the door. He stops before the court and salutes 
the president. When the president has acknowledged his salute, the soldier 
faces the judge advocate and raises his right hand. 
Judge advocate: “You swear that the evidence you shall give in the 
case now in hearing shall be the truth, the whole truth and nothing but 
the truth, so help you God?” 
Soldier: “I do.” 
Judge advocate: “Take that seat.” 
The witness takes the chair. He sits at attention, facing the court with 
his heels together, and his hat on his lap clasped by the fingers of both 
hands. 
Judge advocate: “Give your full name, rank, serial number, organ- 
ization and station,” 
Witness: “John Jones, Private, R-567630, Company “B” 32d Medical 
Battalion, Carlisle Barracks, Pa.” 
The judge advocate, pointing to the prisoner asks: “Do you know the 
accused?” 
Witness: “Yes, sir.” 
Judge advocate: “What is his name?” 
Witness: “Private Henry Smith, sir.” 
Judge advocate: “Has the court any questions?” 
President of the court, looking inquiringly at the members of the court: 
“There appears to be none.” 
Judge advocate: “The witness is excused.” 
The witness rises, and holding his hat in his left hand, faces the presi- 
dent of the court at attention and salutes. The president of the court ack- 
nowledges the salute and the witness withdraws. 
61 (1) 
b. Common errors. 
Scenario: The stage is set as in Par. 10a above. Private Jones appears 
in the doorway, wearing side arms, and covered. He hesitates momentarily 
in the doorway, looks about in bewilderment and ambles listlessly toward 
the only vacant chair he sees. 
Judge advocate: “Come here, Jones.” 
Jones moves in front of the judge advocate and taking position “at 
ease,” waits. 
Judge Advocate: “Take off your hat.” 
The witness removes his hat with his right hand. 
Judge advocate: “Salute the President of the Court.” 
The witness begins to comply and then finding his right hand encum- 
bered with a hat, hesitates a moment before placing the hat on the judge 
advocate’s desk. Finally he salutes the President. 
Judge advocate: “Raise your right hand.” 
The witness raises his left hand. 
Judge advocate: “Your right hand.” 
The witness complies. 
Judge advocate: “You swear that the evidence you shall give in the 
case now in hearing shall be the truth, the whole truth and nothing but the 
truth, so help you God?” 
The witness remains silent. 
Judge advocate: “Well, do you?” 
Witness: “Yes, SIR.” 
Judge advocate: “Take that seat.” 
The witness takes several steps toward the witness chair, remembers 
his hat and returns to the judge advocate’s table to retrieve it. He finally 
gets seated, slumped in an undignified posture with his legs crossed. He 
appears to be ill at ease. His hands are busy creasing and brushing his hat. 
Judge advocate: “Give your full name, rank, serial number, organiza- 
tion and station.” 
Witness: “John Jones, private.” 
Judge advocate: “What is your serial number, organization and 
station?” 
Witness: “567630.” He drops his hat on the floor and recovers it. 
Judge advocate: “What’s your organization and station?” 
Witness: “Well, Lieutenant, I belong to Company “B” but I’ve asked 
for a transfer, only I haven’t heard a thing and if. . . ” 
Judge advocate: “That’ll do, Jones. Has the court any questions?” 
President of the court: “There appears to be none.” 
Judge advocate, (to witness) : “You may go now.” 
Witness rises and makes a dash for the door. 
Judge advocate: “Come back here.” Witness halts and faces the judge 
advocate. “Salute the President of the Court.” 
The witness moves to the end of the table, faces the flank of the court, 
salutes improperly, and leaves. 
62 (1) 
11. MILITARY COURTESIES AT THE PAY TABLE. 
a. Correct method. (Par. 33c, FM 21-100). 
Scenario: An officer and a clerk are seated at adjacent tables. The 
clerk is scanning the pay roll. The officer is fingering stage currency on 
the desk before him. 
Clerk: “Private Smith.” 
Smith: “Here.” Smith, removing his hat with his left hand, places 
himself in front of the officer’s desk, and salutes. 
Clerk: “Twenty-three dollars and thirty cents.” 
The officer counts out the money and pushes it toward Smith. Smith, 
still holding his hat in his left hand, scoops the money into his hat with his 
right hand, executes a right face and departs. 
The clerk calls the names of three other soldiers who receive their pay 
in the same manner as Smith. 
b. Common errors. 
The scene does not change. 
Clerk: “Private Brown.” 
Brown: “Yo!” 
Brown enters without removing his hat and steps up to the officer’s 
desk. He salutes after a fashion. 
Clerk: “One dollar and seven cents.” 
The officer counts out the money and pushes it across the table. 
The soldier in attempting to brush the coins into his left hand drops 
several on the floor. Then on his hands and knees, he picks up the scat- 
tered money. 
63 (1) 
DEMONSTRATION—MILITARY COURTESIES, OUTDOOR 
Instructor (a) 
Fourth Period; One Hour 
Place. Outdoors. (Bleachers or amphitheater if available.) 
Text References. Same as 2nd and 3rd period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Band (if available) 2 color bearers 
10 privates 2 color guards 
1 noncommissioned officer 1 chauffeur 
each grade 1 officer 
1 bugler 1 mounted orderly 
Equipment. 1 car 1 baseball 
2 brooms 2 pistols and belts 
2 baseball gloves 1 horse 
1 bugle 8 rifles and 8 belts 
Band instruments 2 rifles and belts for 
colorguards 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
DEMONSTRATION PROCEDURE 
1. PRELIMINARY REMARKS BY INSTRUCTOR. (Section I, FM 21- 
50). 
2. SOLDIER WITHOUT ARMS SALUTES. 
a. Passing and overtaking an officer. Salutes are rendered as 
prescribed in Par. 9, Fig. 4, FM 21-50. 
b. Common errors. The officer posts himself in front of the center 
of the class, facing the front. Six soldiers, approaching from the officer’s 
left, pass and salute the officer. They approach in single file with suf- 
ficient interval between men to enable the instructor to point out the er- 
rors made by each man before the next arrives. The following errors are 
demonstrated: 
(1) Fingers are spread apart. The tip of the right fore-finger 
does not touch the headdress to right of the right eye. 
(2) Soldier has left hand in pocket. 
64 (1) 
(3) Soldier does not look at the officer as he salutes. His shirt 
;s unbuttoned. 
(4) Soldier holds cigarette in his right hand as he salutes. 
(5) Soldier salutes with hat on the back of his head. 
(6) Soldier salutes with cigarette in his mouth. 
3. SOLDIERS ATTIRED AND ARMED IN VARIOUS WAYS, RENDER 
PROPER COURTESIES IN PASSING AN OFFICER. 
a. Correct method. 
(1) Soldier in civilian clothes executes hand salute. 
(2) Soldier armed with pistol executes hand salute. 
(3) Soldier in fatigue uniform renders hand salute. 
(4) Dismounted sentinel armed with a pistol, halts and executes 
the hand salute. 
b. Demonstration of common errors. 
(1) Soldier in civilian clothes looks at officer as he passes but does 
not salute. 
(2) Soldier, armed with the pistol, tilts head backward as he sa- 
lutes. 
(3) Soldier in fatigue uniform salutes, but he does not hold the 
salute until it is returned by the officer. 
4. MOUNTED ORDERLY DELIVERS A MESSAGE TO A DISMOUNT- 
ED OFFICER. (Par. lOg, FM 21-50). 
Scenario : A soldier on horseback approaches the officer. As he 
arrives at saluting distance he brings the horse to a halt, dismounts and 
stands to horse. 
Soldier: “Sir, I have delivered your message to Lieutenant Smith,” 
Officer: “All right, Jones. Thank you.” 
The soldier mounts and rides off. 
5. SOLDIERS ON FATIGUE DUTY RENDER PROPER COURTESIES 
TO AN OFFICER. 
Scenario : Two soldiers in fatigue uniform, equipped with rakes, are 
working as an officer passes. The men continue with their work. A 
moment later the officer returns and halts in front of one of the men. 
That soldier holding rake in left hand, stands at attention and salutes. 
The officer acknowledges the salute. 
Officer: “What company do you belong to?” 
Soldier: “Company “B”, sir.” 
Officer: “That’s all.” 
The soldier again salutes. After the salute has been acknowledged, 
the soldier resumes his work. The other soldier, who was not addressed, 
continues his work without interruption. 
65 (1) 
6. GROUP OF ENLISTED MEN, IN VARIOUS ATTIRE, OUT OF 
RANKS, RENDER PROPER COURTESIES TO AN OFFICER. 
Scenario: Four soldiers, out of ranks, are standing in a group. One 
man is in service uniform, one is in fatigue uniform, another has on a 
baseball uniform and the fourth is wearing civilian clothes. An officer 
approaches. As the officer arrives within about ten paces of the group 
one of the men calls: “ATTENTION.” All stand at attention and when 
the officer arrives six paces from them they salute. After the officer 
acknowledges the salute the men resume their conversation. 
7. SOLDIERS ENGAGED IN ATHLETICS RENDER PROPER COUR- 
TESIES TO AN OFFICER. 
Scenario: Two soldiers, in baseball uniform, are holding pitching 
practice. An officer passes. The men continue with their game. The 
officer immediately returns and halts beside one of the men. The game 
stops and the soldier, beside whom the officer has stopped, comes to at- 
tention and salutes. The officer acknowledges the salute. 
Officer: “Is there a game scheduled for today?” 
Soldier: “Yes, sir.” 
Officer: “Who are you playing?” 
Soldier: “Company “C,” 32d Medical Battalion, sir.” 
Officer: “Thank you.” 
The soldier again salutes and when the officer has acknowledged the 
salute, the two men resume their pitching practice. 
During the conversation between the officer and one of the men, the 
other man tosses the ball a short distance in the air and catches it, await- 
ing the departure of the officer. 
8. A SQUAD DEMONSTRATES COURTESIES RENDERED UNDER 
VARIOUS CONDITIONS. 
a. Squad marching at route step approaches an officer. 
Scenario: A squad, under command of a noncommissioned officer, 
is marching on the reservation at route step. An officer approaches. The 
noncommissioned officer calls the squad to attention in sufficient time so 
that he may salute the officer at six paces. When the officer has ac- 
knowledged the salute, the noncommissioned officer commands: “Route 
step, MARCH.” 
b. Squad at drill passes an officer. 
Scenario : A squad is receiving instruction in drill by a noncommis- 
sioned officer. An officer passes. No courtesies are exchanged. 
c. An officer passes in rear of a squad. 
Scenario: A squad is standing “at ease.” The noncommissioned of- 
ficer in charge of the squad, also “at ease,” is facing the squad. An of- 
ticer approaches from the flank. The noncommissioned officer commands 
66 (1) 
“Squad, ATTENTION,” faces the front and stands at attention. The 
officer passes in rear of the squad. When the officer has cleared the 
opposite flank the noncommissioned officer faces the squad and com- 
mands: “AT EASE.” He does not salute. 
d. An officer passes in front of a squad. 
Scenario: A squad is standing “at ease.” The noncommissioned of- 
ficer in charge of the squad, also “at ease,” is facing the squad. An of- 
ficer approaches from the flank. The noncommissioned officer calls his 
squad to attention and faces the front. The path of the officer lies in 
front of the squad. As the officer arrives six paces from the noncom- 
missioned officer, the squad leader salutes. When the officer has ac- 
knowledged the salute, the squad leader faces about and commands 
“AT EASE.” 
e. Officer speaks to a man in ranks. 
Scenario: This demonstration is a continuation of the one in the 
preceding subparagraph. (Par. 10b, FM 21-50) 
After the squad leader has commanded: “AT EASE,” the officer 
turns and speaks to one of the men in ranks. The man comes to attention 
and replies. When the officer moves away the man resumes the position 
of “at ease” without command. He does not salute. 
9. COURTESIES RENDERED AT THE PLAYING OF THE NATIONAL 
ANTHEM OTHER THAN AT RETREAT. 
a. By sentinel, armed with pistol, walking post. 
Scenario; The band, or selected members of the band take post so 
that the post flag pole is on one flank of the class and the band on 
the other. 
A sentinel, armed with the pistol, is walking post. As he reaches a 
place opposite the center of the class the band plays the National An- 
them. The sentinel halts, faces the music and executes the hand salute. 
A few strains only of the National Anthem are played. At the last note 
of the music the sentinel completes the salute and resumes walking his 
post. 
b. By members of the guard, guarding prisoners. 
Scenario : The band is situated as in Par. 9a above. 
A prisoner guard with one prisoner approaches from the flank on 
which the band is posted. When he has arrived opposite the center of the 
class the bugler sounds: “ATTENTION.” The sentinel halts his prisoner 
and instructs him to move on the arc of a circle to a position between the 
sentinel and the band. The prisoner, who is carrying a broom, lays the 
broom on the ground and stands at attention. At the first note of the 
National Anthem the sentinel executes the hand salute. At the last note 
of the music the sentinel completes the salute and marches off with his 
prisoner. The prisoner does not salute. 
67 (1) 
c. By soldiers in various attire. 
Scenario: Eight soldiers are standing in line facing the class. When 
the first note of the National Anthem is played each man faces the music 
and renders a courtesy as described below: 
Soldier in fatigue uniform executes hand salute. 
Soldier in baseball uniform removes his cap with right hand and 
places it over left breast. 
Soldier in civilian clothes, covered, removes his hat with his right 
hand and places it over left breast. 
Soldier in civilian clothes, uncovered, stands at attention and sa- 
lutes. (Par. 30k, FM 21-100; Fig. 15, FM 21-50). 
Soldier in service uniform, covered, executes hand salute. 
Soldier in service uniform, uncovered, executes hand salute. 
Soldier, armed with the pistol, executes hand salute. 
Soldier, mounted, executes hand salute. 
The instructor points out: 
That soldiers in uniform, covered or uncovered, salute; that soldiers 
in civilian attire, covered, remove headdress as described above and that 
soldiers in civilian dress, uncovered, execute the hand salute. 
10. COURTESIES RENDERED AT RETREAT. 
a. By squad in ranks. 
b. By soldiers in service uniform and in civilian clothes. 
Whenever or wherever the National Anthem is played or To the 
Colors (standard) is sounded, at the first note thereof all dismounted 
officers and enlisted men present, but not in formation, face the music, 
stand at Attention, and render the prescribed salute, except that at Escort 
of the color or at Retread they will face toward the color or flag. The 
position of salute will be retained until the last note of the music is 
sounded. 
Scenario: The band is situated as in Par. 9a above. 
A squad, standing “at ease,” is facing the class. A noncommissioned 
officer commanding the squad is standing before it. Beside the squad, 
but not in formation, are two soldiers, one in service uniform, the other 
in civilian clothes, covered. 
The bugler sounds retreat. At the first note of retreat the noncom- 
missioned officer commands: “Squad, ATTENTION,” and “Parade, 
REST.” The squad leader then faces the front and executes “parade, 
rest.” The soldiers, out of ranks, who have been conversing informally, 
continue talking. At the last note of retreat the squad leader calls his 
squad to attention, and faces the front. At the first note of the National 
Anthem he executes the hand salute. At the last note of retreat the two 
men out of ranks stop talking and face the post flag. At the first note 
of the National Anthem both of them come to attention. The man in 
68 (1) 
uniform executes the hand salute. The soldier wearing civilian clothes 
removes his hat with his right hand and places it over his left breast. 
At the last note of the National Anthem the squad leader drops his 
hand, faces about and commands: “At EASE.” The soldier in uniform 
out of ranks completes his salute and the man in civilian clothes places 
his hat on his head. They resume their conversation. 
11. SOLDIERS RENDER PROPER COURTESIES WHEN COLORS 
PASS. 
Scenario: The demonstration is arranged in a similar fashion as in 
Par. 9a above, except that the band is withdrawn. The eight men in the 
same dress and with the same equipment are again present. 
The national and regimental colors approach from one flank. As 
the colors arrive within six paces of each individual, he renders the same 
courtesies as are prescribed in Par. 9c for the National Anthem. The 
men hold the salute until the instructor commands: “AT EASE.” 
The instructor explains : 
That the salute terminates when the colors have moved six paces 
beyond the individual. 
12. SOLDIERS IN AUTOMOBILE RENDER PROPER COURTESIES. 
a. At the playing of the National Anthem. 
Scenario: The band is located as indicated in Par. 9a aT^ove. 
An automobile with two occupants approaches from left. When 
the automobile is opposite the center of the class, “ATTENTION” is 
sounded by the band, followed by a few strains of the National Anthem. 
The car is halted. Occupants of the vehicle dismount, face the music and 
salute. When the last note of the music has been played the men complete 
the salute and enter the automobile. 
b. As an officer passes. 
Scenario: The band withdraws; otherwise there is no change in 
the scene. 
An officer approaches from the right. When the officer is within 
twelve paces of the car, the automobile moves slowly forward. The driver 
pays no courtesy to the officer, but the man beside him executes a hand 
salute, which he holds until acknowledged or until the officer is passed. 
69 (1) 
APPLICATION—MILITARY COURTESIES, INDOOR & OUTDOOR 
Instructor (s) 
Fifth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Classroom (for indoor application). 
Bleachers or amphitheater (for outdoor application). 
Text References. Same as 1st Period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. 1 bugler, 2 color bearers, 1 mounted orderly. 
Equipment. 2 tables 
7 chairs 1 horse 
1 pistol and belt 2 baseball gloves 
1 rifle and belt 2 brooms 
1 typewriter several band instruments 
1 car 1 baseball 
sufficient rifles and belts for a platoon. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
APPLICATORY EXERCISE 
Procedure. 
1. The period will actually be an examination by application. 
2. Devote the first hour to indoor courtesies. Select men at random 
to occupy various positions and duties indoors; select others to 
assume such duties as officers, clerks, orderlies, etc. Require the 
class members to render the proper courtesies under v arious 
conditions. Criticize and make corrections where necessary. 
3. Devote the second hour to outdoor courtesies. Select men as in 
the above period of application. Require the class members to 
render proper courtesies under various conditions. Emphasize 
especially the courtesies rendered at Retreat, and at the playing 
of the National Anthem when dressed in various uniforms and 
in various locations. 
4. It is suggested that a part of each of the above periods be devoted 
to actual oral quizzing as well as application by individuals and 
units. 
Note: An additional hour of instruction on discipline may be given 
during an available open hour. It is suggested that the 
material on safeguarding military information and on care- 
lessness which is available in Chapters 7 and 8 FM 21-45 be 
used. 
70 (2) 
PERSONAL HYGIENE AND FIRST AID 
Purpose and Scope. To give such instruction in the essentials of personal 
hygiene, and first aid, as it pertains to the maintenance of health 
and physical efficiency of the individual enlisted man. 
Actual Time Allotted. 5 hours. 
Text References. Field Manual 21-10; FM 21-100; TM 8-220; Training 
Film 8-33, First Aid; Training Film 8-150, First Aid; Training Film 
8-154, Sex Hygiene; Training Film 8-155, Personal Hygiene; FS 
8-7, First Aid; FS 8-6, Venereal Disease Control. 
Methods of Instruction. Conference, Demonstration and Application. 
Minimum Standard. Each man should know : 
a. The importance of personal hygiene, to include the care of the 
skin, hair, nails, mouth and clothing. 
b. The importance of properly fitting shoes and the care of the feet. 
c. The importance of proper dietary habits. 
d. The dangers of venereal disease and their prevention (prophy- 
laxis) . 
e. The proper methods of mess kit sanitation, 
f. How to apply the standard rules of first aid. 
g. How to differentiate between arterial and venous hemorrhage, 
and their control. 
h. How to apply rapidly and correctly improvised and standard 
type tourniquets. 
i. The different kinds of fractures and their first aid treatment. 
j. How to apply the Schafer method of artificial respiration. 
k. The different types of wounds. 
l. The proper handling and application of the first aid packet. 
71 (2) 
PERSONAL HYGIENE AND FIRST AID 
Instructor (s) 
First Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom 
Text References. Par. 104 to 111 inclusive, Chapter 9, Field Manual 
21-10; Par. 115c. Chapter 10, Field Manual 21-10. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Soldier of fine physique to demonstrate an excellent 
example of proper personal hygiene and correct pos- 
ture. 
Equipment. Blackboard, chalk and eraser; chart showing essentials 
of personal hygiene. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline for Conference. The instructor to cover the essentials 
of personal hygiene to include: 
1. Definition, Military Hygiene. 
2. Definition, Personal Hygiene. 
3. Nutrition: adequate diet, dietary habits, constipation. 
4. Dental hygiene; care of the mouth. 
5. Care of the skin, hair, nails, clothing, feet. Importance of proper- 
ly fitted shoes; care of blisters. 
6. Hygiene of the Respiratory Apparatus. Ventilation. Prevention 
of colds. 
7. Care of eyes, ears. 
8. Sleep. 
9. Physical exercise. Weight and health. Correct posture. 
10. Bathing. 
11. Mess kit sanitation. 
12. Monthly physical inspection. 
13. The use of the first aid packet. 
72 (2) 
PERSONAL HYGIENE AND FIRST AID 
(Personal and Sex Hygiene) 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period: One Hour 
Place. Theater. 
Fext References. Par. 78, 79, 80, Chapter 8, Field Manual 21-10; Par. 
250, Chapter 14, Field Manual 21-100; Par. 263, 264, Chapter 5 
Technical Manual 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Movie operator. 
Equipment. Training Film 8-155 (4 reels—36 minutes) ; black 
board; chalk; eraser. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline for Conference. 
1. The first 10 minutes will be taken up with a lecture on sex 
hygiene, stressing the needs for an early prophylaxis and the im- 
portance of reporting symptoms as soon as noted. 
2. Show Training Film 8-155 (86 minutes). (Personal Hygiene.) 
3. Questions, discussion. 
73 (2) 
PERSONAL HYGIENE AND FIRST AID 
(First Aid) 
Instructor (s) 
Third Period: One Hour 
Place. Theater. 
Text Reference. Par. 112 to 119, inclusive, Chapter 10, Field Manual 
21-10. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Movie operator. 
Equipment. Chart showing the standard rules for first aid; Train- 
ing Film 8-33 First Aid (4 reels, running time 33 
minutes); Anatomical Chart Item No. 77490; black- 
board; chalk; eraser. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline for Conference. 
1. The first 15 minutes should be an introduction covering broadly 
the following subjects. 
a. Definition and standard rules for first aid. 
b. Introductory remarks, reference to training film to follow. 
2. The following essentials of first aid should be stressed. 
a. Kinds of wounds and their treatment. 
b. Different kinds of hemQrrhage and their control. 
c. Application of different kinds of tourniquets. 
d. Types of fractures and their first aid treatment. 
e. Transportation of the sick and wounded. 
3. Show Training Film 8-33. 
4. Summary and conclusions as desired Suggest emphasis on the 
importance of first-aid treatment, and that a thorough know- 
ledge of it is expected of the Medical Department soldier. 
74 (2) 
PERSONAL HYGIENE AND FIRST AID 
(First Aid and Sex Hygiene) 
Instructor (s) 
Fourth Period: One Hour 
Place. Theater. 
Text References. Par. 78, 79, 80, Chapter 8, Field Manual 21-10 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Movie operator. 
Equipment. Training Film 8-150 (3 reels—26 minutes), Training 
Film 8-154 (3 reels—26 minutes). 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Procedure. Demonstration. 
Show films to men and bring out important points. Be sure to review 
films before showing them. 
75 (2) 
PERSONAL HYGIENE AND FIRST AID 
(Artificial Respiration) 
Instructor (s) 
Fifth Period: One Hour 
Place: Drill field or gymnasium. 
Text References. Par. 120, 121, 122, Sec. V. Chapter 10, Field Manual 
21-10. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Officer instructor. One demonstration team, consisting 
of 2 men each, for each 12 enlisted men. 
Equipment. Six blankets for each demonstration team. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Procedure. Conference, Demonstration, and Application. 
1. Conference. Indications for artificial respiration. Dangers of 
doing it roughly. Mechanism of the prone pressure method. 
Stress after treatment. (Par. 121-(10)). 
2. Demonstration. Prone pressure (Schafer) method of artificial 
respiration. Include covering of the patient. 
3. Application. Men will apply artificial respiration, the demon- 
strators acting as coaches. 
76 (3) 
EQUIPMENT, CLOTHING AND SHELTER TENT PITCHING 
Purpose and Scope. The purpose of this course is to instruct enlisted men 
in the care of clothing, equipment and quarters; the wearing, pack- 
ing and displaying for inspection of field equipment of dismounted 
personnel; and to train them in the pitching and striking of the 
shelter tent. 
The course includes the wearing of the uniform, care of clothing 
and equipment, marking of equipment, disposition of worn out cloth- 
ing and equipment, preparation and arrangement of beds, foot and 
wall lockers, and indoor and outdoor display of equipment. High 
standards must be illustrated and obtained, and stress laid upon the 
importance of maintaining a high degree of proficiency. 
Actual Time Allotted. 9 hours. 
Text References. 
FM 22-5, Infantry Drill Regulations, paragraphs 145 and 241. FM 
21-15, Equipment, Clothing and Tent Pitching 
Army Regulations 615-40, as changed by Circular 241, Wash., D.C., 
November 21, 1941. FS 8-24 Shelter Tent Pitching. 
Methods of Instruction. Conference, Demonstration, and Application. 
Minimum Standards. Each man must have knowledge of the follow- 
ing information and procedures: 
1. How to wear his uniform correctly, with insignia properly placed. 
2. Be able to properly identify each article of individual equipment, 
and be familiar with the nomenclature of the infantry pack. 
3. How to care for his uniform and equipment, including leather, web 
and metal parts. 
4. The proper method of making beds, and their proper arrangement. 
5. How to arrange the contents of his foot locker and the clothing in 
his wall locker. 
6. The penalty for unlawfully disposing of his clothing or equipment 
and the disposition of worn out articles. 
7. Properly assemble and adjust the infantry pack and to properly 
display individual equipment for inspection, both in the field and 
on the bed. 
8. The different insignia of rank of officers and noncommissioned 
officers. 
9. The standards to be reached in the appearance and condition of 
clothing and equipment. 
10. The unauthorized articles of clothing. 
11. Use of the fatigue uniform, (working suit) 
12. The importance of appearance and conduct while in uniform off the 
military reservation. 
13. Properly pitch and strike the shelter tent in a minimum of time. 
77 (3) 
CARE OF CLOTHING AND EQUIPMENT 
Instructor (s) 
First Period; One Hour 
Place. Classroom, 
Text Reference. FM 21-15, Equipment, Clothing, and Tent Pitching. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One neat, well-groomed soldier to demonstrate the 
standard to be attained. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Procedure. 
1. Suggested outline of Conference: 
a. Care of the uniform and equipment, including leather, web 
and metal parts. 
b. The proper wearing of the uniform and insignia, both on 
and off the military reservation. 
c. Wearing of unauthorized articles of clothing on or off duty. 
d. The different insignia denoting rank and chevrons denoting 
grade. 
e. The purpose of the fatigue uniform. 
f. The importance of proper military bearing. 
g. The disposition of unserviceable clothing and equipment. 
2. Demonstration. Have a well-groomed soldier demonstrate the 
high standard to be attained in the following: 
a. Proper posture (military bearing). 
b. Wearing of the uniform and insignia (cover in detail from 
hat or cap to shoes). 
8. Application. Have each squad leader inspect his squad for 
deficiencies in comparison to the standards just demonstrated. 
Proper steps should be taken to assure correction of defects 
found. 
78 CONFERENCE, DEMONSTRATION AND APPLICATION 
CARE OF CLOTHING AND EQUIPMENT 
(3) 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period: One Hour 
Place. Squad room. 
ARRANGEMENT OF BED, INDIVIDUAL EQUIPMENT, 
WALL LOCKER AND TRUNK LOCKER 
\ undershirts,woolen 
1 DRAWERS. WOOLEN 
3 • SHIRTS, WOOLEN OD 
A- TOWELS, DATN 
5- SHEETS f PILLOW CASES 
6- SUITS. WORKING. CLEAN 
7 ■ UN!FORM-COTTON (WINTER TIME) 
&■ SHIRTS. COTTON O D 
<•> • UNDER SHIRTS. COTTON 
to ■ DRAWERS. COTTON ■ 
1- Mat 
2- Service cap > 
3- overcoat,WO-D 
4 -Raincoat 
5-Uniform,W-O.D. i 
S- .. . C O.D. | 
(summertimeonly)! 
7- Clothes 
8- O’coat. 1 
9- Bag' 
10- heels to 
the front 
11- heels to | 
the Front 
12- Leather belt 
TOILET ARTICLES 
personel articles 
HAHO TOWELS 
I leggings \ 
\ TIE -NANDKERCHIEfsX 
J SOCKS AND COLLARS \ 
BUNK TAG 
i - Edges of blanket and sheet turned under. 
1 - Eight inches of upper, sheet folded back with edge of blanket. 
I - Two INCHES OF UNDER. SHEET SHOWING. 
a - Blanket extra, three folds under pillow. 
5- Pillow with slip opening to right. 
(Courtesy of Military Service Publishing Co.) 
'I'd (d) 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Company commander, squad leaders. 
Equipment. As shown in the above diagrams; 
1. Arrangement of foot locker. 
2. Arrangement of wall locker. 
3. Arrangement of bed. 
4. Proper method of securing pack to end of bed 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Men to have same equipment as the demon- 
strator. 
Procedure. 
1. Hanging pack on the bunk, 
a. Demonstrator will carefully show how the pack should be 
hung on the bed. Suggest web belt completely encircle all 
suspender straps at the level of the mess kit. 
b. Men will now hang their packs on respective bunks. 
c. Those packs improperly hung will be corrected under super- 
vision of the squad instructor. 
2. Arrangement of wall and trunk lockers. 
a. A wall locker and a trunk locker will be arranged by the 
squad instructor, who will explain as he demonstrates. 
b. The men will proceed to carry out the procedures they just 
witnessed, 
3. Inspection. While the men stand beside their bunks the squad 
leaders will look for and correct any errors. 
80 (3) 
CONFERENCE, DEMONSTRATION AND APPLICATION 
CARE OF CLOTHING AND EQUIPMENT 
Instructor (s) 
Third Period: One Hour 
Place. Squad rooms. 
Text References. Same as second period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Company commander, squad leaders 
Equipment. As shown in the above diagrams: 
1. Arrangement of foot locker. 
2. Arrangement of wall locker. 
3. Arrangement of bed. 
4. Proper method of securing pack to end of bed 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Men to have the same equipment as the demon- 
strator. This period to be conducted by squad leaders supervised 
by platoon leaders. 
Suggested Procedure. 
1. Making of bed. 
a. Each squad leader to explain slowly and carefully the steps 
in preparation of a bed, at the same time actually carrying 
out the procedures described. 
b. The men will then make up their beds step-by-step under 
the constant supervision of the squad instructor, 
c. Inspect all beds and have men make necessary corrections 
to bring each to standard. 
81 (3) 
CONFERENCE, DEMONSTRATION AND APPLICATION 
DISPLAY OF INDIVIDUAL EQUIPMENT 
Instructor (s) 
Fourth Period : Two Hours 
Place. Barracks or Training Area. 
Text References. FM 21-15 Equipment, Clothing and Tent Pitching, 
Section 4; FM 22-5, Infantry Drill Regulations, Paragraph 241; 
FM 21-100 Soldier’s Handbook. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Officer instructor, 1 noncommissioned officer or other 
qualified instructor for each group, 1 demonstrator 
for each squad of enlisted men. 
Equipment. Public address system; full field equipment and uni- 
form. (Equipment to include infantry pack and kit, 
medical, privates.) 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Field uniform and full field equipment. 
DEMONSTRATION AND APPLICATION 
PRELIMINARY ARRANGEMENTS.—Prior to the arrival of the 
class the demonstration troops, with packs slung, are arranged in three 
ranks with noncommissioned officers as guide and messenger. The 
public address system is so arranged that the officer instructor can 
control the instruction from a central point. 
PROCEDURE 
1. INTRODUCTION.—The group method of instruction may be used 
in the training of any group, regardless of size or organization, as long 
as the class can hear the instructor and see the demonstrator. It is 
particularly useful in teaching certain basic and technical subjects. 
It provides careful, simultaneous teaching under the direct supervision 
of an instructor and is particularly valuable when there is a lack of 
well-trained instructors. It consists of four distinct steps, as follows: 
a. Explanation of the subject or procedure by the instructor. 
b. Demonstration of the subject or procedure by the instructor or 
his assistant. 
c. Imitation (application) by all undergoing instruction. 
d. Correction of errors by the instructor and his assistants. 
82 (3) 
The group method is excellent for instruction in various subjects 
by the slow-motion or step-by-step procedure. For the purpose of in- 
struction, an operation is broken down into steps. After describing a 
step, the instructor or his assistants demonstrate it, after which the 
class executes it under the supervision of the instructors who correct 
any errors. 
The class may be arranged in a number of ways, depending on the 
particular subject to be taught. The line formation, with demon- 
strators stationed in front of and facing the line, lends itself to this 
particular subject. Four such lines may form a square, or may be 
stationed in depth. The size of the class and the number of demon- 
strators available will influence the choice of formation but the arrange- 
ment should be such that the individuals undergoing instruction can see 
the demonstrators to best advantage. 
Students 
Demonstrators 
Instructor 
Figure 1. A formation for instruction in shelter tent pitching and display of 
equipment 
2. THE DEMONSTRATION.—The group method, as outlined above, 
necessitates considerable preparation on the part of the instructor and 
those concerned with the demonstration of the procedure. Likewise, 
the demonstration of the group method of instruction entails careful 
planning and attention to details. Preparation includes a careful 
study of the subject, complete plans based on the result of such study, 
and finally, repeated rehearsals by all personnel involved in the demon- 
stration. The demonstration should convey to the students the im- 
portance of preparation and planning of instruction and the mechanism 
of the group method of instruction. A standard of excellence must be 
set which they should strive to attain. 
The instructor should review the various methods of instruction 
prior to the beginning of the demonstration. He will call attention to 
the advantages and disadvantages of the group method, and describe 
its mechanism. The practice of breaking a procedure into steps, thus 
simplifying it, is remarked upon. The extent to which this is done would, 
of course, depend upon the intelligence and previous knowledge of 
the group instructed. 
The period of instruction is begun with a demonstration of the 
formation for shelter tents. The demonstration platoon is given the 
proper commands according to paragraph 145, FM 22-5, Infantry 
Drill Regulations. Since normal interval is not sufficient for shelter 
tent pitching, when the command to dress is given, the men may be 
directed to take about six inches additional interval. Another alterna- 
tive would be to have the men take interval in accordance with para- 
graph 126, FM 22-5, Infantry Drill Regulations. After this is done, 
83 rs) 
the correct manner of assembling the men into platoon formation is 
demonstrated. 
Following this, the group method of instruction in shelter tent 
pitching and display of equipment will be demonstrated. The group 
undergoing instruction will be formed in a line by proper commands 
as described above; the demonstrators will take their positions as 
shown in Figure 1. 
The instructor will describe a step, call the demonstrators to at- 
tention and direct them to proceed. When they are finished, they will 
stand at PARADE REST whereupon the group undergoing instruction 
will be called to attention and directed to proceed. The demonstrators 
may assist with the correction of errors. This procedure will be fol- 
lowed in all of the steps. 
3. STEP BY STEP PROCEDURE IN PITCHING THE SHELTER TENT. 
a. Unslinging the equipment and spreading shelter halves. Upon 
direction of the instructor, odd-numbered men mark their position 
with their left heel. The locations marked indicate the positions of the 
front tent poles. Successive pairs of odd and even numbers (numbers 
one and two; numbers three and four; etc.) pitch tents together. 
At the command, “PITCH TENTS,” all men unsling equipment 
and place packs on the ground in front of them, haversacks up and to 
the front, the packs two paces in front of their positions. They open 
packs and remove shelter halves, poles and pins. Each odd-numbered 
man places a tent pin in the ground on the spot which he previously 
marked with his left heel. The men spread the shelter halves on the 
ground which the tent is to occupy, triangle to the rear, buttons to 
the center, even-numbered man’s half on the left. They button the 
shelter halves together. 
b. Adjusting the front tent pole. The odd-numbered man adjusts 
his pole, inserting the pin end through the front eyelets of the tent, and 
then holds the pole upright in position beside the tent pin. The even- 
numbered man pins down the front corners of the tent in line with the 
poles. (During this step one of the assistant instructors takes a post on 
the right flank of the squad and aligns the poles). 
c. Adjusting the front guy rope. The even-numbered man meas- 
ures off on the tent rope the distance from the base of the front tent 
pole to one of the front tent pins and drives the front guy pin this dis- 
tance forward of the front tent pole. He places the loop of the guy rope 
over the front guy pin, runs the other end of the rope through the loops 
of the shelter halves, and ties it with a slip knot at such a length that 
the pole is vertical when the rope is taut. 
d. Adjusting the rear tent pole. Both men proceed to the rear 
of. the tent. The even-numbered man adjusts his rear tent pole through 
(See par. 1) 
84 (3) 
the eyelets in the rear of the tent while the odd-numbered man pins the 
tent corners and the rear triangle, and then drives the rear guy pin two 
and one-half pin lengths from the rear triangle pin. He next adjusts 
the rear guy rope. 
e. Driving the remaining pins. The even-numbered man then 
drives the remaining pin on the left of the shelter tent, and the odd- 
numbered man drives the remaining pin on the right. 
4. REPEATED APPLICATION.—The entire procedure may then be 
repeated. At the command: “PITCH TENTS,” the recruits complete, 
without further commands, the pitching of the tents. 
5. STEP BY STEP PROCEDURE IN DISPLAY OF EQUIPMENT.* 
(See par. 1). 
a. Preparation for display of equipment. 
(1) At the command: “UNSLING EQUIPMENT,” each man 
marks his place in line with his left heel. This is the point at which the 
right rear corner of your equipment is placed when displayed. Unsling 
your equipment, place it on the ground at your feet, haversack to the front, 
the pack one foot in front of your toes. 
(2) At the command: “DISPLAY EQUIPMENT,” open the pack 
and display the equipment in the interval to your left or right in the 
manner described below. 
b. Display of Medical Equipment.— 
(1) Grasp the right medical pouch at the bottom with the right 
hand. Grasp left pouch similarly with left hand. Hold pouches >vaist 
high, buckles of pouches to the front, and suspenders hanging down. 
Then swing the suspender forward and place the pouches on the ground. 
Place your right pouch, its right rear corner, on the heel mark, the 
opening of the pouch to the front, and the buckle on the pouch upper- 
most. The left pouch is placed in a similar manner to the left and on line 
with the bottom of the right pouch. (If the tent is pitched prior to the 
display of equipment, the left rear corner of the left pouch of the even 
numbered man, and the right rear corner of the right pouch of the odd 
numbered man, is on line with the left and right front corner tent pin 
respectively.) 
(2) Grasp the rings of the broad suspender. Pull the broad end 
of the suspender so as to have the suspender rings on line with the 
buckling strap of the pouches, and centered between the pouches. Then 
fold under long suspender extensions on far right and left sides, making 
folds ll/> inches below central neck edge of the broad suspender section. 
Place the round ends of the suspender extensions 21/2 inches under 
* These instructions are applicable when the equipment is displayed and the tent is 
not pitched. If the equipment is displayed in front of the pitched tent, the instruc- 
tions are the same except that the shelter half, tent poles, tent pins, and ropes are 
omitted from the display. 
85 (3) 
DISPLAY OF INDIVIDUAL EQUIPMENT 
MEDICAL DEPARTMENT 
(Revised, December 1941) 
86 (3) 
the foremost inner corners of the left and right pouches. The long 
suspenders properly folded and placed will form a quarter circle at the 
neck or far end of the suspenders. 
(3) Open the left and right pouches. Carry opened flaps 
slightly under the front of the pouches so as to angle them about 30 
degrees upward. Remove litter straps from left pouch, roll them neatly, 
and place them on the left side of the broad section of the suspender. 
Remove the cantle ring straps, roll the cantle and packet straps and 
place them on the right side of the broad section of the suspender. 
(5) Remove the E.M.T, book and pencil from left pouch. Place 
book on the center of flap of the same pouch with the closed edge of 
book to the right or center. Place pencil lengthwise on center of the 
E.M.T. book, point of pencil to the right or center of the display. 
(5) Open the can containing iodine swabs in right pouch. Remove 
bandage scissors and adhesive tape from the same pouch. Place bandage 
scissors on the rear of the flap, with ring end to the right and the cutting 
end to the left and front. Remove cover from adhesive tape and place it 
on the extreme left end of the flap, with circular side down. Place adhesive 
roll on end, on top of the circular part of cover, with the discs of the ad- 
hesive tape roll to the left and right, respectively. 
c. Display of folded shelter half, and blanket with articles upon it. 
(1) Open the roll and, except for the blanket, remove the con- 
tents. Place them on the ground to your rear. Fold in the sides and ends 
of the shelter half toward the center of the blanket. Place the folded 
shelter half and blanket on the ground, centered on and in front of the 
displayed medical equipment, with the ends of the folded shelter half to 
left and right, respectively. 
(2) Spread the raincoat, buttoned, on the ground, the back of 
the raincoat uppermost and the collar end away from you. Fold in the 
sides and sleeves (left and right) so as to obtain a width of 8Vs inches. 
Then fold up the bottom end toward the top (in half, then in half again 
so as to obtain a length of 101/4 inches.) Place the folded raincoat (8i/£"x 
IOI/2") on the right rear corner of the shelter half, flush with the edges, 
the collar toward you and uppermost. 
(8) Spread the undershirt on the ground, the back of the under- 
shirt uppermost. Fold in the sides (left and right) so as to obtain a 
width of eight inches. Then fold the undershirt in half, bringing the 
ends together. Grasp the folded end, carry it toward the collar end far 
enough to obtain a ten-inch length (8"xl0"). Then place the folded under- 
shirt on the left rear corner of the shelter half, flush with the edges, col- 
lar uppermost and toward you. 
(4) Spread the drawers on the ground, the buttons down, waist- 
band to the front. Fold in the sides (left and right) so as to obtain a 
width of 8 inches. Fold up the leg end toward the waistband so as to 
obtain a length of 10 inches. Place the folded drawers on and flush with 
87 (3) 
the sides of the left front corner of the shelter half, with the buttons 
uppermost and the waistband toward you, overlapping the undershirt. 
(5) Fold the handkerchief in half, then in half again bringing 
the ends together. Repeat this procedure forming the handkerchief into 
a square 4x4 inches. Place the folded handkerchief in the center of the 
drawers, folded edges to the left and to the front. 
(6) Fold the tent pole so that the three sections touch each other, 
the pin end section of the pole resting upon and between the two lower 
sections of the pole. Place the pole parallel and adjacent to the underwear, 
with the pin end of the uppermost section of the pole to the front. 
(7) Place a tent pin parallel to the tent pole, one inch to the 
right, with the head of the pin toward you and flush with the rear edge 
of the shelter half. Then align the remaining pins to the right of and 
closely adjacent to the first pin, making sure that the heads of all pins 
are flush with the rear edge of the shelter half. 
(8) Fold the tent rope upon itself so as to obtain a length of six 
inches. Wind a portion of rope around the folds and secure the end. 
Place folded rope lengthwise adjacent to points of the tent pins. 
d. Articles displayed on haversack. 
(1) Fold the attached pack carrier back onto the rear of haver- 
sack, Grasp folded ends and hold the haversack momentarily waist high, 
in front of you, with the back of the haversack toward you. Place the 
haversack on the ground in front of and centered on the shelter half (or 
blanket), with inner side of haversack uppermost and outer flap to the 
front. Pull the rear end of haversack flush against the shelter half. Pull 
the inner haversack flap down and over the outer flap. Place the inner 
flap web strap down in a similar manner. 
(2) Pick up pistol belt with attachments. Remove canteen and 
canteen cup from canteen cover. Place the web belt in front of and 
centered on the shelter half, on top of the coupling strap of the haversack, 
with the female buckle to the left and the male buckle to the right. The 
outer side of the belt should be uppermost. Open the first aid packet 
pouch. Remove the first aid packet, and replace it in the pouch diagonally, 
so that the ring or tab end protrudes from the pouch. The flaps of the 
canteen cover should be open and flat. The first aid packet pouch and 
canteen cover will overlay the shelter half (or blanket). (The canteen 
cover will lie in front of the 5 tent pins and tent rope, bottom of the 
canteen cover adjacent to the tent rope, when the shelter tent is not 
pitched). 
(3) Fold the shoe laces neatly. Place them three inches in from 
the left edge of the haversack and two inches up from the bottom, ends 
of laces to front and rear. 
(4) Fold the face towel lengthwise in half, then in half again, 
bringing the ends together. Place the folded towel on the outer haversack 
flap with the folded edge to the left, and the folded end to the front. The 
folded end of the towel should be flush with the far end of the outer flap. 
88 (3) 
The near end of the towel should be flush with the rear end of the outer 
flap. If the rear end of the towel is too long, fold it under, so that it will 
not extend on to the haversack. 
(5) Place the socks together. Then place them on the ground, 
heels to the left and openings of the socks to the right. Grasp the toes 
of the socks and fold them over to the right making the fold at the center 
of the heels. If the open ends of the socks extend beyond toe ends, fold 
that portion under the toes of the socks and pull the under sock out, so 
as to show one inch at the heel and toe when displayed. Place folded 
socks on the rear end of the towel, with the heels to the right front and 
the rear edge of the socks flush with the rear end of the towel. 
(6) Place the shaving brush on the center of socks with the handle 
of brush toward you, the bristles to the front, and the top of the handle 
flush with the rear center edge of socks. Place the shaving stick one inch 
(1") to the left of the shaving brush, the bottom of the shaving stick 
toward you and flush with the rear edge of the socks. Place the tooth 
powder can in a similar manner to the right of the shaving brush. 
(7) Place the razor one inch below the far edge of the socks, with 
the spacing between ends of razor and the sides of towel equal, and with 
the handle of the razor to the right. Arrange three extra razor blades 
so they can be readily seen by the inspecting officer. 
(8) Place the tooth brush one inch below the razor, bristles toward 
the front and to the left. 
(9) Place the comb one inch below the toothbrush, with broad end 
to the left and the teeth of the comb to the front. 
(10) Place the cake of soap one inch below the comb. 
e. Articles displayed alongside of haversack. 
(1) Place the meat can one inch below the far right corner of the 
haversack. Extend the handle of the meat can so it will pass over the 
far haversack binding strap and about half an inch over the central 
haversack binding strap, with the handle one inch from right side of the 
haversack. Place the meat can lid on the ground, with the inner side 
uppermost, the ring to the front and extended so that it can be easily 
seen. The ring side of the lid should be one inch to the right of the meat 
can handle, and the rear end should be adjacent to the far side of the 
center haversack binding strap. 
(2) Place the knife, fork, and spoon in the meat can, aligning 
them in that order from left to right. Place them so that the handles will 
be toward you and the tips of the handles will be resting on the rear end 
of the meat can. Spacing between the fork and knife and the fork and 
spoon should be equal; the fork should be in the center, and the “U.S.” 
on the knife handle should be uppermost. 
(3) Place the canteen cup, concave side down, three inches to the 
left side of the haversack, the bottom of the cup toward you and aligned 
on the center haversack buckle. 
89 (3) 
(4) Place the canteen, concave side down, with the bottom of the 
canteen toward you, on line with the far left corner of the haversack, 
three inches to the left. 
(5) Place the hand axe along the left side of the outer flap, head 
of the axe toward you, and blade of the axe on the left. 
f. Display of helmet, gas mask, and rations. 
(1) Place the rations in two lines from front to rear, immediately 
adjacent to the front of the outer flap, three cans in each line. 
(2) Place the helmet on line with the near edge of the rations, 
three inches to their right. 
(3) Place the gas mask carrier on line with the near edge of the 
rations, three inches to the left. The opening flap of the carrier folder 
under and the opening to the left. The face piece is removed and is placed 
on the carrier, with lenses to the left and the head-harness to the right. 
(3) 
EQUIPMENT, CLOTHING AND SHELTER TENT PITCHING 
(Shelter tent pitching and display of individual equipment) 
Instructor (s) 
Fifth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Training field 
Text References. FM 22-5, Infantry Drill Regulations, paragraphs 145 
and 146; FM 21-15, Equipment, Clothing and Tent Pitching. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One noncommissioned officer instructor for each group 
of four squads; one demonstrator per squad. 
Equipment. Public address system. Full field equipment including 
infantry pack and kit, medical, privates. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Field uniform. Full field equipment including 
infantry pack and kit, medical, privates. 
Procedure. See 4th Period. 
90 (3) 
EQUIPMENT, CLOTHING AND SHELTER TENT PITCHING 
(Assembling the Infantry Pack) 
Instructor (s) 
Sixth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Training area. 
Text Reference. FM 21-15. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One demonstrator for each squad of enlisted men, with 
noncommissioned officer as assistant instructor. 
Equipment. Individual equipment of the medical soldier. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Individual equipment in his shelter-half. 
(The following was taken from the pamphlet “Shelter Tent Pitching 
and Display of Equipment.” It must be adapted to fit the needs of 
your unit.) 
Demonstration and application. 
During the course of this period, attention should be constantly di- 
rected to the condition of the equipment, and appropriate remarks 
made as to the proper care of individual equipment. 
Preliminary arrangements. In teaching this subject, one of the follow- 
ing arrangements should be used, having one demonstrator for each 
10-20 members of the class. The officer instructor should control 
the instruction by means of a public address system from a central 
location if several of such groups are to be instructed at the same time. 
Figure 1. Some formations suitable for group performance method of instruction. 
91 (3) 
PROCEDURE 
1. INTRODUCTION. The group performance method of instruction 
may be used in the training of any group, regardless of size or organiza- 
tion, as long as the class can hear the instructor and see the demon- 
strator. It is particularly useful in teaching certain basic and technical 
subjects. It provides careful, simultaneous learning under the direct 
supervision of an instructor and is particularly valuable when there is 
a lack of well trained instructors. It consists of four distinct steps, as 
follows: 
a. Explanation of the subject or procedure by the instructor. 
b. Demonstration of the subject or procedure by the instructor or 
his assistants. 
c. Imitation (application) by all undergoing instruction. 
d. Correction of errors by the instructor and his assistants. The 
group performance method is excellent for instruction in various sub- 
jects by the slow-motion or step-by-step procedure. For purposes of 
instruction an operation is broken down into steps. After describing 
a step, the instructor or his assistants demonstrate it, after which the 
class executes it under the supervision of the instructors who correct 
any errors. 
The class may be arranged in a number of ways, depending on the 
particular subject to be taught. Figure 1, illustrates some of these 
formations. The size of the class and the number of demonstrators 
available will influence the choice of formation, but the arrangement 
should be such that the individuals undergoing instruction can see the 
demonstrators to best advantage. 
2. THE DEMONSTRATION. The group performance method of in- 
struction, as outlined above, necessitates considerable preparation on 
the part of the instructor and those concerned with the demonstration 
of the procedure. Likewise, the demonstration of the group perform- 
ance method of instruction entails careful planning and attention to 
details. Preparation includes a careful study of the subject, complete 
plans based on the results of such study, and finally, repeated re- 
hearsals by all personnel involved in the demonstration. The demon- 
stration should convey to the students the importance of preparation 
and planning of instruction and the mechanism of the group per- 
formance method of instruction. A standard of excellence should be set 
which they must strive to attain. 
The instructor should review the various methods of instruction 
prior to the beginning of the demonstration. He will call attention 
to the advantages and disadvantages of the group performance method, 
and describes its mechanism. The practice of breaking a procedure 
into steps, thus simplifying it, is remarked upon. 
lJ2 (3) 
The officer instructor should describe a step, call the demonstrators 
to attention and then direct them to proceed. When they are finished, 
they will stand at parade rest and the group undergoing instruction will 
be called to attention and directed to proceed. The demonstrators may 
assist with the correction of errors. This procedure will be followed in 
all of the steps. 
8. ASSEMBLY AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE MEDICAL SOLDIER’S 
FIELD EQUIPMENT IN STEPS. 
a. Assembling the web pistol belt. The belt is adjusted so that it 
fits loosely around the waist and, when buckled, rests well down over 
the hip bones and below the pit of the abdomen. The belt is put on 
with the male buckle on the right. Then place the belt on the ground 
in front of you, inner side down and male buckle to the right. 
The first aid pouch is attached to the belt by engaging the double 
hook attachment in the 5th and 6th eyelets from the right. The hooks 
are inserted from the under side.. The first aid packet is placed in the 
pouch with the tab or ring down, and the flap is secured. 
The canteen cover is attached in a similar manner in the 5th and 6th 
eyelets from the left. Place the canteen and cup into the canteen cover 
with concave side down and secure the flaps. Place the assembled 
belt on the ground to your right. 
b. Attaching the pack carrier to the haversack. Spread the haver- 
sack on the ground in front of you, inner side down, outer flap and meat 
can pouch to the front. Place the button-holed edge of the pack carrier, 
lettered side of pack carrier up, next to the buttoholed edge of 
the haversack. Insert the free end of the canvas thong which is sus- 
pended from the center of the coupling strap, through the horizontal 
buttonhole of the pack carrier. Lock the thong in place by inserting 
into its end-loop the pack carrier lock strap. Then superimpose the 
buttonholes of the haversack upon the corresponding ones of the pack 
carrier and lace the pack carrier to the haversack by passing the ends 
of the coupling strap through the buttonholes, beginning in the center 
and working to the edges. 
c. To attach hand axe carrier. Pass hand axe carrier underneath 
the meat can pouch and engage the double hook attachment in the eye- 
lets in the flap provided, inserting hooks from the under side. Place 
the hand axe in the carrier and secure the flap. 
d. The mess kit. Place the knife, fork and spoon in the meat can 
and place the lid on the meat can with the ring toward the hinge. Press 
the lid down firmly and fix with the handle. Place the meat can in the 
pouch and button the flap. (As an alternate method, the knife, fork 
and spoon may be carried in the leather receptacles to be found in the 
pockets of the meat can pouch.) 
93 (3) 
e. To pack the haversack. The equipment is turned over, keeping 
the hand axe to the front. Spread the inner flap smoothly over the 
pack carrier. Place the toilet articles wrapped in the hand towel in the 
center of and flush with the upper border of the body of the haversack. 
Place the rations in two horizontal rows of three cans each behind the 
toilet articles. Fold the inner flap of the haversack over and under 
these articles. Then fold the sides of the haversack over the rations 
and toilet articles (which are covered by the inner flap) and pass the 
upper and middle haversack binding straps through the most proximate 
loops on the inner flap and fasten each strap to the buckle opposite it. 
This is done by passing the strap through the opening next to the 
buckle attachment, then over the center bar, and back through the 
opening in the buckle away from the attachment. Pull the straps tight 
and secure them. Lay the inner haversack strap over the toilet articles. 
The haversack is now packed and the carrier is ready for the reception 
of the roll. 
f. To make the roll. 
(1) Shelter half. Spread the shelter half on the ground, tri- 
angular end to the right, with buttons up. Fold the triangular end 
over the body of the shelter half to make an approximate square. Make 
a second fold by carrying the folded edge to the opposite edge. 
(2) The blanket. Fold the blanket twice parallel to its long 
axis so that the blanket is one-fourth its previous width. Make another 
fold in the middle, bringing the ends together. Place the blanket in 
the center of the shelter half, with the folded end toward the buttons 
and the opposite end about ten inches from the far end of the shelter 
half. 
Place the tent pole on the folded end of the blanket (the end of 
the blanket from which the rolling is to begin), and place the five tent 
pins alternately along opposite edges of the blanket with the pointed 
ends toward the center. (An alternate method is to place the pins next 
to and parallel with the pole.) The tent rope is placed on the opposite 
end of the blanket. (If the overcoat is carried on the pack, the rope 
will be kept out and used for purpose of attachment.) 
Fold sides of the shelter half snugly over the blanket. Fold 10 
inches of the far end of the shelter half toward the blanket. Beginning 
at the near end, roll tightly into the folded end of the shelter half, thus 
making an envelope roll. 
g. To assemble the pack. Place the roll in the pack carrier and 
haversack with one end against the bottom of the packed haversack 
and with the seam down. Grasp the lower suspension rings, one in 
each hand, and place the right knee against the bottom of the roll. Pull 
the carrier down and force the roll tightly against the bottom of the 
packed haversack. Without removing the knee, fasten the lower pack 
94 (3) 
carrier binding strap over the roll to the buckle opposite it. The upper 
carrier binding strap is fastened in a similar manner. 
h. To fold and attach the raincoat. Fold the raincoat neatly into 
a rectangle about IOV2 inches long by 8V2 inches wide, with outside 
of raincoat out. This is done by buttoning the raincoat and spreading 
it on the ground with the buttons down. Then fold in the sides and 
sleeves so that the width will be approximately 8V2 inches. Fold it in 
half, bringing the ends together. Now fold it in half again forming 
the rectangle described. Place the raincoat between the inner and outer 
haversack flaps and secure it with the inner haversack strap by fasten- 
ing it tightly to the buckle on the under side of the outer haversack 
flap. Then secure the axe handle by passing the lower haversack bind- 
ing strap over the handle and fastening it to its buckle. 
Engage the snap hooks on the pack suspenders in the suspension 
rings. In order to obtain the maximum benefit from the shoulder loops 
when the pack is suspended on the back, the pack should be so as- 
sembled that when the roll is carried, the length of the assembled haver- 
sack and pack carrier will be at least 27 inches. This may be done by 
placing clothing or equipment ordinarily carried elsewhere in the ration 
space in the haversack so that the assembled pack will be the same 
length as when rations are carried. When this method is used, the pack 
carrier will not be folded under. 
i. To fold and attach the overcoat. Turn the sleeves inside out, 
place the overcoat on the ground, outer side down, coat smooth, collar 
extended, sleeves smooth and extended toward the pockets; move the 
inside flap of the tail under the outside flap about six inches and gather 
the slack in the coat thus caused in one fold along the middle seam, 
tapering toward the collar. Fold the bottom of the front edges of the 
coat about 12 inches toward the center seam, forming an approximate 
parallelogram, the side of which across the coat will be 42 inches. 
Fold the collar end down about 15 inches at the top and roll smoothly 
and tightly toward the tail; turn the tail up to a depth of about 9 inches, 
and roll the entire coat into this pocket. Place the overcoat thus rolled, 
open side of the roll down, on top of the haversack so that the center 
back seam is over the center of the top of the haversack. Secure the 
coat at the top with a shelter half rope. Bind the ends of the overcoat 
down and along the sides of the haversack. Lash the ends of the roll 
to the haversack with the rope, using a half hitch near each end of 
the overcoat and passing the rope around the haversack over the out- 
side flap. 
j. To attach the helmet. Attach and secure the helmet by placing 
the chin strap over the meat can pouch. 
Place the assembled haversack on the ground to the right. 
k. Assembling and adjusting the medical private’s kit. Place the 
suspender on the shoulders with the wide section to the rear. Suspend 
95 (3) 
the pouches by snapping the pouch rings to the front and rear suspender 
on each side. The pouch containing the ammonia bottle is hooked on 
the right side. Hook the snap on the front of the pouch to the ring on 
the front of the opposite pouch. When the conformation of the individ- 
ual requires it, a wider frontal adjustment of the pouches may be ob- 
tained by fastening the snaps on each pouch together, or a cantle ring 
strap may be used. 
One cantle ring strap is used in the rear adjustment of the pouches. 
It is fastened to the rings at the back of each pouch. The equipment is 
properly adjusted when it affords the maximum comfort in use. 
The suspender straps are adjusted so that the pouches will hang 
horizontally about waist high and as far to the front as possible. 
l. To adjust full equipment. The pistol belt is put on first, adjusted 
as described in paragraph 6 a, with the canteen on the left. The medi- 
cal kit is then adjusted as described in paragraph 6 k. If the service 
gas mask is carried, it should be put on in such a way that the carrier 
will be on the left, the buttoned flap to the front, and the shoulder strap 
over the right shoulder. It is suggested that in this case the medical 
pouch on the left be disengaged and suspended in front, from the 
suspenders, thus making room for the gas mask carrier. The assembled 
haversack and pack carrier is then slung by slipping the arms through 
the pack suspenders as through the sleeves of a coat. By means of 
the adjusting buckles on the pack suspenders, raise or lower the load 
on the back until the top of the haversack is on a level with the top 
of the shoulders, so that the pack suspenders from their point of at- 
tachment on the haversack to the shoulders will be horizontal. The 
latter is essential to proper adjustment of the load. 
m. To discard the roll without removing equipment from the body. 
Unsnap the pack suspenders from the suspension rings and snap them 
into the centermost eyelets on top of the pistol belt in the rear. Support 
the bottom of the pack with the left hand, and with the right hand 
grasp the coupling strap at its middle and withdraw it, first from one 
side and then from the other. Pull down on the roll with both hands 
and remove it. When the roll has been removed, lace the coupling strap 
through the buttonholes along the upper edge of the carrier. 
96 (4) 
INDIVIDUAL DEFENSE AGAINST CHEMICAL ATTACK. 
Purpose and Scope. The purpose of this instruction is to instruct Medical 
Department enlisted men in the means and methods of individual 
defense against enemy chemical attacks, thereby minimizing casual- 
ties and preventing undue interruption to the care, treatment and 
transportation of the sick and wounded. It is necessary for the 
Medical Officer to impress upon the Medical Department enlisted 
men the realization that gas poisoning, whatever the chemical irritant 
used, does not in itself cause a permanent poisoning of the patient or 
chronic impairment of his health. It is necessary to insist upon this 
truth lest the patient be allowed to develop a morbid dread, and drift 
into neurasthenia and general debility. The scope of the instruction 
includes: 
The general problems of protection, and general methods and 
measures for obtaining adequate protection. 
The general properties of chemical agents, the physiological ef- 
fects and identification. 
The general effects of weather and terrain, and the difference 
between lethal and irritant agents. 
Actual Time Alloted. 6 hours. 
Text References. Field Manual 21-40; FM 21-45; Technical Manual 
8-285; Technical Manual 8-220; Technical Manual 3-215; Technical 
Manual 3-205; Technical Manual 3-305; Training Circular No. 3, W.D., 
Washington, D.C., January 8, 1942; Film Strip 3-1, “Chemical Agents 
and First Aid”; Film Strip 3-3, “Protection and Protective Equip- 
ment” ; Film Strip 3-6, “Nomenclature and Parts of Miscellaneous Gas 
Masks”; Film Strip 3-7, “Principles of Gas Proofing for Shelters”; 
Film Strip 3-2, “Effects of Weather, Terrain, Weapons and Tactics”; 
Film Strip 3-4; “Nomenclature and Air Flow System of the Standard 
Service Gas Mask”; Film Strip 3-5, “Nomenclature and Air Flow 
System of the Standard Training Gas Mask”; Training Film 8-304, 
“First Aid for Chemical Casualties”; Training Film 3-216, “Adjust- 
ment of the Service Gas Mask”; Training Film 3-217, “Inspection of 
the Service Gas Mask,” 
Methods of Instruction. Conference, Demonstration, and Application. 
Standard of Proficiency. The individual enlisted man to be proficient 
in the following essentials of individual defense against chemical 
attack. 
(1) Chemical Agents. 
(a) Ability to identify a chemical agent in the field by odor, 
color, and physical state. 
(b) Knowledge of: 
1. Persistency of the principal agents. 
97 (4) 
2. Effect produced on the body upon contact with the agent. 
3. Protection required against all classes of agents. 
4. Methods of decontaminating areas and equipment. 
(2) First Aid Treatment of Gas Casualties. 
(a) Recognition of the effects of agents. 
(b) Application of remedial measures pending medical aid. 
(3) Protection. Gas Mask, 
(a) Proficiency in gas mask drill. 
(b) Knowledge of kind and degree of protection afforded by 
the mask, 
(c) Knowledge of when to use and remove the gas mask. 
(d) Ability to take proper care of gas mask. 
98 (4) 
INDIVIDUAL DEFENSE AGAINST CHEMICAL ATTACK. 
(Orientation and Characteristics of Irritant Smokes and Lacrimators) 
Instructor (s) 
First Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Sections II, III, and VI, FM 21-40; Chapter 3, TM 
3-215; Section IV, and V, TM 8-285; Par.360-1, TM 8-220; TM 3-305. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Chart (See page 9 and 10, FM 21-40). Set, Gas Ident- 
ification,. Instructional. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline. 
1. Conference. 
a. Discuss (1) general properties of chemical agents, their 
general physiological effects and identification, (2) the general 
effect of weather and terrain, and (3) the difference between 
lethal and irritant agents, 
b. Discuss (1) characteristics of lacrimators, (2) their physio- 
logical effect, (3) persistency, and (4) general tactical use. 
(5) Explain method of field identification, 
c. Discuss (1) characteristics of irritant smokes, (2) their phys- 
iological effect, (3) peristency, and (4) general tactical use. 
(5) Explain method of field identification. 
2. Practical Exercise. 
a. Pass samples of DM and CN around the group, requiring the 
various members to describe the odor and identify the agent. 
(NOTE: Pass the DM around first as it has the faintest odor. 
The men MUST be given the basic rules for identification by 
odor (see par. 254, TM 8-220) before starting the practical ex- 
ercise.) 
99 (4) 
INDIVIDUAL DEFENSE AGAINST CHEMICAL ATTACK 
(Characteristics of Lung Irritants) 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Section II, FM 21-40; Section II, TM 8-285; Par. 362 
TM 8-220; Par. 139, TM 3-215. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Chart. (See page 6, FM 21-40). Set, Identification, 
Instructional. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline. 
1. Conference. 
Discuss (1) characteristics of lung irritants, (2) their physio- 
logical effect, (3) persistency, (4) general tactical use, (5) first 
aid treatment, and (6) protection. (7) Explain method of iden- 
tification in the field. 
(NOTE: Bring out the fact there is a latent period before the 
onset of symptoms. Know Sec. II, TM 8-285 before starting 
your instruction.) 
2. Practical Exercise. 
Pass around samples of PS and CG, in the above order since 
the odor of PS is fainter than that of CG, requiring various 
members to describe the odor and identify the agent. 
(NOTE: The men must be again given the basic rules for the 
identification by odor before starting the practical exercise.) 
100 (4) 
INDIVIDUAL DEFENSE AGAINST CHEMICAL ATTACK. 
(Characteristics of Vesicants) 
Instructor (s) 
Third Period; One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Sections II and VI, FM 21-40; Sec. Ill, TM 8-285 
Par. 363 and 383, TM 8-220; Par. 142-4, TM 3-215. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Chart (See page 7, FM 21-40). Set, Gas Identification, 
Instructional. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline. 
1. Conference. 
Discuss (1) characteristics of vesicants (2) their physio- 
logical effect, (3) persistency, (4) general tactical use, and (5) 
means of protection. (6) Explain the method of identification 
in the field. 
(NOTE: Emphasize the necessity for all medical personnel ap- 
plying to themselves all measures of protection possible in order 
that they themselves will not become casualties. Remember that 
exposures to low concentrations of vesicants is cumulative.) 
2. Practical Exercise. 
Pass samples of Lewisite (M-l) and Mustard (HS) around 
the group, and in the above order since the odor of M-l is 
fainter than that of HS, requiring the members to describe 
the odor and identify the agent, 
(NOTE: Then men must again be given the basic rules for iden- 
tification by odor.) 
101 (4) 
INDIVIDUAL DEFENSE AGAINST CHEMICAL ATTACK. 
(Individual Protection and Gas Mask Drill.) 
Instructor(s) 
Fourth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom or field. 
Text References. Sec. IV and V, FM 21-40; TM 3-205; Chap. VI, FM 
21-45. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Set, 16 Colored Drawings, Chemical Warfare Material, 
with binder rack. 
Transportation. None, 
Individual Equipment. Service Gas Mask. 
(Mask to be issued and fitted prior to class.) 
Suggested Outline. 
1. Conference. 
a. Discuss (1) individual protection, (2) types of gas masks, 
(3) protective clothing, 
b. Describe the various parts and functions of the service mask. 
Conclude with questions on the important points discussed. 
2. Practical Exercise. 
Have the members of your group sling and adjust masks. 
Check fit and adjustment of each individual’s mask, taking care 
that the head harness straps are not too tight. Follow the pro- 
cedure of Sec. V, FM 21-40. Practice adjusting mask until the 
men can adjust same readily and accurately. 
102 (4) 
INDIVIDUAL DEFENSE AGAINST CHEMICAL ATTACK. 
(Gas Chamber Instruction) 
Instructor (s) 
Fifth Period: One Hour 
Place. Gas Chamber. 
Text References. FM 21-40, Section XI; TM 3-305. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel, a. One officer instructor. 
b. All unit instructors. 
Equipment, a. P.A. System. 
b. Gas masks, training. 
c. CN capsules, 
d. Heater, CN capsule. 
e. Mask, gas, diaphragm. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Mask, gas, training. 
Procedure. The purpose of this period is to prove to the men that 
the gas mask does provide adequate protection for those agents affect- 
ing the eyes and the respiratory tract. 
Instructor’s Outline. 
1. Be sure to study paragraphs 32 and 33, FM 21-40 in preparation for 
this period. 
2. To prove to the individual that his mask does provide adequate 
protection, a second exercise is conducted. This exercise is carried 
out in the same manner as the first with the following exception: 
Prior to leaving the gas chamber, members of the group are in- 
dividually directed to remove their masks and then pass from the 
room. The effect of the lacrimator, when the mask has been re- 
moved, clearly demonstrates that the mask has provided protection. 
3. Each company to execute Open Ranks, MARCH. 
4. The company is given the command GAS and immediately adjust 
their masks. The instructor and his assistants personally check the 
fit of each mask. The company then moves off the field at ROUTE 
STEP to the gas chamber. After passing through the gas chamber 
they return to their position where they are checked by the in- 
structor and his assistants for lacrimation. Masks are then 
removed. 
As each company moves off the field the remaining companies 
move into position. 
As the company returns to the field it is again given the com- 
mand GAS and having adjusted their masks moves off to the gas 
chamber. When in the gas chamber the instructor there has each 
man remove his mask and leave the chamber. All return to their 
position on the field. 
After all are through the chamber, conclude the period with 
instruction on first aid for lacrimators and answering questions. 
103 INDIVIDUAL DEFENSE AGAINST CHEMICAL ATTACK. 
(4) 
Practical Exercise 
Instructor (s) 
Sixth Period: One Hour 
Place: Field. (Should be fairly well isolated so that the tear gas will 
not interfere with traffic or other training.) 
Text Reference: TM 3-305 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel; Division Chemical Warfare Officer (Consultant and 
Supervisor) All Unit Instructors. 
Equipment: Diaphragm gas masks for Instructors. CN Candles 
or grenades. 
Transportation; Use of transportation dependant upon distance 
to the field where the exercise is to be held. 
Individual Equipment. Service Gas Mask. 
Suggested Outline. 
This hour may be worked out in any one of the three methods 
suggested below. 
1. Practical Exercise. 
a. Follow the general outline of Exercise No. 7, Employment of Gas 
in Harassing Fire, paragraph 20, TM 3-305 adapting it to a medi- 
cal installation, such as a battalion aid station, a collecting sta- 
tion, etc., or to the operation of a litter shuttle. 
b. If Exercise (a) is not feasible then the men may be taken on a 
practice march and at several points where brush or trees skirt 
the road or route of march have a detail hidden. This detail to set 
off the candles or grenades, on the upwind side of the approaching 
column, just in time for the gas from the last installation to reach 
the route as the head of the column approaches. 
Wind 
o 
CN Candle or Grenade 
Head of Column 
Rear of Column 
The CN candles or grenades to be set off successively in the order 
numbered in the diagram. The number used to be worked out by 
the Division Chemical Officer, 
c. If neither Exercise (a) or (b) is feasible then take the men on a 
march as in (b), but release the gas on the column by meeting the 
column with a car, passing the column on the upwind side. Have 
a CN candle or grenade wired to a pole extending out to the rear 
of the car. Ignite the candle or grenade just before meeting the 
column. Repeat at least twice on the march. 
104 (5) 
INDIVIDUAL DEFENSE AGAINST AIR, PARACHUTE AND 
MECHANIZED ATTACK 
Purpose and Scope. The purpose of this course is to train Medical De- 
partment enlisted men in individual and unit protection against hostile 
low-flying aircraft, and mechanized attacks; while in camp, on the 
march and during combat. 
Actual Time Alloted. 5 hours. 
Text References. FM 21-45; FM 25-10; Section 5, chapter 10, Section 
4, chapter 15, and 16, FM 100-5; Training Circular No. 10, War De- 
partment, 1940, “Employment of Motorized Divisions”; Training Cir- 
cular, No. 31, War Department, 1941, “Employment of Larger Armor- 
ed Units”; Training Films 5-145 “Armored Combat Vehicles”; 5-146 
“Means of anti-mechanized defense”; 5-147 “Anti-tank mine Ml”, 
5-148 “Anti-tank obstacles”; 5-149 “Road blocks”; 7-109 “Defense 
of Infantry Columns against attack aviation”; 7-110 “Defense of 
Infantry Areas against attack aviation”; Film Strip 4-2, “Identifi- 
cation of Aircraft”; TF 7-35, “Infantry Hasty Field Fortifications.” 
Standard of Proficiency. Each man must be able to: 
1. Antiaircraft security. 
a. Identify the various warning signals. 
b. Take proper concealment. 
c. Properly disperse when warning signals are given. 
d. Know the formations used by hostile aircraft when attack- 
ing troops in column. 
e. Take the proper protection against hostile machine guns 
and bombs. 
f. Appreciate the importance of immediate use of the gas mask 
when attacked by hostile aircraft. 
g. Efficiently render proper protection to casualties prior to 
being removed from the field of battle, during evacuation to 
aid stations and while at the aid stations. 
h. Protect ambulances during evacuation. 
2. Antimechanized defense. 
a. To identify the various warning systems. 
b. Utilize localities which combine both obstacles and cover 
for protection. 
c. Identify vulnerable areas of known hostile mechanized ve- 
hicles. 
d. Identify friendly and hostile combat vehicles. 
e. Be indoctrinated with confidence as to the power and ca- 
pacity of available weapons and means to combat hostile mecha- 
nized attack. 
f. Identify natural and artificial obstacles. 
g. Know the passive measures that are taken to protect indi- 
viduals and units against hostile mechanized attacks. 
105 (5) 
CONFERENCE—INDIVIDUAL DEFENSE AGAINST AIR, 
PARACHUTE AND MECHANIZED ATTACK 
(Antiaircraft Defense) 
Instructor (s) 
First Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Chap. IV, FM 21-45; Par. 233-273, Section V, chapter 
10, Section IV, chapter 15, and chapter 16, FM 100-5; Training Film 
7-110, “Defense of Infantry Areas Against Attack Aviation” (running 
time, 7 minutes) ; Training Film 7-109 “Defense of Infantry Columns 
Against Attack Aviation”. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Training Film 7-109 (2 reels—running time, 18 min- 
utes) ; Training Film 7-110, (1 reel — running time, 7 
minutes) ; Chart to show breakdown of measures em- 
ployed for individual defense against: 
Aircraft 
Mechanized units 
Make charts simple as possible with lettering large 
enough so that all words are clearly visible. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. 
1. Orient the class to the problem of individual defense measures. 
2. Types of combat airplanes. 
3. Active measures of antiaircraft defense. (Give relatively little 
time.) Mention should be made of active measures, such as: 
a. Fire power; b. Attack and bombardment aviation. Show 
Training Film 7-110, and Training Film 7-109. 
4. Passive Measures (important). Use of: a. Warning signals, 
b. Concealment, c. Cover and immobility, d. Dispersion, e. Ne- 
cessity of speed in moving medical units. 
Where large medical installations are concerned, such as clearing 
stations or hospitals, individual defense measures are assumed by 
collective action means. These collective actions means are: dis- 
playing large Geneva Crosses and keeping away from legitimate 
military targets. 
106 (5) 
CONFERENCE—PROTECTION AGAINST MECHANIZED ATTACK 
(Antimechanized Defense) 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Chap. V, FM 21-45; Paragraphs 250-254, inclusive, 
Section V, chapter 10, Section IV, chapters 15 and 16, Field Manual 
100-5; FS 4-2; “Identification of Aircraft.” 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Chart to show breakdown of measures employed for 
individual defense against: 
1. Aircraft. 
2. Mechanized units. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil 
Suggested Outline for Conference. 
1. Definition—Mechanization. Explain: a mechanized unit; an 
armored force; antimechanized defense; antitank weapons. 
2. Defense measures: Warning system, weapons, obstacles. 
a. Warning system. It includes the intelligence and communi- 
cation systems which are completely co- 
ordinated. 
b. Weapons. 
1. Antitank measures. 
a. Antitank guns. 
b. Antitank mines. 
2. Chemical agents. 
a. Air bombs. 
b. Spray. 
c. Artillery. 
d. Chemical mines. 
e. Chemical mortars. 
3. Artillery. 
4. Antiaircraft Artillery. 
5. Combat aviation. 
107 (5) 
c. Obstacles. 
1. Natural. 
a. Buildings and walls. 
b. Water. 
c. Lakes. 
d. Marshes. 
e. Mountains. 
2. Artificial obstacles. 
a. Mine fields. 
b. Antitank ditches. 
c. Post obstacles. 
d. Barricades. 
e. Demolitions. 
3. Training applicable to all: 
a. Troops must be taught to use localities which combine both 
obstacles and cover for protection. 
b. All troops must be instructed as to the vulnerable areas of 
known hostile mechanized vehicles. 
c. All troops must be trained to differentiate between the ap- 
pearance of enemy and friendly combat vehicles. 
d. Every soldier must be indoctrinated with confidence in the 
power and capacity of available weapons and means to combat 
hostile attack. 
e. Establishment of all types of barriers and obstacles. 
f. Probable locations of antimechanized weapons for defense 
against mechanized attack. 
108 (5) 
CONFERENCE AND APPLICATION—INDIVIDUAL DEFENSE 
AGAINST AIR ATTACK 
(Antiaircraft Defense) 
Instructor (s) 
Third Period: One Hour 
Place. Roads. 
Text References. Chap. IV, FM 21-45 ; Paragraphs 261 to 273, inclusive, 
Field Manual 100-5- Otherwise same as Second Period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Gas masks. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Gas mask for each man. 
Procedure. Units are marched along roads and halted. The in- 
structor explains briefly and reviews the formation used by hostile 
aircraft in attacking troops in bivouac and on roads; and the defense 
measures used to protect the troops against attack. After the explana- 
tion, the instructor has the troops quickly apply gas masks and dis-> 
perse and use all available concealment. The dispersion is initiated on 
a blast of the instructor’s whistle. 
The instructors then point out all errors. The action is then repeat- 
ed. Particular attention should be given to the protection afforded by 
natural means against machine gun fire, bombs and mustard gas. 
109 (5) 
CONFERENCE AND APPLICATION—INDIVIDUAL DEFENSE 
AGAINST AIR ATTACK 
(Antiaircraft Defense) 
Instructor (s) 
Fourth Period: One Hour 
Place. Roads. 
Text References. Chap. IV, FM 21-45; Paragraphs 261-273, inclusive, 
Field Manual 100-5; FS 4-2 “Identification of Aircraft.” 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Gas masks. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Gas mask for each man. 
Procedure. Same as the third period, using an area where the terrain 
features are different than that used for the previous period of 
practical application. 
110 (5) 
CONFERENCE AND DEMONSTRATION—INDIVIDUAL DEFENSE 
AGAINST MECHANIZED ATTACK 
(Antimechanized Defense) 
Instructor (s) 
Fifth Period: One Hour 
Place. Roads and woods. 
Text References. Chap. V, FM 21-45; Paragraphs 250 to 254, inclusive, 
Field Manual 100-5; TF 11-204, Safeguarding Military Information; 
TF 11-225, Interrogation of Prisoners, 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Gas masks. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Gas mask for each man. 
Procedure. The units will be marched to a previously recon- 
noitered area where the instructor will explain and review briefly all 
antimechanized means, particulaly natural obstacles. He will then have 
the troops disperse and use quickly the available means for their pro- 
tection. The dispersion will be initiated on a blast of the instructor’s 
whistle. All errors will then be pointed out by the instructor. The gas 
mask should be applied during the period of dispersion. Particular at- 
tention should be given to areas not suited for mechanized attack and 
their probable use for medical department installations, especially aid 
and collecting stations. 
Important features of terrain which would likely be used for 
mechanized attacks should be pointed out and explained to the unit. 
Note—This period requires intelligent planning and preparation on 
the part of the instructor. (6) 
INTERIOR GUARD 
Purpose and Scope. The purpose of the instruction in interior guard is 
to provide training of enlisted men so that they may be detailed to 
provide safety and security of public property and buildings within 
the confines of the military reservation, to preserve order and en- 
force police regulations. It will include practical knowledge of the 
duties of a sentry on interior guard duty, orders, formations and 
special guard. 
Actual time allotted. 3 hours. 
Text References. FM 26-5, Interior Guard Duty; Army Regulations GOO- 
25 and Army Regulations 600-30. 
Methods of Instruction. Conference, demonstration, application and 
examination. 
Minimum standards. Each enlisted man must have the following know- 
ledge : 
a. Be able to serve efficiently as a member of the guard. 
b. Have a sense of the responsibility and serious nature of guard 
duty. 
c. Know how to turn out prisoners with the guard. 
d. Be able to post reliefs. 
e. Be competent to serve as a sentry. 
f. Know the general orders and be able to repeat them. (FM 26-5, 
paragraph 26.) 
g. Be familiar with the duties of special guards. 
h. Be familiar with informal guard mounting. 
i. . Know the different classes of prisoners. 
112 (6) 
INTERIOR GUARD DUTY 
Instructor (s) 
First Period: One Hour 
Place. Bleachers on drill field. 
Text References. Pages 1 to 19, inclusive, FM 26-5; Army Regulations 
600-25; Army Regulations 600-30. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. 4 officers; 4 sergeants; 6 corporals; 20 enlisted men (all 
armed with rifle or pistol). Several men in working 
suits to represent prisoners of the guard. 
Equipment. Instructional chart for conference—see page 2, Field 
Manual 26-5. Mimeographed copies of general orders 
for sentinels (these are to be distributed to each en- 
listed man). 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Garrison uniform. 
Procedure. Conference and Demonstration. 
1. Conference. Twenty-five minute lecture to cover the essential 
features of interior guard duty. Only brief description of each 
heading can be given. A suggested outline of conference is shown 
below: 
a. Interior Guard Duty—General. 
(1) Purpose. 
(2) Definitions. 
(3) How provided. 
(4) Classification. 
(a) Main Guard. 
(b) Special Guard. 
Stable 
Park 
Herd 
Train 
Boat 
Other guard for specific purpose. 
(c) Prisoner Guards. 
(5) Composition. 
(6) General system. 
(a) System of patrols. 
113 (6) 
(b) Use of military police. (See Volume IX, BFM or FM 
29-5 when issued.) 
b. The Main Guard. 
(1) Composition. 
(2) Strength. 
(3) Patrol element. 
(4) Reserve element. 
c. Duties of Personnel. 
(1) Commanding officer—briefly. 
(2) Officer of the Day—briefly. 
(3) Commander of the guard. 
(4) Sergeant of the guard. 
(5) Corporal of the guard. 
(6) Buglers of the guard. 
(7) Privates of the guard. 
(8) Color sentinels. 
d. Orders. 
(1) Classes. 
(2) General. 
Note. Distribute mimeographs containing copies of general orders 
to each man. Require them to be memorized before next class 
in interior guard duty. 
2. Demonstration. Remaining twenty-five minutes of period 
there should be a well-rehearsed demonstration combined with ex- 
planatory remarks by the instructor. 
a. Informal Guard. 
(1) Point out to the men the various members of the guard 
such as Officer of the Day, Commander of the Guard, Ser- 
geant of the Guard, Corporal of the Guard, etc. 
(2) Mounting the Guard. 
(a) Purpose. 
(b) Inspection. 
b. To Turn Out Prisoners. An area representing the guard room 
is indicated on the ground. The men representing prisoners are 
then turned out in proper manner (see paragraph 23, FM 26-5). 
The prisoners are returned to the guard house. 
c. To Post Reliefs—Dismounted. See (paragraph 24, FM 26-5). 
The area under guard should be outlined on the ground in front 
of the bleachers. 
3. Questions. If any time remains, questions by the men will be 
answered. 
114 (6) 
INTERIOR GUARD DUTY 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period: Two Hours 
Place. Bleachers on drill field. 
Text References. Pages 20 to 31, inclusive, FM 26-5; AR 600-25; AR 
600-30. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All available officer and noncommissioned officer in- 
structors familiar with interior guard duty. 
Equipment. Arms sufficient for each guard. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Garrison uniform; pencil; sheet of paper for 
each soldier; lap board; arms (during application only if available). 
Procedure. Conference, Examination and Application. 
1. Conference. Ten minute short review of subjects covered during 
first hour. 
a. Duties of sentries. 
b. Orders. Discuss the regulations pertaining to orders. 
2. Examination. Fifteen minutes. Each man to write out on a piece 
of paper “The General Orders,” numbered and in proper sequence. 
The papers will then be collected by the unit instructor. 
3. Application. With areas designated for each platoon, sentries 
will be designated as members of the guards. These sentinels will 
be posted and later reliefs will be posted. 
Note. Soldiers who are required to perform guard duty should be 
given further instruction and application during an available 
open hour period. 
115 (7) 
DISMOUNTED DRILL 
Purpose and Scope. 
Infantry Drill. The purpose of the instruction in infantry drill 
shall be to so train the individual enlisted man as a part of a command 
that the commanding officer thereof will be able to: 
a. Move his command from one place to another in an orderly 
manner and provide simple formations from which dispositions 
for combat service may readily be assumed. 
b. Aid in disciplinary training by instilling habits of precision 
and response to the leader’s orders. 
c. Provide a means, through ceremonies, of enhancing the mo- 
rale of troops, developing the spirit of cohesion, and giving in- 
teresting spectacles to the public. 
d. Give junior officers and noncommissioned officers practice 
in commanding troops. 
The drill as provided by Infantry Drill Regulations, Field Manual 22-5, 
should be adapted in so far as necessary to meet the needs of medical units. 
It should be given as the first period in the morning if reasonably practic- 
able to do so. Drill requires an alert mind and prompt physical response. 
Paragraph 1, Field Manual 22-5, should be read and thoroughly un- 
derstood by all drill instructors. 
The drill instruction should include: 
a. General knowledge of drill—definitions, fundamentals, pur- 
poses, adaptations. 
b. The school of the soldier without arms. 
c. Positions. 
d. Squad, platoon and company, battalion and regiment. 
e. Manual of the guidon (for certain individuals). 
f. Ceremonies. 
g. Inspections. 
Actual Time Allotted. 29 hours. 
Text References. FM 22-5, “Infantry Drill Regulations ” ; Training Film 
7-143 “Infantry Drill, The Squad’’; Training Film 7-144, “Infantry 
Drill, the Platoon’’; Training Film 7-248, “Instruction of the Soldier, 
Dismounted, Without Arms—Positions and Facings”; Training 
Film 7-249, “Instruction of the soldier, dismounted,—without arms 
—Steps in Marching.” 
Method of Instruction. Explanation, Demonstration, Application, cor- 
rection of errors and discussion: 
Instruction in drill will in the majority of cases be given by 
the group method (keeping groups during basic drill as small as 
practicable) and conducted so as to obtain maximum application 
116 (7) 
by the soldier. Command exercises and cadence drill should be 
used as soon as possible. 
Drill instructors must explain clearly and demonstrate correctly 
each movement before the soldier is required to execute it. All er- 
rors by the soldier should be corrected immediately in an imper- 
sonal and instructive manner. The men should be required to study 
the Infantry Drill Regulations. Discussion of drill among the men 
should be encouraged. Early morning hours should be used when- 
ever practicable to do so. Special classes and instruction must be 
provided for soldiers who obviously need extra training in drill. 
The rate of progress of an individual at drill is determined by the 
extent of his mental and physical coordination. The considerable num- 
ber whose progress will seem laggard will be helped by movements 
executed “by the numbers” while halted, and “slow quick time” while in 
movement. Where this practice is accompanied by careful attention to 
the individual by the instructor the men who are slow to learn can be 
assisted. 
Standard of Proficiency. Each soldier to: 
a. Know all basic definitions of drill. 
b. Execute hand salute correctly and at proper occasions. 
c. Know and execute all positions required of the soldier with- 
out arms. 
d. Know and execute all steps and marchings required of the 
individual soldier. 
e. Know and execute all movements of the squad without arms. 
f. Know and execute all movements of the platoon without 
arms. • 
g. Know and execute all movements of the company without 
arms. 
h. Have general knowledge of formations as a battalion and 
regiment (pages 118 to 132, Infantry Drill Regulations, Field 
Manual 22-5). Special instruction should be given to poten- 
tial noncommissioned officer and officer candidates, or to 
enlisted men acting in such capacities. 
i. Have general knowledge of ceremonies to include (pages 132 
to 160, and pages 197 to 200, Field Manual 22-5) : 
1. Reviews. 
2. Parades. 
3. Inspections, 
4. Ceremonial parades (special), (pages 197 to 200, Field 
Manual 22-5). 
117 (?) 
Note. Battalion ceremonial parade should begin the second week, and 
be regularly scheduled each week thereafter until regimental parades 
begin. When these parades interfere with scheduled drill instruction, 
adequate rehearsal time must be provided to prepare for the parade. 
This time may be taken from the regularly scheduled drill but open 
time, if available, should be used. 
118 (7) 
DISMOUNTED DRILL 
(The Soldier Without Arms) 
Instructor (s) 
Rainy Day Period; One Hour 
(Not included in total hours—use when desired or necessary.) 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Paragraphs 1 to 32, inclusive, Field Manual 22-5, In- 
fantry Drill Regulations. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Officer instructor and all available noncommissioned 
officer assistants. 
Equipment. Blackboard; chalk; erasers. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Garrison uniform. 
Procedure. Conference, Demonstration, Quiz and Discussion. This 
time is allotted to the school of the soldier. 
1. Introductory remarks explaining purpose of period. 
a. Purpose of drill. 
b. Definitions. 
(1) Alinement. 
(2) Base. 
(3) Center. 
(4) Column. 
(5) Depth. 
(6) Distance. 
(7) Double time. 
(8) Element. 
(9) File. 
(10) Flank. 
(11) Formation. 
(12) Front. 
(13) Guide. 
(14) Head. 
(15) Interval. 
(16) Left. 
(17) Line. 
(18) Mass formation. 
(19) Pace. 
(20) Piece. 
(21) Quick time. 
(22) Rank. 
(23) Right. 
(24) Step. 
c. Method of giving commands. 
d. Methods of giving instruction. 
2. Define position of a soldier at attention. 
3. Define positions. 
4. Define various steps and marchings. 
5. Discuss lengths of steps and cadence. 
6. Discuss fully the “cadence system” of teaching drill. 
Note. Various members of the class should be quizzed orally by ques- 
tions based on the above principles of drill. Discussion by the class 
should be encouraged. 
119 (7) 
DISMOUNTED DRILL 
(The Soldier Without Arms) 
Instructor (s) 
First Period: One Hour 
Place. Drill field and Theater. 
Text References. Chapter 1 and 2, FM 22-5 ; Training Film 7-248. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One noncommissioned officer instructor for every 20 
men or fraction thereof; one officer instructor for each 
platoon; four officer instructors for each company. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Garrison or field uniform as prescribed. 
Procedure. Conference and Demonstration. 
1. Orientation and Organization. Sufficient latitude in departure 
from the consecutive steps in drill must be taken during the first 
period to facilitate movement of the unit from one place to an- 
other in an orderly manner, such as: 
a. Formation and organization of the company, platoon and 
squad. 
b. Responsibility of acting unit leaders. 
c. Platoon and company formations as follows: 
(1) Explain and demonstrate what is meant by right and left, 
forward MARCH, and HALT, right (left) FACE. 
(2) Explain, using three demonstrators, what is meant by 
column right and column left. 
(3) Explain and demonstrate: Normal interval, FALL IN, 
FALL OUT, DISMISSED. 
(4) Report of absentees, position of platoon sergeant, guide 
and squad leaders. 
2, Suggested Formal Demonstration (if TF 7-248 is not available). 
The Soldier Dismounted Without Arms as follows: 
a. Preparation. 
(1) Troops required. Two noncommissioned officers and 
eight men. 
(2) Uniform. Garrison. 
(3) Equipment. None. 
120 (77 
b. Plan. 
(1) The instructor introduces the demonstration by describing 
the group method of instruction and by indicating the 
reasons for the sequence in which movements in school of 
the soldier are arranged. 
(2) Demonstration troops are formed for instruction by the 
sergeant-instructor. The illusion of recruits receiving 
their first instruction is preserved in order that proper 
methods of organizing groups for their first instruction 
may be shown. The demonstration opens with the re- 
cruits clustered informally in a group. The sergeant-in- 
structor first organizes them into a squad using language 
they all understand, substantially as follows: 
“Give me your attention. Smith, you come over here. That’s 
right. Now stand where you are, facing me. Jones, you 
move over along side of Smith facing in this direction. 
Black, place yourself beside Jones, and Brown, you line up 
with the other three.” In similar manner he posts the other 
four recruits on the left, after which he says: 
“Now you have fallen in as a squad. Whenever I say: 
FALL IN, that is what I want you to do. Look around 
for a minute and see how you are organized. Remember, 
the order is: “FALL IN.” 
The sergeant-instructor next forms them for instruction 
by the group method approximately as follows: 
“Give me your attention again. I will now arrange you into 
two ranks for instruction.” (He places four men in front of 
the others.) “You four men are a rank and (pointing) you 
four are a rank.” Again pointing, he continues: “This is the 
front rank and this, the second rank. In this case the 
second rank is the rear rank. I’m going to tell you to do 
something now, so listen. Front rank, take four steps 
straight to your front and stop. That is right. Now turn 
around. Those two men are No. 1. You’re No. 1, front 
rank, you’re No. 1, second rank; you two are No. 2; 
you two are No. 3; you two are No. 4. Is that clear? Are 
there any questions? All right! Now, listen to me again. 
No. 1, front and second rank, stand still and raise your 
arms shoulder high like this. No. 2, front and second 
rank, you hold your arms up the same way and move in 
that direction until the tips of your fingers just touch the 
finger tips of No. 1. No. 3’s and No. 4’s, you do the same 
thing. That’s fine. Now, all of you drop your arms to 
your sides. This is what we call: Extend on No. 1.” (The 
men need not be extended for this instruction.) 
121 (7) 
The sergeant-instructor then takes post at a flank between 
the ranks and says: “Relax; take an easy position and look 
toward me.” 
The sergeant-instructor is now ready to begin his instruct- 
ion in the soldier, dismounted. He explains and demon- 
strates each movement, requires the men to execute it, 
and corrects each error that is made. 
(3) Demonstrate: Position of soldier at attention. 
(4) Demonstrate: AT EASE. 
(5) Demonstrate: 1. Parade; 2. REST. 
(6) Demonstrate: .REST. 
(7) Remarks by instructor. He indicates to the class important 
duties of the instructor and refers again to the desirability 
of including marching in the very first period of instruc- 
tion. 
(8) Demonstrate: Forward, MARCH and HALT. 
Demonstration troops close ranks after explanation and 
demonstration by drill master, and then execute: Forward, 
MARCH and HALT. After execution, demonstration troops 
again open ranks. 
(9) Remarks by instructor. 
(10) Demonstrate: 1. Right; 2. FACE and 1. Left; 2. FACE. 
(11) Explain; FALL OUT. 
(12) Remarks by instructor: Explain coach-and-pupil method, 
its application to training, its value and limitations. Squad 
again opens rank and extends on No. 1. 
(18) By coach-and-pupil method, demonstrate: 1. Parade; 2. 
REST. 
(14) Demonstration troops form a single rank. Then execute: 
1.Forward; 2. MARCH, and HALT. 
(15) By group method in squad formation, demonstrate: 1. 
Hand; 2. SALUTE. 
(16) Remarks by instructor, calling attention to various types 
of grouping for instruction in group method. 
(17) Demonstration squad marches off. 
122 (7) 
DISMOUNTED DRILL 
(Positions, Steps in Marching) 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period: One Hour 
Place. Drill Field and Theater. 
Text References. Paragraphs 16 to 82, Field Manual 22-5; TF 7-249. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All available unit officers and noncommissioned offi- 
cers. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Uniform as prescribed. 
Procedure. Application following training film. 
1. Cover the positions and steps in marching (Group Method). Explain 
and demonstrate each position or movement slowly and clearly, then 
have the men do it. Correct any errors at once. 
2. Repeat and continue all movements shown in the above paragraph 
as desired. 
a. Special emphasis should be given to the use of “By the num- 
bers” and correction of errors to insure perfect execution of 
movements. 
b. Instruction in facings on the march should be done at “Slow 
Quick Time” until the command does it in unison. Then quick 
time should be used. 
c. Flank movements should be combined with to the rear, 
MARCH, and practiced until each man executes it correctly 
and smoothly. This is a primary movement. 
123 (7) 
DISMOUNTED DRILL 
(Positions, Steps in Marching) 
Instructor (s) 
Third Period: One Hour 
Place. Drill Field. 
Text Reference. Paragraphs 1 to 32, inclusive, FM 22-5 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All available unit officers and noncommissioned offi- 
cers. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Uniform as prescribed. 
Procedure. Application. 
1. Continue application (Group Method) of all previous drill instruc- 
tion (see second period guide). 
2. Have the unit execute forward MARCH and HALT, repeatedly. 
Caution against forward motion before command of execution is 
given. 
3. Repeat movements by “slow quick time” and “by the numbers”. 
Check continuously and correct all errors. 
4. Prepare list of commands to be used and reviewed prior to the in- 
structional period. 
5. Provide special instruction for men who obviously will need ex- 
tra drill. 
124 (7) 
DISMOUNTED DRILL 
(Positions, Steps in Marching) 
Instructor (s) 
Fourth Period: One Hour 
Place. Drill Field. 
Text Reference. Paragraphs 1 to 32, inclusive, FM 22-5 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All available unit officers and noncommissioned offi- 
cers. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Uniform as prescribed 
Procedure. Application. Continue training in the same movements as 
taught in previous periods but begin to use the cadence system for 
simple commands. Gradually increase the use of cadence system, mak- 
ing sure that it is fully understood, and that the men respond with 
the correct commands. Repeat individual commands until there is a 
definite understanding of the command indicated by a sharpness and 
a confidence in expression. 
The cadence count (1. Cadence, 2. COUNT) should be used fre- 
quently while the unit is marching from one place to another until they 
can keep perfect step without any oral assistance on the part of the 
unit leader. 
125 (7) 
DISMOUNTED DRILL 
(Positions, Steps in Marching) 
Instructor (s) 
Fifth Period; One Hour 
Place. Drill Field. 
Text Reference. Paragraphs 1 to 32, inclusive, FM 22-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All available unit officers and noncommissioned offi 
cers. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Uniform as prescribed 
Procedure. Application. Continue training in the same movements as 
in previous periods, increasing the use of the cadence system. (7) 
DISMOUNTED DRILL 
(Positions, Steps in Marching) 
Instructor (s) 
Sixth Period: One Hour 
Place. Drill Field. 
Text Reference. Paragraphs 1 to 32, inclusive, FM 22-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All available unit officers and noncommissioned offi 
cers. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Uniform as prescribed. 
Procedure. Application. 
1. For the first 30 minutes continue same instruction as of previous 
period. 
2. During the last twenty minutes, put the company together and 
using the cadence system, drill the unit as a whole. Movements 
taught in previous periods only should be used. (A loud speaker 
facilitates this type of drill but is not necessary for a company.) 
3. Inform the unit that the coach-and-pupil method will be used 
during the next period. 
127 (7) 
DISMOUNTED DRILL 
(Positions, Steps in Marching) 
Instructor(s) 
Seventh Period: One Hour 
Place. Drill Field. 
Text Reference. Paragraphs 1 to 32, inclusive, FM 22-5 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All available unit officers and noncommissioned offi 
cers. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Uniform as prescribed. 
Procedure. Application. 
1. First thirty minutes. Execute the positions and simple move- 
ments taught in previous periods using the coach-and-pupil method. 
a. Groups should be formed in double ranks. 
b. Individuals are paired off, one to act as the coach, the other 
as the pupil. 
c. After a short period, the relation of the two ranks are re- 
versed; the pupils now becoming the coaches, and the coaches 
the pupils. 
Note. The coach-and-pupil method should not be used on com- 
plicated movements. 
2. Remainder of period. Drill the unit as a whole using the cadence 
system. (See sixth period.) 
128 (7) 
DISMOUNTED DRILL 
(The Squad) 
Instructor (s) 
Eighth Period: One Hour 
Place. Drill Field and Theater. 
Text References. Paragraphs 114-130, inclusive, FM 22-5; TF 7-143, 
Infantry Drill, The Squad. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Unit commanders and all available noncommissioned 
officer instructors. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Uniform as prescribed. 
Procedure. Demonstration and Application. This time is allotted for 
instruction in squad drill. (Training Film 7-143 may be substituted 
for the demonstration.) 
1. Preparation. 
a. Troops required: One noncommissioned officer and eight 
men. 
b. Uniform: Garrison, 
c. Equipment: None. 
2. Plan. The instructor introduces the demonstration. In his in- 
troduction he covers the following points: 
a. Creditable squad drill is dependent upon proficiency in the 
Soldier, dismounted. So far as the individual is concerned, no 
complicated new movements are introduced in squad drill. 
b. Instruction in squad drill should begin with execution in- 
dividually using “By the Numbers” should progress through 
“Slow Quick Time”, and when the proficiency of the squad war- 
rants, the drill should be conducted in quick time. It should be 
explained that “By the Numbers” and “Slow Quick Time” should 
be abandoned just as soon as a creditable execution can be 
achieved in quick time. 
c. Squad drill follows the same instructional methods employed 
in teaching the Soldier, Dismounted. 
d. It should be emphasized that squad drill is important and 
129 (7) 
that creditable drill of the platoon, company and battalion is 
very largely a matter of good squad drill. 
3. Demonstration. 
a. FALL IN. Emphasize that FALL IN means that each man 
is to get his proper interval and remain definitely at attention. 
b. FALL OUT. 
c. Alinement of the squad. 
(1) Dress right (left), DRESS; Ready, FRONT; COVER. 
(2) Eyes, RIGHT (LEFT). 
d. Movements of the squad. 
(1) To march to the flank: Right (left) FACE; by the right 
(left) flank, MARCH. 
(2) To change direction: Column right (left), (half right) 
(half left), MARCH. 
(3) To march to the oblique: 
(a) Right (left) oblique, MARCH. 
(b) Mark time, MARCH. 
(c) Oblique, MARCH. 
(d) HALT. 
(4) To form column of twos from a single file and return: 
(a) Form column of twos, MARCH. 
(b) Form single file from the right, MARCH. 
(5) Being in line, to take interval and assemble: 
(a) Take interval to the left (right), MARCH. 
(b) Assemble to the right (left), MARCH. 
(6) Being in line at normal interval, to obtain close interval: 
Close, MARCH. 
(7) Being in line at close interval to extend to normal interval: 
Extend, MARCH. 
130 DISMOUNTED DRILL 
(7) 
(The Squad) 
Instructor (s) 
Ninth Period: One Hour 
Place. Drill Field. 
Text Reference. Paragraphs 114 to 130, inclusive, FM 22-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Unit commanders and all available noncommissioned 
officer instructors. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Uniform as prescribed. 
Procedure. Application of movements and formations as shown in dem- 
onstration of previous period. Stress importance of the primary move- 
ments (facings while on the march). Use “slow quick time” cadence 
until unit can execute movement in unison. 
(7) 
DISMOUNTED DRILL 
(The Squad) 
Instructor (s) 
Tenth Period: One Hour 
Place. Drill Field. 
Text Reference. Paragraphs 114 to 130, inclusive, FM 22-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Unit commanders and all available noncommissioned 
officer Instructors. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Uniform as prescribed. 
Procedure. Application. Same as previous period. Use the cadence 
system on those commands to which it is applicable. 
131 (7) 
DISMOUNTED DRILL 
(The Squad) 
Instructor(s) 
Eleventh Period; One Hour 
Place. Drill Field. 
Text Reference. Paragraphs 114 to 130, inclusive, FM 22-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Unit commanders and all available noncommissioned of- 
ficer instructors. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Uniform as prescribed. 
Procedure. Application. Same as previous period. Repeat frequently 
using “slow quick time cadence” on such movements with which the 
unit may have difficulty. 
Note. If battalion parade is scheduled, such portion of this period 
as necessary should be used in preparation for it. Regular 
company officers and noncommissioned officers should be used 
for this parade. During this period the band should be present 
so men can march to music. 
132 (7) 
DISMOUNTED DRILL 
(The Squad) 
Instructor(s) 
Twelfth Period: One Hour 
Place. Drill Field. 
Text Reference. Paragraphs 114 to 130, inclusive, FM 22-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Unit commanders and all available noncommissioned of- 
ficer instructors. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Uniform as prescribed. 
Procedure. Application. Same as previous period. Review all previous 
drill instruction by application. Use quick time with and without the 
cadence system. 
Note. Continue rehearsal for battalion parade. Sound adjutant’s 
call, go through actual rehearsal parade. There should be a 
battalion ceremonial parade regularly scheduled each week. This 
encourages pride in appearance and determination to master 
drill. 
133 (7) 
DISMOUNTED DRILL 
(The Squad) 
Instructor (s) 
Thirteenth Period: One Hour 
Place. Drill Field. 
Text Reference. Paragraphs 114 to 130, inclusive, FM 22-5, 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Unit Commanders and all available noncommissioned 
officer instructors. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Uniform as prescribed. 
Procedure. Application. Same as previous period. Drill the unit under 
one command, while unit drill instructors carefully check their res- 
pective units for errors. Command exercises should be used. Review 
all previous drill instruction. Check posture, wearing of headgear. 
Secure sharpness of command, and prompt and uniform execution by 
repeated application and constant correction of any errors. 
134 (7) 
DISMOUNTED DRILL 
(The Squad) 
Instructor (s) 
Fourteenth Period; One Hour 
Place. Drill Field. 
Text Reference. Paragraphs 114 to 130, inclusive, FM 22-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Unit Commanders and all available noncommissioned 
officer instructors. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Uniform as prescribed. 
Procedure. Application. Prepare for training inspection which will in- 
clude all points covered in drill so far. If this inspection is not made by 
the battalion commander, it should be made by the company comman- 
der. The progress that each man has made in drill should be record- 
ed. 
Note. Training inspections in close order drill should be scheduled 
during open hours. 
135 (7) 
DISMOUNTED DRILL 
(The Platoon) 
Instructor(s) 
Fifteenth Period: One Hour 
Place. Drill field and Theater. 
Text References. Pages 68 to 76, inclusive, FM 22-5 ; TF 7-144. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Unit commanders and all available noncommissioned 
officer instructors. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Uniform as prescribed. 
Procedure, Demonstration. This time is allotted to a demonstration of 
platoon drill. (The training film may be substituted for the demonstra- 
tion). 
1. Preparation. 
a. Troops Required: One noncommissioned officer and a pla- 
toon of at least three squads. 
b. Uniform; Garrison. 
c. Equipment: None. 
2. Plan. The instructor introduces the demonstration. In his in- 
troduction he covers the following points: 
a. Creditable platoon drill is dependent upon proficiency in 
drill of the rifle squad, and platoon drill should not be under- 
taken until the unit has mastered squad drill. 
b. Instruction in platoon drill should begin at a reduced ca- 
dence “Slow Quick Time” (60 to 70 steps per minute), but 
should advance to drill at quick time as soon as the proficiency 
of the platoon warrants. 
c. Platoon drill follows the same instructional methods em- 
ployed in teaching the Soldier, Dismounted and the Drill of the 
Squad. 
f. Cadence drill is used in this demonstration. Cadence drill 
is not used in movements which are executed successively by the 
subdivisions of the command. 
136 (7) 
8. Demonstration. 
a. Composition and formation of the platoon, 
b. Positions of individuals in platoon. 
c. To form and dismiss platoon. 
d. To march the platoon from column and line. 
e. Column movements. 
f. Open and close ranks. 
g. Flank movements. 
h. Column of twos, single file and reform. 
i. To form for shelter tents. 
j. Check proper length of step. Have individuals check step 
on a previously marked five-yard distance shown on the ground. 
DISMOUNTED DRILL 
(The Platoon) 
Instructor (s) 
Sixteenth Period: One Hour 
Place. Drill Field. 
Text Reference. Pages 68 to 76, inclusive, FM 22-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Unit commanders and all available noncommissioned 
officer instructors. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Uniform as prescribed. 
Procedure. Application. Same as previous period. Use cadence system. 
Emphasize column and flank movements. Keep constant check on 
cadence and correct posture. 
137 DISMOUNTED DRILL 
(7) 
(The Platoon) 
Instructor (s) 
Seventeenth Period: One Hour 
Place. Drill Field. 
Text Reference. Pages 68 to 76, inclusive, FM 22-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Unit commanders and all available noncommissioned 
officer instructors. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Uniform as prescribed. 
Procedure. Application. Same as previous period. Use cadence system, 
quick time. Emphasize proper execution of open and close ranks. 
Discuss its use and importance for unit inspection. 
DISMOUNTED DRILL 
(7) 
(The Platoon) 
Instructor (s) 
Eighteenth Period: One Hour 
Place. Drill Field. 
Text Reference. Pages 68 to 76, inclusive, FM 22-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Unit commanders and all available noncommissioned 
officer instructors. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Uniform as prescribed. 
Procedure, Application. Review all previous drill instruction. Drill unit 
as a whole under one command. Respective squad instructors should 
check and record progress of individual men in drill. 
138 DISMOUNTED DRILL 
(7) 
(The Company) 
Instructor (s) 
Ninteenth Period: One Hour 
Place. Drill Field. 
Text Reference. Pages 76 to 85, inclusive, FM 22-5; Infantry Drill 
Regulations. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Unit commanders and all available noncommissioned 
officer instructors. A complete company of three pla- 
toons for demonstration. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Uniform as prescribed. 
Procedure. Demonstration This time is allotted for demonstration of 
company drill, which includes the following formations and move- 
ments : 
1. General. 
a. Position of the various leaders and sergeants. 
(1) With a company in line. 
(2) With a company in column of platoons. 
(3) With a company in mass formation. 
b. Position of the guidon bearer. 
(1) With a company in line or in mass formation. 
(2) With a company in column of threes or fours. 
2. Rules for company drill. 
a. Composition. 
b. Duties of platoon leaders. 
c. Repeating preparatory commands. 
3. Form the company. 
a. FALL IN. Close interval, normal interval. 
b. Method of forming the company. 
(1) Actions of platoon leaders, sergeants, corporals, guides 
and guidon bearers. 
(2) Report of absentees. 
4. Company in line—march to right. 
a. Right face, actions of various key members, position of the 
first sergeant. 
b. Marching to the left. 
139 (7) 
5. Close interval. At close interval, FALL IN. 
6. Dismiss company. Dismissed (action of various key members). 
7. Aline company. 
a. Dress right (center or left), DRESS. 
b. Explain and demonstrate what is meant by each. 
8. Previous instruction applicable. 
9. Being in column of threes or fours at close interval to form 
company mass. 
a. Company mass left (right), MARCH. 
b. Take up the action of each key member for this formation. 
c. From the halt and being at the march. 
10. Extended mass company formation. 
a. Being in column of threes or fours, 
b. Company mass ( ) paces left (right), MARCH. 
11. Change in direction from mass formation. Right (left) turn, 
MARCH, forward, MARCH. 
12. Form column of threes (or fours) from mass formation. Column 
of threes (or fours), right platoon, forward, MARCH. 
(7) 
DISMOUNTED DRILL 
(The Company) 
Instructor (s) 
Twentieth Period: One Hour 
Place. Drill Field. 
Text Reference. Pages 76 to 85, inclusive, FM 22-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Unit commanders and all available noncommissioned 
officer instructors. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Uniform as prescribed. 
Procedure. Application. The same as previous period. Continue all 
movements not completed and emphasize the importance of platoon 
leaders repeating the preparatory commands. The rules for guide 
should be clearly explained when the company is in mass formation. 
Precision in the movements of key men should be stressed. Employ 
the cadence system. 
140 (7) 
DISMOUNTED DRILL 
(The Company) 
Instructor (s) 
Twenty-first Period: One Hour 
Place. Drill Field. 
Text Reference. Pages 76 to 85, inclusive, FM 22-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Unit commanders and all available noncommissioned 
officer instructors. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Uniform as prescribed. 
Procedure. Application, Same as previous period. This period should 
include all the remaining movements and formations of company drill, 
and review and repetition of such as are not understood. 
(7) 
DISMOUNTED DRILL 
(The Company) 
Instructor (s) 
Twenty-second Period: One Hour 
Place. Drill Field. 
Text Reference. Pages 76 to 85, inclusive, FM 22-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Unit commanders and all available noncommissioned 
officer instructors. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Uniform as prescribed. 
Procedure. Application. Same as previous period. 
141 (7) 
DISMOUNTED DRILL 
(The Company) 
Instructor (s) 
Twenty-third Period: One Hour 
Place. Drill Field. 
Text Reference. Pages 76 to 85, inclusive, FM 22-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Unit commanders and all available noncommissioned 
officer instructors. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Uniform as prescribed. 
Procedure. Application. Same as previous period. 
DISMOUNTED DRILL, REHEARSAL FOR PARADE 
(7) 
(Ceremonial Parade (Retreat)) 
Instructor (s) 
Twenty-fourth Period: One Hour 
Place. Drill Field. 
Text Reference. Chapter 9 and appendix, FM 22-5. (Ceremonial Pa- 
rade) . 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Company commanders; platoon leaders; noncommis- 
sioned officers; band personnel. 
Equipment. Prepare drill field with markers for parade. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Uniform as prescribed. 
142 (7) 
Procedure. Application. 
1. Give likely noncommissioned officer candidates opportunity to com- 
mand. Pick out suitable platoon sergeants and squad leaders to 
hold down key positions for parade. 
2. Have the band sound adjutant’s call, then march company at close 
interval onto the field giving the appropriate commands. 
3. Go through the routine of a battalion parade. Correct errors, if any, 
as they occur. 
4. Repeat rehearsal if time permits. 
Note. Additional rehearsals for parades, reviews, ceremonies and 
inspection by higher authorities should be done on open time. 
DISMOUNTED DRILL, REVIEW 
(The Company) 
Instructor(s) 
Twenty-fifth Period: One Hour 
Place. Drill Field. 
Text References. All previous text references. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Unit commanders and all available noncommissioned 
officer instructors. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Uniform as prescribed. 
Procedure. Application. Continue company drill using cadence drill 
exercises and review such movements and commands as necessary to 
prepare men for training inspections in close order drill. 
143 (7) 
DISMOUNTED DRILL 
(The Company) 
Instructor (s) 
Twenty-sixth Period: One Hour 
Place. Drill Field. 
Text References. All previous text references. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Company commanders and all available assistants. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Uniform as prescribed. 
Procedure. Application. Continue company drill, review all previous 
drill instructions as time permits. 
Because only one hour per week is scheduled for drill, it should 
preferably be an early morning hour, and given with snap and 
enthusiasm. 
Notes. If guidons are used, the guidon bearers should be given 
special instructions at this time, (See paragraphs 83 to 
93, inclusive, FM 22-5.) 
If color bearers are used, the color bearers should be given 
special instruction at this time. (See paragraphs 95 to 103, 
inclusive, FM 22-5.) 
144 DISMOUNTED DRILL, COMPANY DRILL 
(7) 
(The Company) 
Instructor (s) 
Twenty-seventh Period: One Hour 
Place. Drill Field. 
Text References. All previous text references. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Unit commanders and all available noncommissioned 
officer instructors. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Uniform as prescribed. 
Procedure. Application of previous drill instruction. Keep the drill 
active and interesting so that men will be mentally alert and 
physically responsive. The one hour per week drill is to keep them 
from getting rusty. If one hour is insufficient, open time should be 
used. 
(7) 
DISMOUNTED DRILL, COMPANY DRILL 
(The Company) 
Instructor (s) 
Twenty-eighth Period: One Hour 
Place. Drill Field. 
Text References. All previous text references. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Unit commanders and all available noncommissioned 
officer instructors. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
145 Individual Equipment. Uniform as prescribed. 
(7) 
Procedure. Application. Same as previous period of instruction in com- 
pany drill. Use potential noncommissioned officer personnel to give 
commands. Use the cadence system. Keep the drill active and inter- 
esting by avoiding repetition of commands. 
Note. The unit commander should encourage competition in drill 
between platoons. The manner of conducting the competitive 
drill should be developed by the unit commanders. The actual 
competition should be done during an available open hour after 
completion of regular periods in close order drill. 
(7) 
DISMOUNTED DRILL 
(The Company) 
Instructor (s) 
Twenty-ninth Period: One Hour 
Place. Drill Field. 
Text References. All previous text references. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Unit commanders and all available noncommissioned 
officer instructors. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Uniform as prescribed. 
Procedure. Application. Continue company drill, reviewing such in- 
struction in close order drill as is necessary to insure completeness in 
company drill. Repeat the use of cadence drill, command exercises, 
and drill the company as a unit. 
Note. Finish preparation for competitive drill by platoons. This 
competitive drill should be held during an open period and fol- 
low completion of the instruction in close order drill. 
146 (8) 
MARCHES AND BIVOUACS 
Purpose and Scope. The purpose of this course is to harden the enlisted 
man physically so that he may reach his destination at the proper 
time and in effective condition; to teach the enlisted man how to 
care for himself on the march, and to carry out his assigned duties 
whether in bivouac or combat. 
Actual Time Allotted. The course covers 45 hours, which are distributed 
over 11 weeks. During the first week, a one-hour conference is given 
for the purpose of teaching the men correct march technique, and 
the general sanitary measures to be observed while on the march or 
in bivouac. The remaining hours should be devoted to marches during 
day and night. 
Text References. FM 100-5, Operations, paragraphs 374-398 inclusive 
(march technique), chapter 7 (halts and security during halts) and 
Sect. V, chapter 10, “Antimechanized Defense”; FM 26-5; FM 
21-25; FM 21-10, chapter 8 (march hygiene and selection of camp 
sites) ; Training Film 5-146 “Means of anti-mechanized defense”; 
Training film 7-109 “Defense of Infantry Columns against attack 
aviation”; TF 7-110; Film strip 4-2, “Identification of Aircraft.” 
Methods of Instruction. Conferences and Practical Exercises. 
Standard of Proficiency. Each man to be able: 
1. To march at least 15 miles with full field equipment. 
2. To observe all march technique. 
3. To care for himself on, and after completion of the march, 
4. To carry out efficiently his assigned duties. 
5. To observe all the usual sanitary measures while on the march and 
in bivouac. 
6. To apply the general principles of individual defense against air, 
mechanized, and gas attack while on the march. 
147 CONFERENCE—MARCHES AND BIVOUACS 
(8) 
Instructor (s) 
First Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. All references above. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Officer Instructor. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. 
1. The importance of physical training for soldiers. 
2. Purpose of marches. 
3. Rates and lengths of marches. 
4. Common march terms. 
5. Preparation for a march. 
6. Protection against air and mechanized attacks. 
7. Conduct of marches, including hand signals. 
8. Occupation of bivouac areas. 
9. March hygiene. 
(8) 
APPLICATION—MARCHES AND BIVOUACS 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period: Two Hours 
Place. Road. 
Text References. FM 100-5, paragraphs 374-398 inclusive; FM 21-10, 
Chapter 8. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Platoon Leaders. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
148 (8) 
Individual Equipment. Stripped packs. 
Procedure. The unit to make a four-mile march, observing strict march 
discipline and the rules of march hj^giene. 
Have a crossroad or road junction marked off to simulate a 
shell hole. Compel the troops to march around the hole. Call at- 
tention to the likelihood of enemy shelling of roads, and the neces- 
sity of having engineers in advance guards for the purpose of 
getting all roads cleared in advance of the arrival of troops. 
(8) 
APPLICATION—MARCHES AND BIVOUACS 
Instructor (s) 
Third Period: Three Hours 
Place. Road. 
Text References. FM 100-5, paragraphs 374-398 inclusive; FM 21-10, 
chapter 8. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Platoon leaders. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Stripped packs. 
Procedure. The unit to make a five-mile march, observing strict march 
discipline and the rules of march hygiene. 
Have a military vehicle partly blocking the road in the direction 
of march, and a civilian vehicle facing in the opposite direction. The 
first represents a disabled military vehicle and the second an aban- 
doned refugee vehicle. Call attention to the necessity for keeping 
roads cleared at all times for movement of military transport and 
personnel. 
149 APPLICATION—MARCHES AND BIVOUACS 
(8) 
Instructor(s) 
Fourth Period: Three Hours 
Place. Road. 
Text References. FM 100-5, paragraphs 374-398 inclusive; FM 21-10, 
Chapter 8. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Platoon leaders. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Full field equipment. 
Procedure. The instruction to be divided into three one-hour periods: 
First hour. The unit to march to a previously reconnoitered area 
observing march discipline while en route. 
Second hour. To erect shelter tents and display equipment in front 
of tents, then strike tents and assemble equipment. 
Third hour. Return march to barracks. 
(8) 
APPLICATION—MARCHES AND BIVOUACS 
Instructor(s) 
Fifth Period; Six Hours 
Place. Road. 
Text References. Field Manual 26-5; Paragraphs 374 to 398, inclusive, 
Field Manual 100-5; Chapter 8, Field Manual 21-10. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Platoon leaders. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
150 (8) 
Individual Equipment. Full field equipment. 
Procedure. This instruction to be divided into three two-hour periods. 
First Period. The unit to march to a previously reconnoitered area 
observing march discipline and rules of march hy- 
giene while en route. 
Second Period. Erect shelter tent and display equipment. Practical 
application of the duties of a sentry on interior 
guard duty and the construction of straddle 
trenches. 
Third Period. Strike tent, assemble equipment and return to bar- 
racks. 
Note: This period should follow the instruction on interior guard 
duty. 
(8) 
APPLICATION—MARCHES AND BIVOUACS 
Instructor (s) 
Sixth Period: Three Hours 
Place. Road. 
Text References. Paragraphs 374 to 398, inclusive, Field Manual 100-5 ; 
Chapter 8, Field Manual 21-10, 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Platoon leaders. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None, 
Individual Equipment. Full field equipment. Gas masks. 
Procedure. 1. The unit to make an eight-mile march. This period should 
be given after gas mask drill. The unit should be warned that gas is 
frequently employed against marching columns. Explain the em- 
ployment of gas sentries on the march, and the use of the command 
“Gas.” 
2. Explain what is meant by gas discipline. 
3. Review briefly the gasses wdiich may be used by the enemy, 
and the protective measures to be employed. Stress the fact that 
151 (8) 
casualties from chemical agents are relatively few, and that the gas 
mask is extremely effective defense. 
4. Without warning release tear gas on the troops while march- 
ing. Time the interval between the release of the gas and the warn- 
ing signal. Examine each soldier for lacrimation after the gassed 
area has been passed. 
5. March the unit, gas masks on, through a smoke screen. When 
they have passed beyond it have them look back to note its effective- 
ness. 
6. Critique. Call attention to effectiveness of the gas attack, 
the number of men gassed and any mistakes made by the unit. 
(8) 
APPLICATION—MARCHES AND BIVOUACS 
Instructor(s) 
Seventh Period: Three Hours 
Place. Road. 
Text References. Paragraphs 374 to 398, inclusive, Field Manual 100-5; 
Chapter 8, Field Manual 21-10; FS 4-2 “Identification of Aircraft”; 
TF 7-109; TF 7-110. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Platoon leaders. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Full field equipment. 
Procedure. Unit to make a five-mile march during which the individual 
members will practice concealment from hostile air attack. Sig- 
nals for the approach of hostile aircraft will be given by the unit 
instructor. Careful check will be made to see that each individual 
has utilized to the fullest extent the best available cover and con- 
cealment. The unit as a whole should be timed to the second in its 
ability to disperse upon receiving the signal that hostile aircraft is 
approaching. 
152 APPLICATION—MARCHES AND BIVOUACS 
(8) 
Instructor (s) 
Eighth Period: Four Hours 
Place. Road. 
Text References. All References of preceding period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Platoon leaders. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Full field equipment. 
Procedure. The unit to make a ten-mile march observing strict march 
discipline and the rules of march hygiene. 
During the march the men to practice concealment from 
hostile air attack. Signals for the approach of hostile air attack 
to be given by the unit instructor. Careful check to be made to see 
that each individual has utilized to the fullest extent the best avail- 
able cover and concealment. A comparison of time involved in dis- 
persing during the seventh period and this period should be made. 
Explain the functions of advance, rear and flank guards. Il- 
lustrate their use on this march and all subsequent marches. 
(8) 
APPLICATION—MARCHES AND BIVOUACS (NIGHT) 
Instructor (s) 
Ninth Period: Four Hours 
Place. Road. 
Text References. Paragraphs 374 to 398, inclusive, Field Manual 100-5; 
Chapter 8, Field Manual 21-10. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Platoon leaders. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Stripped packs. Gas masks. 
Procedure. The unit to make an eight-mile march under cover of dark- 
ness, observing strict march discipline and the rules of march hy- 
giene. Repeat the gassing of the column as was done during the 
sixth period. Check for signs of lacrimation. 
153 (8) 
APPLICATION—MARCHES AND BIVOUACS (NIGHT) 
Instructor (s) 
Tenth Period: Four Hours 
Place. Road. 
Text References. See References for Seventh Period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Platoon leaders. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Stripped packs. 
Procedure. 
1. The unit is to make an eight-mile march during which the in- 
dividual soldiers will practice dispersion and concealment from 
hostile air attack. Signals for the approach of hostile aircraft 
will be given by the unit instructor. 
2. Careful check should be made to see that each individual has 
utilized to the fullest extent the best available cover and con- 
cealment. 
(8) 
APPLICATION—MARCHES AND BIVOUACS 
Instructor (s) 
Eleventh Period: Four Hours 
Place. Cross country. 
Text References. Field Manual 21-25, Sec. 4 paragraphs 374-378, in 
elusive; FM 100-5, chapter 8; FM 21-10. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Platoon leaders. 
Equipment. Compass. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Stripped packs. 
154 Procedure. 
1. A brief discussion should be given on the use of compasses and 
azimuth direction. 
2. A cross country march of four hours by platoon, conducted on 
an azimuth direction for a specified distance. 
Example: Proceed one and one-half miles on magnetic azimuth 
275° and then proceed on magnetic azimuth 80° for 
one-half mile, etc. The route should be planned for 
all platoons to terminate at a common point. 
3. Distances can be measured by counting strides. Selected 
men should be used as platoon and assistant platoon leaders. 
4. Supervision by the unit instructors should be continuous through- 
out the exercises. 
(8) 
(8) 
APPLICATION—MARCHES AND BIVOUACS (NIGHT) 
Instructor (s) 
Twelfth Period: Four Hours 
Place. Cross country. 
Text References. See references of eleventh period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Platoon leaders. 
Equipment. Compass. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Stripped packs. 
Procedure. 
1. A brief discussion on the use of compasses and azimuth direction. 
2. A cross country march of four hours by each platoon under cov- 
er of darkness. This march should be conducted on an azimuth 
direction for a specified distance. 
Example; Proceed one and one-half miles on magnetic azimuth 
275° and then proceed on magnetic azimuth 80° for 
one-half mile, etc. The route should be planned so 
all platoons will terminate at a common point. 
3. Distances can be measured by counting strides. Selected enlisted 
men should be used as platoon and assistant platoon leaders. 
4. Supervision by the unit instructors should be continuous. 
155 APPLICATION—MARCHES AND BIVOUACS 
(8) 
Instructor (s) 
Thirteenth Period: Two Hours 
Place. On roads and across country. 
Text References. Paragraphs 374 to 398, inclusive, and Section V, Chap- 
ter 10, Field Manual 100-5; Chapter 8, Field Manual 21-10; TF 5- 
146 “Means of Anti-mechanized Defense”. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Platoon leaders. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Stripped packs. 
Procedure. 
1. The unit to make a five-mile forced march on roads and across 
country, during which the individuals should be required to 
consider and practice individual defense against mechanized 
attack. 
2. Each group instructor should point out all natural passive means 
that could be used for individual protection and suitable sites 
for medical installations that have natural barriers against mec- 
hanized vehicles. 
(8) 
APPLICATION—MARCHES AND BIVOUACS 
Instructor (s) 
Fourteenth Period: Two Hours 
Place. On roads and across country. 
Text References. All references of Thirteenth Period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Platoon leaders. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Stripped packs, gas masks. 
156 Procedure. 
1. Same as period 13, except to use different march routes. 
2. Gas the troops without warning. Check for lacrimation after walk- 
ing beyond the gassed areas. 
3. March through a smoke screen with masks on. Continue wearing 
masks, while marching, for at least forty-five minutes. 
4. Call attention to the difficulties of marching through gassed areas. 
Include remarks on the necessity for gas discipline to avoid wear- 
ing masks except when necessary. One hysterical individual may 
incapacitate a unit by giving a gas alarm when there is no gas 
present. 
(8) 
(9) 
PHYSICAL TRAINING 
Purpose and scope. The primary purpose of military physical training 
is the production of a state of health and general physical fitness 
which will permit the soldier to perform the arduous duties re- 
quired of him. The ultimate goal of this training, then, is physical 
efficiency which is essential to military effectiveness. 
It will include: Setting-up exercises; marching in quick and 
double time; running, climbing, jumping, and gymnastics; person- 
al contests; mass athletics and group games; swimming; boxing 
and wrestling; and such other exercises and games as deemed 
necessary. 
Actual Time Allotted. Thirty-nine hours. 
Text References. Field Manual 21-20, “Physical Training”; AR 605- 
110 “Physical Fitness”; TF 11-184 “Conduct of Physical Training,” 
Method of Instruction. Normally, instruction should not be imparted 
to a unit greater than a platoon. For disciplinary purposes, how- 
ever, in order to weld the command into a compact, alert, and 
quick unit, and to develop a spirit of enthusiasm, whole companies, 
or even battalions and regiments, should occasionally be drilled 
as a unit. 
To give physical training the importance it merits and to in- 
sure constant discipline, the instruction should be placed in charge 
of commissioned officers. Instruction as important as this is 
worthy of the best efforts, and therefore should never be intrusted 
to anyone who is lacking in enthusiasm or who is not properly quali- 
fied to conduct it. 
Instructors should, if possible, be men of better than average 
physique and more or less accomplished athletes, ready and able 
if necessary, to demonstrate personally what they require of the 
men. The possession of these qualities by officers is an important 
asset in the development of discipline, efficiency, and morale in 
their command. 
157 (9) 
Instructors must be conscientious, painstaking, and patient 
and have the ability to create a feeling of receptiveness among 
those being instructed, through which alone willing responsiveness 
can be engendered. 
Above all, instructors must constantly bear in mind that the ex- 
ercises are the means and not the end of the training; therefore, 
if there is any doubt in their minds as to the effect of an exercise, 
it is always well to err on the side of safety. Underdoing may be 
corrected while overdoing may not. 
Officers in charge of this instruction are cautioned that their 
success will depend upon working in accordance with a carefully pre- 
pared schedule of lessons progressively and systematically arranged, 
and aimed at the attainment of the ultimate general objective. 
instructors should carefully study Field Manual 21-20, then car- 
ry out their instruction in accordance with the doctrines, principles, 
lessons, and methods employed therein. The selection of setting-up 
exercises for the allotted hours have been omitted from the instruc- 
tors’ guides. These should be arranged from FM 21-20 by each in- 
structor to fit the needs of his own unit. The use of games, compete- 
tive athletics, boxing, wrestling, and mass calisthenics has been left to 
the discretion of the battalion commander. The employment of a 
demonstration to clarify the basic fundamentals in the first period 
of instruction has been found very helpful. 
Standard of Proficiency. To develop and insure in each man: 
1. General health and vigor. 
2. Muscular strength, coordination, and endurance. 
3. Discipline and ability to work in a team. 
4. Self-reliance, confidence, courage, self-control, alertness, and pres- 
ence of mind. 
5. Smartness, precision, enthusiasm, personal and organizational pride 
and morale. 
PHYSICAL TRAINING 
(9) 
(Introduction; Orientation and Organization) 
Place. Drill field or other suitable area, indoors or outdoors. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. 1 officer instructor and all available noncommissioned 
officer instructors as assistants. If a demonstration is 
to be used there should be 1 noncommissioned officer, as 
assistant instructor, and 18 enlisted men for demonstra- 
tors. 
158 (9) 
Equipment. Athletic uniform: trousers-white; undershirt-cotton; 
sweatshirt. (The uniform may be altered to suit climatic 
conditions). 
Transportation. None. 
Individual equipment. Athletic uniform. 
Your training program should initially include 33 periods of calis- 
thenics, each of 30 minutes duration. During these periods the functions 
of military calisthenics, listed on preceding page will be implemented. 
The following 45 periods devoted to physical training should be conducted 
with the additional view of training instructors from the ranks. 
Teach your men the various calisthenic formations and all of the start- 
ing positions. Give your commands for exercise as described in FM 21-20. 
Pay particular attention to the manner in which the halt is ordered. Be- 
tween exercises be sure to order one of the several rests. This will insure 
discipline in the unit as well as avoid undue fatigue. 
Certain steps of the mechanism of instruction should be employed in 
calisthenics. Preparation by the instructor and his assistants is imperative. 
Each procedure should be carefully explained and demonstrated. The 
class, of course, will carry out the application. Calisthenics is best taught 
by the progressive method, i.e. by starting slowly and with mild exercises 
and gradually leading up to longer exercise periods and more severe exer- 
cises. Add new movements periodically as your unit becomes accustomed 
to the work. 
Use FM 21-20 to select your exercises. Coupled with the use of judg- 
ment on your part, the combination will be invincible in hardening your 
troops. 
For military purposes certain aspects of calisthenics are particularly 
important. Proper posture should be stressed almost to exaggeration, and 
will result in improved general health as well as improved military bearing. 
Group games produce a fighting spirit and encourage teamwork, both of 
which are military assets. Personal contests are conducive to instilling 
individual confidence, both mental and physical. Wherever facilities for 
swimming are available they should be utilized to the utmost. In addition 
to actual exercise and muscular coordination, swimming has life preserving 
qualities in such operations as river crossings and beach landings. 
In paragraph 5, FM 21-20 will be found the standards of proficiency 
to be achieved by your men. Encourage competition to achieve these stand- 
ards and to even surpass them. 
Calisthenics in civilian life are an end in themselves. In military life 
they are the means to an end. That end is the training and hardening of 
troops, instilling personal confidence and preparing them for battle func- 
tions. 
159 (10) 
SECTION II 
TECHNICAL TRAINING 
HASTY ENTRENCHMENTS AND SHELTER (CAMOUFLAGE) 
Purpose and Scope. The purpose of this instruction is to train Medical 
Department personnel, especially members of tactical units in the use 
of various types of hasty entrenchments and shelter, both artificial 
and natural, which are of value in the protection of the individual 
and the unit installation. The instruction also covers the methods of 
camouflaging installations and vehicles. 
Actual Time Allotted. The instruction covers twelve hours, and con- 
sists of a one-hour conference, a three-hour demonstration and two 
four-hour periods of practical application in the field. 
Text References. Field Manuals 5-15 and 5-20; Training Film 7-35, 
“Infantry Hasty Field Fortifications”, (6 reels, running time 50 
minutes) ; Film Strip 5-3, Camouflage. 
Methods of Instruction. Conference, Demonstration and Application. 
See above for actual time alloted to each. 
Standard of Proficiency. Each enlisted man to have a general and prac- 
tical knowledge of protective concealment as applicable to the 
protection of the medical soldier, the medical unit, the medical 
equipment, and the several types of medical transportation. 
160 (10) 
CONFERENCE—HASTY ENTRENCHMENTS AND SHELTER 
(CAMOUFLAGE) 
Instructor (s) 
First Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Sections I, VIII and IX, Field Manual 5-15; Sections 
1-4, FM 5-20; Training Film 7-35 (6 reels, running time 50 min- 
utes) ; Film Strip 5-3, Camouflage. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Chart showing standard types of hasty defense works. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline of Conference and Demonstration. 
1. Discuss briefly the use of hasty entrenchment by the infantryman 
and company aid man. 
2. Discuss and illustrate the standard types of hasty entrenchments, 
especially foxholes, shell holes and trenches, and the protection 
they afford the individual enlisted man against tanks, mechanized 
and air attacks. 
3. Discuss the different kinds of shelter, natural and artificial, suit- 
able for aid and collecting stations. 
4. Define camouflage. 
5. Discuss means of observation: a. Direct or visual; b. Indirect or 
recorded (aerial photographs). 
6. Discuss camouflage and the aerial photographs. 
7. Methods of camouflage: a. Hiding; b. Blending; c. Deceiving. 
8. Fundamental requirement for successful camouflage. 
9. Camouflage materials: a. Natural; b. Artificial. 
10. Method of camouflaging: a. Aid stations; b. Collecting sta- 
tions; c. vehicles. 
11. Camouflage practice. 
Note. If Training Film 7-35 is available, the instructor should view 
it and familiarize himself with it beforehand. Such portion 
of the conference (suggested above) as is included in the film 
can then be omitted. 
161 (10) 
DEMONSTRATION—HASTY ENTRENCHMENT AND 
SHELTER (CAMOUFLAGE) 
Instructor(s) 
Second Period: Three Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. Sections I, VIII and IX, Field Manual 5-15; and Sec- 
tions 1-4, FM 5-20. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Six demonstrators (may be enlisted men). 
Equipment. Aid station equipment. Pioneer equipment, if available. 
Transportation. Three ambulances. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline of Demonstration. 
1. Demonstrate the following hasty entrenchments: 
a. Fox holes. 
b. Shell holes. 
c. Hasty and deep trench. 
After demonstrating the entrenchments, have a demonstrator enter 
each of them and show the protection each affords against tanks, 
mechanized and air attacks. 
Demonstrate the protection afforded by natural features such as 
ditches, culverts, embankments, mounds, woods, rocks, holes, etc. 
2. Demonstrate an aid station not camouflaged. 
3. Demonstrate the same aid station camouflaged with natural ma- 
terials. 
4. Demonstrate several vehicles parked along a road and not camou- 
flaged. 
5. Demonstrate the same vehicles camouflaged as follows: 
a. Parked under a tree. 
b. Camouflaged with branches of trees and brush. 
6. Demonstrate three ambulances operating an ambulance shuttle, 
parked close together and not camouflaged. 
7. Demonstrate the same ambulances operating the same shuttle, but 
parked 75 to 100 yards apart, and camouflaged with natural 
material, 
162 DEMONSTRATION AND APPLICATION—HASTY 
ENTRENCHMENTS AND SHELTER (CAMOUFLAGE) 
(10) 
Instructor(s) 
Third Period: Four Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. Same as First Period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Organize a battalion medical section plus ten patients. 
Equipment. Aid station equipment and medical pouches (belts). 
Transportation. One truck. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline for the Demonstration. Demonstrate the medical 
service for a battalion of infantry in attack. (The combat troops are 
assumed.) 
1. First Phase of Demonstration. Demonstrate the actions of sev- 
eral company aid men, advancing by bounds, tagging and render- 
ing first aid to the wounded and using natural shelter for their 
protection and the protection of the wounded. The location of the 
wounded to be identified by placing the wounded man’s head gear 
on a stick or tying a piece of bandage to the branch of a nearby 
tree or bush. 
2. Second Phase of Demonstration. Demonstrate four litter bearer 
squads, two at close formation and two at extended formation, each 
using separate routes from the aid station to the front line. One 
squad to demonstrate the wrong way of using sheltered routes, the 
second to cross a shelled area in close formation, the third in ex- 
tended formation using all available shelter and the fourth in ex- 
tended formation advancing by bounds. 
3. Third Phase of Demonstration. Demonstrate the battalion aid 
station established in a wooded area where camouflage is not re- 
quired, then have the aid station advance a short distance; establish 
in the open, and camouflage with natural material. 
Demonstrate a method of camouflaging litter cases awaiting evacua- 
tion to a collecting station, 
163 (10) 
APPLICATION—HASTY ENTRENCHMENTS AND 
SHELTER (CAMOUFLAGE) 
Instructor(s) 
Fourth Period: Four Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. Same as Third Period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. 12 patients. 
Equipment. Battalion aid station equipment. 
Transportation. 1 truck. 
Individual Equipment. Medical pouches (belts). 
Suggested Outline for the Practical Exercise. The battalion medical 
service in the attack. 
1. Prepare a simple exercise in which company aid men advance by 
bounds, using natural shelter for themselves and the wounded. 
The wounded to be tagged, dressed and placed in sheltered areas. 
The litter bearers to cross sheltered areas, pass obstacles, and use 
all available cover and concealment. 
2. The aid station to establish initially using a well sheltered site and 
to advance and establish where camouflage is necessary. 
3. The battalion combat truck to be parked where protective conceal- 
ment is and is not necessary. 
4. The last half hour to be reserved for a discussion on the conduct 
of the exercise. 
134 ELEMENTARY ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 
(11) 
Purpose and Scope. The purpose of this course in anatomy and physi- 
ology is to give the enlisted man a background of knowledge to 
enable him to apply the medical, surgical and sanitary principles 
learned in the study of and experience in these subjects. Special 
emphasis will be given to the requirements of field service, especial- 
ly the close relationship between physiology and anatomy and 
first-aid treatment on the battlefield. 
The course in anatomy and physiology should include: the develop- 
ment of the body (general only) ; varieties of tissues; the skeleton; 
muscular system; functions of the voluntary and involuntary muscles; 
the heart and circulation; the lymphatic system; the respiratory sys- 
tem ; the digestive system; the nervous system; briefly, the endocrine 
system; and the excretory and genito-urinary systems. 
Actual Time Allotted. 21 hours. 
Text Reference. Technical Manual 8-220, Medical Department Soldiers’ 
Handbook. 
Methods of Instruction. Conference, Demonstration, Oral Quizzes and 
Examination. Conferences should always oe augmented by liberal use 
of instructional aids such as the anatomical chart, the skeleton, speci- 
mens of various tissues, apparatus to illustrate physiological function, 
charts, diagrams, movies, film strips, slides, and enlargement of anato- 
mical pictures on the screen (use of the ballopticon). A medical officer 
should conduct this entire course. 
Standard of Proficiency. Each soldier to be able : 
1. To identify and locate the principal structures, bones and organs of 
the body and to understand their respective functions. 
2. To sense and apply this knowledge in the treatment of sick and 
wounded. 
3. To express himself accordingly in speech and writing so that re- 
ports and records of sick and wounded will be clearly and correctly 
completed in agreement with Army Regulations. 
165 ELEMENTARY ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 
(11) 
(Introduction: Bones and Joints) 
Instructor(s) 
First Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text Reference. Chapter 2, TM 8-220, Medical Department Soldier’s 
Handbook. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. 1 officer instructor and noncommissioned officer assist- 
ants. 
Equipment. Skeleton; anatomical chart; decalcified bone; cross 
sections and longitudinal sections of bone; a burned bone 
(residue) ; specimens of the common types of joints: 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference and Demonstration. 
1. Outline of Course. The conferences will be of an informal na- 
ture. Questions may be asked by members of the class at any time and 
in turn questions will be asked of the class. It is recommended that 
the men take notes and discuss the subject with other enlisted 
men and also study the skeleton and anatomical charts. 
2. Subjects to be Covered. Anatomy and Physiology. 
a. Definitions of. 
b. Scope. Explain that the extent of anatomy and physiology 
to be taught is not in any way comparable to that necessary in a 
medical officer’s training, but will furnish practical knowledge 
and a background for further study. 
3. What the Enlisted Man is Expected to Know. At the completion 
of this course it is expected that each man will be able to name the 
bones, joints and organs of the body, correctly spelling their names; 
that he will have an understanding of their function and be able to 
express himself accordingly. 
4. Opening Discussion—The Skeleton. (Bones and Joints). 
a. Bones. (Composition, structure, total number.) 
b. Cartilage. (Composition, structure, function.) 
c. Classification of bones. (1) Long, (2) Short, (3) Flat, and 
(4) Irregular. 
Note. Discuss and demonstrate each on the skeleton. 
166 (11) 
ELEMENTARY ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 
(Bones and Joints) 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text Reference. Chapter 2, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. 1 officer instructor and noncommissioned officer assist- 
ants. 
Equipment. Skeleton; anatomical chart; decalcified and burned 
bones; cross sections and longitudial sections of bones; 
joint specimens showing cartilage, tendons, and muscle 
insertions and origins. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Procedure. Conference, Demonstration and Oral Quiz. 
1. Brief review of classification of bones as given in last period. 
2. Conference and Demonstration. Demonstrate each type of bone 
on the skeleton as conference is given. Ask pertinent questions. 
Suggested outline of conference and demonstration follows: 
a. Bones. (1) Skull—(a) Cranium, (b) Face. 
(2) Spine—(a) Type of bone, (b) Structure of each 
vertebra, (c) Function of each vertebra. 
(3) Shoulder—(a) Clavicle, (b) Scapula. 
(4) Thorax—(a) Ribs, number and function; classifi- 
cation—true, false, and floating, (b) Sternum. 
(5) Pelvis—(a) Formation: Sacrum, Coccyx, Ilium, 
Ischium, and Pubis, (b) Contents of the pelvis and 
the protective function of the pelvic bones, 
(6) Upper Extremity—(a) Arm, (b) Forearm, (c) 
Wrist, (d) Hand. 
(7) Lower extremity—(a) Thigh, (b) Leg, (c) Ankle, 
(d) Foot. 
b. Joints. Definition—(1) Ball and Socket, (2) Hinged, (3) 
Sutures. 
Note. It is suggested that some time during this period reference 
be made to fractures and the importance of knowledge of 
anatomy in first aid treatment of them. 
167 (11) 
ELEMENTARY ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 
(Skin and Muscles) 
Instructor (s) 
Third Period; One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text Reference. Chapter 2, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. 1 officer instructor and noncommissioned officer assist- 
ants; a well-developed muscular individual to show surf- 
ace anatomy. 
Equipment. Skeleton; anatomical chart; bones and joints with 
muscle attachments; piece of skin; diagrams, charts, and 
ballopticon to illustrate enlarged pictures of tissues 
studied. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Procedure. 
1. Classification, the muscular system, a. Voluntary, b. Involun- 
tary, c. Cardiac muscle. 
2. Relationship of the bones and attached muscles, a. Tendon, b. 
Origins and insertions, 
3. Activity of voluntary and involuntary muscles. 
a. Contraction 
b. Relaxation 
(Response to nerve impulse.) 
4. Posture, a. Muscle tonus, b. Fatigue, c. Effect of improper pos- 
ture on spine and on the proper development of muscles. 
5. Effect of exercise on muscle (cite examples), a. Muscle en- 
largement (hypertrophy), b. Disuse (atrophy). 
6. Skin. a. Composition; two layers, sweat glands, hair follicles, 
subcutaneous tissue and nutritive circulation, b. Protective cov- 
ering, c. Relationship to excretory system, d. Heat regulation. 
168 (11) 
ELEMENTARY ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 
(Bones, Skin and Muscles) 
Instructor (s) 
Fourth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text Reference. Chapter 2, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. 1 officer instructor and noncommissioned officer assist- 
ants. 
Equipment. Skeleton; anatomical chart; bones and joints with 
muscle attachments; piece of skin; diagrams, charts, 
and ballopticon to illustrate enlarged pictures of tissues 
studied. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Procedure. Review the bones, skin and muscles by conference and oral 
quiz, with free use of instructional aids. The enlisted men should be 
encouraged to ask questions which will clarify their understanding 
of anatomy. Instructional aids should be used whenever possible to 
answer these questions. 
169 (11) 
ELEMENTARY ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 
(Circulatory System) 
Instructor (s) 
Fifth Period; One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text Reference. Chapter 2, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. 1 officer instructor and noncommissioned officer assist- 
ants ; individual with surface markings tracing out course 
of large blood vessels. 
Equipment. Anatomical charts; skeleton; slides; ballopticon pic- 
tures; anatomical specimens; diagrams, and other in- 
structional aids beneficial to practical instruction. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference and Demonstration. 
1. Component parts of the circulatory system: a. what they are, 
b. where they are located, c. their function, d. relationship to 
other structures. 
2. Give the elements of the blood and the functions of each of these 
elements. 
3. Oxygen and carbon dioxide interchange—pulmonary circula- 
tion. 
4. Give location of the heart and all large arteries and veins. Trace 
the course and show the relationship of the large vessels to other 
structures, using the anatomical charts and by markings drawn 
on the body. Indicate where they come close to the surface and near 
large bones and analyze the reason for the selection of these pres- 
sure points. Point them out on the skeleton, and on the surface 
anatomy. 
170 (11) 
ELEMENTARY ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 
(Circulatory System) 
Instructor (s) 
Sixth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text Reference. Chapter 2, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. 1 officer instructor and noncommissioned officer assist- 
ants ; individual with surface markings tracing out course 
of large blood vessels. 
Equipment. Anatomical charts; skeleton; slides; ballopticon pic- 
tures; anatomical specimens; diagrams, and other in- 
structional aids beneficial to practical instruction. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Procedure. Conference and Demonstration. 
1. Review previous hour on the circulatory system. Discuss the 
nomenclature of various large blood vessels. 
2. Give anatomy and function of the blood vessels, the control of 
bleeding and the difference between arterial and venous bleeding. 
3. Give the anatomy of the heart. 
4. Trace the course of the blood through the body and explain how 
it carries food to the various organs and tissues. 
171 (11) 
ELEMENTARY ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 
(Review of Circulatory System; The Lymphatic System) 
Instructor (s) 
Seventh Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text Reference. Chapter 2, TM 8-220 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. 1 officer instructor and noncommissioned officer assist- 
ants. 
Equipment. Anatomical charts; skeleton; slides, ballopticon pic- 
tures; anatomical specimens; diagrams, and other in- 
structional aids beneficial to practical instruction. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Procedure. 
1. Oral review and quiz of the circulatory system. 
a. Nomenclature. 
b. Spelling and pronunciation, 
2. Conference and Demonstration. Link up the circulatory system 
with the lymphatic system. Stress the function of lymphatics in 
infectious diseases. 
3. Any time remaining may be devoted to writing out of various 
anatomical terms, correcting all errors in spelling. 
172 ELEMENTARY ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 
(11) 
(Respiratory System) 
Instructor (s) 
Eighth Period; One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text Reference. Chapter 2, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. 1 officer instructor and noncommissioned officer assist- 
ants. 
Equipment. Anatomical charts; skeleton; slides; ballopticon pic- 
tures; anatomical specimens; diagrams, and other in- 
structional aids beneficial to practical instruction. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference and Demonstration. 
1. Respiratory System. 
a. Component parts of the respiratory system, giving the names, 
location and function of each briefly. 
(1) Air passages—nose, pharynx, larynx, trachea, bronchi, 
lungs, air sacs. 
(2) Chest cavity (thorax)—mediastinum, diaphragm, pleura, 
pleural cavity. 
(B) Relationship to heart, blood vessels, diaphragm, esophagus 
and thoracic duct. 
b. Detailed anatomy of each part and its relation to the sur- 
face of the body. 
2. Composition of atmosphere and how lungs utilize the air. 
3. Function of lungs in heat regulation. Discuss close relationship 
and importance of the pulmonary circulation to respiration. 
4. Mechanism of respiration. 
173 (11) 
ELEMENTARY ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 
(Respiratory System) 
Instructor (s) 
Ninth Period; One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text Reference. Chapter 2, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. 1 officer instructor and noncommissioned officer assist- 
ants. 
Equipment. Anatomical charts; skeleton; slides; ballopticon pic- 
tures; anatomical specimens; diagrams, and other in- 
structional aids beneficial to practical instruction. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Procedure. Review the respiratory system by conference and an oral 
quiz. Make free use of all available and practical instructional aids. 
Encourage discussion and questions by the men. Give them oppor- 
tunity to use and study the instructional aids during their own time. 
Note. During this period it is well to stress the relationship be- 
tween the circulatory and respiratory systems. The import- 
ance of a knowledge of these systems in relation to first aid 
should be emphasized. 
174 (11) 
ELEMENTARY ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 
(The Digestive System) 
Instructor (s) 
Tenth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text Reference. Chapter 2, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. 1 officer instructor and noncommissioned officer assist- 
ants. 
Equipment. Anatomical charts; skeleton; slides; ballopticon pic- 
tures; anatomical specimens; diagrams, and other in- 
structional aids beneficial to practical instruction. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Procedure. Conference and demonstration of the digestive apparatus. 
1. Explanation of the purpose of the digestive apparatus. 
2. What are foods? Classification of foods: 
a. Proteins d. Minerals 
b. Fats e. Vitamins 
c. Carbohydrates 
3. The part each class of food plays in every day life. 
4. Anatomy of digestive system and the accessory organs of digestion. 
Their location, name and relation to other parts of the body. 
(1) Mouth (5) Liver and gall bladder 
(2) Esophagus (6) Pancreas 
(3) Stomach (7) Large intestine 
(4) Small intestine (8) Rectum 
Note. Take as an example an article of food and describe the 
normal process by which it is digested and assimilated. Bring 
out in simple, clear language the role of the enzymes in the 
digestion, and the absorption of the digested foods into the 
blood and lymphatic system. 
175 (11) 
ELEMENTARY ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 
(Review of the Digestive System) 
Instructor (s) 
Eleventh Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text Reference. Chapter 2, TM 8-220 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. 1 officer instructor and noncommissioned officer assist- 
ants. 
Equipment. Anatomical charts; skeleton; slides; ballopticon pic- 
tures; anatomical specimens; diagrams, and other in- 
structional aids beneficial to practical instruction. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Procedure. 
1. Review by conference and oral quiz. Make free use of all avail- 
able and practical instructional aids. 
2. Re-emphasize the important steps of digestion and assimilation, 
3. Stress the value of knowledge of anatomy and physiology in 
the proper understanding of dietary habits. 
4. Coordinate relationship of the digestive system to the circulatory 
and respiratory system. Stress the necessity of personal hygiene 
to maintain the proper function of these systems and its bearing 
on good health. 
176 (11) 
ELEMENTARY ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 
(Excretory System) 
Instructor (s) 
Twelfth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom, 
Text Reference. Chapter 2, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. 1 officer instructor and noncommissioned officer assist- 
ants. 
Equipment. Anatomical charts; skeleton; slides; ballopticon pic- 
tures; anatomical specimens; diagrams, and other in- 
structional aids beneficial to practical instruction. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Procedure. Conference and demonstration of the excretory system. 
1. Applied anatomy and physiology. 
a. The skin—as pertains to excretion. 
b. The lungs—as pertains to removal of carbon dioxide and 
moisture. 
c. The large intestines—as pertains to removal of solid waste 
products of digestion. 
d. The urinary system—as pertains to excretion of liquid waste 
products of the body. 
2. The relationship of the above to each other. 
177 (11) 
ELEMENTARY ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 
(The Urinary System) 
Instructor(s) 
Thirteenth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text Reference. Chapter 2, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. 1 officer instructor and noncommissioned officer assist- 
ants. 
Equipment. Anatomical charts; skeleton; slides; ballopticon pic- 
tures; anatomical specimens; diagrams, and other in- 
structional aids beneficial to practical instruction. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Procedure. Conference and demonstration of the urinary system. 
1. Component parts of the urinary system and their location. 
a. The kidneys. 
b. The ureters. 
c. The bladder. 
d. The urethra. 
2. Composition of urine. Value of analysis. Relation to disease. 
Course of urine from the kidney tubules to the urethral meatus. 
3. Blood supply of the urinary system. 
4. Relationship to the genital system. 
178 (11) 
ELEMENTARY ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 
(The Male Genital System) 
Instructor (s) 
Fourteenth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text Reference. Chapter 2, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. 1 officer instructor and noncommissioned officer assist- 
ants. 
Equipment. Anatomical charts; skeleton; slides; ballopticon pic- 
tures; anatomical specimens; diagrams, and other in- 
structional aids beneficial to practical instruction. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Procedure. Conference and demonstration of the male genital system. 
1. Component parts of the male genital system and their location. 
a. Reproductive organ; the testicle. 
b. Accessory reproductive organs: the vas deferens, seminal 
vehicles, the prostate gland, and the penis. The anatomy of the 
scrotum. 
c. Relate the function of each of the above. 
(1) Formation of the male cells (spermatozoa). Production 
of secretions necessary to convey the male cell. Trace 
course through the tubules of the epididymis (20 feet in 
length), the vas deferens and the urethra, 
(2) Relationship of the functions of the prostate gland and 
seminal vesicles to the male cell. 
2. Explain what is meant by rupture or hernia. Emphasize that 
hernia is not a veneral disesase but a weakening of the abdominal 
wall. 
179 (11) 
ELEMENTARY ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 
(Review of Excretory System and Genito-Urinary System) 
Instructor (s) 
Fifteenth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text Reference. Chapter 2, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. 1 officer instructor and noncommissioned officer assist- 
ants. 
Equipment. Anatomical charts; skeleton; slides; ballopticon pic- 
tures; anatomical specimens; diagrams, and other in- 
structional aids beneficial to practical instruction. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Procedure. 
1. Review by conference and an oral quiz the excretory system and the 
genito-urinary system. 
Make free use of the instructional aids. Continuous effort should 
be made to give the men logical, understandable and instructive 
answers to their questions. It is better that they have a medical 
officer in whom they have confidence as a source of information 
than to get it from some one perhaps misinformed. 
2. Stress the value of a knowledge of anatomy and physiology 
of the genito-urinary system to the personal hygiene of the 
soldier. 
3. Illustrate by means of instructional aids, the avenues through 
which venereal disease may spread through the genito-urinary 
system and to other parts of the body. 
4. Encourage questions and discussion by the men. 
Note. Stress the importance of the medical soldier being well 
equipped with knowledge of this subject. 
180 ELEMENTARY ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 
(11) 
(The Nervous System) 
Instructor (s) 
Sixteenth Period; One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text Reference. Chapter 2. TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. 1 officer instructor and noncommissioned officer assist- 
ants. 
Equipment. Anatomical charts; skeleton; slides; ballopticon pic- 
tures; anatomical specimens; diagrams, and other in- 
structional aids beneficial to practical instruction. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Procedure. Conference and demonstration of the nervous system, 
1. Component parts of the nervous system, and location of each. 
a. Cerebro-spinal system. 
(1) The brain: cerebrum, cerebellum. 
(2) The spinal cord. 
b. Sympathetic nervous system. 
2. Brief instruction concerning the function of the nervous system as a 
whole. Compare it to a well organized communication system. 
3. Discuss various functions of the brain; character of the brain tis- 
sue and how it may be injured; the seriousness of brain injuries. 
4. Describe anatomy and functions of spinal cord; the result of in- 
jury to the spinal cord. 
5. Names of the larger nerve trunks and their locations. 
6. Difference between motor and sensory nerves; explanation of re- 
flex action; trace out a nerve impulse from the sensory nerve to 
muscle response. 
7. Relationship of the nervous system to other systems of the body. 
181 (11) 
ELEMENTARY ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 
(The Special Senses) 
Instructor(s) 
Seventeenth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text Reference. Chapter 2, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. 1 officer instructor and noncommissioned officer assist- 
ants. 
Equipment. Anatomical charts; skeleton; slides; ballopticon pic- 
tures; anatomical specimens; diagrams, and other in- 
structional aids beneficial to practical instruction. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil 
Procedure. Conference and demonstration of the special senses. 
1. What they are, how they are controlled, anatomy and physiology 
of each. 
a. The eye—vision. 
Normal, near sighted, far sighted, astigmatism. 
b. The ear—hearing. 
External, middle, and internal. 
The eustachian tube. 
The mastoid cells. 
c. The nose—smell. 
The sinuses. 
d. The mouth—taste. 
e. Sensory nerve—touch. 
2. The relationship of each of the above to other senses. 
3. The relationship of the special senses to other systems of the body. 
182 (11) 
ELEMENTARY ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 
(The Male Endocrine System) 
Instructor (s) 
Eighteenth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text Reference. Chapter 2, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. 1 officer instructor and noncommissioned officer assist- 
ants. 
Equipment. Anatomical charts; skeleton; slides; ballopticon pic- 
tures; anatomical specimens; diagrams, and other in- 
structional aids beneficial to practical instruction. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Procedure. Conference and demonstration. 
1. Components of the male endocrine system and their location. 
a. Thyroid and parathroid. 
b. Pituitary gland. 
c. Suprarenal gland. 
d. Pancreas. 
e. Testicles. 
2. The secretions of the endocrine glands; the relationship of the var- 
ious hormones. 
3. Over activity of the endocrine glands. (Cite examples.) 
4. Under activity (hypo) of the endocrine glands. (Cite examples.) 
5. Relationship of the endocrine system to other systems of the body, 
and importance of proper function to good health. 
Note. Distribute to each man a list of the questions to be used 
in oral examination (card system) in the next period of 
Anatomy and Physiology. See Instructor’s Guide for 19th 
Period. 
183 (11) 
ELEMENTARY ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 
(Practical Test) 
Instructor(s) 
Nineteenth Period; Two Hours 
Place. Classroom. 
Text Reference. Chapter 2, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. 1 officer instructor and noncommissioned officer assist- 
ants. 
Equipment. All adaptable instructional aids used in the course; 
examination paper; prepared question cards. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Pencil. 
Procedure. Make this examination as practical as possible. 
During the first hour a number of important structures shown on 
the charts or other instructional aids may be tagged for identification 
by the men. Design this written examination so that answers may 
be brief. 
The last hour of the period should be used for an oral examination; 
this can be conducted with the card system to best advantage. A list of 
the questions that will be used is given to the men at the end of the 
previous period. The individual questions are typewritten on cards, 
and these are distributed to the men. They are required when 
called upon to answer the question they have received. The cards 
are collected at the end of the period for future use. 
184 (11) 
ELEMENTARY ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 
(Discussion of Examination) 
Instructor (s) 
Twentieth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text Reference. Chapter 2, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. 1 officer instructor and noncommissioned officer assist- 
ants. 
Equipment. Instructional aids used in course. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Procedure. Discussion on examination of previous period with clari- 
fication of any misunderstanding as evidenced by answers received. 
Summarize the course by explaining the need of continued study 
of anatomy and physiology by the medical soldier. Consider the re- 
lationship to first-aid treatment and to military hygiene. Link up 
the course again to other subjects such as x-ray, surgery, laboratory 
work, etc., to which some of the men will later undoubtedly be as- 
signed for special technical training. 
(12) 
NOMENCLATURE AND CARE OF ORGANIZATIONAL EQUIPMENT 
Purpose and Scope. The purpose of the instruction is to enable Medical 
Department soldiers to identify by correct terms the organizational 
equipment, and to properly care for this equipment. 
Actual Time Allotted. 6 hours. 
Text References. Appendix, Medical Department Supply Catalog; 
Tables of Basic Allowances, Medical Regiment, 1941; Appendix I, 
II, and III, FM 8-10; Chapter 6, TM 8-220. 
Methods of Instruction. Conference, Demonstration and Application. 
Standard of Proficiency. Each man to be able to identify and care 
for the essential items of organizational equipment that are used in the 
care and treatment of the sick and wounded in the field or while in the 
hospital. 
185 (12) 
NOMENCLATURE AND CARE OF ORGANIZATIONAL EQUIPMENT 
(The Medical and Dental Kits, Private) 
Instructor (s) 
First Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom or field. 
Text References. Appendix, Medical Department Supply Catalog, 1941; 
Appendix I, FM 8-10. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Two enlisted men, one with a disassembled medical kit 
and the other with a disassembled dental kit. 
Equipment. One each, kits, medical and dental, private, and one 
litter. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Kit, medical, private, for each soldier. 
Suggested Outline. Conference and Demonstration. 
1. Conference. 
a. Define and demonstrate expendable, nonexpendable and de 
eriorating medical supplies. 
b. Discuss property responsibility, its care and safekeeping. 
2. Demonstrate. 
a. The following parts of the kit for medical, private— 
Kit, pouch, canvas 
Kit, pouch, lace 
Kit, suspender 
Kit, cantle ring strap 
Kit, insert Type I 
Kit, litter strap 
b. The assembling of the kit, normal and expansion capacity. 
c. The contents of the kit, and the use and care of each item. 
d. The use of the litter straps and cantle ring strap. 
3. Practical Exercise. Have each soldier assemble his kit, normal 
capacity and expansion capacity. Have men replace items in the 
kit. Correct errors. 
4. Questions on material discussed during the conference. 
5. Demonstrate the dental private kit and contents in the same man- 
ner as was done with the medical private kit. 
186 (12) 
NOMENCLATURE AND CARE OF ORGANIZATIONAL EQUIPMENT 
(Battalion Medical Equipment) 
Instructor(s) 
Second Period: Two Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. Appendix, Medical Department Supply Catalog, 1941; 
Appendix II, III, FM 8-10. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Two litter bearers with medical kits. 
Equipment. Battalion medical equipment. 
Transportation. One truck. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline. Conference and Demonstration. 
1. Conference. Talk briefly on the use of the battalion medical 
equipment in camp and during combat. 
2. Demonstration. 
a. Establishment of aid station; name (1) the various items of 
equipment and (2) discuss their care and preservation. 
b. Demonstrate (1) improvised dressing or operating table, 
(2) dressed litter, (3) shock litter, (4) use of chest trays for 
dressing tables, (5) water sterilizing bag, (6) splint unit and 
contents, (7) cocoa unit, (8) surgical instruments, (9) collap- 
sible wheel litter, (10) sterilizer, (11) dressings and bandages, 
(12) drugs, (13) blanket set, (14) flag, Red Cross, (15) emer- 
gency medical tag, (16) clinical thermometers, and (17) lantern 
unit. 
c. Demonstrate step by step the packing of the equipment in 
proper containers. 
3. Questions on nomenclature and care of equipment. 
187 (12) 
NOMENCLATURE AND CARE OF ORGANIZATIONAL EQUIPMENT 
(Nomenclature of Equipment) 
Instructor (s) 
Third Period: One Hour 
Place. Field. 
Text References. Medical Department Supply Catalog, 1941; Section 
III, Chapter 6, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All enlisted and commissioned instructors. 
Equipment. One of each item listed as Class 2, 3, and selected 
items of Class 7 and 9. 
Transportation. One truck for transporting equipment. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline. Group items of equipment for display. Example; 
Display all bandaging material in one group, all surgical instruments 
in another, etc. 
Have a commissioned officer in charge of each display. 
Divide the unit into as many groups as there are displays, 
assigning a group to each display. Have the commissioned instructor 
name the various items and discuss their care and preservation. During 
the discussion the instructor should frequently point to an item of equip- 
ment and have a member of the group identify the item by name. Have 
groups rotate from one display to another on a prearranged time 
schedule. 
(12) 
NOMENCLATURE AND CARE OF ORGANIZATIONAL EQUIPMENT 
Instructor (s) 
Fourth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. Tables of Basic Allowances, Medical Regiment, 1941; 
Chapter 7, FM 8-10. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Basic unit, clearing company. (Established.) 
Transportation. Trucks for transporting basic unit. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
188 Suggested Outline. Conference and Demonstration. 
1. Conference. 
Discuss briefly the (1) operation, (2) equipment, and (3) 
transportation of a clearing station. 
2. Demonstration. 
Demonstrate the equipment in (1) office tent, (2) admission 
tent, (3) property tent, (4) shock tent, (5) waiting tent, (6) 
bath and preparation tent, (7) cot ward, and (8) surgical tent. 
Note. Station a commissioned instructor in each tent. Have each 
squad leader march his squad to a designated tent and have it 
pass from tent to tent on a previously arranged time sched- 
ule. Each instructor should name and demonstrate the 
items of equipment to the members of the squad and briefly dis- 
cuss their care and preservation. 
(13) 
FIELD MEDICAL RECORDS 
Purpose and Scope. To insure the medical soldier’s knowledge of how 
to quickly and accurately make out the records of sick and wounded in 
the field. This course should include the Emergency Medical Tag, the 
Station Logs, the Field Medical Record, and the Report of Sick and 
Wounded Sheet. 
Actual Time Allotted. 5 hours. 
Text References. Field Manual 8-45 ; Chapter 6, TM 8-220 ; AR 40-1025 
as amended by Circular 226, W.D., 1941. 
Methods of Instruction. Conference, Demonstration and Application. 
Standard of Proficiency. Each enlisted man must know when and how to 
make out the Emergency Medical Tag, Station Logs and Field Medical 
Record, including additional entries, their verification, authorized 
abbrevations and disposition. 
189 FIELD MEDICAL RECORDS 
(13) 
(Emergency Medical Tag) 
Instructor (s) 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. AR 40-1025; FM 8-45. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Blackboard; chalk and eraser; large chart represent- 
ing an Emergency Medical Tag (Form 52b, MD, Revised 
January 31, 1940.) 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Emergency Medical Tags (Form 52b,) MD, 
Revised January 31, 1940) or mimeographed reproductions of same 
for each soldier. 
Suggested Outline. Conference, demonstration and practical exercises. 
1. Conference. Explain briefly: 
a. The use of the Emergency Medical Tag. 
b. Purpose. 
c. By whom prepared. 
d. How attached to the patient. 
e. Authorized abbreviations. 
f. Disposition of original and carbon copies. 
2. Demonstration. Demonstrate in detail the preparation of the 
Emergency Medical Tag. (Use chart or blackboard.) 
3. Practical Exercises. Have each man prepare five Emergency 
Medical Tags from data furnished him. 
First Period; One Hour 
(13) 
FIELD MEDICAL RECORDS 
(Field Medical Record) 
Instructor(s) 
Second Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. FM 8-45; AR 40-1025. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Blackboard; chalk; eraser; large chart representing a 
field medical card and a field medical jacket (Forms 52c 
& 52d, MD). 
190 Transportation. None. 
(13) 
Individual Equipment. One field medical card; field medical jacket; 
lead pencil. 
Suggested Outline. Conference, demonstration and practical exercises. 
1. Conference. Discuss: 
a. The purpose of the field medical record. 
b. When initiated. 
c. Its contents. 
d. Alterations. 
e. Abbreviations. 
f. Its retention with the patient. 
g. Final disposition. 
2. Demonstration. Demonstrate the preparation of a field medical 
card and field medical jacket. 
3. Practical Exercises. Each man to prepare a field medical 
card and field medical record from data furnished him. 
(13) 
FIELD MEDICAL RECORDS 
(Monthly Report of Sick and Wounded) 
Instructor (s) 
Third Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. FM 8-45; AR 40-1025. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Blackboard; chalk; eraser; large chart representing 
a Report Sheet (Form 51, MD). 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Blank Report Sheet for each enlisted man. 
Suggested Outline. Conference, demonstration and practical exercise. 
1. Conference. Discuss the use and preparation of the report sheet. 
2. Demonstration. Demonstrate the preparation of the report 
sheet. 
3. Practical Exercise. Each soldier to prepare a monthly report of 
sick and wounded from data furnished him by the instructor. FIELD MEDICAL RECORDS 
(13) 
(Record of Casualties “Station Log” Form 86e, MD) 
Instructor (s) 
Place. Classroom. 
Text Reference. Paragraph 8, Appendix, and paragraph 80, FM 8-45. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Blackboard; eraser; chalk; large chart representing 
a station log (Form 86e, MD). 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. One mimeographed log for each enlisted man. 
Suggested Outline. Conference, demonstration and practical exercises. 
1. Conference. Discuss the use and preparation of a station log 
(Form 86e, MD). 
2. Demonstration. Demonstrate the preparation of a station log. 
3. Practical Exercises. Each man to prepare a station log from 
information furnished to him by the instructor. 
Fourth Period: One Hour 
(13) 
FIELD MEDICAL RECORDS 
(Review) 
Instructor (s) 
Fifth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. All previous text references. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. All previously used charts. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline. Brief review of field medical records. Questions on 
important points discussed during previous conferences, especially 
those pertaining to the preparation of the various field medical records. 
192 (14) 
TREATMENT OF GAS CASUALTIES 
Purpose and Scope. 
The purpose of these periods is to give the Medical Department 
soldier instruction in the classification and identification of the several 
chemical warfare agents. It includes a consideration of the pathologic 
effects produced by these agents as well as the treatment of chemical 
casualties. It must be remembered that very frequently the Medical De- 
partment soldier will be the first to see these casualties on the field. The 
better he is trained in the recognition and treatment of chemical lesions 
the more effectively will he be able to function in the “conservation of 
fighting strength”. The medical soldier must be impressed with the fact 
that speed is the essence of all preventive treatment, particularly in the 
case of casualties produced by vesicant agents. This is especially true 
when there is direct contamination with the liquid vesicants. Preventive 
treatment consists essentially of rapid and complete removal of con- 
taminated clothing and in freeing the skin of the contaminating substance. 
The scope of the instruction covers the physiological effect produced by, 
and first aid treatment of, the various chemical warfare agents. In this type 
of casualty “prophylactic measures are of great importance in reducing the 
incidence of potential chemical casualties, as immediate treatment following 
exposure is usually more beneficial than therapeutic measures applied after 
the symptoms of injury have begun to appear. Since the type of preventive 
treatment is often specific, some knowledge of the properties of chemical 
agents is desirable, if not essential, for the effective utilization of pre- 
ventive measures.” The emphasis on personal decontamination rests upon 
each individual soldier. 
Actual Time Allotted. 8 hours. 
Text References. 
Field Manual 21-40; paragaphs 4 and 8, Technical Manual 3-205; 
Technical Manual 8-285; Technical Manual 8-220. Training Circu- 
lars No. 3 and 4, W.D., Washington, D.C., 1942; Film Strip 3-1, 
“Chemical Agents and First Aid”; Training Film No. 8-304, “First 
Aid for Chemical Casualties.” 
Methods of Instruction. 
Conference, Demonstration, and Application. 
Standards of Proficiency. 
Each soldier must be able to classify chemical agents by their 
physiological effect upon the body, be able to identify the various agents 
in the field (principally by odor or color of the gas cloud), and be able 
to render prompt and correct prophylactic and first aid treatment for 
the various types of casualties. 
193 SUMMARY—SYMPTOMS AND FIRST AID TREATMENT OF 
(14) 
SYMPTOMS IN ORDER OF 
SEVERITY 
TYPE OF 
AGENTS 
AGENT 
SPECIAL 
PECULIARITIES 
Irritation of eyes 
Copious flow of tears 
Blindness (temporary) 
LACRIMATORS 
Chloracetophenone 
Brombenzylcy- 
anide 
Chlorpicrin (or- 
dinary field 
concentration) 
Burning sensation on 
skin 
May cause vomiting 
Irritation nose and throat 
Watery discharge from 
nose 
Coughing 
Pain at base of nose 
Severe headache 
Nausea 
Mental and physical 
depression 
IRRITANT 
GASES 
(Sternutators) 
Diphenlychlorar- 
sine 
Diphenylamine- 
chlorarsine 
' 
Burns on body 
INCENDIARIES 
White Phosphorus 
Thermits and 
solid oils 
Burning particles 
adhere to flesh 
Cause heat burns—set 
fire to clothing 
Irritation nose and throat 
Coughing 
Difficult breathing 
Pains in chest 
Retching—-vomiting 
Strangulation 
Blue pallor—lips, ear lobes 
Grayish pallor face 
LUNG 
IRRITANTS 
Chlorine 
Chlorpicrin (high 
concentration) 
Phosgene 
intense irritation of 
throat; violent cough- 
ing 
Lacrimation and vomit- 
ing 
Non-irritating except 
in high concentration 
VESICANTS* 
■ 
Eye Effects 
Irritation 
Inflammation of lids 
Inflammation of cornea 
Blindness (usually tem- 
porary: rarely per- 
manent) 
Mustard Gas 
Skin burns not painful; 
no effect noticed when 
exposed to gas, hence 
its insidious character 
Skin Effects 
Redness or rash 
Intense itching 
Blisters 
Ulcers 
Granulation and 
sloughing of tissue 
Lewisite 
Vapor causes sneezing, 
often at once. 
Liquid—Burns first 
appear as grayish 
splotches 
Burns not painful 
Secondary effects— 
arsenic poisoning 
Faintness, dizziness, dry- 
ness of throat, rush of 
blood to head, uncon- 
sciousness, death. 
Blurring of sight, weak- 
ness of knees, roaring in 
ears, pain in stomach, 
sweetish taste, muscular 
weakness, unconsciousness, 
failure of respiration, 
death. Cyanosis; and 
usually bluish or red 
splotches on skin. 
PARALYSANTS 
Hydrocyanic acid 
gas 
Carbon monoxide 
* NOTE: All the vesicant agents are extremely toxic. If breathed, they cause severe 
For effects on breathing, first aid as prescribed for lung irritants should 
194 CASUALTIES CAUSED BY EXPOSURE TO CHEMICAL AGENTS 
(14) 
TIME OF APPEAR- 
ANCE OF SYMPTOMS 
FIRST AID TREATMENT 
Immediate 
Immediate 
Immediate 
Remove temporarily from gas atmosphere; have man face 
wind. He should not rub his eyes. Bathing eyes with boric 
acid solution or bicarbonate of soda solution or even plain 
cold water helpful. Symptoms shortly disappear. Do not 
evacuate. Persistent pain may be relieved by instilling 2% 
Butyn Sulfate, or Neosynephrin HCL—Prontocain HCL in a 
saturated solution of boric acid. 
Irritation immediate; 
other effects may be 
delayed 30 minutes 
or longer 
Put man at rest loosen clothing; bathe nose and throat with 
salt water or bicarbonate of soda solution. Breathing chlorine 
as given off from bottle of chloride of lime beneficial. Keep 
away from heat. 
Mild cases need not be evacuated; more serious cases should 
be. 
Use nose drops of Neosynephrin HCL—Prontocain HCL in 
a saturated solution of boric acid. 
Immediate 
1 mmediate 
Immerse affected part in water to stop burning of phosphorus 
and pick out phosphorus particles from flesh. Dampen cloth 
with urine and apply as temporary expedient if water not 
available. If copper sulfate solution available, apply im- 
mediately. It forms coating over phosphorus particles; stops 
their burning and makes them readily visible so that they 
may be picked out. Evacuate severe cases. 
Other incendiaries-—Treat as any ordinary burn—bandage. 
Immedia te 
Usually immediate 
Often delayed 
Remove man from gas atmosphere; loosen clothing; keep at 
absolute rest lying down; do not allow to walk; keep warm 
with blankets, hot water bottle, etc.; give non-alcoholic stimu- 
lants—hot coffee or tea; administration of oxygen frequently 
required in severe cases; evacuate to aid station as soon as 
possible. 
Delayed 
Vapor—2 to 6 lirs. 
Liquid—15 min. to 
1 hr. 
Delayed—15 min. to 1 
hr. 
If face has been exposed to either mustard or Lewisite vapor, 
bathe the eyes, nose and throat with solution of boric acid, 
bicarbonate of soda or common salt; and if vapor has been 
breathed, treat and handle as for lung irritant casualty. 
Skin burns: 
Mustard vapor—Immediate soap and water bath may pre- 
vent or lessen casualties; but no treatment is of much value 
after long exposure to vapor. 
Mustard liquid—Remove excess with cloth sponge. Wash 
with a solution of Dichloramine T in 20% triacetin. If this 
is not available swab affected area repeatedly with oily 
solvent, such as kerosene, straight gasoline (not containing 
lead tetraethyl), lubricating oil or carbon tetrachloride (py- 
rene),—using fresh cloth or cotton for each swabbing. Then 
follow with thorough scrubbing with soap and water or use 
M-4 ointment and wipe off. 
(Weak solution of chloride of lime, or “bleach”, may be 
used instead of oily solvent; but this solution is irritating, and 
must be removed in subsequent washing). 
Lewisite vapor—Scrub thoroughly with soap and water; 
and sponge area with hydrogen peroxide. 
Lewisite liquid—Apply oxidizing agent, such as hydrogen 
peroxide. If this is not available scrub thoroughly with soap 
and water; and wash with 10% NaOH in 30% glycerin, then 
rinse thoroughly with water. 
Supply fresh uncontaminated clothing; and evacuate all but 
the most minor casualties from any vesicant as soon as pos- 
sible. 
HCN even in low con- 
centration usually 
fatal in few minutes. 
CO being odorless is 
frequently not detect- 
ed in time to avoid 
it. Generally fatal. 
Respiration is one vital requirement. Remove patient to pure 
atmosphere, and begin artificial respiration immediately. 
Dashing cold water on face and chest may help to restore 
breathing. 
If available, and during artificial respiration, have patient 
breathe fumes of ammonia or of amyl nitrite. 
(Additional oxygen not necessary;. 
Remove patient to pure atmosphere, and, if breathing has 
■eased, begin artificial respiration immediately. Dashing cold 
.voter on race and chest may help to restore breathing. 
Additional oxygen vitally necessary; and, if available, ad- 
minister oxygen-carbon dioxide mixture. 
Watch for relapse. 
1 
inflammation of the lungs likely to result in bacterial infection and pneumonia, 
be rendered. 
195 (14) 
TREATMENT OF GAS CASUALTIES 
(Lung Irritants) 
Instructor (s) 
Place. Classroom. 
First Period: One Hour 
Text References. Par. 5, 6, 38, FM 21-40; Sec. I and II, TM 8-285; Par. 
349-355, 362, 374-375, 376-381, 383 (c), TM 8-220. Chart, ‘Symp- 
toms and First Aid’, pages 194 and 195 this volume; TF 8-304. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Chart (prepare from data on page 6, EM 21-40 and 
chart referred to under text references) Set, Gas 
Identification, Instructional. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline. 
1. Conference. 
a. Show TF 8-304 (Running time 30 minutes). 
b. Briefly explain the course of instruction. 
c. Explain thoroughly the definitions of the following terms: 
(1) chemical agent, (2) persistent agent, (3) non-persis- 
tent agent, (4) casualty agent, (5) harassing agent, (6) 
incendiary agent, (7) lung irritant, (8) vesicant, (9) lac- 
rimator, (10) irritant smoke, (11) sternutator, (12) screen- 
ing smoke, (13) prophylaxis. 
d. Physiological classification of chemical agents. (Prepare a 
large chart showing this classification and use as a train- 
ing aid). 
e. With the aid of charts demonstrate and explain the (1) 
physiological characteristics of the lung irritants, (2) 
methods of identification in the field, (3) symptoms, and 
(4) first aid treatment. Explain thoroughly and emphasize 
the importance of absolute rest and warmth for ALL lung 
irritant cases, showing the importance of littering these 
patients to the aid stations. (NOTE: Be sure you are 
thoroughly familiar with Sec. II, TM 8-285 before starting 
this period of instruction.) 
2. Practical Exercise. 
Pass around samples of PS and CG, in the order here 
named (PS having the faintest odor), requiring the various 
members to describe the odor and identify the agent. Con- 
clude the hour with questions. 
196 TREATMENT OF GAS CASUALTIES 
(14) 
(Vesicants) 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Par. 5-17, 39, FM 21-40; Sec. Ill, TM 8-285; Par. 
355-359, 363-366; 369-374; 383 (d), TM 8-220. Chart, ‘Symp- 
toms and First Aid’, pages 194 and 195 this volume. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Charts. (Prepare from data on page 7, FM 21-40 and 
the chart referred to under text references.) Set, Gas 
Identification, Instructional. Chest, M.D., Treatment 
of Chemical Casualties. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline. 
1. Conference. 
a. Discuss (1) the object of chemical attack, (2) Methods of 
projecting vesicant agents (75 mm. gun the ideal as it will 
produce the greatest number of infected spots), (3) The 
effect of weather and terrain upon vesicant agents, (4) 
protective measures, (5) methods of identification in the 
field, (6) the danger of defecating or resting upon ground 
which has been contaminated by vesicant agents, (7) 
physiological effects upon the various portions of the body, 
(8) prophylactic and first aid treatment for vesicants. 
b. Discuss (1) the difference between the effects of Lewisite 
and mustard upon the body and the difference in treat- 
ment, (2) the fact that the product of hydrolysis of Lew- 
isite is in itself both toxic and vesicant, (3) the effects of 
breathing either mustard or Lewisite, (4) the difference 
between pervious and impervious protective clothing, (5) 
the disposition of contaminated clothing, (6) protective 
measures in handling vesicant casualties. (NOTE: Em- 
phasize the fact that ALL medical personnel must apply 
to themselves ALL possible means of protection since the 
effects of the vesicants are cumulative. 
2. Practical Exercise. 
Distribute samples of M-l and HS, in the order named, 
requiring the various members to describe the odor and 
identify the agent. 
197 (14) 
TREATMENT OF GAS CASUALTIES 
(Lacrimators, Irritant Smokes, and Incendiaries) 
Instructor(s) 
Third Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Par. 5, 6, 36, 37, 40, FM 21-40; Sec. IV, V, VI, VII, 
TM 8-285; Par. 360, 361, 368, 383 (a) (b), TM 8-220. Chart, 
“Symptoms and First Aid,” pages 194 and 195 this volume. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None, 
Equipment. Charts. (Prepare from data on pages 9 and 10, FM 
21-40 and chart refered to under text references.) 
Set, Gas Identification, Instructional (one per squad) 
Chest, M.D., Treatment of Chemical Casualties. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline. 
1. Conference. 
a. Lacrimators. 
Discuss (1) characteristics of lacrimators, (2) the phys- 
iological effects, (3) persistency, (4) general tactical use, 
particularly in training and riot duty, (5) method of identi- 
fication in the field, and (6) first aid treatment (emphasize 
the fact that under no circumstances should the eyes be 
rubbed or bandaged.) 
b. Discuss (1) characteristics of the irritant smokes, (2) the 
physiological effects, (3) persistency, (4) general tactical 
use, (5) method of identification in the field, and (6) first 
aid treatment. 
c. Discuss (1) characteristics of incendiaries, (2) the phys- 
iological effects, (3) persistency, (4) general tactical use, 
and (5) first aid treatment. 
2. Practical Exercise. 
a. Distribute samples of DM and CN, in the order named, to the 
group requiring the various members to describe the odor 
and identify the agent. 
b. If time permits distribute samples of the agents used in the 
previous periods (covering the name upon the bottle) and 
require various members to identify the agent. 
198 (14) 
TREATMENT OF GAS CASUALTIES 
(Demonstration and Review) 
Instructor (s) 
Fourth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Par. 9 (d) (e), 10 (d) (e), TM 8-285 for the demon- 
stration. All previous references for the review. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. For demonstration. A small amount of dark molasses 
into which has been stirred a few drops of the liquid 
formed from the maceration of a crushed clove of 
garlic with a small amount of water; swabs, made 
with applicators and absorbent cotton; absorbent 
cotton; three pans or basins; soap; water; M-l 
ointment; table; rubber gloves; diluted tincture io- 
dine; diaphragm mask. 
For Review. All previous charts. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None; 
Suggested Outline. 
1. Demonstration, Purpose: to show the proper technic for the re- 
moval of vesicant agents, particularly the liquid agents, from 
skin. 
a. Use one of the enlisted men as a subject. Have him roll up a 
sleeve. Swab some of the molasses (simulated mustard) 
on his arm; then following the method outlined in para- 
graph 9 (d), TM 8-285 remove the molasses. In remov- 
ing the molasses (simulated mustard) from the arm be 
sure the swabs are slightly dampened in the water of the first 
basin (simulated kerosene or other hydrocarbon solvent) ; 
then starting at the outer edge of the contaminated area 
work inward with a spiralling motion, covering the area 
only once with any one swab. Repeat. Then use swabs 
dampened with soap and water, then rinse with clear 
water. Emphasize the necessity of using dampened swabs, 
not swabs so wet that the solvent will run and thus spread 
the contaminating substance to uncontaminated portions 
of the body. 
199 (14) 
b. Repeat the demonstration this time using the diluted iodine 
to simulate the mustard contaminated area and using the 
M-l ointment in place of the simulated hydrocarbons for 
the removal of the simulated mustard. First absorb the 
excess simulated mustard with dry pads of cotton; then 
use swabs coated with M-l ointment. Remove the oint- 
ment with dry swabs and finally wash with soap and water, 
then rinse. Again emphasize the necessity of going over 
any given area but once with any one swab. Emphasize the 
necessity for all medical personnel applying to themselves all 
protective measures possible in order that they do not 
become casualties through the cumulative action of the 
vesicants. 
(NOTE: During both demonstrations the instructor should 
wear the rubber gloves and the diaphragm mask and also make 
the statement that he is wearing impregnated clothing and 
further explain that in the Theatre of Operations all person- 
nel will be issued the impregnated clothing, which is vesi- 
cant resistant to a much higher degree than ordinary cloth- 
ing. The fact that the instructor is wearing the mask during 
the demonstration will demonstrate that it is possible to car- 
ry on ones normal work while wearing the mask, without 
experiencing undue discomfort.) 
2. Review. 
a. Review the symptoms of casualties produced by: 
(1) Phosgene CG 
(2) Chlorine Cl 
(3) Chlorpicrin PS 
(4) Mustard HS 
(5) Lewisite M-l 
(6) Chloracetophenone CN 
(7) Adamsite DM 
(8) Sneeze gas DA 
(9) White Phosphorus WP 
b. Review the methods of field identification of each of the 
above agents. 
c. Review the physiological classification of each of the above 
agents. 
d. Review the types of terrain most suitable as gas targets. 
e. Review the protective measures required against each of 
the above agents. 
200 (14) 
TREATMENT OF GAS CASUALTIES 
(Practical Exercise) 
Instructor (s) 
Fifth Period: Four Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References: All previous references, and Par. 68, FM 21-40. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Post or Division Chemical Warfare Officer (Consultant 
and Supervisor) 
All Unit Instructors. 
9 patients (gas casualties). Selected men may be used 
as patients. 
Equipment. Diaphragm gas masks for all instructors and patients. 
CN Candles or grenades, Smoke Pots, HC (Number to 
be determined by Chemical Warfare Officer) ; Litters, 
one per four men; Paper Slips, 10 per soldier (Cut 
letter size paper in quarter). 
Transportation. Use of transportation dependent upon the distance 
to the field where the exercise is to be held. 
Individual Equipment. Gas mask; Stripped Pack; Medical Soldier’s 
Field Equipment. 
Suggested Outline. 
1. Conference. Discuss paragraph 68, FM 21-40 with those sec- 
tions waiting to start out on the problem. 
2. Practical Exercise. 
Prior to the exercise contact the Post or Division Chemical Officer 
and accompanied by this officer or his assistant select the location 
for the exercise. Endeavor to have certain of the patients located 
at sites which will be favorable for the use of smoke and tear gas. 
The various patients should be located within sight of each other 
for purposes of control, or if woods or ravines prevent this then use 
a time control. Unit instructors with each patient also act as regu- 
lators. Areas between certain of the stations should be marked as 
gassed areas and an officer stationed there to quiz the sections as to 
how they would cross this area or otherwise reach the next station. 
This exercise can best be worked as a battalion problem. This 
outline serving only as a general guide, the details will be best work- 
ed out for each group and will depend upon available sites, terrain 
features, etc. 
201 From the battalion control point successive litter bearer sec- 
tions (four litter bearer squads and a non-commissioned officer) 
are started out over the prescribed route and proceed to the first 
station, which should be at a sufficient distance from the control 
point that it will be possible to subject the group to a low concentra- 
ton of tear gas, thus forcing them to mask. They should test for gas 
before reaching the first patient and should reach the first patient 
unmasked. At each station each man, after hearing the patient’s 
monologue, writes down what chemical agent he thinks has pro- 
duced the casualty and what prophylactic or first aid treatment he 
would administer. The paper slip so filled out will be turned in to 
the control officer with each patient. After receiving the last slip 
this officer will release the group and they will proceed to the next 
station. 
As each company completes the problem they will revert to the 
temporary control of their company commander, who will immedi- 
ately hold a critique on the exercise, basing his remarks upon per- 
sonal observation of the various stations. 
(14) 
Monologues for the various patients. 
(The mechanics of this problem and the following monologues 
should be rehearsed several times prior to putting on the prob- 
lem. Anything you can do to make the patient appear more 
realistic will add to the effectiveness of the exercise, i.e., paint- 
ing the hands, lips, and ear lobes with a dilute solution of 
methylene blue to simulate the appearance of cyanosis.) 
1. Chlorine Casualty. 
“While up at the front I noticed a greenish-yellow cloud 
drifting toward me. Shortly afterwards my nose began to burn, 
my eyes smart and I began to choke and cough. Immediately I 
put on my gas mask but in a short time I became sick at my 
stomach, my chest hurts and I am so weak I can hardly walk.” 
2. Phosgene Casualty. (Mild) 
“About an hour or two ago, while advancing with my company, 
we were held up by an artillery barrage. We did not notice any 
particular odor, other than high explosive, but my chest pains and 
I am so weak I can hardly walk. It is hard to breathe and I cannot 
take a deep breath at all. While waiting here to try to get enough 
strength to walk back to the aid station I tried to smoke but the 
cigarettes all taste rotten.” 
3. Lewisite Casualty. . 
“My company has been in reserve in those woods (pointing). 
Early this morning it was heavily shelled by 75’s. We noticed a faint 
aromatic odor, something like geraniums, and put on our masks. 
As soon as possible we moved out to this position, but before we 
202 could move out, my hands became somewhat red and in about 
four hours small blisters appeared although many of these have 
now run together into larger blisters.” 
(14) 
4. Phosgene Casualty. (Severe) 
“About five o’clock this morning our bivouac area was sub- 
jected to a tremendous burst of heavy artillery fire. Hundreds of 
shells came over in a couple of minutes. A strong odor of fresh 
cut hay filled the air. I immediately put on my mask but had a 
hard time doing so as I had a severe fit of coughing then, but 
after getting my mask on I felt better for a while and then my 
head began to ache, my chest pains and I am too weak to move.” 
(Patient to breathe rapidly and shallowly while slowly giving 
his monologue.) 
5. Mustard Casualty. 
“My company was bivouacked in that woods (pointing). Dur- 
ing the night we were shelled by light artillery, but the shells were 
scattered all over the area. We thought we could get a faint garlic 
odor and so put on our masks. After wearing the mask about half 
an hour I tested for gas, and not smelling any, took my mask off. A 
couple hours or so later my eyes began to smart and water and now 
they feel swollen. I have been sneezing and my nose runs almost like 
I was catching cold. My face, neck, and hands itch and my hands 
look as though they had been sunburned.” 
6. Chloracetophenone Casualty. (Tear Gas) 
Patient is still wearing his mask. Have CN on this area to force 
men coming to this station to wear their masks while there. 
“Just a short time ago the enemy laid down a smoke screen on 
us and later attacked. The smoke smelled aromatic, something like 
apple blossoms, and it caused my eyes to itch and water, I put on my 
gas mask but my eyes watered so much that I could not fire my 
gun. The sergeant told me to have my eyes treated but I am still 
crying too much to be able to see to walk.” 
7. Adamsite (DM) Casualty. 
Have smoke on this position if possible. 
“I was advancing with my company when we saw a bright 
yellow smoke cloud coming toward us. I must not have adjusted my 
mask properly for when the cloud hit us I soon felt a severe pain in 
my nose and I could not keep from sneezing, my throat burned and 
my chest hurt, and I became so sick that I had to vomit and now I 
am so damned sick I don’t care what happens.” 
8. White Phosphorous. 
“While my company was advancing thru those woods (point- 
ing), some mortar shells burst near and sprayed dirt all over us. 
The shells threw streamers of fire and formed a dense white 
203 (14) 
smoke. Almost immediately I felt a number of small burns on 
my hands and face and now they burn like hell.” 
9. Chlorpicrin Casualty. 
“We were at the front and the enemy fired a projector shot 
at us. The gas alarm sounded and we all adjusted our masks. I had 
been carrying my tobacco can in the gas mask carrier and it must 
have put a crimp in the facepiece because I could not make the mask 
fit tight enough to keep out the gas. The gas did not have a strong 
odor, in fact, if I had not started to cry I would not have realized the 
gas was there right away. After a few moments I could faintly smell 
a sweet odor, something like flypaper. I was soon nauseated and 
have vomited several times, my chest hurts and it is hard to breathe. 
I have coughed so much I am worn out.” 
Note: At the critique it is suggested that the company commander 
point out certain of the obvious errors in gas discipline and 
training, such as, the patient who stated that he had tested for 
gas and of his own accord had taken off his mask; the sergeant 
telling the patient to go back for treatment for tear gas; lack 
of proper care in the adjustment of the gas mask; and the 
carrying of anything in the gas mask carrier other than the 
mask, etc. 
204 (15) 
LITTER DRILL, INCLUDING AMBULANCE LOADING AND 
UNLOADING, AND PASSAGE OF OBSTACLES 
Purpose and Scope. The purpose of this instruction is to familiarize the 
enlisted man with various methods of transportation of casualties, 
especially by means of the litter transport over difficult terrain, 
and with the correct procedure in ambulance loading and un- 
loading. 
This course should be practical in nature, with applicatory exer- 
cises on rough terrain illustrating the surmounting of obstacles, and the 
use of defiladed routes under day and night conditions. 
Actual Time Allotted. 10 hours. 
Text References. Field Manual 8-35; FS 8-16 Ambulance loading and 
unloading; Training Film 8-33. 
Methods of Instruction. Conference, Demonstration and Application. 
Standard of Proficiency. The soldier should know— 
1. Methods and use of manual transport for sick and wounded. 
2. Types of litters and adjuncts to litters: aeroplane litter, wheeled 
litter carrier, improvised litters. 
3. Correct methods of transporting litter patients with maximum bene- 
fit to patient over all kinds of terrain with special reference to 
common obstacles. 
4. Use of defiladed routes, and formations for litter bearers under 
battle conditions; special problems presented by night conditions. 
5. Correct method of loading and unloading an ambulance. 
205 (15) 
LITTER DRILL, INCLUDING AMBULANCE LOADING AND 
UNLOADING, AND PASSAGE OF OBSTACLES 
(Litter Drill) 
Instructor (s) 
First Period: One Hour 
Place. Demonstration area. 
Text Reference. Chapters 1 to 4, inclusive, FM 8-35 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Officers—1 (instructor in charge) ; assistant instruct- 
ors—1 (chief demonstrator) ; enlisted men—2 litter 
squads. 
Equipment. As many different types of litters as are available; 
material for improvising litters. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Procedure. Conference and demonstration. 
1. Introductory remarks: 
a. Relation of transportation to the medical task. 
b. The importance of evacuation of wounded to the efficiency 
of the military machine. 
2. Evacuation of patients from field without litters or other equipment. 
a. Factors to be considered such as the nature of the disability. 
b. Methods: supporting carry; the arms carry; the saddle-back 
carry; the fireman’s carry. Method depends on nature of dis- 
ability and distance the casualty must be transported. 
3. The litter. Litters employed by the Medical Department: canvas 
aluminum pole litter; canvas wooden pole litter; canvas folding 
litter; metal airplane litter. 
A suitable demonstration to include above features should accompany 
this instruction. 
206 (15) 
LITTER DRILL, INCLUDING AMBULANCE LOADING AND 
UNLOADING, AND PASSAGE OF OBSTACLES 
(Litter Drill Including Passage of Obstacles) 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period: One Hour 
Place. Demonstration area 
Text References. Chapters 1 to 4, inclusive, FM 8-35; Training Film 
8-33. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Officers—1 (instructor in charge) ; assistant instruct- 
ors—1 (chief demonstrator) ; enlisted men—2 litter 
squads. 
Equipment. As many different types of litters as are available; 
material for improvising litters; one litter for each 
demonstration squad. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Procedure. Conference and demonstration. 
1. Brief review of subject matter covered in first hour. 
2. The litter, continued. Improvisation of litters: rifle litter with 
overcoat, blanket, or blouse; pole litters with blanket, blouse, 
overcoat, shelter half or similar items. 
3. The litter drill with empty and loaded litters. Reason for instruction. 
Care of patient. 
4. Obstacles: a. Types, b. Methods of passing. 
5. Use of defiladed routes, cover and concealment. Problems presented 
by night conditions. 
6. A demonstration will accompany this conference, step by step. 
207 (15) 
LITTER DRILL, INCLUDING AMBULANCE LOADING AND 
UNLOADING, AND PASSAGE OF OBSTACLES 
(Litter Drill Including Passage of Obstacles) 
Instructor(s) 
Third Period: Two Hours 
Place. Training area. 
Text Reference. Chapters 1 to 4, inclusive, FM 8-35. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Officer (instructor in charge) ; noncommissioned officers 
—1 (sergeant instructor) assistant instructor for each 
platoon of enlisted men. 
Equipment. Wheeled litter carrier; airplane litter; necessary ma- 
terial for improvising litters; one litter (old style) for 
each litter squad and one for each demonstrating 
squad; natural and improvised obstacles. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Field and fatigue uniform. 
Procedure. Application. This period will be used for application of all 
matter covered in preceding periods of instruction, including: 
1. Manual transport of sick and wounded, with each man actually 
executing the various methods. 
Demonstration. The instructor makes pertinent remarks con- 
cerning the manual transport for sick and wounded (FM 8-35, 
Chapter 2). 
Demonstrate: 
a. The fireman’s carry. 
b. The saddle-back carry. 
c. The arms carry. 
d. The saddle-back carry. (2 bearers) 
e. The supporting carry. (2 bearers) 
f. The arms carry. (2 bearers) 
g. The pack-saddle carry. (2 bearers) 
Students are given an opportunity to ask questions at the end 
of each phase of the demonstration. Any phase or a part of 
any phase may be re-demonstrated if desired. 
2. Improvisation of litters. 
3. Litter drill. 
4. To pass obstacles. See paragraphs 22, 23 and 24, FM 8-S5. 
208 (15) 
LITTER DRILL, INCLUDING AMBULANCE LOADING AND 
UNLOADING, AND PASSAGE OF OBSTACLES 
(Ambulance Loading and Unloading) 
Instructor (s) 
Fourth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Training area. 
Text References. Field Manual 8-35; Film Strip 8-16. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Officer instructor in charge; one sergeant instructor; 
assistant instructor for each platoon; one litter squad; 
demonstrators; motor ambulance; four men as patients. 
Equipment. One ambulance, equipped with four litters for each 
eight enlisted men. Numerical placards, front and back, 
for each demonstrator. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Procedure. Demonstration and application, using the Group Perform- 
ance Method. 
209 (15) 
LITTER DRILL, INCLUDING AMBULANCE LOADING AND 
UNLOADING, AND PASSAGE OF OBSTACLES 
[Evacuation of Patients from a Field by Means of Manual Transport 
and Various Types of Litters; Ambulance Loading and Unloading 
(Daytime).] 
Instructor (s) 
Fifth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Selected area which has natural obstacles, and is suitable for 
showing use of defilade, etc. 
Text Reference. Chapters 1 to 5, inclusive, FM 8-35. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. As many instructors, officers and noncommissioned of- 
ficers as are available to make this an effective ex- 
ercise. Soldiers should be used as patients. 
Equipment. Litters; wheeled litter carriers; ambulances. 
Transportation. That necessary to transport men to training area. 
Individual Equipment. Field uniform, strip packs, medical equipment. 
Procedure. Application. The success of this and the following period 
depends on the plans and preparation of the instructors in charge. 
This would include a reconnaissance of the area to be used for 
instruction. These exercises should be made as practical as pos- 
sible : various types of simulated casualties are scattered over a 
rough terrain, with routes available for litter bearers that demon- 
strate the necessity of cover, concealment and defilade and the 
ability to surmount natural obstacles. Ambulances should be avail- 
able at the end of the litter-carry, so that the casualties may be 
loaded in proper manner. Arrangements should also be made 
for the unloading of these. The men should be rotated through the 
various activities as much as possible without disrupting the ex- 
ercise. 
210 (15) 
LITTER DRILL, INCLUDING AMBULANCE LOADING AND 
UNLOADING, AND PASSAGE OF OBSTACLES 
[Evacuation of Patients from a Field by Means of Manual Transport 
and Various Types of Litters; Ambulance Loading and Unloading 
(Night).] 
Instructor (s) 
Sixth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Selected area which has natural obstacles and which is suitable 
for showing use of protective concealment, cover, and defilade. 
Text Reference. Chapters 1 to 4, inclusive, FM 8-35. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. As many instructors, officers and noncommissioned of- 
ficers as are available jto make this an effective exer- 
cise. Soldiers should be used as patients. 
Equipment. Litters; wheeled litter carriers; ambulances. 
Transportation. Such as is necessary to transport men to instruc- 
tional area. 
Individual Equipment. Field uniform; stripped packs; individual medi- 
cal equipment. 
Procedure. Application. The success of this exercise depends on the 
plans and efficient preparation by the instructors in charge. It is 
similar to the preceding exercise except that this illustrates the 
additional problems presented by night conditions. 
211 (16) 
FIELD SANITATION AND SANITARY APPLIANCES 
Purpose and Scope. This course of instruction is to teach the enlisted 
men the various measures of control of communicable diseases and 
the various sanitary appliances used in the camp and field. The 
men should be familiar with the construction, care, and operation 
of the essential field sanitary appliances and devices. 
Actual Time Allotted. Twenty hours. 
Text References. Field Manual '8-40; Field Manual 21-10; Film Strips 
8-1 to 8-5 and 8-9 to 8-12 inclusive. 
Methods of Instruction. Conference, Demonstration and Application. 
Standard of Proficiency. Each soldier should know and observe: 
1. General control measures for the following communicable di- 
seases: 
a. Food or water-borne diseases. 
b. Respiratory diseases: Squad room ventilation and bed spac- 
ing. 
c. Insect-borne diseases. 
d. Venereal diseases. 
e. Communicable diseases not included in above classes. 
2. March sanitation. 
a. March discipline. 
b. Care of the feet. 
c. Water discipline. 
3. Sanitation for camp and camp sites (in general). 
4. Sanitation as to water supply; field water purification. 
a. Sources of water. 
b. Protection of water supply sources. 
c. Location of water sources (flagging streams). 
d. Water sterilization. 
(1) Boiling and distillation. 
(2) By chlorination: Lyster bag and calcium hypochlorite, 
canteen method, and water cart method. How to test 
it with orthotolidine. 
(3) By use of iodine. 
5. Disposal of wastes, 
a. Human excreta. 
(1) On the march, in temporary camps and in camps of 
more than one week. 
212 (16) 
(2) How to construct, care and operate pit latrines, urinals 
and urine soakage pits. 
b. Animal excreta. How to construct, care for and operate a 
compost pile for manure. How fly breeding in compost pile 
is controlled. 
c. Garbage disposal. How to construct, care for and operate: 
(1) Company incinerator. 
(2) Garbage stands. 
(3) Garbage strainer. 
(4) Filter and baffle grease traps. 
(5) Soakage trench. 
(6) By burial. 
d. Disposal of other wastes: Rubbish cans, carcasses, and sal- 
vage material. 
6. Sanitation of field messes. 
a. Food handlers. (AR 40-205.) Why is food handlers inspection 
required? 
b. Cleaning mess kits. 
c. Fly control. 
(1) Control of breeding. 
(2) Larvicides. 
(3) Destruction of the adult fly. 
7. Mosquito control. 
a. Study of the life cycle of mosquitoes. 
b. Drainage. 
c. Larvicides. 
8. Sanitation of swimming pools. 
a. Shower baths. 
b. Foot baths. 
9. Relationship of sanitation to personnel and military hygiene. 
213 (16) 
FIELD SANITATION AND SANITARY APPLIANCES 
(Introduction: Communicable Diseases) 
Instructor (s) 
Place. Classroom, 
Text References. Pages 1 to 3 inclusive, and 5 to 11, inclusive, FM 8-40; 
pages 1 to 3, inclusive, and 5 to 12, inclusive, FM 21-10. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. 1 officer for each company. 
Equipment. Chart showing relation between source and transmit- 
ting agencies. (See Figure 1, page 6, FM 21-10). 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Procedure. Conference. 
1. Introduction to military sanitation. Importance to the individual and 
to the unit. 
2. Responsibility for area sanitation (brief) : 
a. The commanding officer. 
b. The Medical Department. 
(1) Medical inspectors. 
(2) Sanitation details. 
3. Control of communicable diseases. 
a. Classification and brief explanation. 
(1) Respiratory diseases. 
(2) Food and water-borne diseases. 
(3) Insect-borne diseases. 
(4) Venereal diseases. 
(5) Other diseases. 
b. Definitions. 
(1) Contact. 
(2) Carrier: true and pseudo carriers. 
(3) Suspect. 
(4) Quarantine: working and absolute. 
c. General control measures. Use chart. 
(1) Environment. 
(2) Primary factors in spread. 
(a) Seed—bacteria. 
(b) Sower—carrier. 
(c) Soil—susceptible individual. 
(3) Establishment of isolation and quarantine. 
(4) Observation or detention camps. 
(5) Control of transmitting agencies. 
(6) Immunization, 
(7) Treatment. 
(8) Physical training and discipline. 
First Period: One Hour 
214 (16) 
FIELD SANITATION AND SANITARY APPLIANCES 
(Respiratory Diseases) 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period; One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Pages 12 to 16, inclusive, FM 8-40; pages 13 to 20, 
inclusive, FM 21-10. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. 1 officer for each company 
Equipment. Chart: Showing control of respiratory diseases, Figure 
Fig. I, page 12, FM 8-40; Figure II, page 14, FM 21-10. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Procedure. Conference. 
1. Control of Respiratory Diseases. Use chart. 
a. Principal respiratory diseases, brief discussion on: 
(1) Common upper respiratory infections. 
(2) Mumps. 
(3) Measles. 
(4) Pneumonias. 
(5) Meningitis. 
(6) Diphtheria. 
(7) Influenza. 
(8) Chicken pox. 
(9) Tuberculosis. 
b. By use of chart show relationship between: 
(1) Case or carrier. 
(2) Contact by air, hands, food, and mess equipment. 
(3) Control of transmission or contact. 
(4) Protection of susceptibles. 
(a) Isolation. 
(b) Quarantine. 
(c) Warm clothing. 
(d) Immunization. 
c. Barracks and tent sanitation. 
(1) Spitting. 
(2) Sweeping. 
(3) Drinking cups and towels. 
(4) Sneezing. 
(5) Bedding. 
215 (16) 
FIELD SANITATION AND SANITARY APPLIANCES 
(Bed Space and Ventilation) 
Instructor(s) 
Third Period: One Hour 
Place. Barracks 
Text References. Pages 12 to 16, inclusive, FM 8-40; pages 13 to 20, 
inclusive, FM 21-10. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. 1 officer and sergeant for each platoon; 1 noncommis- 
sioned officer per squad. 
Equipment. Beds, shelter tents and sheets; pyramidal tents, sev- 
eral having the proper arrangements of bunks. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Procedure. Demonstration and application. 
1. Demonstration in barracks and pyramidal tents, by squads. 
a. Bed spacing. 
(1) Six feet between heads. 
(2) Head to foot sleeping. 
(3) Cubicles. 
(a) Shelter half. (b) Sheets. 
b. Ventilation. 
(1) Barracks. 
(2) Tents. 
2 Application. 
a. The men are divided into squads and are required to ar- 
range cots or beds in proper fashion in regard to bed spacing. 
They are to construct a cubicle using a shelter half, and also 
using bed sheet cubicle. 
b. The same sections are to demonstrate the proper ventilation 
of a squad room and tent. 
216 (16) 
FIELD SANITATION AND SANITARY APPLIANCES 
(Venereal Diseases) 
Instructor(s) 
Fourth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Pages 22 to 24, inclusive, FM 8-40; pages 110 to 114, 
inclusive, FM 21-10. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. 1 officer for each company; one sergeant for each 
platoon. 
Equipment. Venereal Prophylactic Set. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Procedure. Conference. 
1. Prophylactic treatment. Use language understandable to all 
enlisted men. 
2. Concurrent disinfection. 
3. Venereal diseases. 
a. Nomenclature. 
(1) Syphilis. 
(2) Gonorrhea. 
(3) Chancroid. 
(4) Lymphogranuloma inguinale. 
b. General control measures. 
(1) Prevention of exposure. 
(2) Prevent development of disease in those exposed. 
c. Mechanical Prophylaxis. Condoms. 
d. Chemical Prophylaxis. 
(1) In prophylactic stations. (2) Individual prophylactic 
packets. 
e. Operation of prophylactic station. Using the venereal pro- 
phylactic set, the sergeants will demonstrate before each platoon 
of soldiers the setting up, care and operation of a venereal 
prophylactic station. The method of applying venereal pro- 
phylaxis will be discussed. 
217 FIELD SANITATION AND SANITARY APPLIANCES 
(16) 
(Lyster Bag) 
Instructor (s) 
Fifth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Sanitary area. 
Text References. Pages 30 to 81, inclusive, FM 8-40; pages 25 to 27, 
inclusive, FM 21-10. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One officer and one sergeant for each platoon; one 
noncommissioned officer for each squad of enlisted 
men. 
Equipment. Lyster bag; water sterilizing, calcium hypochlorite; 
canteen; Orthotolidine set; and table. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Each enlisted man to have his canteen and 
canteen cup. 
Procedure. Demonstration and application 
1. In first hour set up Lyster bag. Fill with water from creek or other 
source. Proceed step by step to treat water with Grade A calcium 
hypochlorite and show reaction of treated water with orthotolidine. 
Show also reactions of over-and under-chlorinated water and al- 
kaline waters. Demonstrate emergency method of utilizing can- 
teen if no bag is available. Show methods of remedying over-and 
under-chlorination. 
2. In second hour have men in squads go through the same proce- 
dure demonstrated in paragraph 1 above. 
218 (16) 
FIELD SANITATION AND SANITARY APPLIANCES 
(Disposal of Kitchen Wastes) 
Instructor (s) 
Sixth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Sanitary area. 
Text References. Pages 50 to 66, FM 8-40; pages 38 to 52, inclusive, 
FM 21-10. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. 1 officer for each company; 1 officer and 1 sergeant 
for each platoon; 1 noncommissioned officer for each 
squad. 
Equipment. Barrels or oil drums; shovels and saws; G.I. cans. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Procedure. 
1. Conference, (for a company). Brief discussion on disposal of 
kitchen wastes— 
a. Incineration. 
b. Burial. 
c. Sale or gift. 
2. Demonstration. Enlisted men in platoons will inspect sanitary 
devices used for the disposal of kitchen wastes in sanitary area. 
3. Application. 
a. Men to work in squad groups. 
b. Construction of cross trench incinerator by each squad under 
the supervision of the noncommissioned officer. 
c. Construction of baffle grease trap by each squad under the 
supervision of noncommissioned officer. 
219 (16) 
FIELD SANITATION AND SANITARY APPLIANCES 
(Mess Sanitation and Fly Control) 
Instructor (s) 
Seventh Period: Two Hours 
Place. Mess halls and kitchens. 
Text References. Pages 72 to 79, inclusive, and pages 96 to 105, in- 
clusive, FM 8-40; pages 53 to 75, inclusive, FM 21-10. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. 1 officer and a sergeant for each platoon; 1 noncom- 
missioned officer for each squad. 
Equipment. Any of the standard flytraps and any of the standard 
fly baits. 
Transportation. None. 
Procedure. Conference and demonstration. 
1. Fly control. 
a. Brief discussion of the importance of flies in intestinal dis- 
ease transmission. 
b. Brief discussion of flies, habits and breeding. 
2. Mess sanitation. 
a. Brief discussion of mess sanitation. 
b. The men will be conducted by squad groups through a mess 
hall and kitchen. 
c. The following points will be brought out. 
(1) Mess buildings (8) Destruction of adult flies, out- 
(2) Inspection of food. door. 
(3) Storage facilities. (a) Fly traps—use fly traps 
(4) Dish washing. available. 
(5) Care and cleaning (b) Nature of construction, 
of mess kits. (c) Baiting. 
(6) Appliances for clean- (d) Location. 
ing of mess kits. (9) Destruction of adult flies, in- 
(7) Food handlers. doors. 
* (a) Fly wires, paper, poisons 
and spray. 
(b) Construction of fly wires 
and papers. 
220 (16) 
FIELD SANITATION AND SANITARY APPLIANCES 
(Control of Lice) 
Instructor (s) 
Eighth Period; Two Hours 
Place. Sanitary area. 
Text References. Pages 121 to 129, inclusive, FM 8-40; pages 91 to 103, 
inclusive, FM 21-10. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. 1 officer and 1 sergeant for each platoon; 1 noncom- 
missioned officer for each squad. 
Equipment. Serbian barrels; shower baths, either from water 
sterilizing bags or barrel showers. 
Transportation. None. 
Procedure. 
1. Conference. Brief discussion of lice and importance of their 
control. 
2. Demonstration. Construction and use of a shower bath in the 
field. 
3. Application. With previously constructed Serbian barrels, the 
men in squad groups will set up and operate a Serbian barrel 
disinfector. 
221 (16) 
FIELD SANITATION AND SANITARY APPLIANCES 
(Disposal of Human Wastes) 
Instructor (s) 
Ninth Period; One Hour 
Place. Sanitary area. 
Text References. Pages 40 to 49, inclusive, FM 8-40; pages 27 to 37, 
inclusive, FM 21-10. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. 1 officer for each company; 1 sergeant for each pla- 
toon; 1 noncommissioned officer for each squad. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Procedure. Conference and demonstration. During this period of in- 
struction, the instructor and his assistants will utilize all the sanitary 
devices in the sanitary area employed for the disposal of human wastes. 
1. General disposal of human wastes. 
a. Disposal on the march. 
b. Disposal in bivouac. 
2. Deep pit latrine. 
a. Care, construction and operation. 
Seating space. 
b. Fly proofing. 
c. Quartermaster latrine box. 
d. Urine soakage pit. 
3. Location of latrines. 
4. Care of all types of latrines. 
222 (16) 
FIELD SANITATION AND SANITARY APPLIANCES 
(Disposal of Human Wastes) 
Instructor (s) 
Tenth Period: Three Hours 
Place. Sanitary area. 
Text References. Pages 40 to 49, inclusive, FM 8-40; pages 27 to 37, 
inclusive, FM 21-10. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. 1 officer and 1 sergeant for each platoon; 1 noncom- 
missioned officer for each squad. 
Equipment. Spades; crude oil, broken stone, broken bottles or 
bricks; Quartermaster latrine boxes; latrine canvas. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Procedure. Application. 
1. Straddle trench. 
a. In groups of six men each, the men will construct a straddle 
trench. The noncommissioned officers will act as instructors. 
b. The trench will be filled in the proper manner and marked. 
2. Deep pit latrine and urine soakage pit. 
a. The men by squad groups will construct a deep pit latrine 
and urine soakage pit. Care must be taken that all men do part 
of each construction job. 
b. Flyproofing with earth and crude oil will be carried out. 
c. A Quartermaster latrine box will be installed. 
d. In conclusion, the box will be removed and the pit will be 
filled by the proper method and marked by a suitable sign. 
223 (16) 
FIELD SANITATION AND SANITARY APPLIANCES 
(Mosquito Control) 
Instructor (s) 
Eleventh Period: One Hour 
Place. Sanitary area. 
Text References. Pages 106 to 120, inclusive, FM 8-40; pages 73 to 91, 
inclusive, FM 21-10. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One officer and one sergeant for each platoon; one 
noncommissioned officer per squad. 
Equipment. Knapsack sprayers; drip oilers; mosquito nets; larvi- 
cides, including oil, phenol, and paris green; cots; bed- 
ding; and mosquito bar frames. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Procedure. Conference and demonstration. 
1. Introduction. The instructor will first describe briefly the nature 
and habits of the mosquito, and their disease relationship. 
2. General Control Measures. 
a. Drainage. 
b. Open ditches. 
c. Filling. 
d. Stream training. 
e. Elimination of artificial water containers, 
f. Screening. 
g. Mosquito nets. 
h. Destruction of adults. 
224 (16) 
FIELD SANITATION AND SANITARY APPLIANCES 
(Mosquito Control) 
Instructor (s) 
Twelfth Period: One Hour 
Place. Sanitary area. 
Text References. Pages 106 to 120, inclusive, FM 8-40; pages 73 to 91, 
inclusive, FM 21-10. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. 1 officer and 1 sergeant for each platoon; 1 noncom- 
missioned officer per squad. 
Equipment. Knapsack sprayers; drip oilers; mosquito nets; larvi- 
cides, including oil, phenol, and paris green; cots; bed- 
ding; mosquito bar frames. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Procedure. Conference, demonstration and application. 
1, Briefly review important features of previous conference on mos- 
quito control. 
2. Demonstration and application of the use of larvicides. 
a. The noncommissioned personnel will first demonstrate the 
use of the knapsack spray in applying oil and phenol larvi- 
cides; a method of application of paris green will also be 
demonstrated. 
b. The men will practice the use of the knapsack spray. 
c. With the help of the noncommissioned officers, the enlisted 
men will construct and operate a continuous drip oiler. 
3. Protection of bed from mosquitoes. With the assistance of the 
noncommissioned officers, the men will set up mosquito bars on 
their respective cots. 
225 FIELD SANITATION AND SANITARY APPLIANCES 
(16) 
(Disposal of Manure) 
Instructor (s) 
Thirteenth Period: One Hour 
Place. Sanitary area. 
Text References. Pages 66 to 69, inclusive, FM 8-40; pages 55 to 56, 
FM 21-10. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. 1 officer and 1 sergeant for each platoon; 1 noncom- 
missioned officer for each squad. 
Equipment. Shovels; manure. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Procedure. Application. 
1. Working in squad groups, the men will lay out the ground for 
a small compost pile. 
2. Manure will be placed on the area in the proper manner. 
3. Explanation as to care of compost pile. 
Note. Issue to each man a list of the examination questions to 
be used during the oral examination of next (14th) period. 
(16) 
FIELD SANITATION AND SANITARY APPLIANCES 
(Examination—Oral) 
Instructor (s) 
Fourteenth Period: One Hour 
Place. Sanitary area. 
Text References. All previous references. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. 1 officer and 1 sergeant for each platoon; 1 noncom- 
missioned officer for each squad. 
Equipment. The sanitary appliances previously used as desired. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Procedure. Examination (oral). 
1. Issue a card with a question on some phase of this course to 
each enlisted man. 
2. Have each man step forward as he is called upon and answer the 
question on his card. 
Note. It is preferable to conduct this examination in small groups. 
226 (17) 
MATERIA MEDICA AND PHARMACY 
Purpose and Scope. The purpose of this course is to give the medical 
department soldier the fundamentals of materia medica and pharmacy 
insofar as he may have to apply them in his duty. The course covers 
the medicines and medicinal agents used in the army for field service. 
Actual Time Allotted. 12 hours. 
Text References. Technical Manual 8-220, also Technical Manual 
8-233, Manual for Pharmacy Technicians; Medical Department 
Supply Catalog. 
Methods of Instruction. Conferences, Coach and Pupil, Group and 
Demonstration with application and Examination (Practical exer- 
cises) . 
Note:—The instruction will be facilitated and more profitable or 
successful by giving this instruction to small groups of men, (20 to 
30 or less). 
Standard of Proficiency. Each man should have sufficient and ade- 
quate knowledge of the drugs and medicinal agents used by the arms’- 
in the field. He should know the names of all the drugs, their minimum 
and maximum doses, their indications, purposes and effects, the re- 
sults of overdosage, and treatment of such overdosage; where these 
drugs and medicinal agents are to be found, and he should be skilled 
in the methods of administration. 
(17) 
MATERIA MEDICA AND PHARMACY 
Instructor (s) 
First Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. TM 8-220, Medical Department Soldier’s Handbook 
or any other standard text; TM 8-233, Manual for Pharmacy Tech- 
nicians. 
227 Instructional Aids. 
(17) 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Blackboard, chalk, eraser. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline for Conference. 
1. Outline of the course, including subject matter, conduct of the 
course and explanation of how information given will be used by 
the men themselves. Discuss briefly the importance of materia 
medica and pharmacy to the medical soldier in preparation for the 
performance of the various duties that he may be called upon to 
do while a member of the enlisted force of the Medical Department. 
2. a. Define: 
(1) Materia Medica. 
(2) Pharmacy 
(3) Therapeutics 
(4) Mention and explain the U. S. Pharmacopoeia and National 
Formulary and relationship to Medical Department Sup- 
ply Catalog and Tables of Basic Allowances for Battalion 
Aid Station, Collecting Company and Clearing Company. 
b. Discuss: 
(1) Derivation of drugs, in a general way. 
(2) Dose of drugs—(Minimum, maximum and overdosage). 
(3) Methods of administration—Mention, to be covered more 
fully in a later hour. 
(4) Equipment to be fully understood— 
1. Kit, Medical, Officers. 
2. Kit, Medical, Privates. 
3. Chest, MD, No. 1. 
4. Chest, MD, No. 2. 
5. Kit, Medical, N.C.O. 
3. Summary of hour, with oral quiz, covering in a general way 
material to be covered in the course. 
Note:—May start right off with an introduction to the card system 
of oral quizzes. 
Each platoon instructor prepares a comprehensive list of short ques- 
tions and has each question typewritten on a small card. One of these 
cards is given to each enlisted man. The men are allowed about 
five minutes to read and digest the question. The instructor then 
calls on each man to read his question and give his answer. If a 
man fails to answer the question satisfactorily, another is asked 
the question, and so on until the question has been answered 
correctly. At the end of the period the cards are collected and 
preserved for future classes. 
228 MATERIA MEDICA AND PHARMACY 
(17) 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Same as 1st period. Also Tables of Basic Allowances 
and Medical Department Supply Catalog. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. 1 private with full field equipment including his kits, 
medical with contents. 
Equipment. Blackboard, chalk, eraser; kit, Medical, Officers and 
kit, Medical, Non-commissioned Officers; Mimeo- 
graphed list of contents of each of these three kits. 
Extra samples of medicinal agents included in kits. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. Conference, demonstration, and prac- 
tical exercise. 
1. Conference. Discussion and explanation of the kits, Medical, 
privates, Non-commissioned Officer, and Officer, with their con- 
tents, with particular emphasis on the medicinal agents contained, 
their indications, use, minimum, average and maximum dose and 
effects in therapeutic and poisonous doses. 
2. Demonstration of the methods of administration of all of these 
drugs under field conditions. 
3. Practical exercise. Each man to become familiar with the phy- 
sical character (solid or liquid or color, smell and taste) of all 
medicinal agents in these several kits, by actual experience, hand- 
ling, examining and tasting. 
4. Summary of hour or review by oral quizzing—in the form of an 
examination and discussion. 
Drugs in these several kits: 
Kit. Medical. Privates 
Ammonia, Aromatic Spirits, U.S.P. —Oz. 2 
Iodine, Swab, —Boxes 2 
Flask, with cup — 1 
Kit, Medical, N.C.O. and Officers 
Vial, Hard rubber, 1/2 oz. each 6 
Acetophenetidin, U.S.P.—5 gr tab. 
Compound Cathartic, Pill or Tab. (Mercurous Chloride, 
U.S.P.) 
Glycyrrhiza and Opium Compound Mixture, U.S.P. Tab, 
Ipecac and Opium Powder, U.S.P.—5 gr tab. 
Quinine Sulphate, U.S.P.—5 gr tab. 
229 Syringe Hypodermic, Complete 
Syringe Hypodermic, Needle 
Box, Tablet, Folding 
Iodine Swab, IV2 cc 
Case, Instrument, Medical Officers 
Sterilizer, Hypodermic, Needle 
(17) 
(17) 
MATERIA MEDICA AND PHARMACY 
Instructor(s) 
Third Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom 
Text References. Same as 1st period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. N.C.O. and private or 2 privates to display equipment 
and set up chests. 
Equipment. Blackboard, chalk, eraser; Chest, MD No. 1; Chest, 
MD No. 2 with contents. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline for Conference. Conference, Demonstration and 
Practical Exercise. 
1. Chest MD, No. 1—Top and bottom trays 
Only Medicinal agent per se, is the iodine swab in boxes. 
2. Chest MD, No. 2—Start with top tray 
Cover only part of this tray as regards medicinal agents contained 
therein—remainder to be covered in next period. 
Explain then: 
antipyretics (local or general) diuretics 
antiperiodics hypnotics 
antiseptics narcotics 
astringents sedatives 
carminatives diaphoretics 
cathartics disinfectants 
purgatives emetics 
laxatives expectorants 
and cite examples from medicinals in chest. 
Review work of the day with oral quiz and use of the card system 
as desired. 
230 MATERIA MEDICA AND PHARMACY 
(17) 
Instructor (s) 
Fourth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom 
Text References. Same as 1st period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Same as for third period. 
Equipment. Same as for third period. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline for Conference. Conference, Demonstration and 
practical exercise. 
1. Chest, MD, No. 2—Continue with medicinals on top tray. Ex- 
plain, demonstrate and familiarize enlisted men with the medi- 
cine, its location in MD Chest No. 2, its nature, indications or 
use, minimum, maximum and average dose, if any. 
2. Review and oral quiz with use of card system, if desired. 
(17) 
MATERIA MEDICA AND PHARMACY 
Instructor(s) 
Fifth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom 
Text References. Same as 1st period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Same. 
Equipment. Same as for periods three and four. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. 
1. Chest, MD, No. 2—Middle tray 
Cover medicines, as examples of ointments, tablets, hypnotics, 
analgesics, anesthetics, narcotics, and antiseptics—dose and phv- 
sical character. 
2. Chest, MD, No 2.—Bottom tray 
Alcohol as an antiseptic 
3. Review again with oral quiz. 
231 (17) 
MATERIA MEDICA AND PHARMACY 
Instructor (s) 
Sixth Period; One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Same as 1st period 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Blackboard, etc. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. 
1. Discuss weights and measures, Apothecary and Metric system, as 
applies to drugs and medicinals found in Chests, MD, Nos. 1 and 2. 
Demonstrate samples of weights and measures, showing what 
certain weights and amounts of liquids or solids are—size of sy- 
ringes. 
2. Arrange practical exercise to have enlisted men themselves 
demonstrate measuring of amounts of liquid and estimating 
weights of tablets by name and size. 
(17) 
MATERIA MEDICA AND PHARMACY 
Instructor(s) 
Seventh Period : One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Same as 1st period 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Different size syringes, 2 and 10 cc, water and 
placebo pills—Chest, MD No. 2. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Transportation. None 
Suggested Outline of Conference. Including applications. 
1, Explain and demonstrate preparation of hypodermic injections— 
making of dilutions or proper dose and administration including 
sterile preparation. 
2, Applicatory period in which enlisted men actually prepare 
dilutions, checked by instructor. Use proper drugs and com- 
monly used doses to familiarize men with actual problems they 
will face. 
232 MATERIA MED1CA AND PHARMACY 
(17) 
Instructor (s) 
Eighth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Same as 1st period also Medical Department Supply 
Catalog. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Syringe, Hypodermic, complete — 38180 — also Case, 
Emergency-30780 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference and Demonstration. 
1. Cover drugs and medicinals including Syringe, Hypodermic set 
38180 and Case, Emergency 30780, Medical Department Supply 
Catalog and demonstrate sets if available. 
2. Familiarize enlisted men with indications and use of medicinals 
contained, with dose. 
3. Have men actually handle drugs and sets as set up. 
(17) 
MATERIA MEDICA AND PHARMACY 
Instructor (s) 
Ninth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Same as 1st period also Medical Department Supply 
Catalog. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Set of bottles and jars contained in Dispensing Set 
77930—one of each—Venereal Prophylactic Unit 97925. 
Transportation. That necessary to obtain equipment. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference and Demonstration. 
1. Demonstrate and explain each size and type of bottle or jar showing 
by actual filling quantity of fluid each will hold, and explain reason 
for color of amber bottles. 
2. Explain reason for bottles and what might be contained in each. 
8. Demonstrate and explain contents and use of Venereal Prophy- 
lactic Unit 97925. 
233 (17) 
MATERIA MEDICA AND PHARMACY 
Instructor (s) 
Tenth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Those of 1st period and Medical Department Supply 
Catalog. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Chests Medical Pack “A” Complete 97615 if available 
Chest Medical Pack “B” Complete 97620 if available. 
Samples of Drugs 01560, 10570, 11063, 11220, 11555, 
12040, 12230, 12440, 12700, 14180, 14634 as per appen- 
dix, Medical Department Supply Catalog. 
Transportation. That necessary to obtain equipment. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference and Demonstration. 
1. Demonstrate and explain chests Medical pack “A” and “B” if avai-1 
able or applicable. If not a mounted unit, cover drugs mentioned to 
familiarize men with such a pack. 
2. Explain and demonstrate drugs as per appendix, Medical Depart- 
ment Supply Catalog. 
10560 Aloin Compound Capsule 
10570 Aloin Compound Pill or Tablet 
11063 Bismuth Subsalicylate, U.S.P. for Parenteral Injection 
11220 Camphor and Opium, Pill or Tablet 
11555 Coryza Tablet 
12040 Foot Powder 
12230 Glycyrrhiza and Opium Compound Mixture Tablet 
12440 Iron, Quinine and Strychnine Pill 
12700 Mercurial Ointment, Mild, U.S.P. 
14180 Sodium Bicarbonate and Peppermint Tablet 
14645 Sulfocarbonate Compound, 30 gr tablet 
3. Have men actually handle all of these drugs and familiarize 
themselves with their size, character and use, dose and indications. 
Use this as a form of review hour. 
234 (17) 
MATERIA MEDICA AND PHARMACY 
Instructor (s) 
Eleventh Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Those of 1st period and Medical Department Supply 
Catalog. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Same (blackboard, chalk, eraser) and drugs listed in 
Class 9, Medical Department Supply Catalog—Field 
Equipment and Supply (Drugs and Chemicals) avail- 
able. 
Transportation. None, except that for obtaining equipment. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference and Demonstration. 
1. Cover drugs listed in Class 9, Field Equipment and Supplies, Medi- 
cal Department Supply Catalog as to name, physical character, in- 
dications, use, dose and how put up—as to tubes, tin, by bottle. 
Show as many as possible. 
2, Use this hour also as review with oral quiz as regards making up 
dilutions, for hypodermic injections or solutions, identification of 
drugs by sight and smell or taste. (17) 
MATERIA MEDICA AND PHARMACY 
Instructor (s) 
Twelfth Period; One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Those of 1st period and Medical Department Supply 
Catalog. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. All previously used and available. 
Transportation. None, except that for obtaining equipment. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline for Demonstration and Practical Exercise. 
1. Oral quiz or written examination. 
Demonstrate drug, chemical, weight, measure, or container (bottle, 
jar or the like). Have enlisted men identify same, giving in- 
dication, use, dose, where found in field equipment setup—as kit, 
medical, private, non-commissioned officer or officer; Chest MD 
No. 1 or No. 2; Case, emergency; Syringe, Hypodermic set; 
Chest Medical Pack “A” or “B”. 
2. Attempt should be made to summarize, review and reorient 
enlisted men on all drugs and chemicals, indications, uses, doses 
and where each is to be found in the Medical Field equipment. 
236 (18) 
MEDICAL AND SURGICAL NURSING 
Purpose and Scope. The course in nursing is designed to give the medi- 
cal soldier sufficient practical knowledge of the principles of medical 
and surgical nursing so that he will be able to efficiently perform the 
duties of a ward attendant, and to qualify as a junior medical or surgi- 
cal technician with the minimum of additional training. 
The instruction includes: 
1. The basic principles of ward management. 
2. Preparation of ward records. 
3. Care and treatment of patients. 
4. Ward diets. 
5. Sterilization and care of surgical instruments and appliances. 
6. The use of irrigating apparatus. 
7. Care and use of ward equipment, such as bed pans and urinals. 
Actual Time Allotted. 16 hours. 
Text References. FM 8-45; Army Regulations 40-590, 40-1005, 40- 
1025; TM 8-260; TM 8-500; Technical Manual 8-220. 
Methods of Instruction. Conference, Demonstration and Application. 
Standard of Proficiency. Each enlisted man to know: 
1. The general rules of ward management. 
2. The duties of ward master and ward attendants. 
3. The care and safekeeping of medicine, alcohol, narcotics, whiskey 
and poisons. 
4. How to prepare the ward records. 
5. The different kinds of baths, and the taking and recording of tem- 
peratures, pulse and respiration. 
6. How to make a hospital bed and change linen. The use of urinals and 
bed pans. 
7. The care of the mouth, teeth, hair and nails of bed patients. 
8. The application of ice bags, hot water bags, and hot and cold 
compresses. 
9. The nomenclature, dosage and method of administration of the com- 
mon medicines used in a ward. 
10. The different poisons and their antidotes. 
11. The different diets and methods of serving. 
12. The principles of sterilization and how to dress and redress minor 
surgical wounds. 
13. The administration of hypodermic medications. 
14. The administration of irrigations and enemas. 
15. The care of-rubber goods. 
237 (18) 
MEDICAL AND SURGICAL NURSING 
(Introduction: Ward Management in General) 
Instructor(s) 
First Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. AR 40-590; Chapter 4, TM 8-220; TM 8-260. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Chart showing ward arrangement; chart of general 
rules for ward management; property cards; blackboard, 
chalk and erasers. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline. 
1. Conference. Briefly discuss the outline of the course. Include: 
a. Arrangement of wards. 
b. Responsibility for ward property. 
c. Patient’s property and effects. 
d. General rules for ward management. 
2. Questions on important points discussed during the conference. 
238 (18) 
MEDICAL AND SURGICAL NURSING 
(Ward Management) 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. AR 40-590; Chapter 4} TM 8-220; TM 8-260. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Ward master, dressed in white uniform. 
Equipment Samples of reports and such equipment as discussed in 
conference. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline. 
1. Conference. Discuss and demonstrate: 
a. Care of ward linen, soiled and clean. 
b. Care of personal effects in case of patient’s death. 
c. Ward sanitation. 
d. Conduct of ward personnel. 
e. Personal hygiene of ward attendants. 
f. The wearing of the white uniform. 
2. Questions on important points discussed during the conference. 
3. Review of previous instruction. 
(18) 
MEDICAL AND SURGICAL NURSING 
(Ward Management) 
Instructor (s) 
Third Period: One Hour 
Text References. AR 40-590; Chapter 4, TM 8-220; TM 8-260. 
Place. Classroom. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Chart showing layout of wards and adjoining rooms in 
an Army hospital. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline. 
1. Conference. Discuss and demonstrate: 
a. Duties of ward master. 
b. Duties of ward attendants. 
c. Ward discipline. 
d. Prison wards. 
e. Care of ward supplies. 
f. Care of— 
(1) Medicines. 
(2) Alcohol. 
(3) Narcotics. 
(4) Whiskey. 
(5) Poisons. 
2. Questions on important points discussed during the conference. 
239 (18) 
MEDICAL AND SURGICAL NURSING 
(Ward Management, Continued) 
Instructor(s) 
Fourth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. AR 40-590; Chapter 4. TM 8-220; TM 8-260. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline. 
1. Conference. Review briefly the: 
a. Duties of ward master, 
b. Duties of ward attendants. 
c. Care of ward supplies. 
d. Care of— 
(1) Medicines. (4) Whiskey. 
(2) Alcohol. (5) Poisons 
(3) Narcotics. 
2. Discuss and demonstrate the: 
a. Isolation of infectious and non-infectious cases. 
b. Care of seriously ill patients. 
c. Care of insane. 
d. Care of ward beds. 
e. Care of furniture. 
f. Linen disinfection. 
g. Disposal of human waste. 
h. Care of mail and telegrams. 
3. Give enlisted men a list of the questions to be used in the oral ex- 
amination of the next period. 
240 MEDICAL AND SURGICAL NURSING 
(Oral Test) 
Instructor (s) 
Fifth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Review all previous text references. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline. Oral test. 
Procedure. Use the card system of testing. Prepare questions that 
cover the subject matter discussed in all previous con- 
ferences. 
(18) 
(IB) 
MEDICAL AND SURGICAL NURSING 
(Ward Records: Forms 55a & 72, MD) 
Instructor(s) 
Sixth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom, 
Text References. AR 40-590, 40-1005, 40-1025; Chapter 6, TM 8-220; 
Chapter 2, FM 8-45 (Records of Morbidity and Mortality). 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Blackboard, chalk and eraser, and chart illustrating 
each of the Medical Department forms shown below. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Forms 55a and 72, MD or mimeograph copies 
of them for each enlisted man. 
Suggested Outline. Conference, demonstration and application. 
1. Conference. Discuss and illustrate the preparation of: 
a. The admission card (Form 55a MD). 
b. Ward morning report (Form 72 MD). 
2. Practical Exercise. From data furnished by the instructor have 
each enlisted man prepare each of the above mentioned forms. 
241 (18) 
MEDICAL AND SURGICAL NURSING 
(Ward Records: Forms 73, 75 & 76, MD) 
Instructor (s) 
Seventh Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. AR 40-590, 40-1005, 40-1025; Chapter 6, TM 8-220; 
Chapter 2, FM 8-45. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Blackboard, chalk and eraser, or chart illustrating 
each of the Medical Department forms shown below. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Forms 73, 75 and 76, MD, or mimeograph copies 
of them for each enlisted man. 
Suggested Outline. Conference, demonstration and application. 
1. Conference. Discuss and illustrate the preparation of the: 
a. Diet card (Form 73 MD). 
b. Patient’s property card (Form 75 MD). 
c. Patient’s property tag (Form 76 MD). 
2. Practical Exercise. From data furnished by the instructor have 
each enlisted man prepare each of the above mentioned forms. 
242 (18) 
MEDICAL AND SURGICAL NURSING 
(Care of Patients) 
Instructor(s) 
Eighth Period; One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. AR 40-590; Chapter 4, TM 8-220 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Clinical thermometer (a large wooden model with 
sliding scale can be made for demonstration of parts of 
and the reading of the thermometer) ; glass containing 
alcohol; small piece of gauze; chart showing a clinical 
thermometer with its scale. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. For each two enlisted men: one clinical ther- 
mometer; glass containing alcohol or other antiseptic solution; 
several packages of sterile gauze. 
Suggested Outline. Conference, demonstration and application. 
1. Conference. 
a. Discuss baths and bathing. 
(1) Their purpose. 
(2) Types. 
(a) Sponge 
(b) Sedative 
(c) Sweat 
(d) Bran 
(e) Cold pack 
(f) Alcohol 
(g) Local 
(h) Bakes 
b. Discuss: 
(1) Temperature. 
(2) Respiration. 
(3) Pulse. 
2. Demonstration. The taking and recording of temperature, pulse 
and respiration. 
3. Practical Exercise. Use the coach-and-pupil method. Have each 
coach take and record temperature, pulse and respiration. Ex- 
ercise should be supervised by squad instructors. 
243 (IB) 
MEDICAL AND SURGICAL NURSING 
(Care of Patients) 
Instructor (s) 
Ninth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. AR 40-590; Chapter 4, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None, 
Equipment. Hospital bed; mattress; pillow; bed linen; urinal; bed 
pan. 
Individual Equipment. One set of equipment listed above for each squad. 
Transportation. None. 
Suggested Outline. Conference, demonstration and application. 
1. Conference and Discussion. 
a. Care of the hair. 
b. Care of the mouth. 
c. Care of the nails. 
d. How and when to use alcohol rubs. 
e. Care of and disposal of the deceased. 
2. Demonstration. 
a. Bed making. 
b. Change of linen. 
c. Care and use of bed pans. 
d. Care and use of urinals. 
8. Practical Exercise. Have various men make up a hospital 
bed properly. Have coaches demonstrate the care and use of 
the bed pan and urinal with pupils acting as patients. 
244 (18) 
MEDICAL AND SURGICAL NURSING 
Instructor (s) 
(Treatments) 
Tenth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. AR 40-590; Chapter 4 TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One demonstrator. 
Equipment. One ice bag; hot water bag; Valentine irrigator; hypo- 
dermic syringe; teaspoon; water; alcohol lamp. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. One set of the above mentioned equipment for 
each squad. 
Suggested Outline. Conference and demonstration. 
1. Conference. Discuss: 
a. The routine administration of medicines. 
b. The use of ice bags. 
c. The use of hot water bags. 
d. Use of turpentine stupes. 
e. Preparation and administration of enemas, all types. 
2. Demonstration. Demonstrate the use of: 
a. Ice bag. 
b. Hot water bag, 
c. Enemas. 
d. Hypodermic medication. 
3. Practical Exercise. Procedure—coach-and-pupil method. Have 
each coach prepare a hypodermic medication and make the pre- 
parations for the administration of enemas. 
4. Furnish each enlisted man with a list of examination questions 
to be used in card test next (11th) period. 
245 (18) 
MEDICAL AND SURGICAL NURSING 
(Oral and Practical Test) 
Instructor (s) 
Eleventh Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. All previous text references. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Clinical thermometer; bed pans; urinals; irriga- 
tion apparatus (all that can be made available) ; ward forms. 
Suggested Outline. Oral and practical test. Use the card system of test- 
ing. Prepare questions that cover all subject matter discussed since 
last test. 
(18) 
MEDICAL AND SURGICAL NURSING 
(Hospital Diets) 
Instructor (s) 
Twelfth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Section IV, Chapter 6, TM 8-220; TM 8-500 Hospital 
Diets. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One demonstrator. 
Equipment. Feeding tube ; serving tray; dishes. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
246 (18) 
Suggested Outline. Conference and demonstration. 
1. Conference. Discuss: 
a. Diets. 
(1) Liquid. 
(2) Soft. 
(3) Light. 
(4) Regular. 
b. Feeding of patients. 
c. Preparation and use of the serving tray. 
d. Use of the feeding tube. 
2. Demonstration. Demonstrate the preparation of a serving tray 
and the use of the feeding tube. 
3. Question on important points discussed. 
(18) 
MEDICAL AND SURGICAL NURSING 
(Sterilization and Care of Surgical Instruments.) 
Instructor (s) 
Thirteenth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text Reference. TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One assistant. 
Equipment. Small operating case sterilizer; several hand basins, 
one to contain water, and another, antiseptic solution; 
a jar of green soap; hand brush; a pair of rubber 
gloves. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
247 Suggested Outline. 
(18) 
1. Discuss: 
a. The cleanliness and sanitation of operating room and dress- 
ing room. 
b. The care and preservation of surgical equipment. 
c. The sterilization of instruments. 
d. The cleansing of the operator’s hands. Use of sterile gowns. 
e. The nomenclature and care of common surgical instruments 
and appliances used in dressing and operating rooms. 
2. Demonstration. 
a. Demonstrate the sterilization of surgical instruments. 
b. Demonstrate how the nurses and doctors scrub their hands 
and don sterile gowns before surgery. 
3. Questions on important points discussed. 
4. Issue to each enlisted man a list of examination questions for 
the next (14th) period. 
(IB) 
MEDICAL AND SURGICAL NURSING 
(Oral Test) 
Instructor(s) 
Fourteenth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Squad room. 
Text References. All previously listed texts. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Clinical thermometer for each six enlisted men; 
bed, mattress, pillow, bed linen, bed pan and urinal for each twelve 
enlisted men. 
Suggested Outline. 
1. Oral Quiz. Card system of testing, questions to cover all sub- 
ject matter previously discussed. 
2. Practical Exercise. To include bed making, the changing of 
linen with patient in bed, the use of urinal and bed pan, and 
the taking of and recording of pulse, temperature and respira- 
tion. 
248 (19) 
HEAVY TENT PITCHING 
Purpose and Scope. To instruct the -men by demonstration and by 
application the correct method of pitching and striking the pyra- 
midal tent and the medical ward tent with efficiency as to time and 
manner. Instruction in the care and storage of these tents will be 
given. Knowledge of proper handling of these tents should enable 
an enlisted man to satisfactorily pitch and strike the other com- 
monly used tentage. 
Actual Time Allotted. 6 hours. 
Text References. Field Manual 21-15; App. I, FM 8-5, “Heavy Tent 
Pitching”; Film Strip 8-89 Heavy Tent Pitching; Film Strip, Pyra- 
midal Tent Pitching. 
Methods of Instructions. Demonstration and Application 
Standard of Proficiency. The men should know: 
1. How to select satisfactory sites for the erection of tentage. 
2. The necessity of plotting an area so that tents will be erected 
in orderly fashion, both as to alinement and relationship to other 
tentage (in case of ward tents). 
3. The proper method of driving stakes, of fastening ropes, and 
the precautions to be taken under various weather conditions. 
4. The principles of proper care and preservation of canvas. 
249 ( 19) 
HEAVY TENT PITCHING 
(Pyramidal Tent) 
Instructor (s) 
First Period: Two Hours 
Place. Demonstration areas 
Text References. FM 21-15; App. I, FM 8-5, Heavy Tent Pitching 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Noncommissioned officer instructor and other qualified 
assistants as available. 
Equipment. One complete basic unit set pyramidal tent; 28 large 
tent pins; 28 small tent pins; two mauls for each 4 
or 8 man group of enlisted men according to method 
of instruction used. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Field or fatigue uniform. 
Procedure. Demonstration and Application. 
a. The demonstrators are marched to the area where the pyra- 
midal tent is to be pitched. 
b. The officer instructor forms the men in the observation area 
and introduces the demonstration. 
c. The officer instructor discusses the size, uses and care of pyra- 
midal tents. 
d. The instructor briefly describes each step before demonstrating 
it. (When the explanation of a step is necessarily long or involved, 
the demonstration of that step should be carried out concurrently 
with its description.) He then proceeds with the demonstration as 
follows: 
(1) PITCHING THE PYRAMIDAL TENT BY STEPS. (Four 
men.) 
Step No. 1. Unfolding the Tent; Driving the Corner Wall 
Loop Pins. Numbers two and three unfold the tent over the area which 
it is to occupy while the number one man obtains six short pins and the 
number four man obtains two mauls, one of which he places on 
the right side of the tent and the other on the left. All men then 
grasp their respective tent corners with the number one man at the 
right front corner, number two at the right rear, and so on. Numbers 
two and three now pull their corners to the rear with numbers one and 
four holding fast. (The tent is now lying on the ground with the inner 
250 (19) 
surface down.) The number one man fastens the door. Numbers one 
and two men drive the right front and right rear corner pins, and 
numbers three and four men drive the left front and left rear corner 
pins. 
Step No. 2. Driving Remaining Wall Loop and Corner Guy 
Rope Pins; Inserting the Pole. Each man now secures six short pins 
and places them on a line with each wall loop. Number one man places 
his at the front, number two at the right, three at the rear and four 
at the left. Numbers one and three men drive the pins while numbers 
two and four align them. Now each man secures one long pin and pro- 
ceeds to his respective corner; he measures out three and one-half pin 
lengths diagonally from the corner, aligns the pin with the opposite 
corner and drives it. Then numbers one and two men secure the pole and 
place it under the tent. While this is being done the numbers three and 
four men secure the hood and place it on the top of the pole so that the 
opening is to the front. Each man secures his respective corner guy rope. 
Step No. 3. Tent Raised; Driving Remaining Guy Rope Pins; 
Corner Uprights Inserted. Numbers one and two enter the tent and 
take the top of the pole, number three enters and takes the bottom, 
and number four remains outside at the rear of the tent. When the 
one and two men grasp the pole they raise it shoulder high. At the 
command “RAISE” the pole is brought to an upright position. The 
numbers one and three men remain at the pole while the numbers two 
and four men secure their respective corner guy ropes. Then each man 
secures six long pins and places them on his side of the tent. Numbers 
two and four drive them while numbers three and one align them. 
All men now fasten the guy and hood ropes and each man secures one 
corner upright and places it under his corner. The area is policed. All 
mauls, extra pins, etc., are brought to the front of the tent. 
An opportunity should now be given students to ask questions. 
(2) STRIKING AND FOLDING THE PYRAMIDAL TENT BY 
STEPS. (Four men.) 
Step No. 1. Removing Pins and Loosening Ropes. Numbers 
one and three men pull all short pins except the right and left rear 
corner pins and remove the corner uprights bringing them all up front. 
While this is being done the numbers two and four men remove all 
long pins except the four corner guy pins, and bring them up front. 
They also unfasten the hood ropes and slacken all guy ropes, except 
the four corner guy ropes. 
Step No. 2. Striking Tent. Numbers one, two and three men 
now enter the tent and number four goes to the rear where he grasps 
the hood ropes. At the command “DOWN” the tent is lowered to the 
ground, toward the rear. The number four man folds the hood while 
the rest of the men remove the pole, bring it up front, and then remove 
the four corner guy pins and bring them up front. 
251 (19) 
Step No. 3. Folding the Tent. Numbers two and three men 
now go to the top of the tent and pull it as far to the rear as the two 
remaining pins will permit. Numbers one and four men go to the two 
front corners, and straighten out the tent. Then numbers one and 
four men grasp their respective corner wall loops and, individually, 
walk to the opposite corner and return. (This movement folds the 
two side walls.) They then straighten out the door and pull out 
the two corner pins. (The front and rear sides of the tent are now lying 
smooth and flat and the two sidewalls folded inward, each on itself.) 
The numbers two and three men place the hood in the top ring and 
begin to fold from the top toward the bottom, each fold being about 
two feet wide—the last fold should reach the wall seam. All men now 
proceed to the bottom of the tent and grasp the edge, folding it upwards 
until the wall seam is exposed. (The final fold of the top of the tent 
(the ring) should be withheld until the fold is made from the bottom so 
the ring will be lying on top.) All ropes are laid along the folded canvas 
except the two on the center width. While numbers one and four go to 
their respective sides and fold the tent toward the middle, securing it 
with the two remaining ropes, numbers two and three police the area. 
This concludes the demonstration using four men for pitch- 
ing and striking a pyramidal tent. An opportunity should now be given 
men to ask questions. 
e. Application. 
(1) The enlisted men are arranged in four man groups. The men 
go to individual tent areas and check equipment. 
(2) Upon signal from instructor, the men pitch the pyramidal 
tent. When completed it is inspected by the noncommissioned officer or 
officer in charge. 
(3) When all groups have pitched their pyramidal tents, and the 
tents have been inspected, the instructor signals for striking tent. The 
men begin striking tent in unison, roll and fold up tent, placing all 
equipment and tent neatly together at right front corner of respective 
tent area. 
f. This concludes the period of application. The men are assembled 
by instructor. The instructor summarizes the purposes and value of the 
instructional period. Questions by the men are answered. 
252 (19) 
HEAVY TENT PITCHING 
(Ward Tent) 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period: Two Hours 
Place. Demonstration area. 
Text Reference. App. I, FM 8-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One noncommissioned officer and 8 enlisted men. 
Equipment. One ward tent, complete; one box large pins (100) ; 
1 box small pins (100) ; 4 mauls or axes. 
Transportation. That necessary for transporting the equipment. 
Individual Equipment. Field or fatigue uniform. 
Procedure. Demonstration and Application. 
a. The demonstration group is placed on the field and the equip- 
ment on the ground where the tent is to be erected. (This must be suit- 
able ground for tent pitching). 
c. The officer instructor introduces the demonstration in accordance 
with Appendix I, FM 8-5. 
b. Enlisted men are seated in the observation area. 
d. The instructor briefly describes each step, then has the demon- 
stration group execute it slowly. When the explanation of a step is nec- 
essarily long or involved, the demonstration of that step should be car- 
ried out concurrently with its description. He proceeds with the demon 
stration as follows: 
(1) DEMONSTRATION BY STEPS. 
(a) Designation of landmarks on the tent. The ends and sides 
of the tent are numbered 1-2-3-4, beginning at the front end and con- 
tinuing clockwise. The poles are numbered from front to rear 1-2-3-4 
as are the rings at the top of the tent. 
(b) Organization of the tent pitching squad. A squad of 
eight men and one noncommissioned officer are required. The squad is 
counted off dividing the squad into the customary four sets of files or 
minor squads, number 1-2-3-4 from right to left. 
Each file works at an end or side as follows: 
No. 1 File—The front end (including the right front corner and No. 1 
pole). 
No. 2 File—The right side (including the right rear corner and No. 2 
pole). 
253 (19) 
No. 3 File—The rear end (including the left rear corner and No. 3 
pole). 
No. 4 File—The left side (including the left front corner and No. 4 
pole). 
(c) Pitching ward tents by steps. After designating the di- 
rection in which the tent will face and placing a marker for the right 
front corner, the noncommissioned officer commands: “PITCH TENT.” 
The squad proceeds as follows: 
Step No. 1. Distribution of Corner and Door Wall Loop Pins; 
Unrolling the Tent. 
All rear rank men Secure an axe or maul and place it at the side or end 
of the tent at which they are to work. 
No. 1 front rank . . Secures eight short pins and proceeds to the right 
front corner of the tent area, throwing a pin to each 
corner of the tent area and two pins to each end for 
the fixing of the doors. He places the right front 
corner pin at the marker where it is driven by No. 1 
rear rank. 
Remainder of squad Unroll the tent. 
Step No. 2. Unfolding the Tent; Fixing the Doors; Driving 
the Corner Wall Loop Pins. 
All men Throw all hoods and storm guys to the front of the 
tent. 
Nos. 1 and 3 files. . Pull out the doors of the tent; all men then go to the 
bottom of the tent, grasping the top skirt, pulling 
the skirt to the left so that the inner surface 
of the tent is on the ground. The men then drop the 
skirt and walk over the tent to the other side grasp- 
ing the skirt and pulling it so that the No. 1 file can 
put the corner wall loop on their corner pin; the 
men then drop the skirt and go to their respective 
rings, pulling them to the right until rings are about 
18 inches inside the right skirt. 
Nos. 1 and 3 files. . Fix the doors, No. 1 file taking care of the front 
door and No. 3 file the rear door. The door is tied by 
overlapping the folds of the door in place and plac- 
ing a short pin through the wall loops on each side 
at the junction of the door. 
No. 4 file The front rank man, inserting a short pin through 
the left front corner wall loop, pulls the front of the 
tent taut. When aligned by the noncommissioned 
officer, he moves the pin in 6 inches toward the 
right front corner for slack. The pin is driven by the 
rear rank. 
No. 2 file Does likewise after No. 4 file drives their pin. 
254 (19) 
No. 3 file Stretches the tent to the left and rear to its fullest 
extent. The front rank man inserting a short pin 
through corner wall loop moves it 8 inches toward 
the center of the tent. The rear rank man then 
drives the pin. In the meantime, the files are un- 
rolling the storm guys. 
Step No. 3. Distribution of all Remaining Pins; Driving the 
Corner Guy Rope Pins. 
All men Secure sufficient pins for respective sides or ends of 
the tent. The front rank men get short pins and 
place one at each wall loop while the rear rank men 
get long pins and place one in line with each wall 
loop along the guy pin line. 
All front rank men Place the corner guy pins in position. The pins are 
driven by the rear rank men. The position of the 
corner guy pins is long pin lengths from the 
corner pin and in line with the eighth wall loop of 
the opposite side of the tent. Fix alignment ropes. 
NOTE: For the purpose of training and demon- 
strations it is considered good practice to use align- 
ment ropes for the alignment of all pins. 
Procure and fix alignment ropes (the storm guy 
ropes are used for this purpose). One set of ropes is 
stretched between the four corner wall pins and an- 
other set between the four corner guy pins. All pins 
are driven outside the alignment ropes. 
Step No. 4. Driving the Remaining Pins. 
All men Drive all pins. The wall pins are driven straight into 
the ground, one for each wall loop. The guy pins are 
driven sloping toward the tent at a 30-degree angle, 
one in line with each wall loop and on the guy pin 
line which extends between all corner guy pins. The 
front rank men drive them. When Nos. 1 and 3 files 
have finished driving their pins they assist Nos. 2 
and 4 files, respectively. (This equalizes the pin 
driving.) 
Remove the alignment ropes, placing two opposite 
each ring on the right side of the tent. (Long pins: 
64; 24 to each side, 8 to each end. Short pins: 44; 20 
to each side, 2 to each end. Corner wall pins are 
already in, the two pins used in tying doors can be 
used at each end). 
Place all guy ropes, fully slackened and in proper 
order, over the second notch of the guy pins. (Make 
certain that the correct rope—the one sewn in the 
255 (19) 
canvas and extending to the ring—is used as the 
corner guy rope). Untie the doors and remove the 
four corner wall loops from the corner wall pins. 
Step No. 5. Inserting the Tent Poles; Hoods and Storm Guy 
Ropes in Place, Preparatory to Raising Tent. 
All front rank men Insert their pole through their respective ring of 
the tent, putting the butt of the pole through the 
ring first and then the pike of the pole through 
the collar of the ring. 
All rear rank men Get hoods and place them on their poles with the 
opening to the left while the front rank men support 
the poles. 
Each file Now secures and places two storm guy ropes over 
the pike of their pole. 
Step No. 6. Tent Raised. 
All men Go under the tent, each to his proper pole, front 
rank to the top of the pole and rear rank to the 
bottom. Each front rank man raises his pole about 
four feet. 
The noncommissioned officer now checks the hoods and guy ropes on 
each pole. 
The noncommissioned officer commands: “ARE YOU READY?” Each 
front rank man calls out from front to rear, NO. 1, READY, NO. 2, 
READY, etc. If not ready, NO. 1, NOT READY, etc. When all are 
ready, the noncommissioned officer commands: “RAISE.” 
The tent is raised by elevating the poles to the vertical, the front 
rank men raising the poles while the rear rank men keep the bottom 
of the poles on the ground. As soon as the tent is raised the rear 
rank men leave the tent, place corner wall loops over the corner 
wall pins and then each tightens his respective corner guy rope. The 
front rank men remain at the poles until they are aligned by the 
noncommissioned officer. The noncommissioned officer then com- 
mands: “ALL TIGHTEN.” The front rank men place the wall loops 
over the wall pins while the rear rank men tighten the guy ropes 
and storm guys. Nos. 1 and 3 files assist Nos. 2 and 4 files, respect- 
ively. Each file places the corner wall poles in position. 
(In case it is desired to roll the sides of the tent, all men first tighten 
all guy ropes and then proceed inside the tent and roll the sides.) 
Step No. 7. Policing the Area. 
All men Police the area. All extra pins are picked up and 
placed in containers. Axes or mauls are placed in 
front of the tent on the right side with handles in- 
clined toward the door. Each file is responsible 
for the policing of its area. The noncommissioned 
officer gives the tent a final inspection. 
256 STRIKING THE WARD TENT BY STEPS 
(19) 
Step No. 1. Removing the Wall Loop Pins and Slackening 
the Ropes. 
At the command STRIKE TENT, given by the noncommissioned 
officer, each file proceeds its respective side or end of the tent and 
acts as follows: 
All front rank men Remove all wall loops and pull all wall pins except 
the right front corner and right rear corner ones. 
They also remove the corner wall poles and carry 
them together with the short pins to the front of 
the tent. 
All rear rank men Slacken all guy ropes fully and untie all hood ropes. 
Step No. 2. Removing the Tent Poles. 
All front rank men Proceed to their respective poles within the tent 
and move the bottom of the pole about 24 inches to 
the left. 
All rear rank men Take position on the right side of the tent, each 
opposite his respective ring, securing the anchor 
rope of the storm hood, ready to pull the hood from 
the pole when the tent is struck. 
The noncommissioned officer gives the command DOWN. The front rank 
men carry the poles to the left, out under the left side of the tent. 
The poles are then carried to the front of the tent and piled. The 
rear rank men drop the hoods. 
Step No. 3. Guy Rope Pins Removed; Hoods and Storm 
Guy Ropes Rolled. 
All men Remove all the long pins, disengaging the rope from 
the pins. Remove the pins in the same manner as 
they were driven, leaving just the right front corner 
wall loop pin and right rear corner wall loop pin and 
bring them to the front. 
All men Then roll up the hoods and storm guys and bring 
them to the front of the tent. 
Step No. 4. Folding the Tent. 
Each file Goes to its ring at the top of the tent and on the 
command of the noncommissioned officer drag the 
tent to the right as far as the two remaining wall 
pins will permit. This action folds the tent with the 
inner surfaces together. Pull corner wall pins. 
Nos. 1 and 3 files. . Straighten out the doors of the tent. 
Nos. 2 and 4 files. . Straighten out the skirts of the tent. 
Step No. 5. Folding the Tent, Continued. The tent being 
ready to fold, the men take positions as follows: 
257 (19) 
Nos. 1 and 3 files. . At the doors which are pulled out to their fullest 
extent. 
Nos. 2 and 4 files. . Stand on the tent. 
No. 2 file Of the rear rank stands at the first ring. 
No. 2 file Of the front rank takes his position on the opposite 
side of the skirt. 
No. 4 file Takes position at the fourth ring in the same man- 
ner as the No. 2 file. 
All men Being in place, the No. 1 and No. 8 files walk in 
toward the center of the tent drawing the doors in. 
All men go to the bottom of the tent, grasp the 
skirts and fold them inward until the wall seam is 
showing. All men now go to the top of the tent, 
grasp it and standing on the tent, make two 18-inch 
folds bringing the top of the tent to the edge of the 
upturned skirt. 
Step No. 6. Rolling the Tent. 
No. 4 file Throws in all guy ropes, except the front four. 
Remainder of squad Procure the hoods and storm guy ropes and dis- 
tribute them along the tent. 
Entire squad Now makes its last fold, folding the top folds over 
the skirts. 
No. 4 file Forces out all the air within the tent by taking 
short steps down the tent. 
Nos. 2 and 3 files. . Then roll this into a drum shaped roll, starting from 
the rear. The four loose guy ropes are now used 
for securing the tent roll, crossing the ropes at right 
angles about it. 
Nos. 1 and 4 files. . Then give the area of the tent a final policing. 
This concludes the demonstration. An opportunity should be given 
the class to ask questions concerning the erection and striking of the 
ward tent. 
(2) APPLICATION. 
(a) The officer in charge forms the men for heavy tent pitch- 
ing and assigns a squad of enlisted men to each ward tent area. The 
demonstrators are assigned as assistant instructors. All proceed to res- 
pective areas. Each squad then proceeds to pitch the assigned ward 
tent. Each tent when pitched will be inspected by the noncommissioned 
officer or officer in charge. Errors will be corrected. 
(b) When all squads have erected their tents and have been 
inspected, the signal will be given to strike tents. 
(c) Tents will be folded and placed at the right front corner 
of the tent area. The other equipment will be placed neatly near the 
folded tent. 
(3) The men are then assembled and all questions pertaining to 
the erection of and striking of the ward tent are answered. 
258 (19) 
HEAVY TENT PITCHING 
(Ward Tent) 
Instructor (s) 
Third Period: Two Hours 
Place. Demonstration area. 
Text Reference. App. I, FM 8-5, Heavy Tent Pitching: The Ward Tent. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One noncommissioned officer and as many assistant 
instructors as are available. 
Equipment. One ward tent, complete; one box large pins (100) ; 
1 box small pins (100) ; 4 mauls or axes for each group 
of eight men. 
Transportation. That necessary for equipment. 
Individual Equipment. Field or fatigue uniform. 
Procedure. Application. 
1. The officer in charge forms the men for heavy tent pitching 
and assigns a squad to each ward tent area. The demonstrators 
of the previous period are assigned as assistant instructors. All 
proceed to respective areas. Each squad then proceeds to pitch 
the assigned ward tent. Each tent when pitched will be in- 
spected by the noncommissioned officer or officer in charge. 
Errors will be corrected. 
2. Upon completion of inspection, the signal will be given to strike 
tents. 
3. Tents will be folded and placed at the right front corner of the tent 
area. The other equipment will be placed neatly near the folded tent. 
4. Men are then assembled and all questions pertaining to the 
erection and striking of the ward tent are answered. 
259 (20) 
ORGANIZATION AND FUNCTION OF THE ARMS 
Purpose and Scope. The purpose of this course is to give the enlisted 
man information concerning the Army as a whole, its organization, 
and function of the arms. He will then have an intelligent compre- 
hension of the Army of which he is a part. The Medical Department 
soldier will be interested in the relationship of his own branch to 
the arms. It is intended that this course be coordinated with the 
course on Organization and Function of the Medical Unit. 
Actual Time Allotted. 9 hours. 
Text References. Field Manual 7-5; Field Manual 100-5; Tables of 
Organization 7-11; FM 8-10; FM 101-5; FM 101-10, and appro- 
priate FM pertaining to arms and weapons; FM 31-25; FM 31-35; 
TM 1-240; TF 7-236. 
Methods of Instruction. Conference and Demonstration, 
Standard of Proficiency. The enlisted man should have sufficient knowl- 
edge pertaining to the Army, its general organization, and the 
function of its arms, so that he will have a background which will 
enable him to carry out his particular task with greater intelligence 
and understanding. 
(20) 
ORGANIZATION AND FUNCTION OF THE ARMS 
(The Army as a Whole, and The Medical Department; 
Instructor (s) 
First Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom, 
Text References. The National Defense Act of June 3, 1916, with 
Amendment of June 4, 1920; FM 101-5; FM 101-10. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Prepared charts to show general organization of the 
Army. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
260 Procedure. Conference. This should be introductory in nature and de- 
signed to give the enlisted man a broad background for understand- 
ing the Army of the United States and its medical service. The 
subject should be discussed under the following headings: 
1. The Constitution of the United States relating to the National De- 
fense: The National Defense Act, 
2. The War Department; organization and functional structure. 
3. Components of the Army of the United States: 
a. The Regular Army. 
b. The National Guard, 
c. The Organized Reserves. 
4. The Arms and Services. 
5. Organization and activities of the Medical Department: 
a. Components and distribution. 
b. The Surgeon General and his office. 
c. The Army Medical Center. 
d. The Medical Field Service School. 
(20) 
(20) 
ORGANIZATION AND FUNCTION OF THE ARMS 
(Infantry Organization (Regiment) and Its Weapons) 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom or demonstration area. 
Text References. App. II, FM 7-5; War Department T/O 7-11; FM 
101-10; FS 7-7; FS 7-8; FM pertaining to each weapon; TF 7-236. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. As needed to demonstrate available weapons. 
Equipment. Prepared charts. If possible, the following weapons 
should be demonstrated to the men: The U. S. rifle, 
caliber .30, Ml Garand; the light machine gun, cali- 
ber .30; the bayonet; the hand grenade; the pistol, 
caliber .45; the caliber .30 machine gun; the 81 mm 
mortar; 60 mm mortars; gun, submachine, caliber .45 ; 
gun, 37 mm, antitank; gun, machine, caliber .50 flexi- 
ble (HB) M2. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Uniform as prescribed. 
Procedure. Conference and demonstration. This period should be util- 
ized to give the enlisted man an understanding of the infantry, its 
mission, organization and weapons. The subject matter should be 
presented in such a manner that it can be easily understood by the 
enlisted man. When the weapons are demonstrated, reference 
should be made to the type of wound produced by the weapon and 
the proper dressing to be used. 
261 (20) 
ORGANIZATION AND FUNCTION OF THE ARMS 
(Infantry in Security) 
Instructor (s) 
Third Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. FM 7-5; Chapters 6, 7, 8, FM 100-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Prepared charts to show security measures; black- 
board and chalk. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Procedure. Conference. This time should be devoted to giving the 
enlisted man an understanding of the principles of security as they 
pertain to a military force and the part that Infantry plays in ob- 
taining security. 
Security measures consist of all-around ground and air pro- 
tection of a military force by the adoption of effective measures 
to prevent surprise, observation, and interference by an enemy. 
It consists of provisions to establish a “zone of security” within 
which the bulk of a command is free to move and operate with 
relative freedom from hostile interference. 
1. Security measures. 
a. Must be continuous— 
(1) In camp or bivouac. 
(2) On the march. 
(3) During battle. 
b. Guards— 
(1) Advance, rear, flank, outposts. 
(2) Duties, How performed. 
2. Importance of security. 
3. Missions of ocher arms in security: 
a. Observation Aviation. 
b. Cavalry. 
c. Motorized Infantry. 
d. Infantry. 
e. Field Artillery. 
f. Engineers. 
g. Signal Corps. 
h. Quartermaster Corps. 
i. Medical Department. (20) 
ORGANIZATION AND FUNCTION OF THE ARMS 
(Infantry in Attack and in Defense) 
Instructor (s) 
Fourth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Chapters 2 and 3, Part 2, FM 7-5; Chapters 9, 10, 11, 
and 12, FM 100-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Blackboard and chalk. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Procedure. Conference. Illustrate by diagrams on charts and black- 
board wherever possible. As the time is short for the 
amount of material to be covered, this hour necessitates 
careful preparation and organization of material. The fol- 
lowing running outline may prove helpful. 
1. Offensive combat. 
a. Movement to assembly position. 
b. Organization for attack (assault and reserve units). 
c. Line of departure. 
d. Zone of action. 
e. Objective. 
f. Approach march. 
g. Fire fight, base of fire, fire and movement. 
h. Use of heavy weapons company. 
i. Employment of reserves. 
j. Assault. 
k. Subsequent action. 
2. Defensive combat. 
a. Key localities. 
b. All around defense. 
c. Organization of ground. 
d. MLR, RRL, battle position. 
e. Company and battalion defense areas. 
f. Sectors. 
g. Conduct of defense, including opening fire and counter- 
attacks. 
263 (20) 
ORGANIZATION AND FUNCTION OF THE ARMS 
(Artillery and Its Medical Detachment) 
Instructor (s) 
Fifth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. FM 6-40 ; FM 6-130 ; FM 8-10; FM 100-5 ; FM 101-10 ; 
T/O 6, Field Artillery. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Prepared charts showing organization of artillery and 
its medical detachment; blackboard and chalk. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Procedure. The purpose of this conference is to discuss: 
1. The characteristics of field artillery. 
a. Definition. 
b. Organizational framework. 
c. Missions. 
d. Classification. 
(1) By caliber. 
(2) Transportation. 
(3) For tactical employment. 
e. Range of pieces. 
(1) Safety factor. 
(2) Targets. 
(3) Limitations. 
f. Types of artillery fire. 
g. Shells. 
h. Disposition of batteries. 
2. The organization and employment of the medical detachments 
of field artillery. 
a. Organization and composition (use diagram). 
b. Mission. 
c. Factors influencing employment. (The employment of the 
headquarters section, and of the battalion sections with loca- 
tion of aid stations and function of the battery aid men 
should be covered.) 
3. Evacuation of field artillery casualties. 
264 (20) 
ORGANIZATION AND FUNCTION OF THE ARMS 
(Cavalry and Its Medical Detachment) 
Instructor (s) 
Sixth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. FM 2-5; FM 2-10; FM 100-5; FM 101-10; FM 2-15; 
T/O 2 Cavalry. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Prepared charts showing organization of the cavalry 
and its medical detachment. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Procedure. Conference. 
1. Organization of horse cavalry. The use of prepared charts will faci- 
litate instruction in organization. 
2. The organization of medical units with horse cavalry divisions. 
3. The general principles of medical service with cavalry. The basic 
principles of medical service with cavalry are similar to those which 
apply to infantry, but the difference in methods of application must 
be shown. This difference is due to the diversity and rapidity of 
cavalry action, the wide dispersion and the numerous isolated con- 
tacts with the enemy, often far from communications and in hostile 
territory, coupled with the small size of the medical units. 
4. Function of the medical service with cavalry in specific situations. 
a. In camp and on the march. 
b. On reconnaissance and counter-reconnaissance missions. 
c. In attack. 
d. In pursuit. 
e. In delaying actions. 
5. Points to be emphasized in conclusion: 
a. Medical units with cavalry must be highly mobile. 
b. Close coordination with medical supporting and evacuating 
units to the rear is paramount. 
c. Placing wounded at collection points, preferably sheltered, 
or with friendly civilian inhabitants after giving very limited 
emergency treatment is often the limit of the capabilities of 
medical detachments with cavalry. 
d. Medical squadron must generally be kept mobile and must 
always emphasize rapid evacuation. 
265 (20) 
ORGANIZATION AND FUNCTION OF THE ARMS 
(The Infantry Division: Organization and Employment) 
Instructor (s) 
Seventh Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. FM 100-5; FM 7-5; FM 101-10; T/O 7, Infantry. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Blackboard and chalk; prepared charts to show di- 
vision organizations and to illustrate tactical employment 
of combined arms. 
Transportation. None, 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Procedure. Conference. The two types of divisional organization, square 
and triangular will be illustrated. The tactical employment of the com- 
bined arms should be discussed, spending the greater part of the period 
on offensive combat. 
Note. Make introductory remarks for Training Film 8-26 to be 
shown next period. Preview this film. 
(20) 
ORGANIZATION AND FUNCTION OF THE ARMS 
(The Medical Regiment) 
Instructor(s) 
Eighth Period: One Hour 
Place. Theater. 
Text References. FM 8-10; FM 100-5; FM 101-10. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Movie operator. 
Equipment. Training Film 8-26 (running time, 61 minutes). 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Procedure. Show Training Film 8-26. Preview this film and make a 
few introductory remarks at end of foregoing period. 
266 (20) 
ORGANIZATION AND FUNCTION OF THE ARMS 
(Armored Units, The Engineers, Signal Corps, Air Corps, 
and their Medical Service.) 
Instructor (s) 
Ninth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. FM 1-5; FM 5-5; FM 11-5; FM 100-5; FM 101-10. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Prepared charts showing organizational setup of the 
Armored Units, Engineers, Signal Corps, Air Corps. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Procedure. Conference, Cover the organization and functions of the 
Armored Units, The Engineers, Signal Corps, and Air Corps in a gen- 
eral way, using charts so that the enlisted man will have some 
practical knowledge of these units. At the same time, the medical 
service of each of the units will be briefly discussed. 
267 (21) 
ORGANIZATION AND FUNCTION OF THE MEDICAL UNIT 
Purpose and Scope. The purpose of this course is to give the enlisted man 
such information as is necessary concerning the organization and 
function of the medical units, and their relation to the arms, so that 
he will have a broad understanding of the medical service and its 
place in the Army. This will make him a more valuable individual 
in his assigned task. 
Actual Time Allotted. 9 hours. 
Text References. FM 8-5; FM 8-10; T/O 8—Series. 
Methods of Instruction. Conference and Demonstration. 
Standard of Proficiency. The enlisted man should know: 
1. The organization of the Medical Department as a whole. 
2. Infantry Regimental Medical Detachment, the Medical Service 
of the Artillery and Cavalry. 
3. The Medical Regiment and the Medical Battalion. 
4. Organization and functions of the Collecting, Ambulance, Clearing 
and Headquarters and Service Units. 
5. Duties of the company aid men, litter bearers and the personnel of 
the battalion and regimental aid stations. 
(21) 
ORGANIZATION AND FUNCTION OF THE MEDICAL UNIT 
(The Infantry Regimental Medical Detachment) 
Instructor (s) 
First Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Chapter 3, FM 8-10; Chapter 2, FM 8-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Large charts showing organization of the Regimental 
Medical Detachment; blackboard and chalk. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Uniform as prescribed. 
Procedure. This should be a conference roughly outlining the organiza- 
tion and functions of the Medical Detachment of the Infantry Regi- 
ment. The enlisted man should have a clear understanding of this 
unit. 
268 (21) 
ORGANIZATION AND FUNCTION OF THE MEDICAL UNIT 
(Company Aid Men) 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period: One Hour 
Place. Demonstration area. 
Text References. Chapter 3, FM 8-10; Chapter 2, FM 8-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Enlisted men equipped as company aid men. 
Equipment. Kits, medical, privates. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Procedure. Conference and demonstration. 
Company aid men follow their respective companies in battle, ad- 
minister immediate first-aid treatment, tag the dead, and di- 
rect the walking wounded to the aid station. They facilitate 
the work of the litter squads by marking the location of seriously 
wounded men or moving them to positions, sheltered if practicable, 
where they may be found and evacuated more readily. Company aid 
men send information to battalion surgeons by messages carried by 
litter bearers or walking wounded. 
The usefulness of a company aid man is increased if he knows, 
and is known by, the company to which he is detailed. This indicates 
the detail of the same aid men to the same companies whenever prac ■ 
ticable. 
The enlisted man should be shown by means of diagrams or 
charts the relation of the company aid men to the medical detach- 
ment, and to the company to which they are attached. An enlisted 
man fully equipped as a company aid man should demonstrate 
his kit. 
269 (21) 
ORGANIZATION AND FUNCTION OF THE MEDICAL UNIT 
(The Litter Bearer Squad; The Aid Station Group) 
Instructor (s) 
Third Period: One Hour 
Place. Demonstration area. 
Text References. Chapter 3, FM 8-10; Chapter 2, FM 8-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Litter bearer squads (12 men) ; an aid station group 
(7 men) and officer. 
Equipment. Aid station equipment. 
Transportation. That needed for equipment. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Procedure. This should be a conference and demonstration period to 
thoroughly acquaint the enlisted man with the litter bearer squads 
and the aid station group of the Regimental Medical Detachment, 
their place in the organization, and their functions. 
For demonstration, a skeletal aid station (as complete as avail- 
able personnel and equipment will allow) should be established, 
demonstrating its various departments. At the same time the rela- 
tion of the litter bearer squad to the aid station can be brought out. 
Discuss the aid station group, its organization and functions. 
Discuss the litter bearer squad, its organization and functions. 
(21) 
ORGANIZATION AND FUNCTION OF THE MEDICAL UNIT 
(Medical Unit, Battalion Medical Section in Attack) 
Instructor (s) 
Fourth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Demonstration area. 
Text Reference. Chapter 3, FM 8-10. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. A battalion medical section. 
Equipment. Aid station equipment. 
Transportation. That necessary for the Battalion Medical Section. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
270 (21) 
Procedure. Conference and demonstration of the employment of a Bat- 
talion Medical Section. 
1. In garrison. 
2. On the march. 
3. In combat. 
a. Attack. 
b. Defense. 
c. Retrograde movements. 
(21) 
ORGANIZATION AND FUNCTION OF THE MEDICAL UNIT 
(The Collecting Units) 
Instructor (s) 
Fifth Period: One Hour 
Place. Demonstration area. 
Text References. Chapters 4 and 5, FM 8-10; Chapters 3, 4, 5, and 6, 
FM 8-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Prepared charts to show organization of collecting 
units; blackboard and chalk. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Procedure. 
This period will be devoted to discussion of the Collecting 
Company Medical Regiment and Medical Battalion as to: 
1. Organization. 
2. Functions. 
3. Equipment and supply. 
4. Relations with other units. 
5. Duties on the march and in combat. 
271 ORGANIZATION AND FUNCTION OF THE MEDICAL UNIT 
(Ambulance Units) 
Instructor (s) 
Sixth Period: One Hour 
Place. Demonstration area. 
Text References. Chapters 4 and 6, FM 8-10; Chapters 3, 4, 5, and 6, 
FM 8-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Drivers for ambulances. 
Equipment. A number of ambulances to demonstrate the shuttle 
system. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Procedure. Conference and demonstration. 
Suggested conference should include: 
1. Organization (both in the medical regiment and medical bat- 
talion) . 
2. Functions. 
3. Equipment. 
4. Relations with other units. 
5. Duties on the march and in combat. 
(21) 
(21) 
ORGANIZATION AND FUNCTION OF THE MEDICAL UNIT 
(Clearing Units) 
Instructor (s) 
Seventh Period: One Hour 
Place. Demonstration area (classroom). 
Text References. Chapter 7, FM 8-10; Chapter 3, 4, 5, and 6, FM 8-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Charts to show organization of clearing units. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Procedure. Conference. Discuss clearing units as to: 
1. Organization (both in the medical regiment and in the medical 
battalion). 
2. Functions. 
3. Equipment. 
4. Relations with other units. 
5. Duties on the march and in combat. 
Use organizational charts. 
272 MEDICAL AID 
(22] 
Purpose and Scope. One of the most important of the many duties of 
the medical soldier is to render medical aid. In time of war, it be- 
comes his most important duty. In order that this duty shall be per- 
formed promptly and efficiently, without excitement or hesitation, he 
must be taught what to do until he possesses the confidences born of 
knowledge. 
It is the purpose of this course to teach the Medical Department 
soldier the fundamentals of medical aid so that he may with confi- 
dence treat the sick and wounded in a prompt and efficient manner 
during peace and war. The scope of the course covers the follow- 
ing subjects: 
Bandages and dressings. 
Contusions and wounds. 
Hemorrhages. 
Fractures, dislocations and sprains. 
Splints and splinting. 
Foreign bodies. 
Injuries due to heat and cold. 
Poisonous bites and stings. 
Traumatic shock. 
Asphyxia. 
Actual Time Allotted. 60 hours. (Divided into 43 periods). 
Text References. Field Manuals 8-50 and 21-10; TM 8-220; Training 
Films 8-33 and 8-150; Film Strip 8-7 First Aid; FS 8-15 Army 
Leg Splint; FS 8-25, gunshot wounds of the face and jaw; FS 8-26 
to 8-31 inclusive, Roller Bandages. 
Methods of Instruction. Conference, Demonstration and Application. 
Standard of Proficiency. Each Medical Department soldier to be able 
to render emergency treatment promptly and efficiently to all cases 
of sudden illness or accident whether on or off the field of battle. 
273 MEDICAL AID 
(Circular Bandage) 
Instructor(s) 
First Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom or squadroom. 
Text References. Paragraph 32, FM 8-50; page 87, TM 8-220; Training 
Film 8-33, First Aid (4 reels, running time 33 minutes). 
instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One assistant instructor for each squad. 
Equipment. One 2" roller bandage for demonstration purposes. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. One 2" roller bandage for each two enlisted men. 
Suggested Outline. Conference, demonstration and practical exercise. 
1. Conference. 
a. Discuss briefly the : 
(1) General rules of bandaging. 
(2) Various types of bandages. 
(3) Purpose of bandages. 
b. Describe the circular bandages and point out parts of the 
body for which they may be used. 
2. Demonstration. Demonstrate slowly and with precision the ap- 
plication of the circular bandage. 
3. Practical Exercise. Coach - and - pupil method. Apply circular 
bandage of the arm and of the head. 
(22) 
(22) 
MEDICAL AID 
(Spiral, Oblique and Recurrent Bandages) 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom or squadroom. 
Text References. Section IV, FM 8-50; Section II, Chapter 3, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Instructor and one assistant instructor for each squad. 
Equipment. One 2" roller bandage for demonstration purposes. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. One 2" roller bandage for each two enlisted men. 
274 (22) 
Suggested Outline. Conference, demonstration and practical exercise. 
1. Conference. 
a. Brief description of the: 
(1) Spiral bandage. 
(2) Oblique bandage. 
(3) Recurrent bandage. 
b. Point out the parts of the body for which they may be used. 
2. Demonstration. Demonstrate slowly and with precision a 
method of applying these bandages. 
3. Practical Exercise. Procedure—Use coach-and-pupil method in 
application of spiral, oblique and recurrent bandages to the arm, 
chest and abdomen. 
(22) 
MEDICAL AID 
(Figure-of-eight Bandage) 
Instructor(s) 
Third Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Section IV, FM 8-50; Section II, Chapter 3, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Instructor and one assistant instructor for each squad. 
Equipment. One 2" roller bandage for demonstration purposes. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. One 2" roller bandage for each two enlisted men. 
Suggested Outline. Conference, demonstration and practical exercise. 
1. Conference. Figure-of-eight bandage. 
a. Description. 
b. Uses. 
c. Parts of the body for which they may be used. 
2. Demonstration. Demonstrate slowly and with precision, a 
method of applying the bandage to the— 
a. Elbow. 
b. Knee. 
c. Ankle. 
d. Hand and wrist. 
3. Practical Exercise. Procedure—Use coach-and-pupil method in 
application of the figure-of-eight bandage to the hand, wrist, fore- 
arm, and elbow. The coaches should be proficient in the applica- 
tion of each bandage before proceeding with the next. 
275 (22) 
MEDICAL AID 
(Spiral Reverse Bandage of Arm and Complete Bandage of Hand) 
Instructor (s) 
Fourth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Section IV, FM 8-50; Section II, Chapter 3, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One instructor per squad. 
Equipment. One 2" roller bandage for demonstration purposes. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. One 2" roller bandage for each two enlisted men. 
Suggested Outline. Conference, demonstration and practical exercises. 
1. Conference. Spiral reverse bandage and complete bandage of 
hand. 
a. Description of each. 
b. Uses. 
c. Parts of the body for which they may be used. 
2. Demonstration. The spiral reverse bandage of the arm and the 
complete bandage of the hand. 
3. Practical Exercise. Procedure—Use coach-and-pupil method in 
application of spiral reverse bandage to forearm, and complete 
bandage of hand. 
4. Review. 
a. Circular bandage. 
b. Spiral bandage. 
c. Oblique bandage. 
d. Recurrent bandage. 
e. Figure-of-eight bandage. 
276 (22) 
MEDICAL AID 
(Demigauntlet and Gauntlet Bandage) 
Instructor (s) 
Fifth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Section IV, FM 8-50; Section II, Chapter 3, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One instructor per squad. 
Equipment. One 2" roller bandage for demonstration purposes. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. One 2" roller bandage for each two enlisted men. 
Suggested Outline. Conference, demonstration and practical exercise. 
1. Conference. Demigauntlet and gauntlet bandage. 
a. Description of each. 
b. Parts of the body for which they may be used. 
2. Demonstration. Demonstrate the demigauntlet and gauntlet 
bandage of the hand and fingers. 
3. Practical Exercise. Using the coach - and - pupil method have 
men apply the demigauntlet and gauntlet bandages to the 
hand and fingers. 
4. Review. 
a. Circular bandage. 
b. Spiral bandage. 
. c. Oblique bandage. 
d. Recurrent bandage. 
e. Figure-of-eight bandage. 
277 (22) 
MEDICAL AID 
(Spica Bandages) 
Instructor (s) 
Sixth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Section IV, FM 8-50; Section II, Chapter 3, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One instructor per squad. 
Equipment. One 2" roller bandage for demonstration purposes. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. One 2" roller bandage for each two enlisted men. 
Suggested Outline. Conference, demonstration and practical exercise. 
1. Conference. Spica bandage. 
a. Description. 
b. Use of the various spica bandages. 
c. Parts of the body for which they may be used. 
2. Demonstration. Spica bandage of— 
a. Right shoulder (ascending). 
b. Lower extremity. 
c. Groin (ascending). 
d. Foot. 
3. Practical Exercise. Using the coach - and - pupil method have 
men apply the spica bandage of: 
a. Right shoulder (ascending). 
b. Groin (ascending). 
c. Foot. 
278 (22) 
MEDICAL AID 
(Velpeau Bandage and Sayre’s Dressing) 
Instructor (s) 
Seventh Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Section IV, FM 8-50; Section II, Chapter 3, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One assistant instructor per squad. 
Equipment. For demonstration purposes one 3" roller bandage; 
a piece of sheet wadding; 1 roll 3" adhesive plaster; 
one 4" roll flannel bandage. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. One 3" roller bandage and a piece of sheet 
wadding for each two enlisted men. One roll 3" adhesive plaster; 
one 4" flannel bandage. (Use same material over and over again). 
Suggested Outline. Conference, demonstration and practical exercise. 
1. Conference. Velpeau bandage. 
a. Description 
b. Use of the Velpeau bandage in— 
(1) Fixation of the arm. 
(2) Treatment of the fractured clavicle, 
(3) Treatment of dislocated shoulder joint. 
2. Demonstration. Velpeau bandage of right shoulder, step by 
step. 
3. Practical Exercise. Using the coach - and - pupil method have 
men apply the Velpeau bandage to the right shoulder. 
4. Demonstrate and explain Sayre’s Dressing—compare Velpeau 
Bandage and Sayre’s dressing in their use. 
279 (22) 
MEDICAL AID 
(Barton Bandage; Recurrent Bandage of Head; 
Cross Bandage of One Eye and of Both Eyes.) 
Instructor (s) 
Eighth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Section IV, FM 8-50; Section II, Chapter 3, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One assistant per squad. 
Equipment. For demonstration purposes: one 2" bandage; one 
safety pin. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. One 2" bandage and one safety pin for each 
two enlisted men. 
Suggested Outline. Conference, demonstration and practical exercise. 
1. Conference. Briefly describe and discuss the use of the follow- 
ing bandages: 
a. Barton bandage. 
b. Recurrent bandage of head. 
c. Crossed bandage of one eye. 
d. Crossed bandage of both eyes. 
2. Demonstration. Demonstrate each of the above bandages. 
3. Practical Exercise. Using the coach - and - pupil method, have 
men apply: 
a. Barton bandage. 
b. Recurrent bandage to the head. 
c. Crossed bandage to the eye. 
280 (22) 
MEDICAL AID 
(Proficiency Test) 
Instructor (s) 
Ninth Period; Three Hours 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. All previous references on bandaging. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One assistant instructor for each squad. The test to be 
conducted by the platoon leaders, assisted by the platoon 
sergeant. 
Equipment. For demonstration purposes: one 2" and one 3" roller 
bandage; one roll 3" adhesive plaster; several small 
pieces of sheet wadding; one 4" flannel bandage; one 
piece of muslin 6" wide and 36" long; 3 safety pins. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. For each two enlisted men: one 2" and one 3" 
roller bandage; one roll 3" adhesive plaster; several small pieces 
of sheet wadding; one 4" flannel bandage; one piece of muslin 6" 
wide and 36" long; 3 safety pins. 
Suggested Outline. Coach-and-pupil method. 
1. Standard to be observed. Each man to apply neatly and cor- 
rectly each of the following bandages: 
a. Circular bandage of forearm. 
b. Spiral bandage of forearm. 
c. Recurrent bandage of hand. 
d. Spica bandage of right shoulder. 
e. Bandage of foot, complete. 
f. Velpeau dressing. 
g. Barton bandage. 
h. Crossed bandage of one eye. 
i. Sayre’s dressing. 
2. When completed, each bandage to be inspected and approved before 
proceeding with the next. Men who fail to meet the training 
standard will be given additional training and reexamined. 
281 ("2) 
MEDICAL AID 
(T-Bandage and Tailed Bandage) 
Instructor (s) 
Tenth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Section IV, FM 8-50; Section II, Chapter 3, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One instructor per squad. 
Equipment. For demonstration purposes: one 3" roller bandage; 
one piece of muslin 6" wide and 36" long; three safety 
pins. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. One 3" roller bandage; one piece of muslin 6" 
wide and 36" long; and three safety pins, for each two enlisted men. 
Suggested Outline. Conference, demonstration and practical exercise. 
1. Conference. Brief description of the T-bandage and tailed ban- 
dage. Discuss their use and point out parts of the body best suited 
for their application. 
2. Demonstration. 
a. T-bandage of the perineum. 
b. Many-tailed bandage of the abdomen. 
3. Practical Exercise. Using the coach - and - pupil method have 
men apply: 
a. T-bandage to the perineum. 
b. Many-tailed bandage to the abdomen. 
282 (22) 
MEDICAL AID 
(Triangular Bandage) 
Instructor (s) 
Eleventh Period: Two Hours 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Section IV, FM 8-50; Section II, Chapter 3, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One instructor per squad. 
Equipment. One triangular bandage (Item 20120, Medical Depart- 
ment Supply Catalog) for demonstration purposes. 
Transportation. None, 
Individual Equipment. One triangular bandage (Item 20120, Medical 
Department Supply Catalog) for each two enlisted men. 
Suggested Outline. Conference, demonstration and practical exercise. 
1. Conference. Briefly describe the triangular bandage and its use. 
Point out the parts of the body best suited for its application. 
2. Demonstration. 
a. Demonstrate the following applications of the triangular 
bandage: 
(1) Fronto-occipital triangle. 
(2) Triangles of chest or back. 
(3) Brachio-cervical triangles and arm slings. 
(4) Triangle of hand. 
3. Practical Exercises. Using the coach - and - pupil method have 
men apply the following bandages: 
b. Questions on material covered during the period 
a. Fronto-occipital triangle. 
b. Triangle of chest. 
c. Triangle of hand. 
d. Brachio-cervical triangle and arm sling. 
283 (22) 
MEDICAL AID 
(Triangular Bandage) 
Instructor (s) 
Twelfth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom or squadroom. 
Text References. Pages 79 and 80, and Figures 49, 50, 51 and 52, FM 
8-50; Section II, Chapter 3, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One assistant instructor per squad. 
Equipment. One triangular bandage (Item No. 20120, Medical De- 
partment Supply Catalog for demonstration purposes. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. One triangular bandage (Item No. 20120, Med- 
ical Department Supply Catalog) for each two enlisted men. 
Suggested Outline. Conference, demonstration and practical exercise. 
1. Conference. Brief remarks on the use of the triangular bandage, 
and of the cravat. Point out the parts of the body best suited for its 
application. 
2. Demonstration. 
a. Triangular bandage on the following parts of the body: 
(1) Foot. 
(2) Gluteus-femoral region. 
b. Cravats. 
(1) Mento-vertico-occipital cravat. 
(2) Bis-axillary cravat. 
(3) Cravat of the head and ear. 
3. Practical Exercise. Using the coach-and-pupil method, have 
men apply each of the bandages listed above. 
284 122) 
MEDICAL AID 
(Wounds) 
Instructor (s) 
Thirteenth Period; One Hour 
Place. Classroom or squadroom 
Text References. Section II, Chapter 10, FM 21-10; Section IV, Chap- 
ter 3, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Squad instructor. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline. Conference and oral quiz. 
1. Conference. Contusions and wounds. 
a. Contusions. 
(1) Definition, 
(2) Objective symptoms. 
(3) Treatment. 
b. Wounds. 
(1) Definition. 
(2) Types. 
(a) Incised. 
(b) Lacerated. 
(c) Contused. 
(d) Punctured. 
(e) Poisoned. 
(f) Gunshot. 
2. Oral Quiz. Questions on material covered during conference 
285 (22) 
MEDICAL AID 
(Bacteria, Sepsis, Antiseptics, Sterilization) 
Instructor (s) 
Fourteenth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom or squadroom. 
Text Reference. Section IV, Chapter 3, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Squad instructors. 
Equipment. Chart showing the common bacteria. Have samples 
of common antiseptics. Enlargement of photographs by 
means of the ballopticon. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline. Conference and oral quiz. 
1. Conference. 
a. Define bacteria. 
(1) Demonstrate the common bacteria (charts). 
(2) Methods of transmission. 
b. Describe: 
(1) An infected wound. 
(2 The common causes of wound infection 
c. Define: 
(1) Sepsis. 
(2) Antiseptics. 
(3) Sterilization. 
(4) Disinfection. 
d. Demonstrate the following disinfectants and discuss their 
preparation, use and limitations. 
(1) Corrosive sublimate. 
(2) Phenol. 
(3) Cresol. 
(4) Iodine, etc. 
2. Oral Quiz. Questions on the important points discussed during 
the conference. 
286 (22) 
MEDICAL AID 
(Dressings) 
Instructor (s) 
Fifteenth Period; One Hour 
Place. Classroom or squadroom. 
Text References. Paragraph 34, FM 8-50; Pages 80 and 108, TM 8-220 ; 
Medical Department Supply Catalog. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. One per squad. 
Item No. 92060—Dressing, first aid, small. 
Item No. 92050—Dressing, first aid, large. 
Item No, 20130—Cotton, absorbent, compressed. 
Item No. 20240—Gauze, plain, sterilized. 
Item No. 92070—Gauze, plain, sublimated. 
Item No. 20300—Packet, first aid, Carlisle model. 
Item No. 20310—Packet, first aid, instructional. 
Item No. 20313-15—Packet, front line. 
Item No. 20317—Packet, individual dressing. 
Item No. 92100—Sponge, gauze. 
Item No. 92090—Sponge, cotton. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. See equipment above. 
Suggested Outline. Conference and demonstration 
1. Conference. Discuss briefly 
a. Dressings in general. 
b. Compresses. 
c. Aseptic dressings. 
d. Antiseptic dressings. 
e. Wet dressings. 
f. Dry dressings. 
g. Types of first aid dressings (small and large) 
2. Demonstration. Demonstrate and discuss the use of each type 
of dressing, packet, and sponge. 
3. Conclude with questions on material covered during the conference. 
287 (22) 
MEDICAL AID 
(Treatment of Wounds) 
Instructor (s) 
Sixteenth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom or squadroom. 
Text References. Chapter 7, FM 21-10; Page 128, TM 8-220 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One assistant instructor for each squad. 
Equipment. One first aid packet, instructional (Item No. 20310) ; 
one iodine swab Item No. 91120; one tourniquet for 
each enlisted man. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. See equipment above. 
Suggested Outline. Conference, demonstration and application. 
1. Conference. Discuss the general treatment of: 
a. Wounds. 
b. Application of first aid treatment. 
Discuss the precautions taken to avoid infection or aggravation 
of injuries. 
2. Demonstration. 
a. The precautions used to avoid infection or aggravation of 
injury. (See page 115, FM 21-10.) 
b. The operator explains and demonstrates each step in the ap- 
plication of the first aid dressing. 
Step 1. Expose wound. 
Step 2. Apply tourniquet (if hemorrhage is present). 
Step 3. Apply antiseptic (use iodine swab). 
Step 4. Apply dressing (first aid dressing). 
Step 5. Apply heat. (Describe the various methods of ap- 
plying internal and external heat.) 
3. Practical Exercise. Procedure—Use coach-and-pupil methou. 
The instructor designates the type and location of the wound, which 
is then dressed by the men. Instructors should closely supervise 
the procedure, stressing points brought out in the conference. 
288 (22) 
MEDICAL AID 
(Dressings) 
Instructor (s) 
Seventeenth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom or squadroom. 
Text References. All previous text references on Wounds and Dressings. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One assistant instructor for each squad. 
Equipment. One first-aid dressing, large; one iodine swab; one 
book of emergency medical tags; one 2" roller band- 
age for each enlisted man. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline. Conference and practical exercise. 
1. Conference. Discuss wounds in general and demonstrate the ap- 
plication of the large first-aid dressing. 
2, Practical Exercise. Procedure—Coach-and-pupil method, step 
by step, (a) The instructors to designate a small shell wound 
of right side of face. Dress with individual dressing, and secure 
dressing with cross bandage (figure-of-eight) of one eye. (b) 
The instructor to designate a large superficial wound of the 
forearm which requires breaking the stitch of the compress to 
cover the wound. 
3. Review. Dressings in general, shell wounds and their treatment, 
and the healing of wounds. 
289 (22) 
MEDICAL AID 
(Dressings) 
Instructor (s) 
Eighteenth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom or squadroom 
Text References. All previous references on Wounds and Dressings. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One assistant instructor for each squad. 
Equipment. One individual dressing packet; one iodine swab; one 
book of Emergency Medical Tags; one 2" roller bandage 
for each enlisted man. 
Transportation. None. 
individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline. Conference and practical exercise. 
1. Conference. Discuss infected wounds and their treatment. Dis- 
cuss the prophylactic treatment for tetanus, and reasons for record- 
ing the treatment on the Emergency Medical Tag. 
2. Practical Exercise. Procedure—Coach-and-pupil method, step 
by step. The instructor will designate a small shell wound of 
right side of foot to be dressed with individual dressing and 
secured with spica of foot. 
Review previous dressings. 
290 MEDICAL AID 
(22) 
(Proficiency Test) 
Instructor (s) 
Nineteenth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Classroom or squadroom. 
Text References. All previous references. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One assistant instructor for each squad 
Equipment. One first aid packet, instructional; one iodine swab; 
one book emergency medical tags; one package of 
plain sterilized gauze or plain gauze. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Two large first aid dressings and two plain 
gauze dressings for each two enlisted men. 
Suggested Outline. 
1. First hour. Quiz on the following subjects: 
a. Contusions. 
b. Definition of wounds. 
c. Classification of wounds. 
d. Sepsis. 
e. Antiseptics. 
f. Sterilization. 
g. Disinfection. 
h. Aseptic dressing. 
i. Wet dressing. 
j. Dry dressing. 
k. Infected wound. 
l. Sublimated gauze. 
m. The precautions used to avoid infection or aggravation of 
the injury. 
n. Steps in the application of first aid dressings. 
2. Second hour. Practical Exercise—Coach-and-pupil method, step 
by step. 
a. Proper method of handling the first aid dressings to prevent 
contamination. 
b. Have each man apply four dressings—two using the first 
aid dressing and two using plain gauze. 
291 (22) 
MEDICAL AID 
(Hemorrhage) 
Instructor (s) 
Twentieth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom or squadroom. 
Text References. Page 147, FM 21-10; Page 131, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One assistant instructor for each squad. 
Equipment. Anatomical chart. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline. Conference, demonstration and application. 
1. Conference. 
a. Discuss the varieties of hemorrhage 
(1) Arterial. 
(2) Venous. 
(3) Capillary. 
b. Discuss the control of hemorrhage: 
(1) Natural. 
(2) Artificial. 
2. Demonstration. 
a. With red skin pencil trace the course of the arteries of the 
head and neck on one of the assistant instructors and point out 
the pressure points in controlling hemorrhage with the fingers. 
b. Demonstrate the following methods of controlling hemor- 
rhage : 
(1) Elevation. 
(2) Pressure. 
3. Practical Exercise. Procedure—Coach-and-pupil method. Each 
squad instructor to demonstrate the pressure points of head and 
neck. Demonstrate one point at a time and have the coaches 
apply the pressure as demonstrated. Require each coach to 
name the artery to which pressure is being applied. 
292 (22) 
MEDICAL AID 
(Hemorrhage: Treatment by Manual Pressure) 
Instructor (s) 
Twenty-first Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom or squadroom. 
Text References. Pages 134-135, TM 8-220; Section II, Chapter 10, 
FM 21-10. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One assistant instructor for each squad. 
Equipment. Anatomical chart, and skeleton 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline. 
1. Questions on varieties of hemorrhage and the methods of control of 
hemorrhage. 
2. Demonstration. With red and blue skin pencils trace out the 
course of the arteries and veins of the arm, hand, thigh, leg and foot 
on one of the assistant instructors. Point out the pressure points in 
controlling hemorrhage with the fingers, and name the arteries and 
veins on which pressure is applied. 
3. Practical Exercise. Procedure—Use the operator-and-patient 
method of instruction. 
a. Demonstrate the pressure points as shown in Figures 76, 77 
and 78, FM 21-10. 
b. Demonstrate one point at a time and have the operator apply 
the pressure as demonstrated. Continue the demonstration until 
all the pressure points have been demonstrated and applied by 
each member of the squad. Have each member of the squad name 
the artery or vein to which pressure is applied. 
293 (22) 
MEDICAL AID 
(Hemorrhage: Use of the Tourniquet) 
Instructor (s) 
Twenty-second Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom or squadroom. 
Text References. Pages 152 and 153, FM 21-10; page 134, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One assistant instructor for each squad. 
Equipment. Anatomical chart and a tourniquet for each two en- 
listed men, improvised tourniquets. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline. Conference, demonstration and application. 
1. Conference. 
a. Briefly discuss: 
(1) The use of the tourniquet. 
(2) Its dangers. 
(3) The importance of recording the time of application on the 
Emergency Medical Tag. 
b. Discuss improvised tourniquets. Cite examples. 
2. Demonstration. 
a. Demonstrate the application of the tourniquet for hemor- 
rhages of the: 
(1) Arm or hands. 
(2) Thigh. 
(3) Leg or foot. 
b. Demonstrate various varieties of improvised tourniquets. 
3. Practical Exercise. Procedure—Coach-and-pupil method. 
a. Application of tourniquet for hemorrhage of 
(1) Forearm and hand. 
(2) Arm and shoulder. 
(3) Thigh. 
(4) Leg or foot. 
b. Application of improvised tourniquets. 
294 (22) 
MEDICAL AID 
(Practical Test on Hemorrhage) 
Instructor (s) 
Twenty-third Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Pages 134 and 135, TM 8-220; Section II, Chapter 10, 
FM 21-10. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One assistant instructor for each squad. 
Equipment. One tourniquet for each two enlisted men. 
Transportation. None. 
Suggested Outline. 
1. Quiz on varieties of hemorrhage. Describe the following hemorr- 
hages and the methods of control: 
a. Arterial. 
b. Venous. 
c. Capillary. 
2. Practical Exercise. Procedure—Coach-and-pupil method. 
a. Each man to demonstrate the finger pressure control of 
hemorrhage from: 
(1) Scalp. 
(2) Face. 
(3) Neck. 
(4) Forearm and hand. 
(5) Arm and shoulder. 
(6) Thigh. 
(7) Leg and foot. 
b. Each man to relate the precautions to be observed when a 
tourniquet is applied, and to apply a tourniquet for hemor- 
rhage of the upper or lower extremity. MEDICAL AID 
(22) 
(Shock) 
Instructor (s) 
Twenty-fourth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom or squadroom. 
Text References. Page 136, TM 8-220; Section III, Chapter 10, FM 
21-10. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One assistant instructor for each squad. 
Equipment. Shells of two chests, M.D., No. 1; six blankets; pack- 
age of safety pins; one litter; four hot water bottles; two 
canteens; cocoa unit; lantern set. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline. Conference and demonstration 
1. Conference. 
a. Discuss: 
(1) Definition of shock. 
(2) Causes of shock; various types of shock. 
(3) Symptoms of shock. 
(4) Treatment of shock. 
b. Discuss the preventive measures which should be rigidly ob- 
served during the care and treatment of the wounded. 
c. Discuss the application of internal and external heat as a 
means of treating shock, with particular reference to the means 
available to the medical soldier. 
d. Questions on subject material covered during the period. 
2. Demonstration. Demonstrate the preparation of a shock and 
dressed litter. Demonstrate the grouping of shock litters. 
(22) 
MEDICAL AID 
(Examination—Shock) 
Instructor (s) 
Place. Field. 
Twenty-fifth Period; Two Hours 
Text References. Paragraph 117, FM 21-10; Page 136, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
296 (22) 
Equipment. Two empty chests, M.D., No. 2, or improvised litter 
racks; one litter; six blankets; two hot water bottles; 
two lanterns; one package of safety pins. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline. 
1. First hour. Quiz on the following subjects: 
a. Definition of shock. 
b. Causes of shock. 
c. Symptoms of shock. 
d. Internal and external treatment of shock. 
2. Second hour. Practical Exercise. Using the coach-and-pupil 
method, prepare dressed litters and shock litters. Group the shock 
litters so they can be taken care of more readily by one attendant. 
MEDICAL AID 
(22) 
(Fractures, Dislocations and Sprains) 
Instructor (s) 
Twenty-sixth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Section IV, FM 21-10; pages 146 to 149 inclusive, 
TM 8-220; Section II, FM 8-50. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One instructor for each squad 
Equipment. One long bone with muscles attached to show a com- 
plete fracture; bone of a young animal to show a green 
stick fracture. Ballopticon for enlargement of photo- 
graphs or text book pictures. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline. Conference and demonstration conducted simultane- 
ously. 
1. Define fractures. 
2. Discuss: 
a. Simple fractures. 
b. Compound fractures. 
c. Complicated fractures 
d. Immobilization. 
297 e. Traction. 
(22) 
f. Fixation. 
g. Signs of fractures. 
h. Symptoms of fractures. 
i. Complications resulting from fractures. 
j. Necessity for proper records. 
3. Describe the first aid treatment of fractures. Conclude with ques- 
tions on important points discussed. 
4. Demonstrate as many kinds of fractures as possible. Enlarge photo- 
graphs or pictures by use of the ballopticon. 
(22) 
(Fractures, Dislocations and Sprains) 
MEDICAL AID 
Instructor (s) 
Twenty-seventh Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Section IV, FM 21-10; pages 146 to 149 inch, TM 
8-220; Section II, FM 8-50. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One instructor for each squad. 
Equipment. First aid dressing; tourniquet; iodine swab 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline. Conference, demonstration and practical exercise. 
1. Conference. 
a. Discuss compound fractures, their treatment, and complica- 
tions. 
b. Conclude with questions on important points discussed. 
2. Demonstration. Demonstrate the treatment of a compound frac- 
ture with hemorrhage. 
3. Practical Exercise. Quiz on signs and symptoms of fractures. 
MEDICAL AID 
(22) 
(Dislocations and Sprains) 
Instructor (s) 
Twenty-eighth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom or squadroom. 
298 (22) 
Text References. Paragraph 119, FM 21-10; Paragraph 150, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One instructor per squad. 
Equipment. Triangular bandage. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline. Conference, demonstration and practical exercise. 
1. Conference. 
a. Define: 
(1) Dislocation. 
(2) Sprain. 
b. Discuss the various kinds of dislocations and sprains, their 
symptoms and first aid treatment. 
2. Demonstration. Demonstrate the first aid treatment of a dis- 
located shoulder and hip. Demonstrate how to support the injured 
part with the aid of improvised slings such as coat or shirt sleeve. 
3. Practical Exercise. Procedure—Coach-and-pupil method. Sup- 
port injured arm by using improvised slings made from coat and 
shirt sleeve. 
MEDICAL AID 
(22) 
(Examination—Fractures, Dislocations and Sprains) 
Instructor (s) 
Twenty-ninth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Classroom or squadroom. 
Text References. Section IV, FM 21-10; Paragraphs 149-150, TM 8-220 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One assistant instructor per squad. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline. Oral quiz. 
1. The quiz to be conducted by squad instructors and controlled by pre- 
pared questions. 
2. The questions should conform to the subject matter and be answer- 
able in sentences of a few words. 
299 MEDICAL AID 
(22) 
(Army Leg Splint) 
Instructor (s) 
Thirtieth Period: Three Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. Section II, FM 8-50; Section III, Chapter 3, TM 8-220; 
Film Strip 8-15. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. See Outline below. 
Equipment. See Outline below. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Procedure. Demonstration and Application. 
1. PURPOSE.—a. To demonstrate the group performance method 
of instruction. 
b. To demonstrate the approved method of applying the Army 
Hinged Half-Ring Thigh and Leg Splint. 
2. PREVIOUS TRAINING OF TROOPS (STUDENTS).—The ap- 
plication of the Army Hinged Half-Ring Thigh and Leg Splint should be 
preceded by instruction which has begun with elementary anatomy and 
physiology and has progressed through elementary medical aid. This 
should be followed by instruction in the various kinds of fractures, their 
diagnosis and complications with special reference to shock. The im- 
Figure 1. Demonstration Team for Application of the Army 
Hinged Half-Ring Thigh and Leg Splint. 
300 (22) 
portance of early splinting, precautions regarding splints and a demon- 
stration of standard types of splints should be covered in the unit school. 
The instruction can then progress to the actual application of the Army 
Hinged Half-Ring Thigh and Leg Splint. 
Fig. 2. Equipment required for demonstration or application 
of the Army Leg Splint 
3. PREPARATION.—a. Troops Required. One officer, instructor in 
charge; one noncommissioned officer, assistant instructor; one demonstra- 
tion team of 4 men for each group of 24 students or fraction thereof under- 
going instruction. Each member of the demonstration team is placarded 
and designated as follows (See Figure 1) : 
Number 1: The operator. 
2: The first assistant. 
3: The second assistant. 
4: The patient. 
b. Uniform for Troops: Field Uniform. 
Note: The No. 4 man or “patient” in each demonstration team 
should wear an old pair of salvaged trousers which 
can be slit by the operator in the step “Dress Wound,” so 
that the simulated wound (a spot on the anterior surface 
of the middle third of the left thigh marked with mer- 
curochrome or iodine previous to the demonstration- can 
be properly inspected and dressed. (Putting the dressing 
over the trousers might give the wrong impression of 
medical aid technique to newly-trained troops.) 
c. Equipment Required. The equipment required for each dem- 
onstration team is as follows (See Figures 2 and 3) : (22) 
BLANKET ' 
L1TTE-R_ 
&Pin$ 
Jafc-ty 
FIRST 
AID 
PACKET 
SPLINT 
SUPPORT 
REST 
SPLINT 
SUPPORT 
FOOT REST 
MUSLIN - 
BANDAGE- 
0 
"TRIANGULAR 
COMPRESS 
BANDAGES 
LITTER 
BAR 
TRACTION 
STRAP 
LEG 
SPLINT 
Tronf— 
Figure 3. Diagram showing space and equipment required for each team of 
demonstrators or students. The positions of the team members and 
of the equipment at beginning of introduction to application, is 
indicated. 
(1) One litter, complete with slings, Item 78440 (or one of 
any other type of litter available). 
(2) Three blankets, O.D. wool, 90 by 66 inches, Item 99090. 
(3) One Splint, Army Leg, Half-Ring, Hinged, Item 37500. 
(4) Two Splint support and footrest, Item 37515. 
(5) One Packet, first aid, for instruction, Item 20310. 
(6) One Bandage, muslin, 3 inch, Item 20080. 
(7) One Splint strap adjustable, traction, Item 37455. 
302 (22) 
(8) Six Bandages, triangular, compressed, Item 92040. 
(9) Six pin safety, large, item 78770. 
(10) One Litter bar, complete. (Item Number not available.) 
d. Instructional Aids. One large chart showing steps of applica- 
tion for the Army Hinged Half-Ring Thigh and Leg Splint (See Figure 4). 
Four oil cloth placards, numbered 1, 2, 3, 4, respectively, for each demon- 
stration team used (See Figure 1). 
ARMY LEG SPLINT 
* IO STEPS 
(. DREW LITTER 
2.APPLY TRACTION {TRAP 
initiate traction 
5. DREW WOUND 
4. apply Splint 
Secure traction 
5. Spu nt Support 
6. SUPPORT LEG 
7. FOOT REIT 
8. Place Patient on Litter 
9. Fix Spunt With Litter Bar 
10. Cover patient 
Note: The salvaged trou- 
sers worn by the demonstra- 
tion team “patient” and the 
mercurochrome or iodine 
spot painted on his left leg 
to simulate the wound are 
properly classed as “instruc- 
tional aids,” (See Paragraph 
4 b.) 
Figure 4. Chart showing' steps in 
application of Army Hinged 
Half-Ring Thigh and Leg 
Splint. 
SECTION II 
4. PROCEDURE,—a. The group performance method of instruc- 
tion is particularly useful in teaching certain basic and technical subjects. 
The number of students that can be instructed at one time is limited only 
by their ability to hear the instructor and see the demonstrators. A large 
number of students should always be divided into small groups, the num- 
ber of groups depending upon the number of trained demonstrators avail- 
able. The smaller the individual group the more effective will be the train- 
ing. If the individual groups be large and cannot clearly see the actions 
of the demonstrators, they should be permitted to leave their positions at 
the litter and form around the demonstrators in such a manner as will 
allow all to see equally well. 
A very definite order is observed in using the group method of in- 
struction. First, a procedure or operation is broken down into its logical 
steps. Then the instructor explains the first step (EXPLANATION). 
Secondly, the demonstration team demonstrates the first step (DEMON- 
STRATION). Third, the students imitate the first step (IMITATION). 
Fourth, the instructor and his assistants correct the errors, if any, made 
by the students in imitating the first step (CORRECTION OF ERRORS). 
303 (22) 
The instructor then explains the second step and the demonstration team 
demonstrates it, etc. Each of the steps of the operation is handled con- 
secutively and similarly by the four phases of the group method: (1) 
EXPLANATION, (2) DEMONSTRATION, (3) IMITATION, and (4) 
Student 
Army Leg Splint 
Teams 
Instructor 
CHART 
IO STEPy 
CHART 
IO STEPS 
DEMONSTRATION TEAM 
Figure 5. Suggested arrangement for group performance 
method of instruction. 
304 (22) 
CORRECTION OF ERRORS, until the entire operation has been com- 
pleted, 
b. Before the arrival of the group to be instructed the required 
number of litters, blankets and sets of equipment should be opened and 
arranged as shown in Figure 5. The equipment listed in paragraph 4 c 
is placed in proper position for the demonstration team and for each team 
of students (See Figure 3). 
c. The demonstration team marches to its litter at the head of 
the group of litters. They check their equipment. 
d. The demonstration team is formed for instruction as per 
Figure 1. The men are numbered 1, 2, 3, 4, from right to left. 
e. The officer instructor in charge directs the formation of the 
class. The students are assigned to their positions, 4 students to each litter. 
f. The students in groups of four take their positions at their 
respective litters facing the demonstration team. The instructor has the 
demonstration team count off after which the student teams count off. 
The student teams check their respective equipment. 
(In subsequent periods of instruction, the students should be 
rotated through the four numbered position.) 
g. Introduction to Step-by-Step Application of Army Leg Splint. 
The officer instructor introduces the period of instruction by explaining 
that the subject is the application of the Army Hinged Half-Ring Thigh 
and Leg Splint. He enumerates its uses and explains that, for instruction- 
al purposes only, the entire operation has been broken down into simple 
steps and that on the battlefield the splint would be applied without any 
perceptible adherence to a strict step-by-step technique, although the 
general sequence of actions would be essentially the same. He explains the 
way in which the step-by-step method works and he instructs the students 
as follows: To stand at parade rest while he explains each step. He states 
that he will then call the demonstrators to attention and order them to 
proceed, at which time they will demonstrate the step. He will then call 
the class to attention and order them to proceed with the imitation (appli- 
cation), each student of each team doing the respective job assigned to him 
in the explanation of the step. When finished with a step, each student 
will return to his former position and stand at parade rest, unless ordered 
otherwise. At this point the instructor and his assistant will correct any 
errors. 
He sets the stage for the enusing action by explaining that the ideal 
treatment for fractures of the thigh and leg is to “Splint them where they 
lie.” This, however, is not always practicable and the Army Leg Splint is 
usually not applied in areas forward of the battalion aid station. In trans- 
porting the patient to the aid station the two legs may be tied together to 
aid in the immobilization of the fracture. 
At this time the instructor explains that the “patient” is assumed to 
have suffered a compound fracture of the middle third of the left femur 
and has been brought to the aid station on the undressed litter. He in- 
305 (22) 
structs the number four man of each team to lie on his back on the litter 
in front of his team with his feet toward the number one man. The “pa- 
tient’s” left trouser leg is slit at the seam so that the thigh is exposed, 
making visible the mercurochrome or iodine mark previously placed there 
to simulate the flesh wound. 
h. The instructor then proceeds with the application of the 
Army Leg Splint, using the following 10 steps (See Figure 4, Chart) : 
(1) Dress litter. 
(2) Apply Traction Strap; initiate traction. 
(3) Dress wound. 
(4) Apply splint; secure traction strap. 
(5) Splint support. 
(6) Support leg. 
(7) Footrest. 
(8) Place patient on dressed litter. 
(9) Fix splint with litter bar. 
(10) Cover patient. 
STEP NO. 1 DRESS LITTER (See Figure 6). 
The litter is dressed by the No. 2 and No. 3 men. No. 1 steps to right 
so that students’ vision is not blocked. A litter is said to be “dressed” when 
the blankets have been arranged on it as follows: The first blanket is 
placed on the litter lengthwise so that one edge corresponds with the outer 
(or far) pole of the litter and its upper edge is even with the head of the 
canvas. The second blanket is placed lengthwise on the first so that one 
edge corresponds with the inner pole of the litter and its upper edge is 
Figure G. Step \«. i, Dress Fitter. Numbers 2 and 3 
Completing the Dressing of the litter. 
306 (22) 
Figure 7. Step Vo. Part 1, Showing traction strap in place. 
again even with the head end of the canvas. It is then folded back upon 
itself cnce in the same manner as the first blanket. The free edges of each 
of these blankets hang over opposite sides of the litter and there should 
be four thicknesses of blankets on the litter. The third blanket is folded 
to form a pillow for the patient, if the latter is not in shock, and is used 
as a pillow until the last step. 
Figure 8. Step Vo. 2: Part IT, Placing right hand through splint. 
307 (22) 
Figure 9. Step No. 2: Part II, Traction Initiated. 
STEP NO. 2. APPLY TRACTION STRAP. INITIATE TRACTION. (See 
Figures 7, 8, and 9.) 
Part I.—The instructor, holding up a traction strap, identifies its 
parts: (1) The loop, (2) the retention strap and buckle, (3) the extension 
strap and swivel. The No. 2 man then applies the adjustable traction strap 
to the foot of the injured limb without moving the foot and without re- 
moving the shoe. The loop is slipped over the toes and the forward half of 
the foot and placed around the foot, encircling it at the instep in such a 
manner as to bring the buckle to rest just posterior to the external 
malleolus. The retention strap is passed back of the ankle from the 
medial side to the lateral side and secured in the buckle. The swivel with 
the long traction strap attached is slid on the loop until it rests under the 
middle of the instep of the shoe. 
Part II.—The instructor holds up the Army Hinged Half-Ring 
Thigh and Leg Splint and identifies the following parts: (1) the short 
Figure 10. Step No. 3: Dressing the Wound. 
308 (22) 
Figure 11. Step No. 4: Rolling the Army Leg Splint into Position. 
inner rod, the long outer rod and the notched distal end; (2) The half-ring 
and the hinges; (3) The anterior web strap and its buckle. The No. 1 man 
takes the Army Leg Splint and adjusts it, placing the half-ring at a right 
angle to the bars of the splint so that when applied the short bar of the 
splint will be on the inner side of the leg and the concavity of the ring will 
be directed upward. In order to effect this, he places the splint next to 
the litter alongside the injured leg, with the ring at the proximal end of the 
thigh, the shorter rod down, and the concavity of the ring directed toward 
the injured leg. The No. 2 man then initiates traction as follows: Having 
applied the traction strap to the foot of the injured leg, he kneels at the 
feet of the patient, facing the patient, and the No. 3 man kneels at the side 
of the patient. The No. 2 man then places his right hand between the rods 
of the leg splint and grasps the heel. He grasps the toe with the left hand 
and, keeping his arms straight at the elbows, exerts a steady pull to pro- 
duce the necessary traction. This manual traction must -be continued until 
the traction strap has been secured to the end of the leg splint (STEP NO. 
4). The No. 3 man slides his hands under the calf and thigh of the injured 
leg to support it until the supporting bandages have been applied in Step 
No. 6. 
Figure 12. Step No. 4: Securing the Splint in Place with the 
Anterior Web Strap. 
309 (22) 
Figure 13. Stop \«. 4: Securing Traction Strap 
STEP NO. 3. DRESS WOUND (See Figure 10). 
(The instructor, holding up a First Aid Packet, instructional type, 
identifies it as the dressing which will be used in this step.) 
While the No. 2 man continues manual traction and the No. 3 man 
supports the injured leg, the No. 1 man inspects the wound of the left 
thigh and applies an occlusive sterile dressing. No. 2 and No. 3 man 
cautiously raise the injured leg high enough to allow the No. 1 man to 
apply the dressing and to inspect and dress any wound on the under sur- 
face of the leg. (The instructor explains that the trousers of the “Patients” 
in the student group will not be cut, but that for the purpose of saving time 
the dressing will be applied over the “Patients’ ” trousers. He cautions 
that thi* should never be done in actual practice.) 
STEP NO. 4. APPLY SPLINT AND SECURE TRACTION STRAP (See 
Figures 11, 12, and 13). 
While traction is maintained by No. 2 and the leg and thigh are sup- 
ported by No. 3, the No. 1 man applies the Army Leg Splint to the injured 
leg by rolling it under the leg and thigh from without inward, the short 
rod to the inner side. The half-ring, with the cancavity directed upward 
Figure l-» Step No. 5: Securing the Splint Support. 
310 Figure 15. Step No. 6s Supporting: the I.eg. 
is pushed firmly against the tuberosity of the ischium in order to effect 
counter-traction. The operator is careful to avoid possible injury to the 
patient’s scrotum and testicles from pressure by the splint. When the 
splint is correctly placed, the No. 1 man secures it by buckling the anterior 
web strap. 
Fixed traction is then effected in the following manner: No. 1 grasps 
the free end of the long traction strap, brings it down over the notched 
distal end of the splint, then folds it back upon itself and inserts it through 
Figure 16. Step No. 7: Securing Foot to the Foot Rest. 
311 (22) 
Figure 17. Step No. 8 s Lifting Patient. 
the metal ring of the swivel. He then pulls on the free end of the strap 
until the required traction is obtained and secures it to the notched distal 
end of the splint with an ordinary cinch knot. 
STEP NO. 5. SPLINT SUPPORT (See Figure 14). 
(The instructor, holding up a SPLINT SUPPORT, explains that it 
is identical with the FOOT REST which will be used later and identifies 
its parts: (1) The base (or closed end), (2) the splint end (or open end), 
(3) the arms.) 
No. 1 fastens the splint supports to the side rods of the Army Leg 
Splint with the arms of the support directed toward the patient and the 
base on the litter. This relieves the No. 2 man, enabling him to assist in 
the next step. No. 3 continues to support the leg and thigh. 
Figure 18. Step No. Ss Placing l>rcssed Litter Under Patient. 
312 (22) 
Figure IS). Step Np. S: Patient on Dressed Litter. 
STEP NO. 6. SUPPORT LEG (See Figure 15) 
(The instructor explains that the supports are BANDAGES, Tri- 
angular, compressed—not the heavy triangular bandage with tape ties used 
as arm slings. He unrolls one and mentions that they are not to be un- 
unfolded. He also mentions that they are used instead of ordinary muslin 
bandage because they do not roll forming a narrow, constricting, uncom- 
fortable cord.) 
No. 1 and No. 2 arrange 5 compressed triangular bandages, unrolled 
but not unfolded, on the splint to form a cradle for the leg—two under the 
Figure 20. Step 3Vo. 9: Securing Litter Bar in Place. 
313 (22) 
Figure 21. Step No. 0: Looking Splint Support in Litter Bar. 
i high, one under the knee, and two under the leg. These are all applied in 
like fashion, as follows: 
The bandage is placed over the bars of the splint and under the leg. 
'the ends of the bandage are reversed, by crossing them under the splint, 
and are then brought up and over the bars of the splint and tied together 
over the outer bar. No. 3 is then free to assist further in the succeeding 
steps of the application of the leg splint. (The instructor here remarks 
• hat the leg must be supported in every case in this way, regardless of the 
location of the fracture; muslin bandages 5 inches wide may be used in 
place of compressed triangular bandages, if the latter are not available; 
the wound dressing should not be incorporated in any of the leg supports.) 
STEP NO. 7. FOOT REST (See Figure 16). 
No. 1, assisted by No. 2 then attaches the foot rest to the rods of the 
splint just below the foot, with the base (or closed end) of the support 
directed anteriorly and the arms directed away from the patient. The foot 
rest is pushed up against the foot until the foot is at right angles to the 
leg. The foot is then secured to the foot rest by means of a triangular 
bandage in order to support and fix the foot in its proper position and to 
prevent foot drop. 
314 STEP NO. 8. PLACE PATIENT ON DRESSED LITTER (See Figures 
17, 18, and 19.) 
No. 2 and No. 8 take their positions alongside the patient on the side 
of the injured leg, No. 2 toward the head of the patient, No. 3 toward the 
feet. No. 1 assists from the opposite (uninjured) side. All three men 
kneel on that knee which is nearer the patient’s feet. No. 3 passes both 
forearms under the patient’s legs, carefully supporting the splinted leg. 
No. 2 passes one hand under the patient’s hips and thighs, and the other 
hand under the patient’s shoulders. All lift together, slowly and carefully, 
and place the patient upon the knees of the No. 2 and No. 3 men. As soon 
as he is firmly supported there, the No. 1 man relinquishes his hold and 
removes the undressed litter. Exposing the lower 5 inches of canvas, he 
slides the dressed litter underneath the patient. No. 1 resumes his former 
kneeling position opposite No. 2 and No. 3 and prepares to assist in 
lowering the patient. The patient is now gently lowered upon the dressed 
litter in such a way that the base of the splint support rests upon the 
canvas of the litter about lJ/o inches from its lower edge. 
(22) 
STEP NO. 9. FIX SPLINT WITH LITTER BAR (See Figures 20 and 21). 
(Instructor holds up litter bar and identifies its parts: (1) smooth 
undersurface, (2) grooved upper surface, (8) cam end, (4) cam lock, (5) 
securing strap, and (6) buckle with buckle catch. He then demonstrates 
how the buckle attaches to the buckle end of the bar and how it is locked 
in place by the buckle catch.) 
No. 8 holds up the distal end of splint so that base of splint support 
is about 3 inches off the canvas of the litter. No. 2 passes litter bar under 
the litter to No. 1 man who places litter bar across lower end of litter 
resting on both poles. The grooved surface is directed upward and its 
Figure 23. Step No. 10s Placing Third Blanket Over Patient. 
315 (22) 
cam end is on the side of the injured leg and allows the base of the splint 
support to rest easily in the groove. The cam lock handle will be on the 
side of the bar toward the patient when the left leg is splinted and on the 
side away from the patient when the right leg is splinted. At this point 
the bar may be straight across the litter, at right angles to the long axis 
of the litter or slightly angulated. Regardless of whether the bar is 
straight across the litter or angulated, No. 2 then secures the bar tightly to 
the litter by fastening the buckle to the litter bar (see Figure 20). No. 2 
locks the buckle in place by hooking the catch on its under surface over 
the side of the litter bar. The buckle should be so adjusted on the securing 
strap that when buckled the securing strap is under considerable tension, 
sufficient to prevent any movement of the bar on the litter. Finally, No. 1 
fastens the cam lock, thus fixing the base of the splint support securely in 
the groove of the litter bar. 
Figure 23. Step No. 10: Step Completed. Patient Ready 
for Transportation. 
STEP NO. 10. COVER PATIENT (See Figures 22 and 23). 
Nos. 2 and 3 fold the third blanket once lengthwise and place it over 
the patient, the upper edge under the patient’s chin. The free edges of 
the first two blankets are folded over the third and secured in place, using 
three safety pins to the body portion and three safety pins to the portion 
of the blankets enclosing the patient’s feet and the lower end of the splint. 
This gives four thicknesses of blankets over and four under the patient, 
thus assisting in the prevention of shock by conserving the patient’s body 
heat. 
316 (22) 
MEDICAL AID 
(Improvised Leg Splints) 
Instructor (s) 
Thirty-first Period: Two Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text Reference. Figures 84 and 85, FM 21-10. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Four demonstrators. 
Equipment. Improvised splints for fractures of femur: 1 board 2"x 
l"x4"; 1 board 2"xl"x5"; 2 straight branches, 4 feet 
long; 1 rifle; grass, straw or other suitable material for 
padding; 1 roll of 3" bandage or other suitable material 
securing splint; 1 first aid packet, instructional; (one 
set of improvised splinting material for each two en- 
listed men). 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline. Conference, demonstration and application. 
1. Conference. Talk briefly on improvised splints, stressing the 
materials that may be available to the medical soldier for improvised 
splints. 
2. Demonstration. Demonstrate several types of improvised splints 
and their application. 
3. Application. Procedure—Coach-and-pupil method. Apply sev- 
eral types of improvised leg splints. 
317 MEDICAL AID 
(22) 
(Wire Ladder Splint) 
Instructor (s) 
Thirty-second Period; Two Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. Section II, FM 8-50; Section III, Chapter 3, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One demonstrator and assistant. 
Equipment. One set of the following equipment for each two en- 
listed men; 2 wire ladder splints; 1 large piece of sheet 
wadding; 1 roll of 3" muslin bandage. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline. Conference, demonstration and practical exercise. 
1. Conference. Brief description of the wire ladder splint and the 
fractures best suited for its application. (There are 6 in each splint 
unit.) 
2. Demonstration. Demonstrate slowly, step by step, the applica- 
tion of the wire ladder splints for a fractured ankle. 
3. Practical Exercise. Procedure—Coach-and-pupil method. Ap- 
ply wire ladder to a fracture of the ankle. 
(22) 
MEDICAL AID 
(Arm Splint) 
Instructor (s) 
Thirty-third Period: Two Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. Paragraph 9, FM 8-50; Paragraph 132, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. 3 demonstrators. 
318 Equipment. For each two enlisted men: 
1 Army arm splint. 
1 roll 3" adhesive. 
3 triangular bandages. 
1 first aid dressing, instructional. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline. Conference, Demonstration and Practical Exercise. 
1. Conference. Brief remarks by the instructor on fractures and 
treatment of fractures of the arm. 
2. Practical Exercise. Procedure—See par. 9, FM 8-50, 
(22) 
(22) 
MEDICAL AID 
(Wire Ladder Splint) 
Instructor(s) 
Thirty-fourth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References, Section II, FM 8-50; Section III, Chapter 3, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One demonstrator and one assistant. 
Equipment. One set of equipment for each two enlisted men: 
2 Splints, wire ladder. 
1 Large piece of sheet wadding. 
1 Roll of muslin bandage or adhesive plaster. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline. Conference, demonstration and practical exercise. 
1. Conference. Brief remarks on the use of the wire ladder splint 
in splinting fractures of the forearm where extension is not re- 
quired. 
2. Demonstration. Demonstrate the application of the wire ladder 
splint in fractures of the forearm. 
3. Practical Exercise. Procedure—Coach-and-pupil method. Have 
each coach splint a fracture of the forearm using the wire ladder 
splint. 
319 MEDICAL AID 
(Arm Splints) 
(22) 
Instructor (s) 
Thirty-fifth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Field or classroom. 
Text References. FM 8-50; Figures 81, 82 and 83, FM 21-10; Section 
TIT, Chapter 3, FM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One demonstrator and one assistant. 
Equipment. One set of basswood splints for each ten enlisted men; 
piece of sheet wadding for each two enlisted men; 
one 3" roller bandage for each two enlisted men; 
one triangular bandage for each two enlisted men; 
one 2" roll of adhesive plaster for each two enlisted 
men; several boards and sticks to demonstrate impro- 
vised splints. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline. Conference, demonstration and practical exercise. 
1. Conference. Talk briefly on the method of using improvised 
splints in the treatment of fractures of the arm and forearm. 
2. Demonstration. Demonstrate the application of the basswood 
splints and improvised splints in the treatment of fractures of the 
arm and forearm. Demonstrate splinting of fractures of phalanges. 
3. Practical Exercise. Procedure—Coach-and-pupil method. Have 
each coach splint a fracture of the arm and forearm, first with the 
basswood splint and then with various types of improvised splints. 
320 MEDICAL AID 
(Practical Test) 
(22) 
Instructor (s) 
Thirty-sixth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. All previous references. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. All splinting material used during the instruction. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline. Practical test. 
1. Have each of the operating teams apply one of the following splints: 
a. Fracture of femur. 
(1) Use Army leg splint. 
(2) Use improvised splint. 
b. Fracture of tibia or fibula. 
(1) Use wire ladder splint. 
(2) Use board and blanket. 
c. Fracture of humerus. 
(1) Use Army arm splint. 
(2) Use improvised splint. 
d. Fracture of radius and ulna. 
(1) Use basswood splint. 
(2) Use improvised splint. 
2. When each of the coaches has completed his test assignment, 
and his work has been inspected by an instructor, the team is re- 
versed and new test assignments made. 
321 MEDICAL AID 
(Injuries Due to Burns) 
(22) 
Instructor (s) 
Thirty-seventh Period: Two Hours 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Section VII, Chapter 10, FM 21-10; Paragraph 147, 
TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One demonstrator. 
Equipment. One small jar of vaseline; one quart of normal salt so- 
lution; one pint of 2 per cent picric acid solution; one 
small roll of gauze; several roller bandages; one 
pint of denatured alcohol. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline. Conference, demonstration and practical exercise. 
1. Conference. 
a. Discuss: 
(1) Causes of burns. 
(2) Classification of burns: 
(a) First degree. 
. (b) Second degree. 
(c) Third degree. 
(3) Treatment of burns (general rules). 
b. Discuss chemical burns; their causes and treatment. 
c. Discuss the treatment of scalds, especially those occurring in 
the kitchen. 
2. Demonstration. 
a. Demonstrate the general rules to be observed in the treat- 
ment of burns. 
b. Demonstrate the method of treating a first degree burn; 
second degree burn; and chemical burns. 
c. Conclude with questions on important points discussed during 
the conference, 
3. Practical Exercise. Procedure—Coach-and-pupil method of in- 
struction, Have each coach give the general rules for treating burns, 
and actually apply the treatment for first and second degree burns. 
322 MEDICAL AID 
(Foreign Bodies) 
(22) 
Instructor (s) 
Thirty-eighth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Paragraph 132, FM 21-10; Paragraph 151, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One demonstrator. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline. Conference, demonstration and application. 
1. Conference. Briefly discuss removal of foreign bodies in the 
eye, ear, nose and throat. 
2. Demonstration. Demonstrate the method of removing foreign 
bodies from the eye, ear, nose and throat. 
3. Application. Procedure—Coach-and-pupil method of instruc- 
tion. Each coach to practice the first aid treatment of removing 
foreign bodies from the eye, ear, nose and throat. 
(22) 
(22) 
MEDICAL AID 
(Sunstroke, Heat Exhaustion, and Frost Bite) 
Instructor (s) 
Thirty-ninth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Paragraph 126, FM 21-10; Paragraphs 147 and 148, 
TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
323 Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline. Conference and oral quiz. 
1. Conference. 
a. Discuss the causes, symptoms and treatment of sunstroke and 
heat exhaustion. 
b. Discuss the symptoms and treatment of frost bite. 
2. Oral Quiz. Questions on the important points discussed during 
the conference. 
(22) 
MEDICAL AID 
(Poisonous Bites, Stings, and Common Poisons) 
(22) 
Instructor (s) 
Fortieth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Section VII, Chapter 10, FM 21-10; Paragraphs 142, 
TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline. Conference and oral quiz. 
1. Conference. 
a. Discuss the treatment of: 
(1) Snake bite. 
(2) Insect bite. 
(3) Animal bites. 
b. Discuss the treatment for the following poisons: 
(1) Carbolic acid. 
(2) Corrosive poisons. 
(3) Iodine. 
(4) Strychnine. 
(5) Overdoses of sedatives. 
(6) Wood alcohol. 
(7) Acute alcoholism. 
(8) Poison oak. 
2. Oral Quiz. Questions on the treatment of: 
a. Snake bite. 
b. Insect bite. 
c. The common poisons. 
324 MEDICAL AID 
(22) 
(Pain in Abdomen, Unconsciousness, Fainting, Fits, 
Epilepsy, Apoplexy and Head Injuries) 
Instructor (s) 
Forty-first Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Section IX, Chapter 10, FM 21-10; Paragraph 146, 
TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline. Conference and oral quiz. 
1. Conference. Discuss the causes, symptoms and first aid treat- 
ment of: 
a. Pain in the abdomen. 
b. Unconsciousness. 
c. Fainting. 
d. Fits. 
e. Epilepsy. 
f. Apoplexy. 
g. Head injuries. 
2. Oral Quiz. Questions on the main points covered daring the 
conference. 
(22) 
MEDICAL AID 
(Artificial Respiration) 
Instructor (s) 
Forty-second Period; One Hour 
Place. Field. 
Text References. Section V, FM 21-10; Paragraph 145, TM 8-220 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One enlisted man. 
Equipment. Blankets. 
Transportation. None. (22) 
Individual Equipment. One blanket for each two enlisted men; note- 
book and pencil. 
Suggested Outline. Conference, demonstration and practical exercise. 
1. Conference. Define asphyxia. 
a. Most common causes. 
b. Emergency treatment. 
2. Demonstration. Demonstrate artificial respiration — Schafer 
Method. 
3. Practical Exercise. Procedure—Coach-and-pupil method. Ap- 
ply Schafer Method of artificial respiration. 
(22) 
MEDICAL AID 
(Proficiency Test) 
Instructor (s) 
Forty-third Period; Two Hours 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. All previous text references. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. All equipment used during the 41st Period. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline. Oral quiz and practical application. 
Question each man on the subject matter covered in Periods 
39 through 42. Selected enlisted men to demonstrate the treatment 
for first and second degree burns. 
326 (23) 
SECTION III 
TACTICAL AND LOGISTICAL TRAINING 
MOVEMENTS BY MOTOR, ENTRUCKING AND DETRUCKING 
Purpose and Scope. The purpose of this instruction is to train individ- 
uals and groups of individuals to promptly entruck and detruck with- 
out confusion during hours of daylight or darkness. 
The course includes two practical exercises of two hours each. 
The initial period should be conducted during the hours of daylight, 
and the second during the hours of darkness. Since the instruction is 
by application, the size of the groups will depend upon the number 
and capacity of vehicles available. (See Figure 7, page 57, Field 
Manual 25-10.) 
Actual Time Allotted. 4 hours. 
Text References. Chapter 3, Field Manual 25-10; Chapter 9, Field 
Manual 100-5; paragraph 190, Field Manual 22-5. 
Methods of Instruction. Conferences and Practical Exercises.' 
Standard of Proficiency. Each company to be able to: 
1. Entruck promptly without confusion within 15 minutes after the 
arrival of the company and trucks at the entrucking point. 
2. Detruck promptly without confusion within 10 minutes after the 
trucks arrive at the detrucking point. 
3. Smoothly adjust itself quickly to any situation requiring movement 
of the unit by truck. 
327 (23) 
MOVEMENTS BY MOTOR, ENTRUCKING AND DETRUCKING 
(During Daylight) 
Instructor (s) 
First Period: Two Hours 
Place. Suitable road. 
Text References. Chapter 3, FM 25-10; Chapter 9, FM 100-5; para- 
graph 190, FM 22-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Drivers for trucks or ambulances. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. Trucks or ambulances. (See Figure 7, page 57, 
FM 25-10). 
Individual Equipment. Field packs. 
Procedure. Conference and Practical Exercises. 
1. Entrucking. 
a. Have several previously designated entrucking and detruck- 
ing points. 
b. Prepare time schedule for entrucking and detrucking prior 
to exercise. 
c. Count off men into vehicle loads and designate trucks for 
each vehicle load. 
d. Check entrucking time from the instant the command: 
“LOAD TRUCKS” is given until the last man is properly en- 
trucked. 
e. Drive several miles to designated detrucking point. 
2. Detrucking. Check detrucking time from the instant the com- 
mand: “UNLOAD TRUCKS” is given until the last man has de- 
trucked. 
3. Entruck again as soon as all the trucks are unloaded and drive back 
to original entrucking point. 
4. Detruck. 
Note. Traffic control must be arranged on route designated to 
avoid accidents. 
328 (23) 
MOVEMENTS BY MOTOR, ENTRUCKING AND DETRUCKING 
(During Darkness) 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period: Two Hours 
Place. Suitable road. 
Text References. Chapter 3, FM 25-10; Chapter 9, FM 100-5; para- 
graph 190, FM 22-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Drivers for trucks or ambulances. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. Trucks or ambulances. (See Figure 7, page 57, 
FM 25-10.) 
Individual Equipment. Full field equipment. 
Procedure. Conference and Practical Exercises. This is a night prob- 
lem, and will necessitate consideration of factors present because 
of darkness: 
1. Entrucking. 
a. Have several previously designated entrucking and detruck- 
ing points. 
b. Prepare time schedule for entrucking and detrucking prior 
to exercise. 
c. Count men off into vehicle loads and designate trucks for 
each vehicle load. 
d. Check entrucking time from the instant the command: 
“LOAD TRUCKS” is given until the last man is properly en- 
trucked. 
e. Drive a short distance to designated detrucking point. 
2. Detrucking. Check detrucking time from the instant the com- 
mand: “UNLOAD TRUCKS” is given until the last man has de- 
trucked. 
3. Entruck again as soon as all the trucks or ambulances are unloaded. 
Return to initial entrucking point. 
4. Detruck. 
Note. If a road having heavy traffic is used, arrangements should 
be made beforehand to control traffic, and thus avoid acci- 
dents. 
329 (24) 
MOVEMENTS BY RAIL, ENTRAINING AND DETRAINING 
Purpose and Scope. The purpose of this instruction is to teach enlisted 
men the proper methods of entraining and detraining, loading 
and unloading of individual and organizational equipment and 
transportation; use of a transportation request, and proper con- 
duct to be observed on trains. 
Actual Time Allotted. 4 hours. 
Text References. Field Manual 25-10; AR 30-945; AR 30-920; AR 30- 
910; Section IV, Circular No. 56, War Department, Washington, D. C., 
May 28, 1940. 
Methods of Instruction. Conference and Demonstration, followed by 
Application. 
Standard of Proficiency. Each enlisted man to know: 
1. How to properly entrain and detrain with individual equipment. 
2. Proper method of loading and unloading organizational equipment. 
3. How to make the required inspection of motor vehicles prior to ship- 
ment by rail (see check list—Appendix III, Field Manual 25-10). 
4. Proper method of loading and unloading motor vehicles on flat cars 
using ramp. 
5. How to properly secure the vehicles to the cars to prevent length- 
wise, sidewise and bouncing motions. 
6. All rules applicable to proper discipline and safety while in transit 
by rail. 
7. Proper method of installation and use of the field range on troop 
trains. 
8. Use of the transportation request. 
9. Proper conduct to be observed on trains. (24) 
MOVEMENTS BY RAIL, ENTRAINING AND DETRAINING 
Instructor (s) 
First Period: One Hour 
Place. Class Room. 
Text References. AR 30-910, Transportation Requests; AR 30-920, Trans- 
portation of individuals; AR 30-945, Transportation of Troops; Section 
I, Chapter 6, Field Manual 25-10; Section IV, Circular No. 56, WD, 
May, 1940, as changed by Circular 63, WD, 1940 and Circular 39, 
WD, 1941; Section 1, chapter 3, FM 100-10. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Transportation Requests. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Procedure. Conference. 
A general conference covering the following points: 
1. The use of the transportation request 
2. General instructions to travelers 
3. Proper conduct to be observed on trains 
4. Travelling as an individual or with a unit 
5. Transportation of troops 
6. Types of trains 
7. Methods of entraining and detraining 
8. Use of loading ramp 
9. Securing of vehicles on flat cars. 
10. Rules applicable to proper discipline and safety while in transit 
by rail. 
331 (24) 
MOVEMENTS BY RAIL, ENTRAINING AND DETRAINING 
(Entraining and Detraining of a Medical Battalion) 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period: Three Hours 
Place. Railroad siding. 
Text References. Same as 1st period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One unit with equipment to represent medical 
Equipment. I battalion, its individual and organizational 
Transportation. J equipment, and transportation. 
Individual Equipment. Individual equipment. 
Procedure. 
1. Conference and Demonstration (simultaneous). 
a. Organization of unit, and transportation for movement 
by rail. 
b. Types of railroad cars used for transporting troops and motor 
vehicles. 
c. Facilities for loading, blocking and unloading vehicles. 
d. Inspection and preparation of motor vehicles for trans- 
portation. 
e. Use of motor ramps. 
f. Securing motor vehicles to flat cars. 
g. Entraining and detraining of troops. 
h. Antiaircraft defense of train—passive measures and defen- 
sive fires. 
i. Installation of the United States Army Field Range in the 
baggage car. 
2. Application. 
a. Entraining and detraining of enlisted men. 
b. Inspection and preparation of motor vehicles for transporta- 
tion. (Fill out inspection report. See Appendix III, FM 
25-10.) 
c. Securing of motor vehicles to flat car, 
d. Installation of the United States Army Field Range in the 
baggage car. (25) 
SCOUTING AND PATROLLING, 
USE OF COVER AND CONCEALMENT 
Purpose and Scope. The purpose of this instruction is to teach Medical 
Department personnel, especially those assigned to field units, how to 
operate by night and day over varied types of terrain and close to or 
within the enemy position. 
The character of this duty requires a high degree of training in 
concealment, movement, and observation. Without this training, 
casualties within the Medical Department would be numerous and 
the first aid treatment of the wounded would consequently suffer. 
The scope covers the methods used for training individuals and 
groups of individuals in the principles upon which their operations 
are based. 
Actual Time Allotted. 6 hours. 
Text References. FM 21-45 ; par. 201, 206, 215, 231-233 and 286, FM 7-5 ; 
FM 30-30; par. 222, 224, 231 and 232, FM 21-100; TF 7-234; 
FS 5-3; FS 5-10. 
Methods of Instruction. Conference, Demonstration and Application. 
Standard of Proficiency. Each enlisted man must be able to: 
1. Recognize and use the military terms for features of the terrain. 
2. Orient a map by compass, by two points, by watch and sun, or by the 
North Star; understand conventional signs; correctly determine 
elevations and contours, scale distance on a map, and to find his 
position upon the map, or know his position in relation to other 
positions or objects on the ground. 
3. Determine direction: a. with, and b. without compass (day and 
night). 
4. Use the field message book in the transmittal of messages. 
5. Make simple sketches and prepare overlays. 
6. Use cover and concealment day and night. 
7. Function with patrols and raiding parties. (25) 
SCOUTING AND PATROLLING, 
USE OF COVER AND CONCEALMENT 
Instructor (s) 
First Period; One Hour 
Place. Field. 
Text References. Pars. 201, 206, 215, 231-238 and 286, FM 7-5; Pars. 
222, 224, 231 and 232, FM 21-100; Chaps. 2 and 3, FM 21-45. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. 6 demonstrators. 
Equipment. Blackboard; chalk and erasers. Two charts: one 
showing a prismatic compass and another showing de- 
termination of north by watch and sun. (See FM 21- 
25). 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline of Conference and Demonstration. 
1. A brief discussion by the instructor of the reasons why Medical 
Department soldiers need instruction in the basic principles of scout- 
ing and patrolling. 
2. Define patrols and raiding parties. Discuss their composition, for- 
mations and control during day and night operations. Discuss 
methods of rendering first aid to and evacuating wounded of patrols 
and raiding parties. 
3. Discuss the protection afforded wounded and medical personnel by 
the proper use of natural and artificial features. Mention the fact 
that the wounded instinctively seek protective concealment during 
combat. 
4. Discuss the selection and use of covered routes by litter bearers and 
other personnel. 
5. Discuss the use of maps and sketches. 
6. Discuss the military features of terrain as illustrated in FM 7-5. 
334 (25) 
SCOUTING AND PATROLLING, 
USE OF COVER AND CONCEALMENT 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References, Pars. 201, 206, 215, 231-233 and 286, FM 7-5; Pars. 
222, 224, 231 and 232, FM 21-100; Chaps. 2 and 3, FM 21-45. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Chart or blackboard showing a simple written message 
and sketch. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None, 
Suggested Outline. Conference, Demonstration and Application. 
1. Conference. Discuss (1) oral and (2) written messages, (3) 
sketches and (4) overlays, (5) orienting maps by compass, (6) 
two-point method, (7) watch and sun method, and (8) North Star. 
2. Demonstration. Demonstrate (1) the preparation of a sim- 
ple message using the field message blank, (2) a simple sketch and 
overlay, (3) orienting a map by compass, (4) two-point method, 
(5) watch and sun, and (6) North Star method. 
3. Practical Exercise. Squad instruction—Procedure: 
a. Have each squad leader orally deliver a prepared message 
to a member of his squad; this message is then transmitted 
through each of the enlisted men, one by one, until the last 
man has received the message. This man then repeats the 
message, and it is compared with the original. 
This will illustrate the importance of accuracy and the thorough 
understanding of the message by the man transmitting it. 
b. Give each soldier sufficient data to prepare a simple written 
message on a field message blank. Check each for accuracy. 
335 SCOUTING AND PATROLLING, 
USE OF COVER AND CONCEALMENT 
(25) 
Instructor (s) 
Third Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Pars. 201, 206, 215, 231-233 and 286, FM 7-5; Pars. 
222, 224, 231 and 232 FM 21-100; Training Film 7-234, “Use of 
Natural Cover and Concealment”; Film Strip 5-3, “Camouflage”; 
Film Strip 5-10, “Present Day Camouflage.” 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. Discuss the natural aids used in con- 
cealment- See Field Manual 7-5, Field Manual 21-100 and Field Manual 
21-45. Discuss Identification of U. S. Govt. Aircraft, FM 30-30. 
(25) 
SCOUTING AND PATROLLING, 
USE OF COVER AND CONCEALMENT 
(Tactical Walk) 
Instructor (s) 
Fourth Period: Three Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. Pars. 201, 206, 215, 231-233 and 286, FM 7-5; Pars. 
222, 224, 231 and 232, FM 21-100; Chaps. 2 and 3, FM 21-45. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
336 (25) 
Procedure—Tactical Walk. This should be a tactical walk over varied 
types of terrain, during which all military features, such as defilade 
and aids used in concealment are pointed out. Demonstrate the use of 
the natural aids used in concealment. Have men orient a map by 
compass, by the two-point method and by the watch and sun. 
In order that the instructors be familiar with the terrain, an in- 
structor qualified in terrain analysis should conduct a preliminary 
reconnaissance of the proposed area, selecting control points where 
important features of the terrain will be pointed out. 
MAP AND AERIAL PHOTOGRAPH READING 
(26) 
Purpose and Scope. 
1. The purpose of this course is to instruct selected enlisted men 
in the principles of maps and map reading, and in aerial photo- 
graph reading. 
2, Scope: 
a. Map reading. Conventional signs; military grid system; dis- 
tances; direction; elevation; terrain analysis; time—distance; 
practical use in the field; orientation and location, 
b. Aerial photograph reading. Identification and interpretation 
of terrain features; scales and orientation. 
Actual Time Allotted. 16 hours. 
Text References. FM 21-26; FM 21-80; FM 21-25; Film Strip 5-1, 
“Map Reading;” and Film Strip 5-2, “Aerial Photograph Read- 
ing”; Training Film 5-12, “Map Reading”; Training Film 7-233, 
“Determining Direction in the Field.” 
Methods of Instruction. Conference, Demonstration and Practical Exer- 
cise. 
Standard of Proficiency. Ability to use the military map and aerial 
photograph in the field. 
337 (26) 
MILITARY MAP READING 
(Conventional Signs and Locations) 
Instructor (s) 
First Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. FM 21-26; Sections I and II, Field Manual 21-25; 
Field Manual 21-30. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Blackboard; chalk and erasers; topographical map, 
3" = 1 mile; coordinate scale. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. One topographical map, 3" = 1 mile; one co- 
ordinate scale; one masonite lapboard, 20" x 16"; thumb tacks; 
pencil and paper. 
Note. In order to simplify and speed up instruction, each enlisted 
man may be issued “The Practical Course in Map Reading, 
Medical Field Service School” with two special overprinted 
maps and one special military map (aerial mosaic, Carlisle 
and vicinity, sheet 3, scale 1-20,000). 
Suggested Outline. Conference. 
1. Topographical map, 3" = 1 mile. 
a. Definition. 
b. Classification, 
c. Uses. 
d. Conventional signs and military symbols. 
e. Military grid system. 
(1) Location of points by means of coordinates. 
(2) Use of coordinate scale. 
(3) Writing of coordinates. 
2. Practical Exercise. Location of points by means of coordinates. 
3. Questions on material covered during period. 
338 MILITARY MAP READING 
(Conventional Signs and Locations) 
(26) 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period; One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. FM 21-26; Section V, FM 21-25; FM 21-30. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Blackboard; chalk and erasers; topographical map, 
3" = 1 mile; topographical map, 1" = 1 mile; coordinate 
scale. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. One topographical map, 3" = 1 mile; one 
topographical map, 1" = 1 mile; one coordinate scale; one masonite 
lapboard, 20" x 16"; thumb tacks; pencil and paper. 
Suggested Outline. Conference. 
1. Review: 
a. Coordinates, 3" map. 
b. Location of coordinate square, 1" map. 
c. Coordinates of points, 1" map. 
d. Location of points by means of coordinates, 1" map. 
2. Questions on material covered during period. 
MILITARY MAP READING 
(Scales and Distances) 
(26) 
Instructor (s) 
Third Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. FM 21-26; Section III, FM 21-25. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Topographical map, 3" = 1 mile; blackboard; chalk 
and erasers. 
Transportation. None. 
339 Individual Equipment. One topographical map, 3" = 1 mile; lapboard; 
pencil and paper. 
Suggested Outline. 
1. Conference. 
a. Marginal information. 
b. Scales defined. 
c. Use of scales. 
(1) Graphic scales. 
(2) Representative fraction. 
2. Practical Exercises. 
a. Distance measurements, by use of graphic scale. 
b. Determination of road distances. 
3. Questions on material covered during period. 
(26) 
MILITARY MAP READING 
(Direction) 
Instructor(s) 
Fourth Period: One Horn 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. FM 21-26; Section IV, FM 21-25. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Topographical map, 3" = 1 mile; protractor: black- 
board; chalk and eraser. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. One topographical map, 3" = 1 mile; protractor; 
lapboard; pencil and paper. 
Suggested Outline. 
1. Conference. 
a. Grid azimuth. 
b. Magnetic azimuth. 
c. True azimuth. 
d. Marginal information. 
2. Demonstration. Measurement of azimuth with protractor. 
3. Practical Exercise. Measurement of azimuth on a map. 
4. Questions on material covered during period. 
340 MILITARY MAP READING 
(Direction, Use of the Compass) 
(26) 
Instructor (s) 
Fifth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. FM 21-26; Sec. IV, FM 21-25. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Topographical map, 3" = 1 mile; compass; black- 
board; chalk and eraser. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. One topographical map, 3" = 1 mile; one com- 
pass ; lapboard; paper and pencil. 
Suggested Outline. 
1. Conference. 
a. Explanation of compass. 
b. Determination of magnetic north. 
c. Determination of magnetic bearing between two points. 
d. Determination of grid azimuth, given magnetic bearing. 
e. Following a given azimuth at night. 
2. Practical Exercise. Determining azimuth. 
3. Questions on material covered during period. 
MILITARY MAP READING 
(Orientation) 
(26) 
Instructor(s) 
Sixth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. FM 21-26; Sec. VII, FM 21-25. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Topographical map, 3" = 1 mile; compass; black- 
board; chalk and eraser. 
Transportation. None. 
341 (26) 
Individual Equipment. One topographical map, 3" = 1 mile; compass; 
lapboard; pencil and paper. 
Suggested Outline. 
1. Conference and Demonstration. 
a. Orientation of a map by compass. 
b. Orientation of a map by inspection. 
c. Orientation of a map without compass. 
d. Location of one’s position on a map. 
2. Practical Exercises. Orientation of a map with compass, with- 
out compass, by inspection, and location of one’s position on a map. 
3. Questions on the material covered during the period. 
(26) 
MILITARY MAP READING 
(Elevation) 
Instructor (s) 
Seventh Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. FM 21-26; Sec. VI, FM 21-25. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Topographical map, 3" = 1 mile; blackboard; chalk 
and eraser. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. One topographical map, 3" = 1 mile; lapboard; 
pencil and paper. 
Suggested Outline. 
1. Conference and Demonstration. 
a. Contour system. 
b. Elevation of point on contour line. 
c. Elevation of point between contour lines. 
d. Elevation along streams. 
e. Ridge lines and drainage systems. 
2. Questions on the material covered during the period. 
342 (2(5) 
MILITARY MAP READING 
(Elevation) 
Instructor (s) 
Eighth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. FM 21-26; Secs. VI and VII, FM 21-25. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Topographical map, 3" = 1 mile; blackboard; chalk 
and eraser. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. One topographical map, 3" = 1 mile; lapboard; 
pencil and paper. 
Suggested Outline. Practical Exercises. 
1. Elevation of point on contour line. 
2. Elevation of point between contour lines. 
3. Stream and ridge lines. 
4. Map determination of gradual and steep slopes along roads. (Spac- 
ing of contour lines.) 
5. Analysis of terrain. 
(26) 
MILITARY MAP READING 
(Training Film) 
Instructor(s) 
Ninth Period: One Hour 
Place. Theater. 
Text References. None. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Motion picture operator. 
Equipment. Motion picture projector; Training Film 5-12, Map 
Reading (5 reels, running time 45 minutes). 
Transportation. None. 
343 Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline. Motion Picture. 
1. Introductory remarks as desired. 
2. Training Film 5-12 (45 minutes). 
3. Summary—Answer questions, if any. 
(26) 
MILITARY MAP READING 
(Day Exercise) 
Instructor (s) 
Tenth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. Same as fifth and sixth periods. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Lapboard; pencil; practical written exercise; 
prismatic compass. 
Suggested Outline. Practical exercise in map reading. 
Walk in a given azimuth a specified distance, change azimuth 
and continue to walk a given distance, again change azimuth so that 
men return to starting point. 
344 MILITARY MAP READING 
(Night Exercise) 
(26) 
Instructor (s) 
Eleventh Period: Two Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. Same as tenth period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Lapboard; pencil; practical exercise; prismatic 
compass; flashlight. 
Suggested Outline. Practical exercise in map reading, similar to that 
of the preceding period except that different route will be used and 
that this will be conducted during hours of darkness. 
AERIAL PHOTOGRAPH READING 
(26) 
Instructor (s) 
Twelfth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. FM 21-26; Section VIII, FM 21-25. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Aerial photograph. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Aerial photograph and lapboard. 
Suggested Outline. 
1. Conference and Demonstration. 
a. Identification of terrain features, such as: roads, streams, 
railroads, vegetation, cultivated fields, buildings, etc. 
b. Scales. 
c. Light and shadows. 
2. Practical Exercises. 
a. Identification of terrain features. 
b. Distance. 
345 (26) 
AERIAL PHOTOGRAPH READING 
Instructor (s) 
Thirteenth Period: One Hour 
Place. Field. 
Text References. FM 21-26; Section VIII, FM 21-25. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Aerial photograph. 
Suggested Outline. Practical Exercise. This should be a terrain exercise 
over a local area, for which there is an available aerial photograph. 
The aerial photograph should be compared with important landmarks 
and terrain features. 
Suggestion. Written or practical examination covering map and aerial 
photograph reading during open time. 
(27) 
ORIENTATION IN NIGHT COMBAT 
Purpose and Scope. The purpose of this instruction is to teach the 
Medical Department soldier how to carry out his assigned duties 
under cover of darkness with the minimum of confusion and delay. 
Scope: Loading and unloading organizational equipment; move- 
ment without lights to installation sites and the occupation of these 
sites; reconnaissance; forward and rearward displacements. 
Actual Time Allotted. 14 hours. 
1. To all Medical Department enlisted men—6 hours. 
2. To all Medical Department enlisted men of field medical units— 
14 hours. 
Text References. Par. 212, Field Manual 7-5; Pars. 287-601, Field Man- 
ual 100-5, 
Method of Instruction. Application. 
Standard of Proficiency. Each enlisted man should be so experienced 
in night operations that he can function efficiently as an individual 
or as a member of a team during night operations. 
346 (27) 
ORIENTATION IN NIGHT COMBAT 
(Loading and Unloading Unit Equipment Under Night Conditions) 
Instructor (s) 
First Period: Two Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. FM 7-5 and FM 100-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Station equipment: aid, collecting or clearing stations. 
Transportation. Unit transportation. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline. Procedure. 
1. Loading and unloading unit equipment during the hours of dark- 
ness. 
2. Silence and precision to be stressed. 
(27) 
ORIENTATION IN NIGHT COMBAT 
(Daytime Reconnaissance in Preparation for Night Problem) 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period: Two Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. FM 7-5 and FM 100-5, 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Compass, if available. 
Suggested Outline. Procedure. 
1. Each platoon to reconnoiter sites for divisional and unit medical 
installations. 
2. The location of sites should conform to actual sites as far as the 
area and conformation of the terrain will permit. 
3. The reconnaissance should be made during daylight, observing 
routes, maintenance of direction, and rate of march. 
4. Routes should be marked and directions maintained by compass. 
5. Each platoon to represent a unit of the medical regiment or of 
regimental medical detachments. 
347 ORIENTATION IN NIGHT COMBAT 
(Exercise in Night Orientation) 
(27) 
Instructor (s) 
Third Period: Two Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. FM 7-5 ; FM 100-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Compass if available. 
Suggested Outline. Procedure. 
1. Follow the same procedure and use the same routes and sites as 
reconnoitered during the second period. 
2. Stress secrecy, quietness and rates of march. 
3. Direction with the aid of the compass should be encouraged. 
(27) 
ORIENTATION IN NIGHT COMBAT 
Instructor (s) 
Fourth Period: Four Hours 
(This period for tactical units only.) 
Place. Field. 
Text References. FM 7-5; FM 100-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Sufficient unit equipment to represent battalion aid 
stations, collecting, clearing, ambulance and service sta- 
tions ; Prepared messages. 
Transportation. Sufficient transportation to transport unit equip- 
ment and motor ambulances to represent divisional 
ambulance service. 
Individual Equipment. Compasses. 
348 (27) 
Suggested Outline. Procedure. This period must be carefully planned 
and controlled. 
1. Enlisted men to be organized into collecting, clearing, ambulance 
and service companies (skeletonized), and battalion medical sect- 
ions. 
2. Units to load equipment. Loading and movements to ,be made 
without lights. 
3. Company aid men to be assigned to simulated rifle companies prior 
to the march and directed to proceed to previously selected 
points on the terrain. 
4. One or more contact agents, previously instructed as to the general 
location of their respective collecting stations, are dispatched to 
each battalion medical section. 
5. All units march to previously selected station sites and establish 
simulated stations. 
6. Each company aid man to be given prepared messages showing the 
progress of the attack, which he will deliver to litter bearers. The 
messages should contain orders requiring at least one forward 
displacement of each medical installation (unit and divisional). 
Note. Messages should be transmitted by litter bearers, motorcyclists 
and ambulance drivers. On completion of the forward displace- 
ment, stations to be closed, equipment to be loaded and units to 
return to camp. 
ORIENTATION IN NIGHT COMBAT 
(27) 
Instructor (s) 
Fifth Period: Four Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. FM 7-5; FM 100-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Sufficient unit equipment to represent battalion aid 
stations, collecting, clearing, ambulance and service sta- 
tions. 
Transportation. Sufficient transportation to transport unit equip- 
ment, and motor ambulances to represent division- 
al ambulance service. 
Individual Equipment. Compasses. 
Suggested Outline. Procedure. Same as fourth period, except that mes- 
sages will require at least one rearward displacement. Use the same 
problem used in the fourth period. 
349 (28) 
COMMUNICATIONS IN COMBAT 
Purpose and Scope. The purpose of this course is to teach the medical 
soldier the means and methods employed in transmittal of messages 
and telephone conversations during combat. The scope should cover 
the methods employed by field medical units in preparing, recording 
and transmitting field messages. 
Actual Time Allotted. 10 hours. 
1. To all Medical Department enlisted men—5 hours. 
2. To all Medical Department enlisted men of field medical units— 
10 hours. 
Text References. Field Manual 24-5; Field Manual 11-5; TF 7-13 
Signal Communications within Inf. Regt.; FS 11-1 Basic Signal Com- 
munications. 
Methods of Instruction. Conference, Demonstration and Application. 
Standards of Proficiency. Each enlisted man to know: 
1. The means and methods used to transmit messages, ’ 
2. How to prepare a field message. 
3. The operation of a Medical Department unit message center. 
(28) 
COMMUNICATIONS IN COMBAT 
(Organization) 
Instructor(s) 
First Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. FM 24-5; FM 11-5; TF 7-18 (Signal Communication 
within the Regt.) may be used as an introduction. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Charts showing simple line route map of an infantry 
division, brigade, regiment and battalion; one field tele- 
phone. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
350 (28) 
Suggested Outline Conference, demonstration and quiz. 
1, Conference. 
a. Define: 
(1) Signal communications, 
(2) Message. 
(3) Agencies of signal communication (Signal Corps). 
(4) Means of signal communication, 
(5) Command post. 
(6) Axis of signal communication. 
b. Discuss the qualifications of: 
(1) A runner. 
(2) A bicycle, motor and motorcycle messenger, 
(3) A contact agent. 
2, Demonstration. Demonstrate the operation of a field telephone 
3, Quiz on important points discussed. 
(28) 
COMMUNICATIONS IN COMBAT 
(Signal Agencies and Means) 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. FM 24-5; FM 11-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Chart showing agencies of signal communication. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline. Conference and quiz. 
1. Conference. 
a. Discuss the following agencies of signal communication: 
351 (1) Message center. 
(2) Messenger communication. 
(a) Motor messenger. 
(b) Motorcycle messenger. 
(c) Ambulance messenger. 
(d) Bicycle messenger. 
(e) Dismounted messenger (runner). 
(f) Agent. 
(3) Visual communication. 
(4) Sound communication. 
(5) Wire communication, 
b. Discuss: 
(1) Carrying of messages, and rates of travel. 
(2) Delivery of messages. 
(3) Double messenger. 
(4) Routes. 
2. Quiz on important points discussed. 
(28) 
COMMUNICATIONS IN COMBAT 
(28) 
(Message Centers - Medical Units) 
Instructor (s) 
Third Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text Reference. FM 24-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Chart showing unit journal; message book; delivery 
lists. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline. Conference and quiz. 
1. Conference. Discuss the operation of a message center: 
a. Outgoing and incoming messages. 
b. Preparation of unit journal, 
c. Solution files. 
d. Definitions and abbreviations. 
e. Messenger schedules. 
f. Delivery lists. 
g. Classification of messages and their preparation. 
2. Quiz on important points discussed. 
352 COMMUNICATIONS IN COMBAT 
(28) 
Instructor (s) 
Fourth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text Reference. FM 24-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Three demonstrators; one ambulance and one motor- 
cycle with drivers. 
Equipment. For message center: A small table and stool—Chest 
M.D. No. 4; blank delivery lists; field message blanks; 
supply of carbon paper and pencil; lantern and flash- 
light (for night operation) ; time piece; message center 
direction signs; file. 
Transportation. One ambulance with driver. 
Individual Equipment. Lead pencil and several field message blanks. 
Suggested Outline. Conference, demonstration and practical exercise. 
1. Conference. 
a. Discuss the means of communication available to medical units 
in advance and to the rear of the collecting stations. 
b. Discuss the various methods employed in transmitting mes- 
sages from: 
(1) Company aid men to aid station. 
(2) Aid station to collecting station. 
(3) Collecting station to ambulance station, and to clearing 
station. 
(4) Collecting station to service station. 
(5) Collecting station to regimental command post and division 
surgeon’s office. 
2. Demonstration. Demonstrate the operation of a unit message 
center (collecting) to include: 
a. Preparation of field message. 
b. Procedure used for incoming and outgoing messages. 
c. Use of unit journal. 
d. Delivery lists, 
e. Classification of messages. 
f. Solution files. 
g. The various methods employed in the transmittal of messages. 
(Use only personnel authorized by TR 405-550, The Collecting 
Company). 
3. Practical Exercise. From data furnished by the instructor have 
each enlisted man prepare several field messages. 
4. Conclude with a discussion on the demonstration and practical 
exercise. 
353 (28) 
COMMUNICATIONS IN COMBAT 
(Message Writing) 
Instructor(s) 
Fifth Period: One Hour 
Note. The next five hours to be used for additional training of 
Medical Department enlisted men destined for medical field 
units. 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. FM 24-5 ; FM 11-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Blackboard ; chalk; eraser. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline. Conference, demonstration and quiz, 
1. Conference and demonstration. Discuss each of the following 
twelve points in message writing, and after discussing each point 
illustrate same on the blackboard. 
a. Number of copies prepared. 
b. Legibility and use of pencil. 
c. Capitalization of all proper names except signature and grade 
of sender. 
d. Use of coordinates. 
e. Brevity. 
f. The writing out of all punctuation marks, i.e., “Comma,” 
“stop,” “dash,” etc. 
g. Use of authorized abbreviations only. 
h. Numbering of messages. 
i. The proper method of writing the hour, day, month and year. 
j. Signature and official designation of sender. 
k. Use of vellum sheet in back of book (M-105). 
l. Time signed. 
2. Quiz; on important points discussed. 
354 COMMUNICATIONS IN COMBAT 
(28) 
(Message Writing) 
Instructor(s) 
Sixth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. FM 24-5; FM 11-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Prepare a series of six situations typewritten on index 
cards, one situation to each card, one card for each 
enlisted man. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Six or more field message blanks (may be mimeo- 
graphed), and lead pencil for each soldier. 
Suggested procedure of practical exercise. Give each man a card con- 
taining a described situation. Have each man prepare a complete field 
message observing all the points discussed in the previous conference. 
Allow five minutes for each requirement. Rotate cards at the end of 
each 15-minute period. Utilize the remainder of the period for a discus- 
sion of each of the requirements. 
Note. Collect all cards at the end of the exercise and preserve for 
future classes. 
(28) 
COMMUNICATIONS IN COMBAT 
(Practical Exercise) 
Instructor (s) 
Seventh Period: Two Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. FM 24-5; FM 11-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All platoon instructors. 
Equipment. See outline for practical exercise. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
355 Suggested Outline 
1. Outline of the practical exercise. Message center. 
a. Have a number of unit message centers located at various 
points and designated by a sign as message center (collecting), 
message center (clearing), message center (3d Medical Regi- 
ment), etc. 
b. Assign approximately six enlisted men to each of the mes- 
sage centers, one to act as message center chief, another as 
journal clerk, and the remainder as assistants and messengers. 
c. Each messenger should be designated as a runner, motor- 
cyclist, ambulance driver or litter bearer. 
d. Each message center to be equipped with the following: 
(1) A small table and stool. 
(2) Blank delivery lists. 
(3) Field message blanks. 
(4) Carbon paper and pencils. 
(5) Blank copies of unit journal. 
(6) Several large manila envelopes for files. 
(7) Time piece. 
(8) Sixteen prepared messages in duplicate, some written il- 
legibly, improperly addressed, and with different dates, 
and classified as urgent (O), priority (P), and routine. 
(9) Message center number sheets. 
(10) Time schedule for delivery of messages. 
e. One enlisted man is charged with the delivery of messages to 
the message center chief in accordance with the time schedule. 
(Acts both as writer and messenger.) 
2. Procedure. 
a. Message center chief. 
(1) Outgoing messages. 
(a) Receives the messages in duplicate from the writer or 
messenger. 
(b) Immediately inspects the message for legibility and 
proper address. He declines to accept illegible and im- 
properly addressed messages, and if necessary brings 
such messages immediately to the attention of the unit 
commander. 
(c) Writes the time of receipt on both copies of the mes- 
sage. 
(d) Writes the message center number beginning a new 
series at midnight each day. 
(e) Checks the message center number off his number 
sheet by drawing a diagonal line through the corre- 
sponding number. Enters the message center number 
in the first column of the delivery list, and writes the 
time dispatched in the proper blank space. 
356 (f) Decides the method of transmittal, and delivers the 
original with the delivery list to the proper messenger 
(runner, ambulance driver, motorcyclist, etc.) and 
files the duplicate copy in the live file. 
(g) Receives the signed delivery list from the messenger as 
soon as it has been returned by the messenger. 
(h) Checks the transmitted message off his number sheet 
by drawing a diagonal line through or encircling the 
corresponding number, and writes the time returned 
in the proper blank space on the signed delivery list. 
(i) Removes the duplicate copy of the message from the 
live file and places it with the signed delivery list in 
the dead file. 
(2) Incoming messages. Incoming messages are not assigned 
message center numbers. 
(a) Receives the message from the incoming messenger, 
signs the delivery list of the distant message center, re- 
turns the delivery list to the messenger. 
(b) Services the message, entering the time received under 
the message. 
(c) Copies the message in duplicate, prepares a delivery 
list, designates a messenger to deliver the message and 
writes the time dispatched in the proper space when 
the messenger is ready to depart. 
(d) Hands the message and delivery list to the messenger. 
(e) Writes the time returned in the proper space when the 
signed delivery list has been returned to him by the 
messenger, and files it with the duplicate copies in the 
dead file. 
b. Messenger. 
(1) Outgoing messages. 
(a) Delivers the message and delivery list to the distant 
message center chief or addressee who signs it and, in 
case of the routine delivery list, enters the time of re- 
ceipt in the last column. 
(b) Receives the signed delivery list from the message cen- 
ter chief or addressee, and returns to his own message 
center where he enters his name or initials on the de- 
livery list for identification. 
(2) Incoming messages. 
(a) Delivers the message and delivery list to addressee and 
obtains his signature and, in the case of the route de- 
livery list, the time received. 
(b) Returns to the message center and enters his name or 
initials on the delivery list for identification. 
357 (28) 
c. Clerk of unit journal. 
(1) The journal is the log of the unit. It contains briefs of all 
written and oral messages received or sent, and notations 
of periodic reports, orders, and similar matters that per- 
tain directly to the unit. 
(2) Refers to time of receipt or sending in this office. 
(3) Refers to time information originated, thus calling atten- 
tion to the age of the information. 
Example: 
Time2 
In Out 
Serial1 
No. 
Time3 
dated 
Incidents, Messages, 
Orders, Etc. 
Disposition 
(29) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
Purpose and Scope. To furnish necessary instruction to individual 
elements so that they can function as a team with other units of their 
organization. 
To correlate the training in those subjects common to more than 
one element. 
Finally, to combine various elements into a complete unit so that 
the unit will function efficiently as a Battalion or Regiment. 
Actual Time Allotted. 95 hours. 
Text References. Field Manuals: 5-20, 7-5, 8-5, 8-10, 8-45, 8-50, 8-55, 
21-10, 21-100, 22-5, 25-10, 100-5, 100-10. Technical Manuals: 5-400, 
8-220, 8-260, 8-285, 8-500, 12-250. Film Strips: 8-1, 8-3, 8-7, 8-9, 
8-17, 8-19, 8-20, 8-21, 8-22, 8-25, to 8-31, inclusive. Tables of Or- 
ganization, 8-series, Medical Department. 
Methods of Instruction. Lecture, Conference, Demonstration and Group 
Method. 
358 Standards of Proficiency. Each unit must be so trained that it can: 
1. Efficiently fulfill required technical and tactical duties under simu- 
lated combat conditions. 
2. Function in team work with other Medical Organizations concerned 
in the evacuation process. 
Note: This section (TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL EMPLOYMENT OF 
MEDICAL FIELD UNITS) is written primarily for Medical Regi- 
ments (Square Division). 
Those individuals concerned with the training of Companies of the 
Medical Battalion may find it necessary to alter the contents of 
this section of the guide to fit their specific unit. For Example: 
The training of the Headquarters Detachment (Medical Battalion) 
will be very similar to that of the Headquarters and Service Com- 
pany (Medical Regiment), insofar as these units are both or- 
ganized in a similar manner. Because the ambulances are a part 
of the Collecting Company in a Medical Battalion, the Company 
Commander of this unit will find it necessary to combine the train- 
ing of the Collecting and Ambulance Companies, as outlined in 
this guide. 
(29) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
MEDICAL DETACHMENTS 
(29b Med. Det.) 
(Reconnaissance, Use of Cover and Concealment) 
Instructor(s) 
First Period: One Hour 
Place. Field. 
Text References. FM 7-5; Chapter 13, FM 21-100; Sec. Ill, Chapter 2, 
FM 8-10. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Prismatic compass. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Prismatic compasses. 
Suggested Outline. Practical exercise. 
1. To follow a given azimuth in daylight with the aid of prismatic 
compass. 
2. Lay out a triangular course, each leg 200 to 300 yards in length. 
3. Require the men to traverse the course by means of a direction 
(magnetic azimuth) and distance (paces) between stations. 
Note. Men to be cautioned to use the prescribed drill pace. One 
assistant instructor should be placed at each station to give 
information for the next leg of the triangle. 
359 (29b Med. Det.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
MEDICAL DETACHMENTS 
(Reconnaisance, Use of Cover and Concealment) 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period: One Hour 
Place. Field. 
Text References. FM 7-5; Chapter 13, FM 21-100; Sec. Ill, Chapter 2, 
FM 8-10. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. 4 litter bearer squads. 
Equipment. 4 litters. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline. Demonstration. 
1. The men to be marched to a point on the terrain where the 
actions of the demonstrators can be readily seen. 
2. Briefly explain the purpose of the demonstration and discuss the 
actions of the demonstrators during each phase of the demonstra- 
tion. 
3. Procedure. Litter bearers. 
a. Demonstrate the use of defiladed and covered routes. 
b. Demonstrate a method of crossing and avoiding areas which 
are subject to artillery fire, or concentrations of mustard gas. 
c. Demonstrate the use of cover and concealment for litter 
patients and bearers during hostile aerial activity. Conceal 
patients in shade, woods, brush, tall grass, etc. If natural con- 
cealment is insufficient, cover patient with grass, leaves, 
twigs, etc. 
360 TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
MEDICAL DETACHMENTS 
(29b Med. Det.) 
(Reconnaissance, Use of Cover and Concealment) 
Instructor (s) 
Third Period: Four Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. Tables of Organization, Med. Dept. 8-series; FM 7-5; 
Chapter 13, FM 21-100; Chapter 2, FM 8-10. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel.. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Emergency Medical Tags and eight litters for each 
32 men. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Kits, medical, privates. 
Suggested Outline. Practical exercise—daylight. 
1. Purpose. The purpose of this exercise is to give practical train- 
ing in the use of cover and concealment while evacuating wound- 
ed from the field of battle. The exercise to be conducted by 
company and supervised by company instructors. 
2. Organization. The company should be organized into litter 
bearer platoons with selected men acting as platoon sergeants 
and section leaders. 
3. Terrain. An area of difficult terrain, approximately 600 yards 
long and 500 yards wide. 
4. Conduct of exercise. 
a. Select site for simulated aid station. 
b. Tag and distribute patients at the rate of one patient to each 
litter bearer squad. 
c. Assemble litter bearers at aid station. Point out general direc- 
tion of attack. Send litter bearers forward with instruction to 
search the field for wounded, render proper first aid, (type 
and extent of wound should be noted on Emergency Medical 
Tag), and evacuate the wounded by litter carry to the aid 
station. Caution litter bearers that area covered is subject to 
intermittent machine gun and artillery fire. 
5. When completed, assemble the company and conduct a short 
critique. 
361 (29b Med. Det.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
MEDICAL DETACHMENTS 
(Reconnaissance, Use of Cover and Concealment) 
Instructor (s) 
Fourth Period: Four Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. Tables of Organization, Med. Dept. 8-series; FM 7-5; 
Chapter 13, FM 21-100; Chapter 2, FM 8-10. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Emergency Medical Tags and 8 litters for each 32 men. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment, None. 
Suggested Outline. Practical exercise—cover of darkness. 
1. Purpose. The purpose of this exercise is to give practical training 
in the use of defilade and in searching the field for wounded 
during the hours of darkness. Conduct exercise by company and 
supervise by company instructors. 
2. Organization. The company to be organized into litter bearer 
platoons with selected men as platoon sergeants and section 
leaders. 
3. Terrain. An area of difficult terrain, approximately 600 yards 
long and 500 yards wide. 
4. Conduct of exercise. 
a. Select site for simulated aid station. 
b. Tag and distribute patients at the rate of one patient per lit- 
ter bearer squad. (Care should be exercised that patients 
selected are not those who were used during the daylight 
exercise.) 
c. Assemble litter bearers at aid station. Point out general 
directions of the attack. Send litter bearers forward to search 
the field for wounded, render proper first aid( patients to 
give the type and extent of wound as noted on Emergency 
Medical Tag), and evacuate wounded by litter to the aid 
station. Caution litter bearers that area searched is subject to 
intermittent machine gun fire. Unit instructors to observe the 
actions of the litter bearers and correct errors in the use of 
defilade and first aid treatment. 
5. When completed, assemble the company and conduct a critique. 
362 TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
MEDICAL DETACHMENTS 
(29c Med. Det.) 
[Collection and Evacuation of Casualties from the Field (Day)] 
Instructor (s) 
First Period: Five Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. Sec. II, Ch. 2, FM 8-10; Chap. 2, FM 8-5; FS 8-17 
(Unit Medical Service). 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Dressings; blankets; splints; one litter for each litter 
bearer squad; any other equipment available to assist 
in establishing and operating an improvised aid station. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Full field equipment. 
Suggested Outline. Practical exercise. 
1. Organize each platoon into a battalion medical section using 
surplus personnel as additional litter bearers and patients. 
2. Procedure. Distribute patients (litter cases only) over a bat- 
talion zone of advance requiring a 300 to 400-yard litter carry. 
Each patient should bear a tag showing the location, type and 
extent of his wound. During the advance each company aid man 
will search the field for wounded, dress those found, place them 
in covered positions and mark their location. 
Designate or mark areas in the zone of advance as under 
aimed rifle, machine gun and intermittent artillery fire, in 
order to provide training in the use of ground in cover and con- 
cealment during combat. All men should be impressed with the 
necessity of rendering early first aid treatment to the wounded, 
regardless of their own personal dangers. 
3. Litter bearer squads. Prior to being dispatched the litter bearers 
should be impressed with the necessity of using natural and 
artificial features of the terrain while searching for wounded, 
and using defilade for litter bearer routes. Litter bearer routes 
should present a number of natural or artifical obstacles which 
litter bearers are required to cross during the evacuation of 
wounded from the field. 
4. Aid station squad. The aid station personnel to function as in 
actual warfare. 
363 (29c Med. Det.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
MEDICAL DETACHMENTS 
[Collection and Evacuation of Casualties from the Field (Day) ] 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period; Five Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. See First Period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Dressings; blankets; splints; one litter for each litter 
bearer squad; extra dressings for company aid men; any 
other equipment available to assist in establishing and 
operating an improvised aid station. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Full field equipment. 
Suggested Outline. Practical exercise. Same as first period, except 
rotate personnel. 
(29c Med. Det.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
MEDICAL DETACHMENTS 
[Collection and Evacuation of Casualties from the Field (Day)] 
Instructor (s) 
Third Period: Four Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. See First Period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Dressings; blankets; splints; one litter for each litter 
bearer squad; extra dressings for company aid men; any 
other equipment available to assist in establishment and 
operation of an improvised aid station. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Full field equipment. 
Suggested Outline. Practical exercise. Same as first period, except 
rotate personnel. 
364 (29c Med. Det.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
MEDICAL DETACHMENTS 
[Collection and Evacuation of Casualties from the Field (Day)] 
Instructor(s) 
Fourth Period: Four Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. Same as First Period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Dressings; blankets; splints; one litter for each litter 
bearer squad; extra dressings for company aid men; 
any other equipment available to assist in establishing 
and operating an improvised aid station. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Full field equipment. 
Suggested Outline. Practical exercise. Same as first period, except 
rotate personnel. 
(29c Med. Det.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
MEDICAL DETACHMENTS 
[Collection and Evacuation of Casualties from the Field (Day)] 
Instructor (s) 
Fifth Period: Four Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. Same as First Period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Dressings; blankets; splints; one litter for each litter 
bearer squad; extra dressings for company aid men; 
any other equipment available to assist in establishing 
and operating an improvised aid station. 
Transportation. None, 
Individual Equipment. Full field equipment. 
Suggested Outline. Practical exercise. Same as first period, except 
rotate personnel. 
365 (29c Med. Det.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
MEDICAL DETACHMENTS 
[Collection and Evacuation of Casualties from the Field (Day)] 
Instructor (s) 
Sixth Period: Four Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. Same as First Period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Dressings; blankets; splints; one litter for each litter 
bearer squad; extra dressings for company aid men; 
any other equipment available to assist in establishing 
and operating an improvised aid station. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Full field equipment. 
Suggested Outline. Practical exercise. Same as first period, except 
rotate personnel. 
(29c Med. Det.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
MEDICAL DETACHMENTS 
[Collection and Evacuation of Casualties from the Field (Day)] 
Instructor (s) 
Seventh Period: Four Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. See First Period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Dressings; blankets; splints; one litter for each litter 
bearer squad; extra dressings for company aid men; 
any other equipment available to assist in establishing 
and operating an improvised aid station. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Full field equipment. 
Suggested Outline. Practical exercise. Same as first period, except 
. rotate personnel. 
366 (29i Med. Det.) 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
MEDICAL DETACHMENTS 
(Selection and Occupation of Aid Station Sites and the 
Functioning of Such Stations) 
Instructor (s) 
First Period; One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Sec. II, Chapter 2, FM 8-10; Chap. 2, FM 8-5 ; FS 8-17 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Organizational and functional assignment charts. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline. Conference and oral quiz. 
1. Conference. Discuss the— 
a. Composition of the medical detachment, 
b. Organization and duties of the personnel. 
c. Employment in garrison, on the march and in combat. 
d. Functions of the company aid men. 
e. Litter bearers. 
f. Aid station squad. 
2. Oral quiz on important points discussed. 
(29i Med. Det.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
MEDICAL DETACHMENTS 
(Selection and Occupation of Aid Station Sites and the 
Functioning of Such Stations) 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period; One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. See First Period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Organizational and functional assignment charts. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None, 
367 Suggested Outline. Conference and oral quiz. 
(29i Med. Det.) 
1. Conference. 
a. Define— 
(1) Aid station. 
(2) Regimental aid station. 
(3) Battalion aid station. 
(4) Veterinary aid station. 
b. Discuss the— 
(1) Location of regimental, battalion and veterinary aid sta- 
tions. 
(2) Selection of such sites. 
c. Discuss the function, operation and organization of the dif- 
ferent aid stations. 
d. Discuss aid station equipment. 
2. Oral quiz on the important points discussed during the confer- 
ence. 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
MEDICAL DETACHMENTS 
(29i Med. Det.) 
(Selection and Occupation of Aid Station Sites and the 
Functioning of Such Stations) 
Instructor (s) 
Third Period: Two Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. See First Period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline. Tactical walk. 
1. Each platoon commander to conduct a tactical walk over varied 
types of terrain presenting a number of desirable sites for aid 
stations, pointing out in each instance the features that make the 
location desirable. 
2. Point out several sites that having features which make them un- 
desirable. 
368 (29i Med, Det.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
MEDICAL DETACHMENTS 
(Selection and Occupation of Aid Station Sites and the 
Functioning of Such Stations) 
Instructor (s) 
Fourth Period: Three Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. See First Period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Battalion aid station equipment. 
Transportation. Battalion aid station transportation. 
Individual Equipment. Full field equipment. 
Suggested Outline. Demonstration and practical exercise. 
1. Organization. Prepare assignment rosters and post them on the 
company bulletin board. Select suitable sites for battalion aid 
stations. 
2. Demonstration, Have one of the battalion medical sections 
properly placarded, slowly demonstrate the establishment, func- 
tioning and closing of a battalion aid station. During the demon* 
stration explain in detail the laying out of equipment, its use, and 
the duties of the personnel. 
3. Practical Exercise. Have all of the medical sections establish, 
operate and close the station. 
4. Question the personnel on their functional assignments. 
369 (29i Med. Det.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
MEDICAL DETACHMENTS 
(Selection and Occupation of Aid Station Sites and the 
Functioning of Such Stations) 
Instructor (s) 
Fifth Period: Four Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. See First Period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Battalion aid station equipment. 
Transportation. Battalion aid station transportation. 
Individual Equipment. Stripped packs and medical belts or pouches for 
battalion medical section. Extra dressings for the company aid men. 
Suggested Outline. Demonstration. Reduced distances for all phases of 
the demonstration. 
1. Route column and development. The Detachment (less one bat- 
talion medical section) is organized to simulate an infantry bat- 
talion of three rifle companies marching in route column. The 
company has reached the zone of hostile artillery fire, and is halted. 
The development order has been issued and the company is now 
awaiting orders for the approach march. 
The company aid men in the rear of their respective companies are 
being issued extra dressings. The battalion medical section (less 
company aid men) is in the rear of the battalion. The battalion 
commander and the battalion surgeon are at the head of the 
column. 
2. Approach march. 
a. The two leading companies in approach march formation 
(squad column) advance toward the line of departure. A num- 
ber of casualties occur. The company aid men of the assault 
companies dress the casualties, move them to sheltered areas 
and continue forward with their respective companies. 
b. The reserve company turns off the road and assembles in a 
sheltered area. 
870 c. The litter bearers are deployed to cover the widening bat- 
talion front. The remainder of the section marches along the 
axis of advance in extended order. The battalion surgeon re- 
mains with the battalion commander. The assistant battalion 
surgeon remains with the battalion medical section. 
d. The assault companies advancing in their zone of action are 
about to halt in rear of the line of departure. 
e. The battalion surgeon completes his reconnaissance for the 
aid station site, joins the assistant battalion surgeon, points 
out the approved location, and directs that the station be es- 
tablished. The wounded begin to arrive at the aid station. The 
aid station is established and the treatment of the wounded 
begins. 
3. The instructor explains the purpose of the demonstration and 
points out all important events. 
(29i Med. Del.) 
(29i Med. Det.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
MEDICAL DETACHMENTS 
(Selection and Occupation of Aid Station Sites 
and the Functioning of Such Stations) 
Instructor (s) 
Sixth Period: Four Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. See First Period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Battalion aid station equipment. 
Transportation. That of battalion medical section. 
Individual Equipment. Full field equipment. 
Suggested Outline. Practical Exercise. 
1. Organization. Organize each platoon into a battalion medical 
section, using surplus personnel as additional litter bearers or 
patients, 
2. Procedure. Distribute patients (litter wounded only) over a bat- 
talion zone of advance so that the litter carry will be a distance of 
300 to 400 yards. A tag showing the location, type and extent of 
injury should be on each patient. 
a. Company aid squad. The company aid men to work in pairs 
and advance in a designated rifle platoon zone of action (100 
to 150 yards). During the approach march and advance each 
company aid man is to search for wounded, dress those found, 
place them in covered positions, and mark these positions. 
371 Areas in the zone of advance should be designated by signs as 
under aimed rifle, machine gun, or artillery fire, in order to 
provide training in the use of ground and cover during combat. 
All men should be impressed with the necessity of rendering 
early £irst aid to the wounded, regardless of their own personal 
dangers. 
b. Litter bearer squads (reinforced). Prior to being dispatched 
the litter bearers should be impressed with the necessity of using 
natural and artificial features of the terrain while searching 
for wounded and using defilade for litter bearer routes. 
c. Aid station squad. The aid station squad should function as in 
actual combat. The noncommissioned officers to act as surgical 
assistants, assistant dressers, charge of property and property 
exchange, water purification, preparation of hot stimulants, 
sterilization of instruments, and administration of antitetanic 
serum and other hypodermic medication. One private to per- 
form clerical duties, such as the preparation of the Emergency 
Medical Tag (Form 52b, Medical Department, Revised January 
31, 1940). The others to act as assistant dressers, utility men 
and drivers of the battalion motor vehicles. 
(29i Med. Det.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
(29j Med. Det.) 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
MEDICAL DETACHMENTS 
(Forward Displacements and Withdrawals During Action) 
Instructor (s) 
First Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Chap. 2, FM 8-5; Chap. 2 & 7, FM 8-10; FM 100-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline. Conference. 
1. Discuss the mission or purpose of forward displacement and a 
withdrawal from action and methods followed for such move- 
ments during the day and night. 
372 2. Discuss: 
a. The selection of a position or successive positions for such 
movements. 
b. The formation of a covering force and how it occupies the 
initial covering positions, 
c. The designation of positions well to the rear to which units 
will withdraw, assemble and reorganize. 
d. The withdrawal of troops in close contact with the enemy. 
e. Delaying the hostile force. 
f. The reorganization of the force for future employment; 
counterattack, retirement, or defense. 
3. Discuss the employment of the medical detachment during with- 
drawals to include: 
a. Medical service for the covering force. 
b. Clearing the field and aid stations of wounded, 
c. Establishment and evacuation of collecting posts. 
d. Operation of clearing stations. 
e. Medical service in general during the withdrawal. 
(29j Med. Det.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
(29j Med. Det.) 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
MEDICAL DETACHMENTS 
(Forward Displacements and Withdrawals During Action) 
Instructor (s) . 
Second Period: Four Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. See First Period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Battalion aid station equipment. 
Transportation. Battalion aid station transportation. 
Individual Equipment. Full field equipment with medical belts or 
pouches for all medical demonstrators. 
Suggested Outline. Practical Exercise. 
The instruction here should cover the medical service of an infantry 
regiment during an attack and subsequent withdrawal. 
In the first phase of the exercise the station should be displaced 
forward at least twice. In the second phase explain to the men that the 
attack has been stopped and that the regimental commander has de- 
cided to withdraw to a position in the rear. Explain the plan of with- 
drawal of line troops and the coordinated medical plan. 
Execute the complete medical service of the withdrawal. 
373 (29k Med. Det.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
MEDICAL DETACHMENTS 
(Operation of Regimental and Battalion Dispensaries) 
Instructor (s) 
First Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. FM 8-45; Chapter 2, FM 8-10; Instructions contained 
on each of the MD and WD forms used. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Enlarged charts of Forms 52a, 55a, WD AGO No. 5, 
and WD AGO No. 528; prepared histories of cases to 
be recorded on the mimeograph blanks by the men. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Issue blank mimeographed copies of the above 
forms to each man. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. 
1. Discuss the purpose, preparation, and disposition of the following 
forms: 
a. Form 52a MD, Index Record of Patients. 
b. Form 55a MD, Clinical Record Brief 
c. Form WD, AGO No. 258, Record of Illness, Injury, Etc. 
d. Form WD, AGO No, 5, Daily Sick Report. 
2. Practical exercise. Have all men complete the above forms, using 
the sample case history. 
3. Correction of errors. Show properly completed form, then have 
men make necessary corrections to complete their forms accord- 
ingly. 
374 (29k Med. Det.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
MEDICAL DETACHMENTS 
(Operation of Regimental and Battalion Dispensaries) 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Same as First Period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Enlarged charts of Forms WD, AGO No. 68 ; WD, AGO, 
No. 21; WD, AGO, No. 38; 81 MD; 77 MD. Blank 
forms. Prepared histories of cases to be recorded on 
the blank mimeographed forms by the men. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Blank mimeographed copies of forms. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. 
1. Discuss the purpose, preparation and disposition of the following 
forms: 
a. Form WD, AGO No. 63, Report of Physical Examination. 
b. Form 81, MD, Immunization Record. 
c. Form WD, AGO No. 21, Enlistment Record. 
d. Form WD, AGO No. 38, Report of Physical Examination of 
Enlisted Man Prior to Discharge or Retirement. 
e. Form 77, MD, Venereal Prophylaxis Slip. 
2. Practical exercise. Have each man complete all of the above 
forms, using sample case history. 
3 Correction of errors. Show properly completed forms, then 
have men make necessary corrections to complete their forms ac- 
cordingly. 
375 TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
MEDICAL DETACHMENT 
(29k Med. Det.) 
(Operation of Regimental and Battalion Dispensaries) 
Instructor (s) 
Third Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Same as First Period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Charts showing enlargements of Forms 52b, 52c and 
52d, MD; Sufficient forms for each man; Prepared 
sample histories to be recorded. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Each of the above blank forms may be mimeo- 
graphed. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. 
1. Discuss the purpose, preparation and disposition of the following 
Medical Department forms: 
a. Emergency Medical Tag, Form 52b, Revised January 31, 1940. 
(See model EMT inside the front cover of a book of Emergency 
Medical Tags). 
b. Field Medical Card, Form 52c MD. 
c. Field Medical Jacket, Form 52d MD. 
2. Question on important points discussed during the conference. 
(29k Med. Det.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
MEDICAL DETACHMENT 
(Operation of Regimental and Battalion Dispensaries) 
Instructor (s) 
Fourth Period: One Hour 
Place. Regimental or battalion dispensary. 
Text References. FM 8-45 ; Chapter 2, FM 8-10. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
376 Suggested Outline of Demonstration. 
1. Demonstrate the organization and functioning of a well conducted 
regimental or battalion dispensary to include— 
a. Arrangement of equipment, medicines, instruments, dressings 
and records. 
b. Duties of personnel. 
c. Conduct of sick call. 
d. Treatments. 
e. The preparation of the surgeon’s part of the sick report and 
other dispensary records. 
2. Questions on important points demonstrated. 
(29k Med. Det.) 
(29k Med. Det.) 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
MEDICAL DETACHMENT 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
(Operation of Regimental and Battalion Dispensaries) 
Instructor (s) 
5th to 14th Periods, Inclusive: One Hour Each 
Place. Battalion or regimental dispensaries. 
Text References. All previous text references. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Practical Application. 
1. These ten hours should be devoted to application in the actual 
operation of battalion or regimental dispensaries. 
2. Men should be assigned daily to each battalion dispensary for 
duty and instruction during the hours that actual conduct of 
“sick call” takes place. 
377 TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
MEDICAL DETACHMENT 
(29k Med. Det.) 
(Operation of Regimental and Battalion Dispensaries) 
Instructor (s) 
15th Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom, 
Text References. Same as First Period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. All necessary forms and lists of questions. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. All blank forms discussed previously. 
Suggested Outline of Oral Quiz. 
1. Question on the purpose, preparation and disposition of all forms 
used in regimental and battalion dispensaries. Use the card sys- 
tem; call on all members of the detachment. Some of the ques- 
tions may require completion of certain reports, or may be ques- 
tions on the operation of the dispensary. 
2. Clear up any questions in the minds of the men relative to the ad- 
ministration and operation of battalion and regimental dispen- 
saries. 
3. Conclude by stressing the importance of the medical detachment 
(attached medical personnel) in the echelons of medical service. 
They render first echelon medical service, such as operating dis- 
pensaries while in bivouacs or semipermanent camps and operating- 
aid stations during combat. 
(29h Med. Det.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
MEDICAL DETACHMENT 
(Battalion or Regimental Training) 
Instructor (s) 
20 Hours 
The procedure as outlined for the hours devoted to Battalion or 
Regimental Training is common for all elements and will be found 
under Regimental Tactical Training (291 All Units), on pages 482 and 
483. 
378 (29a Hq. & Serv.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
HEADQUARTERS AND SERVICE COMPANIES 
(Functions and Combat Dispositions of Sections of 
Headquarters and Service Elements) 
Instructor (s) 
First Period; One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Chapter 2, FM 8-10; Sec. II, Chap. 3, 4, 5 and 6, FM 
8-5; FS 8-19 (Headquarters & Service Co., Med. Regt.) ; Chap. 6, 
TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Organizational and functional assignment charts; see 
T/O, Medical Department 8-series. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference of Functional Organization. 
1. With the aid of a functional assignment chart, discuss the func- 
tional organization and duties of the enlisted personnel of the 
Headquarters and Service Company. 
2. Questions on important points discussed. 
(29a Hq. & Serv.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
HEADQUARTERS AND SERVICE COMPANIES 
(Functions and Combat Dispositions of Sections of 
Headquarters and Service Elements.) 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period; Two Hours 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. See First Period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Placards showing grade and functional assignments of 
all personnel. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
379 (29a Hq. & Serv.) 
Suggested Outline of Demonstration of Functional Organization. 
1. Purpose. The purpose of this demonstration is to teach men the 
functional organization of the Headquarters and Service Company 
and the duties of its enlisted personnel. 
2. Preparation. The same as the second period, Collecting Com- 
pany (29a Coll,), applied to the Headquarters and Service Com- 
pany. 
3. Procedure. Follow the same procedure as outlined in second 
period, Collecting Company (29a coll), applied to the Headquar- 
ters and Service Company. 
(29a Hq. & Serv.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
HEADQUARTERS AND SERVICE COMPANIES 
(Functions and Combat Dispositions of Sections of 
Headquarters and Service Elements.) 
Instructor (s) 
Third Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. See First Period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Functional assignment charts. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. 
1, Company Headquarters. Briefly review the organization of 
Company Headquarters and discuss the following functional duties: 
a. Administration. 
b. Supply of company. 
c. Operation of regimental and battalion messes. 
d. Operation of company transport. 
e. Transport officers’ baggage and headquarters equipment of 
regimental headquarters. 
380 (29a Hq. & Serv.) 
2. Regimental Headquarters Section. Briefly review the organiza- 
tion of Regimental Headquarters Section and discuss the follow- 
ing functional duties: 
a. Establishment and operation of regimental headquarters or 
regimental command post. 
b. Regimental headquarters administration. 
c. Personnel duties and correspondence. 
d. Mail. 
e. Orders pertaining to field operations. 
f. Message center. 
3. Questions on the organizational and functional duties. 
(29a Hq. & Serv.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
HEADQUARTERS AND SERVICE COMPANIES 
(Functions and Combat Dispositions of Sections of 
Headquarters and Service Elements.) 
Instructor (s) 
Fourth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. See First Period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Functional assignment charts. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. 
1. General Medical Supply Section. Briefly review the organization 
of the Medical Supply Section and discuss the following function- 
al duties: 
a. The supply of the Medical Regiment. 
b. The medical supply of the division. 
2. Motor Repair Section. Briefly review the organization of the 
Motor Repair Section and discuss the motor repair function of 
this section. 
3. Questions on important points discussed. 
381 (29a Hq. & Serv.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
HEADQUARTERS AND SERVICE COMPANIES 
(Functions and Combat Dispositions of Sections of 
Headquarters and Service Elements.) 
Instructor(s) 
Fifth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. See First Period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Examples of Class I, II, III and IV supplies. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference and Demonstration. Classes of Sup 
plies. 
1. Conference. Discuss the fundamental principles and classifica 
tion of supplies. 
2. Demonstration. Show at least one example of each class. 
3. Questions on Class I, II, III and IV supplies. 
(29a Hq. & Serv.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
HEADQUARTERS AND SERVICE COMPANIES 
(Functions and Combat Dispositions of Sections of 
Headquarters and Service Elements.) 
Instructor (s) 
Sixth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. See First Period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
382 Suggested Outline of Conference. Supply in Garrison. 
1. Name the supply branches and the type of supplies for which 
is responsible. 
2. Define and give an example of: 
a. Property accountability. 
b. Property responsibility. 
c. Expendable property. 
d. Non-expendable property. 
3. Discuss stock record account, 
a. Stock record card. 
b. Account of property on memorandum receipt. 
c. Shipping ticket. 
d. Memorandum receipt. 
4. Questions on important points discussed. 
(29a Hq. & Serv.) 
(29a Hq. & Serv.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
HEADQUARTERS AND SERVICE COMPANIES 
(Functions and Combat Dispositions of Sections of 
Headquarters and Service Elements.) 
Instructor (s) 
Seventh Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. See First Period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Blank forms. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Copies of all blank forms discussed during the 
conference. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. Supply Forms. 
Discuss: 
a. Requisitions. 
b. Shipping tickets. 
c. Memorandum receipts. 
d. Stock record cards. 
e. Account of property on memorandum receipt. 
f. Inventory and inspection report . 
g. Statement of charges. 
h. Report of Survey. 
i. Over, Short, and Damaged Report. 
383 (29a Hq. & Serv.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
HEADQUARTERS AND SERVICE COMPANIES 
(Functions and Combat Dispositions of Sections of 
Headquarters and Service Elements.) 
Instructor(s) 
Eighth Period; One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. See First Period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Tables of Allowances; Tables of Basic Allowances; 
Tables of Organization. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. Basis of Issue and Disposition of 
Property. 
1. Discuss: 
a. Basis of issue of supplies. 
(1) Tables of Allowances. 
(2) Tables of Basic Allowances. 
(3) Medical Supply Catalog. 
(4) Tables of Organization. 
b. Chain of supply. 
c. Method of dropping expendable property. 
d. Classifications and dispositions of unserviceable property. 
2. Questions on important points discussed. 
3. Utilize the remainder of the hour for review and questions. 
384 (29a Hq. & Serv.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
HEADQUARTERS AND SERVICE COMPANIES 
Functions and Combat Dispositions of Sections of 
Headquarters and Service Elements.) 
Instructor (s) 
Ninth Period; One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. See First Period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference and Demonstration. Clothing. 
1. Conference. Discuss the function of procuring, issuing and 
accounting for clothing and individual equipment by the Head- 
quarters and Service Company. 
2. Demonstration. Demonstrate the fitting of the garrison uniform 
and shoes. Explain tariff sizes and tariff tables. 
385 (29a Hq. & Serv.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
HEADQUARTERS AND SERVICE COMPANIES 
Functions and Combat Dispositions of Sections of 
Headquarters and Service Elements.) 
Instructor(s) . 
Tenth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Chapters 1 and 2, FM 100-10; Sections 1 and 2, TM 
5-400; all previous text references. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. Supply in Combat. 
1. Discuss: 
a. Regulating station. 
b. Regulating officer. 
c. Railhead. 
d. Daily train. 
e. Day of supply. 
f. Credits. 
g. Automatic supply. 
h. Daily telegram. 
i. Depot. 
j. Dump. 
k. Supply point. 
l. Distributing point. 
m. Control point. 
n. Train. 
2. Questions on the above terminology. 
386 (29a Hq. & Serv.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
HEADQUARTERS AND SERVICE COMPANIES 
(Functions and Combat Dispositions of Sections of 
Headquarters and Service Elements.) 
Instructor(s) 
Eleventh Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Sect. II, Chapter 5, FM 100-10; Chapter 5, FM 8-55 
and previous text references. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference and Demonstration. Class I Supplies. 
1. Conference. 
a. Review Class I supplies. 
b. Define the various rations. 
(1) Garrison. 
(2) Field. 
(3) Travel.’ 
(4) Filipino. 
2. Demonstration. Demonstrate Field Rations A, B, C, and D. 
3. Questions on important points discussed. 
387 (29a Hq. & Serv.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
HEADQUARTERS AND SERVICE COMPANIES 
(Functions and Combat Dispositions of Sections of 
Headquarters and Service Elements.) 
Instructor (s) 
Twelfth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. Chapter 5, FM 8-55; Chapter 4, FM 8-10. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Service station equipment. 
Transportation. Service Company transportation. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline of Demonstration. 
1. Demonstrate the functioning of the Headquarters and Service 
Company. It should include the functioning of: 
a. Company Headquarters. 
b. Regimental Headquarters. 
c. General Supply Section. 
d. Medical Supply Section. 
e. Motor Repair Section. 
2. Each headquarters and service section to be identified by an 
appropriate sign. 
3. All personnel to bear placards showing their functional assign- 
ment. 
388 (29a Hq. & Serv.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
HEADQUARTERS AND SERVICE COMPANIES 
(Functions and Combat Dispositions of Sections of 
Headquarters and Service Elements.) 
Instructor (s) 
Thirteenth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. All previous references. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline of Review or Examination. Headquarters and Serv- 
ice Company. 
1. The examination or review will cover all the important points 
discussed during the conference. 
2. Use card system for testing and rotate cards among the men. 
29b Hq. & Serv.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
HEADQUARTERS AND SERVICE COMPANIES 
(Reconnaissance, Use of Cover and Concealment) 
Instructor (s) 
10 Hours 
This course of instruction is common tactical training for all units. 
Instructors should read the Instructors’ Guides shown on pages 359 to 
362, inclusive, this section under Reconnaissance, Use of Cover and Con- 
cealment, Medical Detachments (29b Med. Det.). 
The time allotted for this instruction is 10 hours. The periods should 
be arranged in accordance with the training guides for the Medical 
Detachments, as applied to the Headquarters and Service Companies. 
References for all Units: FM 7-5; Chapter 13, FM 21-100. 
389 (29g Hq. & Serv.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
HEADQUARTERS AND SERVICE COMPANIES 
(Transportation and Supply Requirements) 
Instructor (s) 
' First Period; One Hour 
Place. Motor park. 
Text References. T/O 8-22; FM 25-10; AR 850-15; FM 8-10; FM 8-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. Unit transportation. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline of Demonstration. Types of Transportation. 
1. Demonstrate and discuss the characteristics of each type of unit 
transportation. 
2. Questions on important points discussed. 
(29g Hq. & Serv.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
HEADQUARTERS AND SERVICE COMPANIES 
(Transportation and Supply Requirements) 
Instructor(s) 
Second Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. T/O 8-22; FM 25-10; AR 850-15; FM 8-10; FM 8-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment, Notebook and pencil. 
390 (29a Hq. & Serv.) 
Suggested Outline of Conference. Duties of Drivers. 
1. Responsibility of drivers. 
2. Motor park organization. 
3. Personnel and general duties. 
a. Motor sergeant. 
b. Mechanics. 
c. Drivers. 
4. Fire prevention and fire fighting. 
a. Preventions against fire (AR 850-15). 
b. Proper methods of fighting fires. 
(1) Gasoline and oil fires—fire extinguishers, blankets, sand 
and chemicals. 
(2) Other fires. 
c. Location of fire equipment. 
(1) In and around motor park. 
(2) On the motor vehicle. 
5. Accident prevention. 
a. Precautions against accident. 
b. Carbon monoxide poisoning. 
(29g Hq. & Serv.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
HEADQUARTERS AND SERVICE COMPANIES 
(Transportation and Supply Requirements) 
Instructor (s) 
Third Period; Two Hours 
Place. Motor park. 
Text References. T/O 8-22; FM 25-10; AR 850-15; FM 8-10; FM 8-5 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. Light motor vehicles. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil 
391 (29g Hq. & Serv.) 
Suggested Outline. Motor Vehicle Control and Operation. 
1. Conference and demonstration of vehicle controls and their use. 
a. Steering wheel. 
b. Foot brake. 
c. Hand brake. 
d. Spark control. 
e. Ignition switch. 
f. Choke. 
g. Hand throttle. 
h. Foot accelerator. 
i. Starter switch. 
j. Transmission gearshift lever. 
k. Driver’s position. 
2. Practical exercise on vehicle control. Have drivers assume cor- 
rect position and familiarize themselves with the locality and 
manipulation of controls (engine not running). 
3. Conference and demonstration of motor operation. 
a. Inspection prior to starting engine. 
b. Proper method of starting engine, to include cold weather 
starting. 
c. Proper warm-up of engine. 
d. Inspection after starting engine. 
e. Driver’s arm signals. 
f. Signals for control of unit. 
g. Position of gearshift lever. 
h. Proper use of the clutch, accelerator, gearshift lever and 
brakes, to start, change gears and stop the vehicle. 
4. Practical exercise in motor operation. (Vehicles to be blocked 
with all wheels off the ground. A qualified instructor to be as- 
signed to each vehicle.) 
a. Inspection prior to starting engine, by the numbers, 
b; Students mount, assume correct position, and familiarize 
themselves with controls. 
c. Start and warm up engine. 
d. Inspection after starting engine, by the numbers. 
e. Drivers shift transmission into each of the several ratios at 
will. 
f. Drivers shift into designated speeds, and change direction on 
signal of instructor. Students give proper arm signals. Re- 
peat until drivers are reasonably proficient. 
g. Stop engines. 
5. Conference and demonstration of vehicle inspection. 
a. Inspection during operation, 
b. Inspection at the halt. 
c. Driver’s trip ticket. 
392 (29g Hq. & Serv.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
HEADQUARTERS AND SERVICE COMPANIES 
(Transportation and Supply Requirements) 
Instructor (s) 
Fourth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Motor park. 
Text References. T/0 8-22; FM 25-10; AR 850-15; FM 8-10; FM 8-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. All unit light vehicles. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline. Motor Maintenance. 
1. Conference and demonstration. 
a. Nomenclature and functioning of vehicle unit and assemblies 
with particular attention to lubrication. 
b. Weekly inspection. 
c. Lubrication. 
2. Practical exercise. 
a. Inspection. 
b. Driving. 
c. Caretaking. 
393 (29g Hq. & Serv.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
HEADQUARTERS AND SERVICE COMPANIES 
(Transportation and Supply Requirements) 
Instructor (s) 
Fifth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. Sections I and II, Chapter 5, FM 25-10; T/O 8-22; 
AR 850-15; FM 8-10; FM 8-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Set each: Motor vehicle mechanics; pioneer equip- 
ment; motor vehicle set No. 1; and unit equipment, 
second echelon—sets 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, and 7. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline of Conference and Demonstration. Maintenance. 
1. Conference. 
a. Basic principles of army system of automotive maintenance. 
b. Echelons of maintenance. 
(1) First echelon 
(2) Second echelon OCA 
(3) Third echelon f AR 85°'15' 
(4) Fourth echelon 
2. Demonstration. 
a. Automobile mechanic’s set of tools. 
b. The tools that make up the second echelon unit equipment. 
c. The pioneer equipment, motor set No. 1. 
394 (29g Hq. & Serv.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
HEADQUARTERS AND SERVICE COMPANIES 
(Transportation and Supply Requirements) 
Instructor (s) 
Sixth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Page 32, FM 25-10; T/O 8-22; AR 850-15; FM 8-10; 
FM 8-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Standard Form No. 26 and WD QMC Form No. 237. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Standard Form No. 26 and WD QMC P'orm No. 
237, to each man. 
Suggested Outline of Conference and Application. Transportation 
Forms. 
1, Conference. Discuss and illustrate the preparation of standard 
Form No. 26 and WD QMC Form No. 237. 
2. Application. Have each man prepare an accident report and 
trip ticket from information furnished by the instructor. 
(29g Hq. & Serv.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
HEADQUARTERS AND SERVICE COMPANIES 
(Transportation and Supply Requirements) 
Instructor (s) 
Seventh Period: Two Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. FM 5-20; FM 25-10; FM 8-10; FM 8-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Organizational equipment. 
Transportation. Unit transportation. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
395 (29g Hq. & Serv.) 
Suggested Outline of Conference, Demonstration and Application. Move- 
ment of Troops and Supplies. 
1. Conference. 
a. Discuss the procurement and issue of both general and medi- 
cal supplies prior to and during combat. 
b. Discuss entrucking and detrucking of personnel during the 
day and night and the loading and unloading of organiza- 
tional equipment. 
2. Demonstration. Demonstrate loading and unloading of organi- 
zational equipment and the common field expedients (page 106, 
FM 25-10). 
3. Application. 
a. Entrucking and detrucking of personnel. 
b. Common field expedients. 
4. Questions on important points discussed and demonstrated. 
3. Application. 
(29g Hq. & Serv.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
HEADQUARTERS AND SERVICE COMPANIES 
(Transportation and Supply Requirements) 
Instructor (s) 
Eighth Period: Four Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. FM 5-20; FM 8-10; FM 8-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Organizational equipment. 
Transportation. Unit transportation. 
Individual Equipment. Full field equipment. 
Suggested Outline of Practical Exercise. Troop Movements and March 
Supplies. 
1. March over varied terrain (motor). 
2. Occupation of position. 
3. Disposition of vehicles (concealment and camouflage.) 
4. Estimation of supply requirements for a 24-hour period (Class I, 
III and IV). 
5. Distribution of Class I, II and IV supplies to units of the medical 
regiment and medical detachments during combat. 
6. Preparation and serving of a meal in the field. 
396 TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
HEADQUARTERS AND SERVICE COMPANIES 
(29h Hq. & Serv.) 
(Procurement and Issue of Supplies) 
Instructor (s) 
First Period: Five Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. FM 8-10; Sec, VI, Chapter 2, FM 100-10; FM 8-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Headquarters and Service Company Equipment. 
Transportation. Headquarters and Service Company transportation. 
Individual Equipment. Full field equipment. 
Suggested Outline of Practical Exercise. 
1. During the conduct of maneuvers or exercises (company, bat- 
talion or regiment), have the company procure and issue all 
classes of supplies. The basis of issue should be the same as 
in actual warfare. The issue should be actual wherever practi- 
cal, and simulated when issue is not practical. 
2. Each headquarters and headquarters section should be encour- 
aged to develop situations which require action on the part of 
the personnel. 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
HEADQUARTERS AND SERVICE COMPANIES 
(29h Hq. & Serv.) 
(Procurement and Issue of Supplies) 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period: Five Hours 
Place. Field, 
Text References. FM 8-10; FM 8-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Headquarters and Service Company equipment. 
Transportation. Headquarters and Service Company transporta 
tion. 
397 (29h Hq. & Serv.) 
Individual Equipment. Full field equipment. 
Suggested Outline of Practical Exercise. 
1. The same as 1st period. 
2. Rotate the personnel so that each man will have a new job. 
3. Change the type of ration procured and issued. 
4. Vary the method of distribution (unit or central). 
(29h Hq. & Serv.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
HEADQUARTERS AND SERVICE COMPANIES 
(Procurement and Issue of Supplies) 
Instructor(s) 
Third Period: Five Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. FM 8-10; FM 8-5, 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Headquarters and Service Company equipment. 
Transportation. Headquarters and Service Company transporta- 
tion. 
Individual Equipment. Full field equipment. 
Suggested Outline of Practical Exercise. 
1. The same as 1st period, 
2. Rotate the personnel again so that each man will have a new job 
3. Change the type of ration procured and issued. 
398 (29i Hq. & Serv.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
HEADQUARTERS AND SERVICE COMPANIES 
(Selection and Occupation of Service Station Sites and the 
Functioning of Such Stations.) 
Instructor (s) 
First Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. FM 8-10; FM 8-5; FS 8-19. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Functional chart of company and regimental head- 
quarters and each of the sections. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. Location and Organization of Head- 
quarters and Service Company Installations. 
1. Discuss: 
a. Organization of company headquarters. 
b. Regimental headquarters section. 
c. General and medical supply section. 
d. Motor repair section. 
2. Discuss the basic functions of headquarters and service company 
in bivouac, on the march and during combat. 
3. Discuss the normal location of headquarters and service company 
in bivouac, on the march and during combat. 
4. Discuss the type and use of unit transportation. 
5. Review the operation of the regimental message center. 
6. Discuss the operation of: 
a. Regimental messes. 
b. Battalion messes. 
7. Discuss the procurement and issue of general and medical sup- 
plies during combat. 
8. Questions on important points discussed. 
399 TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
HEADQUARTERS AND SERVICE COMPANIES 
(29i Hq. & Serv.) 
(Selection and Occupation of Service Station Sites and the 
Functioning of Such Stations.) 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period: Two Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. FM 8-10; FM 8-5; FS 8-19. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. As listed below. 
Transportation. As listed below. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference and Demonstration. 
1. Explain and demonstrate separately the functioning of: 
a. Company headquarters. c. General and medical supply 
b. Regimental headquarters section. 
section. d. Regimental motor repair sec- 
tion. 
a. Company headquarters. 
(1) Personnel (all placarded). 
(a) First sergeant. 
One corporal—assistant. 
One company clerk. 
One bugler. 
One orderly. 
Equipment: Field desk, typewriter, company records, 
tables and chairs. 
(b) Mess sergeant. 
Two cooks in cook’s uniform. 
One cook’s helper in fatigue uniform. 
Equipment: mess equipment. 
(c) Motor sergeant. 
Four chauffeurs. 
Two mechanics—motor. 
(d) Company supply sergeant. 
i. Recruit in civilian clothes—one private, assistant. 
Explain and demonstrate the procedure in equip- 
ping the enlisted man to include measurements 
for clothing sizes, preparation of all clothing and 
equipment records. 
ii. Size him up for a gas mask. 
hi. Explain and demonstrate the procedure in draw- 
ing and issuing Class I supplies. 
400 (29i Hq. & Serv.) 
b. Regimental headquarters section. 
(1) Personnel (all placarded). 
Regimental sergeant major. 
Personnel sergeant major. 
Chief clerk. 
Plans and training sergeant. 
Corporal, assistant to the chaplain. 
Two privates, clerks. 
Three privates, orderlies. 
One stenographer. 
Two privates, basic. 
(2) Equipment. 
One 5-passenger car with driver. 
One motorcycle w/side car and driver. 
One motorcycle, solo, w/driver. 
c. General and medical supply section. 
(1) Personnel. 
Master sergeant, regimental supply sergeant. 
Technical sergeant, medical supply sergeant. 
Two privates, assistants. 
(2) Equipment. 
One motorcycle w/side car and driver. 
Four 21/> ton cargo trucks w/drivers. 
Small amount of medical supplies representing rolling 
stock. 
d. Regimental motor repair section. 
(1) Personnel. 
Regimental motor sergeant. 
Seven privates—mechanics. 
(2) Equipment. 
Motor repair tools. 
One motorcycle w/side car and driver. 
One truck, pick-up, w/driver. 
Four trucks, 2!/2-ton, cargo. 
2. Questions on important points discussed and demonstrated. 
3. Discuss echelons of maintenance, especially the first and second 
echelons. 
Note. See current tables of organization for recent changes. 
401 (29i Hq. & Serv.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
HEADQUARTERS AND SERVICE COMPANIES 
(Selection and Occupation of Service Station Sites and the 
Functioning of Such Stations.) 
Instructor (s) 
Third Period: Two Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. TM 12-250; FM 8-10; FM 8-5; FS 8-19. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. As listed below. 
Transportation. As listed below. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference and Demonstration. Functions of 
Headquarters and Service Company to be conducted by functional 
groups so that each group will receive its special instruction separa- 
tely and simultaneously. The instruction outlined in this period is 
continued in the fourth and fifth periods. 
1. Company headquarters group. 
a. Conference. 
(1) Preparation of morning reports. 
(2) Preparation of duty rosters. 
(3) Preparation of service records. 
(4) Preparation of sick reports. 
(5) Preparation of pay rolls. 
(6) Preparation of immunization records. 
(7) Preparation of ration returns. 
(8) Procurement, storage and issuing Class I, II and III Sup- 
plies. 
(9) Tables of Organization and Tables of Basic Allowances 
as a basis of issue. 
(10) Contents of company field’desk, 
(11) Breakdown of the components of the ration to companies. 
(12) Weight of gallon of gasoline and oil as basis of truck 
loads. 
(13) Kinds of rations. 
(14) The relation of company headquarters to regimental and 
battalion headquarters. 
b. Questions on important points discussed. 
402 2. Regimental headquarters group. 
a. Discuss: 
(1) The location, function and purpose of regimental head- 
quarters and regimental command post. 
(2) Organization, location and function of division surgeon’s 
office. 
(3) Field orders. 
(4) Administrative orders. 
(5) Warning orders. 
(6) Oral orders. 
(7) Written orders. 
(8) Fragmentary orders. 
(9) Messages. 
b. Discuss and demonstrate: 
(t) Medical plan. 
(2) Operation of the regimental message center. 
(3) Handling of mail in combat. 
c. Discuss the location and function of: 
(1) Division command post. 
(2) Brigade command post. 
(3) Regimental command post. 
(4) Battalion command post. 
(5) Division communications system. 
(6) Field telephones. 
(7) Contents of regimental field desk. 
d. Demonstrate: 
(1) Kinds of maps and map equipment. 
(2) Preparation of common personnel records. 
3. General and medical supply group. 
a. Discuss the functions of the general and medical supply sub- 
sections during combat. 
b. Discuss and demonstrate: 
(1) Expendable supplies. 
(2) Non-expendable supplies. 
(3) Deteriorating supplies. 
c. Demonstrate: 
(1) Surgical instruments and 
surgical appliances. 
(2) Surgical dressings. 
(3) Bandages. 
(4) Compresses. 
(5) First aid dressings. 
d. Define: 
(1) Regulating station. 
(2) Railhead. 
(3) Truck head. 
(4) Navigation head. 
(29i Hq. & Serv.) 
403 (29i Hq. & Serv.) 
(5) Daily train. 
(6) Day of supply. 
(7) Requisitions. 
(8) Shipping tickets. 
(9) Invoices. 
(10) Credit and debit memorandums. 
(11) Credits. 
(12) Automatic supply. 
(13) Depot. 
(14) Dump, 
(15) Supply point. 
(16) Distributing point. 
(17) Control point. 
(18) Trains. 
(19) Initial equipment. 
(20) Maintenance equipment. 
(21) Reserve supplies. 
(22) Automatic supplies. 
(23) Automatic exchange during combat. 
e. Demonstrate the use of the Medical Department supply cata- 
log. 
f. Discuss fully the method of procuring and issuing medical 
supplies while in camp, on the march and during combat. 
g. Discuss the use of ambulances and litter bearers as a means 
of delivering medical supplies during combat. 
h. Questions on important points discussed. 
4. Regimental motor repair section. 
a. Discuss the location of the motor repair section during com- 
bat and the possible use of garages, buildings, repair shops, 
etc. 
b. Discuss the principles of an internal combustion engine and 
the nomenclature and function of its parts. 
c. Discuss the care, operation, maintenance, and repair of motor 
vehicles. 
d. Discuss the basic principles of the Army system of automatic 
maintenance (FM 25-10). 
e. Discuss the echelons of maintenance and the responsibility for 
the maintenance of the first two. 
f. Questions on important points discussed. 
5. Ration group. 
a. Have the group observe the handling of rations at the rail or 
truck head, the break-down of rations at the unit distributing 
point, and the issue to the company kitchens. 
b. Discuss the basis for the ration break-down. 
c. Questions on important points discussed. 
404 (29i Hq. & Serv.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
HEADQUARTERS AND SERVICE COMPANIES 
(Selection and Occupation of Service Station Sites and the 
Functioning of Such Stations.) 
Instructor (s) 
Fourth and Fifth Periods: Two Hours Each 
Place. Field. 
Text References. TM 12-250; FM 8-10; FM 8-5; FS 8-19. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Same as 3d period. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline of Continued Demonstration and Application. 
Continue the procedure as outlined in the 3d period. 
(29i Hq. & Serv.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
HEADQUARTERS AND SERVICE COMPANIES 
(Selection and Occupation of Service Station Sites and the 
Functioning of Such Stations.) 
Instructor(s) 
Sixth Period: Six Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. FM 8-10; FM 8-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Service Company equipment. 
Transportation. Service Company transportation. 
Individual Equipment. Full field equipment. 
Suggested Outline of Practical Exercise. Procedure. 
During the conduct of maneuvers or exercises (company, bat- 
talion or regimental) establish station and function as in actual 
combat. Include distribution of rations; medical and general sup- 
plies; gas and oil; simulated rations for patients. 
405 (29j Hq. and Serv.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
HEADQUARTERS AND SERVICE COMPANIES 
(Forward Displacements and Withdrawals During Action) 
Instructor (s) 
One Period: Five Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. FM 8-10; FM 8-5; FM 100-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Headquarters and Service Company equipment. 
Transportation. Headquarters and Service Company transporta- 
tion. 
Individual Equipment. Full field equipment. 
Suggested Outline of Conference and Practical Exercise. 
1. Discuss the functions of the company during a forward displace- 
ment and a withdrawal. 
2. Practical Exercise. Simulate a tactical operation and have the 
company procure and issue all classes of supplies, especially 
medical supplies, as in actual warfare. 
(291 Hq. & Serv.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
HEADQUARTERS AND SERVICE COMPANIES 
(Battalion or Regimental Training) 
Instructor (s) 
20 Hours 
The procedure as outlined for the hours devoted to Battalion 
or Regimental Training is common for all elements and will be found 
under Regimental Tactical Training (291 All Units) on pages 482 and 
483. 
406 TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
COLLECTING COMPANIES 
(29a Coll.) 
(Functions and Combat Dispositions of Sections of Collecting Elements.) 
Instructor (s) 
First Period; One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Sec. Ill, Chapter 3, 4, 5 and 6, FM 8-5; FM 8-10; FS 
8-20, First Bn. (Collecting) Med. Regt. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Schematic chart showing functional organization of a 
collecting company. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. Functional Organization of the Col- 
lecting Company. 
1. Review briefly the organization of a collecting company accord- 
ing to the tables of organization. 
2. With the aid of the functional assignment chart discuss briefly 
the functional organization and duties of personnel. 
3. Questions on the important points discussed during the confer- 
ence. 
COMMANDERS OF COLLECTING COMPANIES (MEDICAL BAT- 
TALION) : See note on Page 359. 
407 TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
COLLECTING COMPANIES 
(29a Coll.) 
(Functions and Combat Dispositions of Sections of Collecting Elements.) 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period : Two Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. See first period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Placards showing grade and functional assignment of 
all personnel. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline of Demonstration and Application. Organization of 
Collecting Company. 
1. Purpose. The purpose of this instruction is to teach men the 
functional organization of a collecting company and the duties 
of its personnel. 
2. Preparation. Prepare rosters showing name, rank and functional 
assignments of each member and post them on the bulletin board. 
Example 
COMPANY “A” (COLLECTING) 
Company Headquarters 
Captain M.C., Commanding 
Tech. Sgt. John Smith, First Sergeant 
sj: s}: :J; 
Station Section 1st Litter Bearer Platoon 
******** Staff Sgt. Peter Strong, Platoon Sgt. 
Liaison Section 2d Litter Bearer Platoon 
******** Staff Sgt. Robert Rice, Platoon Sgt. 
******** 
408 (29a Coll.) 
3. Procedure. One company with all members placarded demon- 
trates the functional organization and assignment of its personnel. 
The other companies observe the demonstration. When the dem- 
onstration has been completed reverse the relationship of the 
companies and repeat the demonstration. 
4. Formation. 
a. Company headquarters is formed in single rank at close in- 
terval facing the class. The first platoon is formed in single 
rank at close interval ten paces in rear of company headquarters 
with a five pace interval between sections. The second and 
third platoons are formed in rear of the first in a like manner. 
b. The company observing the demonstration is assembled twen- 
ty to thirty paces in front of and facing the demonstrators. 
c. The company commander is now ready to proceed with the 
demonstration. He explains briefly the functions of company 
headquarters and duties of its members during combat. Be- 
ginning on the right each member, as his name and rank is 
called, assumes the position of attention, raises the right arm 
in a vertical position and maintains his position throughout the 
explanation of his functional duties. He lowers his arm when 
the next man’s name is called. 
d. When the demonstration has been completed, the company 
commander commands, “Section, ATTENTION; right, FACE; 
Forward, MARCH.” The command HALT is given when suf- 
ficient interval has been obtained to uncover the last platoon. 
Company headquarters is then faced to the front and given, 
“AT EASE.” 
e. The first platoon is now marched forward and halted on line 
with company headquarters. The functional duties of the 
liaison and collecting station sections and that of each of its 
members are now explained. 
f. When the demonstration has been completed the first platoon 
is marched to the right and halted allowing a five pace interval 
between units. 
g. The second and third platoons are demonstrated in a like 
manner. 
h. Upon completion of the demonstration all platoons and com- 
pany headquarters are on line and facing the front. 
5. The second company is next formed, placarded and demonstrated 
in the same manner as the first company. 
6. Time not used for the demonstration should be utilized to question 
members of the companies on functional organization and duties 
of the personnel. 
409 (29a Coll.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
COLLECTING COMPANIES 
(Functions and Combat Dispositions of Sections of Collecting Elements.) 
Instructor (s) 
Third Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. See first period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. Employment of the Collecting Com- 
pany. 
1. Discuss the functions of the collecting company: 
a. In camp. 
b. On the march. 
c. In combat. 
2. Discuss the functions of the collecting company with security 
detachments: 
a. Advance guards. 
b. Flank guards. 
c. Rear guards. 
3. Discuss establishment of march collecting posts and litter relay 
posts. 
4. Questions on important points discussed during the conference. 
410 TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
COLLECTING COMPANIES 
(29a Coll.) 
(Functions and Combat Dispositions of Sections of Collecting Elements.) 
Instructor (s) 
Fourth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. See first period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Schematic chart showing ground plan of a collecting 
company. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. Evacuation of Casualties from Aid 
Stations to include: 
1. Location and methods of evacuating: 
a. Artillery aid stations. 
b. Regimental aid stations. 
c. Battalion aid stations. 
2. Aid station sites and their locations in relation to the front line. 
3. Collecting station sites and their locations in relation to the front 
line. 
4. The ground plan of a collecting station. 
5. The functions of the: 
Receiving department Kitchen section 
Litter wounded department Message center 
Forwarding department Motor park 
Walking wounded department Gas section 
Record department Morgue 
6. Questions on important points discussed. 
411 (29a Coll.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
COLLECTING COMPANIES 
(Functions and Combat Dispositions of Sections of Collecting Elements.) 
Instructor (s) 
Fifth Period: Eight Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. All previous text references. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Collecting station equipment. 
Transportation. All unit transportation. 
Individual Equipment. Full field equipment. 
Suggested Outline of Practical Application. The establishment and 
operation of Collecting Stations. 
Procedure. Have the company march to the site of the collecting 
station and unsling equipment. 
a. The company commander points out the location for the com- 
pany headquarters and message center, the receiving, litter 
wounded, walking wounded, and forwarding departments, the 
kitchen, morgue, motor park, latrines, gas section, and direction 
of water point, and indicates where the liaison section will 
report to him for orders. 
b. The company officers and noncommissioned officers then take 
charge of their respective platoons, sections and details, and 
the company breaks up to establish station. 
c. The trucks are driven to points most convenient for unloading 
and placing equipment. 
d. The litter bearers are marched to a nearby point affording 
some concealment and cover. Each bearer discards his roll 
(stripped pack) and the rolls are stacked. Litters are procured 
and stacked. The litter bearers fall out and remain in the 
immediate vicinity of the stacked litters. 
e. Under the immediate direction of the platoon sergeant, the 
reinforced collecting station section unloads the collecting sta- 
tion equipment from the trucks. The litters are unloaded first 
and placed to one side, convenient for use by the litter bearers. 
This detail may pitch the tents for litter and walking wounded. 
412 (29a Coll.) 
The tents are then equipped by the enlisted personnel on duty 
therein, under the supervision of the platoon sergeant. Each man 
arranges and prepares the equipment and supplies for immedi- 
ate use, in accordance with his duty assignment. These duties 
completed, each man in the litter wounded department takes his 
post of duty. After they are unloaded, the platoon sergeant 
directs the distribution of blankets, litters and splints to the 
receiving department, litter wounded department and walking 
wounded department. 
f. Personnel in the walking wounded department prepare for 
reception of patients. 
g. The forwarding department is established. 
h. The clerk keeping the record of patients takes his position 
and is prepared to make the necessary record of patients pass- 
ing through the station. 
i. As soon as the platoon sergeant has personally inspected all 
departments of the station and ascertained that equipment and 
preparations are complete and satisfactory, he takes post in the 
receiving department. 
j. Kitchen. Under the direction of the mess sergeant, the cooks 
and helpers unload the necessary kitchen equipment and sup- 
plies, put up the kitchen fly or paulin and start the prepara- 
tion of hot nourishment for patients. The company cooks 
should be present to prepare the noon meal. 
k. Message center. The clerk in charge of the message center 
establishes it at the designated point ,places the message center 
sign (direction) and takes post. 
l. Motor vehicles. As soon as the trucks are unloaded they are 
driven to concealed positions in the vicinity of the station. If 
concealment is not available the trucks are camouflaged with 
branches of trees, etc. 
m. Latrines. As soon as all trucks are parked the drivers dig the 
latrines. They then return to their trucks and await orders. 
When the station has been completely established and all per- 
sonnel have taken their posts, the instructors should question 
the station members in regard to their duties. On completion 
of the questioning the station should be closed and loaded on 
the trucks. 
413 (29a Coll.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
COLLECTING COMPANIES 
(Functions and Combat Dispositions of Sections of Collecting Elements.) 
Instructor (s) 
Sixth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Classroom and field. 
Text References. All previous text references. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Four trained litter bearer squads and two bearers for 
wheeled litter. 
Equipment. Four litters and one wheeled litter. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Medical belts or pouches for demonstrators only. 
Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference and Demonstration. Liaison Agents 
and Litter Bearers. 
1, Conference (first hour). 
a. Discuss: 
(1) Duties of liaison agents. 
(2) Duties of litter bearers. 
(3) Litter bearer formations. 
(4) Litter bearer routes. 
b. Discuss the organization of a collecting company, medical 
battalion (triangular). 
c. Questions on important points discussed during the confer- 
ence. 
2. Demonstration (second hour). Litter bearer formations, 
a. Column of litter squads. 
b. Line of litter squads. 
c. Line of section column. 
d. Method of clearing the field of wounded. 
e. Use of the wheeled litter carrier. 
414 (29b Coll.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
COLLECTING COMPANIES 
(Reconnaissance, Use of Cover and Concealment) 
Instructor(s) 
10 Hours 
This course of instruction is common tactical training for all units. 
Instructors teaching this subject should read the Instructor's Guide shown 
on pages 359 to 362, inclusive, this section, under Reconnaisance, Use of 
Cover and Concealment, Medical Detachments (29b Med. Det.) 
The time allotted for this training is 10 hours. Instructional periods 
should be arranged, when practicable, in accordance with the training 
guides for the Medical Detachments, as applied to the Collecting 
Companies. 
Text References For All Units: FM 7-5; Chap. 13, FM 21-100. 
(29c Coll.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
COLLECTING COMPANIES 
[Collection and Evacuation of Casualties from the Field (Day)] 
Instructor (s) 
First Period: Four Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. Sect. Ill, Chaps. 3, 4, 5 & 6, FM 8-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Litters; emergency medical tags for wounded ; splints; 
wheeled litter carriers. 
Transportation. Unit transportation. 
Individual Equipment. Medical belts or pouches; extra first aid dress- 
ings and bandages. 
415 (29c Coll.) 
Suggested Outline of Practical Exercise. Collection and Evacuation of 
Casualties. 
1. Purpose. The purpose of the exercise is to make Medical De- 
partment soldiers proficient: 
a. In the art of rendering first aid. 
b. In searching and clearing the field of wounded. 
c. In the use of cover and concealment. 
d. In transporting wounded by litter during combat. 
2. Organization. Assume a tactical situation and orient the com- 
pany in the situation. 
3. Terrain. Brigade zone of action. 
4. Aid stations. Simulate four improvised aid stations—one artil- 
lery, one regimental and two battalion aid stations. 
5. Aid station personnel and equipment. 
a. Distribute approximately eight simulated wounded at each 
aid station. Each patient will bear a tag showing the type, 
extent and location of his wound. 
b. Post necessary equipment, splints, blankets, etc., at the aid 
station sites. 
6. Collecting station. 
a. The site to be approximately eight hundred yards from the 
line of aid stations. 
b. The litter bearers to be organized as per T/O. 
7. Procedure. 
a. Instructors will designate and establish simulated aid station, 
distribute patients, and supervise the treatment and collection 
of wounded. 
b. The casualties will consist of litter cases only, several of these 
to represent fracture cases requiring the use of improvised 
splints. 
c. One liasion agent is dispatched from the collecting station to 
each aid station. On his return he reports the location of the 
aid station with the help of a brief sketch. 
d. On completion of this report, each liaison agent leads a sec- 
tion or squad of litter bearers to his aid station pointing out 
while enroute the best routes of litter carry, and the areas to be 
avoided. 
e. The litter bearers, by hand carry, evacuate all patients from 
the aid stations to the collecting station site. 
f. For collecting companies of medical battalions an ambulance 
shuttle may be established and patients transported to a sim- 
ulated clearing station. 
416 TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
COLLECTING COMPANIES 
(29c Coll.) 
[Collection and Evacuation of Casualties from the Field (Day)] 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period: Four Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. See first period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Litters; emergency medical tags for wounded; splints; 
wheeled litters. 
Transportation. Unit transportation. 
Individual Equipment. Medical belts or pouches; extra dressings and 
bandages. 
Suggested Outline of Practical Exercise. Collection and Evacuation of 
Casualties. Same as First Period except that personnel and patients 
will exchange places. 
(28c Coll.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
COLLECTING COMPANIES 
[Collection and Evacuation of Casualties from the Field (Day)] 
Instructor (s) 
Third Period: Four Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. See first period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Litters; emergency medical tags for wounded; splints; 
wheeled litter carriers. 
Transportation. Unit transportation. 
Individual Equipment. Medical belts or pouches; extra first aid dress- 
ings and bandages. 
Suggested Outline of Practical Exercise. Collection and Evacuation of 
Casualties. Similar to that of First Period except that different ter- 
rain should be used and there should be variation in types of wounded. 
417 TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
COLLECTING COMPANIES 
(29c Coll.) 
[Collection and Evacuation of Casualties from the Field (Day)] 
Instructor (s) 
Fourth Period: Four Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. See first period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Litters; emergency medical tags for wounded; splints; 
wheeled litter carriers. 
Transportation. Unit transportation. 
Individual Equipment. Medical belts or pouches; extra first aid dress- 
ings and bandages. 
Suggested Outline of Practical Exercise. Collection and Evacuation of 
Casualties, Same as 1st period with men exchanging places. 
(29c Coll.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
COLLECTING COMPANIES 
[Collection and Evacuation of Casualties from the Field (Night) ] 
Instructor (s) 
Fifth Period: Four Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. See first period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Litters; emergency medical tags for wounded; splints; 
wheeled litter carriers. 
Transportation. Unit transportation. 
Individual Equipment. Medical belts or pouches; extra first aid dress- 
ings and bandages. 
Suggested Outline of Practical Exercise. Collection and Evacuation of 
Casualties. Same as 1st Period except that it will be conducted under 
cover of darkness and without the use of lights. 
418 (29c Coll.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
COLLECTING COMPANIES 
[Collection and Evacuation of Casualties from the Field (Day) ] 
Instructor (s) 
Sixth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Demonstration area. 
Text References. See first period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Two wheeled litter carriers and eight hand litters. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Medical pouches or belts for all demonstrators. 
Suggested Outline of Demonstration. Clearing the Field of Wounded. 
1. Brief remarks will be made by the instructor on methods of clear- 
ing the field of wounded. 
2. The area for the demonstration should be approximately 400 yards 
wide and 600 yards in depth. 
a. The patients should be recumbent and distributed over the 
entire area, using as much natural cover and concealment as is 
available. 
b. Each demonstration litter bearer section should be assigned 
a definite zone of action, the boundaries of which are easily 
recognizable, such as roads, fences, etc. 
c. The demonstrators should be deployed in a line of litter 
squads, using such interval as may be indicated by the nature 
of the terrain. The effectiveness of the search may be in- 
creased by the number 1 and 4 of each squad moving 10 to 25 
yards to the right and left of each litter. Each litter bearer 
squad oh finding a patient removes him to a central axis and then 
resumes the search. The central axis should be well marked, by 
easily distinguishable features, such as roads, fences, etc, 
d. When the' entire field has been searched the litter bearers 
evacuate the central axis by litter to the site of the collecting 
station . 
419 (29c Coll.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
COLLECTING COMPANIES 
[Collection and Evacuation of Casualties from the Field (Day)] 
Instructor (s) 
Seventh Period: Four Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. See first period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Litters; wheeled litter carriers. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Medical belts or pouches. 
Suggested Outline of Practical Exercise. Clearing the Field of Wounded. 
1. Organization. Organize the company into litter bearer platoons 
of two sections each. Part of the company will be designated as 
seriously wounded casualties. 
2. The area for the practical exercise should be approximately 400 
yards wide and 600 yards in length, with a moderate amount of 
broken terrain. 
a. The patients should be distributed through the entire area, 
using all the cover and concealment available, 
b. Each platoon to be assigned a designated zone of action, the 
boundaries of which should be easily recognizable. Each platoon 
should form in a deployed line of litter squads, using such in- 
terval as may be indicated by the nature of the terrain and 
systematically search all the ground during the advance. 
3. The effectiveness of the squad in the search may be increased by 
having the number 1 and 4 move 10 to 25 yards on each side of the 
litter. When a wounded man is found he is removed to a central 
axis and the search is resumed from where the patient was found. 
The central axis should be a well marked,-by an easily distin- 
guishable feature, such as a road or fence. It is finally cleared by 
hand and wheeled litter carriers to the site of the collecting sta- 
tion (assumed), 
420 (29c Coll.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
COLLECTING COMPANIES 
[Collection and Evacuation of Casualties from the Field (Night) ] 
Instructor (s) 
Eighth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. See first period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Two wheeled litter carriers and eight hand litters; 
4-inch white arm bands for each demonstrator. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Medical pouches or belts for all demonstrators. 
Suggested Outline of Demonstration and Application. Clearing the 
Field of Wounded (At night), 
1. Same as 7th Period except the demonstration should show methods 
of control during night collection and evacuation. 
2. In night collection, the interval between litter bearer squads should 
be reduced, the zones of action narrowed, the boundaries and cen- 
tral axis more easily distinguishable. 
3. Litter bearers should wear broad white arm bands for individual 
identification. 
4. The remainder of this period should be devoted to a practical 
exercise as outlined in 7th period. 
421 TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
COLLECTING COMPANIES 
(29c Coll.) 
[Collection and Evacuation of Casualties from the Field (Night) ] 
Instructor(s) 
Ninth Period; Two Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. See First Period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Litters; wheeled litter carriers. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Medical belts or pouches. 
Suggested Outline of Practical Exercise. Clearing the Field of Wounded 
(At night). 
1. Same as 8th Period over different terrain and omitting the dem- 
onstration. 
2, Rotate the personnel. 
(29i Coll.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
COLLECTING COMPANIES 
(Selection and Occupation of Collecting Station Sites and the 
Functioning of Such Stations.) 
Instructor (s) 
First Period: Four Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. Sec. Ill, Chaps. 3, 4, 5 and 6, FM 8-5; Sec. Ill, Chap. 2, 
FM 8-10. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Collecting station equipment; Red Cross markers; ex- 
tra dressings; arm and leg splints; blankets; emergency 
medical tags for wounded. 
Transportation. All unit transportation. 
Individual Equipment. Full field equipment. 
422 (29i Coll.) 
Suggested Outline of Practical Exercise. Occupation and Operation of 
Collecting Station Sites. 
1. Procedure. 
a. Select a suitable site for a collecting station. 
b. Have the company establish and operate the station. This 
station is to be fully established in accordance with the pro- 
cedure outlined in the 5th Period, “Functions and Combat Dis- 
positions of Sections of Collecting Elements” (29a Coll.) 
2. Aid stations. Simulate battalion aid stations which are distri- 
buted over a regimental zone of action. 
a. Allot to each aid station as many patients as there are men 
available. Each patient will be tagged by the assistant in- 
structors, the tags showing a variety of wounds, fractures and 
gas casualties; these instructors will also supervise the first aid 
treatment. 
b. Evacuation at the aid stations should be controlled by time 
schedules in order that the collecting station personnel may have 
time to systematically receive, sort, render additional treatment 
to, and forward patients to the respective clearing station sites. 
c. Have sufficient medical equipment placed at each aid station 
to care for the wounded and for automatic exchange. 
d. Each aid station will be identified by a Red Cross marker 
prominently displayed. 
3. Liaison agents. Liaison agents should be dispatched shortly after 
the arrival of the company at the collecting station site. 
a. Each agent should be given explicit instructions as to the di- 
rection of the front line, the division and regimental boundaries, 
the probable location of aid stations, best routes to follow and 
the particular aid station to be located, 
b. On returning to the collecting station he informs the com- 
pany commander or a designated assistant of the exact location 
of the aid station. 
c. He is then directed to guide a designated section or squad of 
litter bearers to his aid station. 
d. After performing this part of his mission, he remains at his 
respective aid station and sends information to the rear about 
contemplated changes in the location of the aid station, the pre- 
vailing types of wounded or gas casualties, the number of wound- 
ed at the aid station and the progress of the combat units. 
4. Litter bearers. The litter bearers are to evacuate all wounded 
from the aid stations to the collecting station. 
5. Collecting station section. Each wounded man is to be processed 
through the collecting station as would be done in actual warfare. 
6. In training collecting companies, medical battalion, an ambulance 
shuttle should be established and patients evacuated to an assumed 
clearing station. 
423 TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
COLLECTING COMPANIES 
(29i Coll.) 
(Selection and Occupation of Collecting Station Sites and the 
Functioning of Such Stations.) 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period: Four Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. See first period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Collecting station equipment; Red Cross markers; ex- 
tra dressings; arm and leg splints; blankets; emergency 
medical tags. 
Transportation. All unit transportation. 
Individual Equipment. Full field equipment. 
Suggested Outline of Practical Exercise. Occupation and Operation of 
Collecting Station Sites. Follow the same procedure as in the First 
Period except that personnel should be rotated and the exercise con- 
ducted over different terrain. 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
COLLECTING COMPANIES 
(29i Coll.) 
(Selection and Occupation of Collecting Station Sites and the 
Functioning of Such Stations.) 
Instructor(s) 
Third Period: Four Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. See first period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Collecting station equipment; Red Cross markers; ex- 
tra dressings; arm and leg splints; blankets; emergency 
medical tags. 
Transportation. All unit transportation. 
Individual Equipment. Full field equipment. 
Suggested Outline of Practical Exercise. Occupation and Operation of 
Collecting Station Sites. 
Follow the same procedure as in the First Period except 
a. Rotate personnel. 
b. Use different terrain. 
424 (29i Coll.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
COLLECTING COMPANIES 
(Selection and Occupation of Collecting Station Sites and the 
Functioning of Such Stations.) 
Instructor (s) 
Fourth Period: Three Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. See first period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Collecting station equipment; Red Cross markers; ex- 
tra dressings; arm and leg splints; blankets; emergency 
medical tags. 
Transportation. All unit transportation. 
Individual Equipment. Full field equipment. 
Suggested Outline of Practical Exercise. Occupation and Operation of 
Collecting Station Sites During Darkness. 
Follow the same procedure as in First Period with the following 
changes 
a. The exercise is to be conducted under cover of darkness. 
b. With changed personnel. 
c. On different terrain. 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
COLLECTING COMPANIES 
(29j Coll.) 
(Forward Displacements and Withdrawals During Action) 
Instructor (s) 
One Period: Five Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. Chaps. 5 and 7, FM 8-10; Chap. 11, FM 100-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. See First Period “Selection and Occupation of Collect- 
ing Station Sites and the Functioning of Such Stations” 
(29i Coll.) 
Transportation. All unit transportation. 
425 Individual Equipment. Full field equipment. 
Suggested Outline of Practical Exercise. Forward Displacement and 
Withdrawal of the Collecting Station. 
1. Follow the same procedure as outlined for the First Period “Selec- 
tion and Occupation of Collecting Station Sites and the Functioning 
of Such Stations” (29i Coll.), except that one forward displacement 
and one withdrawal should be executed. 
2. Prior to the displacement the company commander should make a 
reconnaissance of the route or routes forward and of the vicinity 
in which the collecting station is to be reopened. The reasons for 
the displacement should result from messages initiated by the 
liaison agents showing a number of forward displacements of 
the aid stations. 
3. The litter bearers should be informed of the new location and the 
hour at wdiich the movement of patients thereto is to start. 
4. Aid stations are notified by field message of the location of the 
new station and as to the time it will be open. 
5. Clear station of all patients. 
Note. Ordinarily one truck, and the equipment and personnel of 
the walking wounded department should remain at the old 
site until everyone concerned has been notified of the move- 
ment forward and the establishment of the new station. 
6. Follow the same procedure as outlined above except execute a 
withdrawal. 
7. The reasons for the withdrawal should result from messages ini- 
tiated by the liaison agents showing rearward displacements of aid 
station. 
8. Withdrawals are executed in similar fashion as forward displace- 
ments. 
(29j Coll.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
COLLECTING COMPANIES 
(291 Coll.) 
(Battalion or Regimental Training) 
Instructor(s) 
20 Hours 
The procedure as outlined for the hours devoted to Battalion or 
Regimental Training is common for all elements and will be found under 
Regimental Tactical Training (291 all units) on pages 482 and 483. 
426 TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
CLEARING COMPANIES 
(29a Clr.) 
(Functions and Combat Dispositions of Sections of Clearing Elements.) 
Instructor (s) 
First Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Sect. IV, Chaps. 3, 4 and 5, Sect. V, Chap. 6, FM 8-5; 
Sect. V, Chap. 2, FM 8-10; T/O 8-45; FS 8-22, Third Battalion (Clear- 
ing) Med. Regt. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Organizational and functional assignment charts. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. Functional Organization of the Clear 
ing Battalion and Company. 
1. Introductory remarks on clearing battalion, 
a. Organization of battalion. 
b. Functions of battalion. 
c. General nature of hospital service in division on the march 
in camp and in combat. 
2. Clearing company. 
a. Organization. 
(1) Personnel. 
(2) Equipment. 
(3) Transportation. 
b. Functional or operating organization. 
(1) Unit headquarters. 
(2) Technical group. 
(3) Ward group. 
(4) Transportation group, 
c. Departments in station. 
(1) Receiving or admission. 
(2) Treatment. 
(3) Nursing. 
427 (29a Clr.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
CLEARING COMPANIES 
(Functions and Combat Dispositions of Sections of Clearing Elements.) 
Instructor(s) 
Second Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. See first period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Blackboard. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. Employment of the Clearing Com- 
pany. 
1. Employment of the clearing company. 
a. General. c. On the march. 
b. In camp. d. In combat. 
2. Establishing clearing station. 
a. Selection of site. 
(1) Desirable features. 
(2) Undesirable features, 
b. Ground plan. 
(1) Laying out field. 
(2) Marking. 
(3) Erection of tentage. 
(4) Installation of equipment. 
3. Operation of station. 
a. Discuss the operation of each tent to include: 
(1) Administration. 
(2) Admission. 
(3) Supply. 
(4) Walking patients. 
(5) Waiting. 
(6) Shock. 
(7) Surgical. 
(8) Evacuation. 
b. Records. 
c. Kitchen. 
d. Transportation. 
e. Closing station. 
428 (29a Clr.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
CLEARING COMPANIES 
(Functions and Combat Dispositions of Sections of Clearing Elements.) 
Instructor (s) 
Third Period: Three Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. See first period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Company officers. 
Equipment. Clearing Company unit equipment. 
Transportation. Clearing Company transportation. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline of Demonstration. Functional Organization of the 
Clearing Company. 
Procedure. 
a. Organize the company as per Tables of Organization (T/O 
8-45). 
b. Use placards to show individual functional assignments. 
c. Review briefly organization of the company, platoons and 
sections. 
d. Point out and discuss briefly duties of each individual, 
e. The company then establishes the basic unit. 
f. Members of demonstration groups take their station in ac- 
cordance with their functional assignments. 
g. Question individuals as to their duties. 
During the erection of tentage, the instructor may discuss the 
functional organization of the basic unit; i.e., administration, admis- 
sion, supply, dental, laboratory, pharmacy, shock, surgical, waiting, 
and evacuation. 
429 (29a Clr.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
CLEARING COMPANIES 
(Functions and Combat Dispositions of Sections of Clearing Elements.) 
Instructor (s) 
Fourth Period: Five Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. See first period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Company officers. 
Equipment. Clearing Company unit equipment. 
Transportation. Clearing Company transportation. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline of Practical Exercise. Employment of the Clearing 
Company. 
Procedure. 
a. Organize the company as per Tables of Organization (T/O 
8-45). 
b. Have the 1st platoon establish the basic unit and take station 
in accordance with their functional assignments. 
c. The 2nd platoon will be divided into: 
(1) Patients. 
(2) Detail for making out Emergency Medical Tags. 
(3) Detail for applying splints and bandages. 
(4) Detail for ambulance loading. 
d. The 3rd platoon will furnish patients to the hospital at a 
fairly rapid rate. The Emergency Medical Tags should in- 
clude a wide variety in types of casualties. 
e. Patients will be received by and passed through the different 
tents and departments of the clearing station, 
f. Unit instructors should be assigned to each tent to assist per- 
sonnel in carrying out their assigned duties. 
430 (29a Clr.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
CLEARING COMPANIES 
(Functions and Combat Dispositions of Sections of Clearing Elements.) 
Instructor (s) 
Fifth Period: Five Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. See first period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Company officers. 
Equipment. Clearing Company unit equipment. 
Transportation. Clearing Company transportation. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline of Practical Exercise. Employment of the Clearing 
Company. Repeat Fourth Period using the third platoon of the 
company as the application group. 
(29b Clr.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
CLEARING COMPANIES 
(Reconnaissance, Use of Cover and Concealment) 
Instructor (s) 
This course of instruction is common tactical training for all units. 
Instructors teaching this subject should read the Instructors’ Guides shown 
on pages 359 to 362, inclusive, this section, under Reconnaissance, Use of 
Cover and Concealment, Medical Detachments (29b Med. Det.) 
The time allotted for this training is 10 hours. Instructional periods 
should be arranged when practicable in accordance with the training 
guides for the Medical Detachments, as applied to the Clearing Companies. 
Text References for All Units. FM 7-5; Chap. 13, FM 21-100. 
431 TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
CLEARING COMPANIES 
(29f Clr.) 
(Nursing and Ward Management) 
Instructor (s) 
First Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. See Instructors’ Guide for course in Elementary 
Anatomy and Physiology (11), Sect. II, Chap. 3; Chap. 4, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Officer instructors. 
Equipment. Anatomical chart; skeleton. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference and Comprehensive Review. Elemen- 
tary Anatomy and Physiology as Applicable to Nursing. 
1. The bones and joints. 
a. Nomenclature. 
b. Most frequent sites of fracture. 
2. Muscles, cellular tissue and the skin. 
a. Relation of muscles to bones. 
b. Groups of muscles used in movements. 
c. Effect of muscular contraction on fracture fragments. 
3. Nervous system and special senses. The common symptoms of 
injury to nervous system. 
Note. Stress the importance of anatomy and physiology to the 
medical soldier in care of sick and wounded. Cite examples to 
indicate this value. 
432 TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
CLEARING COMPANIES 
(29f Clr.) 
(Nursing and Ward Management) 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. See first period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Officer instructors. 
Equipment. Anatomical charts. 
Transportation. None, 
individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. Review Elementary Anatomy and 
Physiology as Applicable to Nursing. 
1. Digestive apparatus. 
a. Foods. 
b. Alimentary canal. 
2. Circulatory system. 
a. Lymphatic system. 
b. Blood. 
c. Cardio-vascular system. 
3. Respiratory system. 
a. Larynx. 
b. Trachea. 
c. Bronchi. 
d. Lungs. 
4. Genito-urinary system 
a. Kidneys. 
b. Ureters. 
c. Bladder. 
d. Urethra. 
e. Testicles, 
433 (29f Clr.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
CLEARING COMPANIES 
(Nursing and Ward Management) 
Instructor (s) 
Third Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. FM 21-10; Chap. 4, TM 8-220; FS 8-7; FS 8-25 to 29. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Officer instructor. 
Equipment. Bandages and first aid dressings. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. Review First Aid. 
1. Standard rules of first aid. 
a. Keep cool. Act quickly, 
b. Make patient comfortable. Keep him quiet. 
c. Examine patient gently. 
d. Send for medical officer or ambulance. 
e. Check hemorrhage or institute artificial respiration 
f. Loosen clothing. Keep patient warm. 
g. Keep crowd back. 
h. Splint fracture cases where they lie. 
i. Relieve pain. 
j. Prevent shock. 
2. Bandaging. 
a. Purpose. 
b. Types. 
c. Method of application. 
3. Wounds. 
a. Types. 
b. Treatment. 
4. Hemorrhage. 
a. Types. 
b. Effects of hemorrhage. 
c. Methods of controlling hemorrhage. 
434 (29f Clr.) 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
CLEARING COMPANIES 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
(Nursing and Ward Management) 
Instructor (s) 
Fourth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. FM 21-10; Chap. 4, TM 8-220; FM 8-50. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Officer instructors. 
Equipment. Army splints. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. Review First Aid. 
1. Hemorrhage. 
2. Shock: symptoms and treatment. 
3. Fractures. 
a. Types. 
b. Symptoms. 
c. Principles of splinting. Types of splints. 
4. Sprains, dislocations. 
5. Transportation of sick and wounded. 
6. First aid in common emergencies. 
a. Shock. 
b. Pain in abdomen. 
c. Fainting. 
d. Concussion of brain. 
e. Compression of brain and fractured skull. 
f. Apoplexy. 
g. Epileptic convulsion. 
h. Unconsciousness. 
i. Asphyxiation. 
j. Artificial respiration. 
k. Choking. 
l. Alcoholic intoxication. 
m. Thermal injuries. 
n. Poisoning. 
435 (29f Clr.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
CLEARING COMPANIES 
(Nursing and Ward Management) 
Instructor (s) 
Fifth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. FM 21-10; Chap. 4, TM 8-220; FS 8-1; FS 8-3 ; FS 8-9. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Officer instructors. 
Equipment. Charts to show grouping of various diseases as to mode 
of transmission. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. Review Sanitation. 
1. Water supply and purification of water in the field. 
2. Disposal of wastes. 
a. Human excreta. 
b. Garbage. 
3. Field messes. 
4. Cleaning and disinfecting devices. 
436 (29f (’!i.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
CLEARING COMPANIES 
(Nursing and Ward Management) 
Instructor (s) 
Sixth Period; One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. FM 21-10; Chap. 4, TM 8-220; FS 8-1. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Officer instructors. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. Review Sanitation. 
1. Arrangement of beds in ward. 
2. Environmental measures. 
a. Ventilation. 
b. Heating. 
c. Light. 
d. Housing sanitation, 
e. Cleaning and policing. 
f. Disinfection. 
g. Fumigation. 
3. Care of dishes. 
4. Care of bed pans, urinals, basins, sputum cups, etc. 
5. Disposal of excreta, dressings, sputum cups, etc. 
6. Care of ward linen. 
7. Insect control. 
8. Isolation—quarantine. 
437 (29f Clr.l 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
CLEARING COMPANIES 
(Nursing and Ward Management) 
Instructor (s) 
Seventh Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. AR 40-590; FM 8-10; Chap. 4, TM 8-220; FS 8-22. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Officer instructors. 
Equipment. Charts and diagram to show arrangement of depart- 
ments and tents of clearing station. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. Ground Plan of Clearing Station. 
1. Show by diagram the conventional ground plan of the clearing 
station (square division and triangular division). 
2. For descriptive purposes briefly discuss the operation of the clear- 
ing station by tents, rather than by departments as some of the 
tents contain several activities. 
a. Office tent. 
(1) Company office. 
(2) Dental service. 
(3) Dispensary and laboratory. 
b. Admission tent. 
c. Supply tent. 
d. Treatment tents. 
e. Shock tent. 
f. Evacuation tent. 
g. Bath and preparation tent. 
(1) Bathing. 
(2) Preparation for surgical procedures, 
(3) Treatment for gassed cases. 
(4) Disinfestation. 
438 (29f Clr.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
CLEARING COMPANIES 
(Nursing and Ward Management) 
Instructor (s) 
Eighth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Chap. 4, TM 8-220; TM 8-260. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Officer instructors. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference and Discussion. Ward Duties, Ward 
Property. 
1. Use this hour for discussion of the responsibilities and duties of 
the ward master. 
a. Care of equipment. 
b. Care of ward supplies. 
(1) Medications. 
(2) Alcohol. 
(3) Narcotics. 
(4) Poisons. 
c. Property exchange. 
d. Ward discipline. 
e. Relation to officer in charge of department. 
2. Duties of ward attendants. 
3. Ward rules. 
4. Prison ward. 
439 (29f Clr.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
CLEARING COMPANIES 
(Nursing and Ward Management) 
Instructor (s) 
Ninth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Chap. 4, TM 8-220; FM 8-10; TM 8-260. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Officer instructors. 
Equipment. Ward Morning report blanks (MD Form 72). 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference and Practical Exercise. The Clearing 
Company. 
1. Patients’ valuables and individual equipment. 
a. Responsibility for (MD Forms 75 and 76). 
b. Methods of accounting for. 
2. Care of mail and telegrams. 
3. Preparation of Ward Morning Report (MD Form 72). 
4. Practical Exercise. Have each man fill out a Ward Morning Re- 
port from information given by the instructor. 
(29f Clr.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
CLEARING COMPANIES 
(Nursing and Ward Management) 
Instructor (s) 
Tenth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text Reference. Chap. 4, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Officer instructors. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
440 (29f Clr.) 
Suggested Outline of Conference. Isolation technique. 
1. Discuss precautionary measures that must be observed in c ii i of 
communicable diseases. 
a. Use of cap, gown and gloves, if necessary. 
b. Scrubbing of the hands and washing of face before leaving 
the room and before meals. 
c. Scrubbing of hands and immersion in antiseptic solution after 
handling patient or contaminated articles. 
d. Wearing of glasses and gauze mask. 
e. Meaning of term “isolation,” 
f. Concurrent disinfection. 
g. Terminal disinfection. 
2. Discuss care of neuropsychiatric patients. 
(29f Clr.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
CLEARING COMPANIES 
(Nursing and Ward Management) 
Instructor (s) 
Eleventh Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Chap. 4, TM 8-220; FS 8-6. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Test tube with holder; alcohol lamp ; urine; nitric acid; 
Benedict’s solution. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Illustrated Conference. Venereal Prophylaxis. 
1. Venereal prophylaxis. 
a. Value. 
b. Method (step by step). 
c. Venereal prophylaxis slip (Form 77 MD). 
2. Urinalysis. 
a. Test for albumen. 
b. Test for sugar. 
441 (29f Clr.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
CLEARING COMPANIES 
(Nursing and Ward Management) 
Instructor (s) 
Twelfth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Chap. 4, TM 8-220; FM 8-45; TM 8-260. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Officer instructors. 
Equipment. Large diagrams showing: Emergency Medical Tag, 
Form No. 52b, MD; Field Medical Record - The Field 
Medical Card and Jacket, Forms Nos. 52c and 52d, MD; 
Clinical Record, Brief, Form No. 55a, MD; Immunization 
Register, Form No. 81, MD; Syphilitic Register, Form 
No. 78, MD. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Illustrated Conference. Medical Department 
Forms Used in Clearing Stations. 
Purpose, composition and use of: 
a. Emergency Medical Tag, Form No. 52b, MD. 
b. Field Medical Record. 
(1) The Field Medical Card, Form No. 52c, MD. 
(2) The Field Medical Jacket, Form No. 52d, MD, 
c. Clinical Record, Brief, Form No. 55a, MD. 
d. Immunization Register, Form No. 81, MD. 
e. Syphilitic Register, Form No. 78, MD. 
442 (29f Clr.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
CLEARING COMPANIES 
(Nursing and Ward Management) 
Instructor (s) 
Thirteenth Period; One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Chap. 4, TM 8-220; FM 8-45; TM 8-260. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Officer instructors. 
Equipment. Same as of previous period; blank forms. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. Medical Department Forms Used in 
Clearing Stations. 
1. Review material covered during last period. 
2. Quiz the men on important features. 
3. Have them complete blank forms if there is time available. 
443 (29f Clr.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
CLEARING COMPANIES 
(Nursing and Ward Management) 
Instructor(s) . 4 
Fourteenth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. TM 8-260; Chap. 4, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Officer instructors. 
Equipment. Clinical thermometers; mercury manometers. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference and Demonstration. General Nursing 
Care and Procedures. 
1. The application of scientific knowledge to the principles of nurs- 
ing results in the better care of the patient, in providing for his 
greater safety and comfort, in quickly recognizing symptoms and 
signs, and in the use of proper remedial measures and treatment, 
a. Observation of the patient’s symptoms. 
(1) Objective symptoms—those noted by the observer. 
(a) General appearance. 
(b) Appearance of the body. 
(c) Patient’s mental condition. 
(d) Patient’s position. 
(e) Sleep, nature of. 
(f) Coughs, types. 
(g) Vomiting, types. 
(h) Voice. 
(i) Perspiration; urine; feces. 
(j) Eruptions of skin. 
(k) Patient’s temperature, pulse and respiration, 
(2) Subjective symptoms—those complained of by the patient. 
(a) Dizziness, faintness, weakness and exhaustion. 
(b) Nausea. 
(c) Pain. 
(d) Itching. 
(e) Hunger or thirst. 
(g) Peculiar feelings or sensations. 
(h) Fear, apprehension. 
(i) Shortness of breath, thirst for air. 
2. Demonstrate use of thermometer, sphygmomanometer, and taking 
of pulse and respiration. Follow this with applicatory exercises 
in use of same. 
444 TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
CLEARING COMPANIES 
(29f Clr.) 
(Nursing and Ward Management) 
Instructor (s) 
Fifteenth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Classroom, 
Text References. TM 8-260; Chap. 4, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Officer instructors. 
Equipment. Clinical thermometers; temperature trays; clinical 
records; temperature charts; specimen containers. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference and Demonstration. Taking and Re- 
cording of Temperature, Pulse and Respiration; Collection of Speci- 
mens. 
1. Temperature, 
a. Clinical thermometer. 
b. Temperature trays. 
Proper cleansing and disinfecting of thermometers after use. 
c. How taken. 
(1) Mouth. 
(2) Axilla. 
(3) Rectum. 
d. Precautions used in taking temperature. 
(1) Continuous. 
(2) Remittent. 
(3) Intermittent. 
2. Pulse. 
a. Rate or frequency. 
b. Tension. 
c. Regularity. 
d. Volume. 
3. Respiration. 
a. Inspiration and expiration. 
b. Rate. 
c. Dyspnea. 
4. Clinical recording and charting. 
a. Accuracy. 
b. Completeness. 
445 5. Collecting of specimens. 
a. General precautions. 
b. Care of specimens. 
c. Types of specimens. 
(1) Urine. 
(2) Throat. 
(3) Smears or cultures from wounds. 
(4) Stools. 
(5) Sputum. 
6. Demonstrate, whenever possible, the various procedures described. 
(29f Clr.) 
(29f Clr.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
CLEARING COMPANIES 
(Nursing and Ward Management) 
Instructor (s) 
Sixteenth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Chap. 4, TM 8-220; TM 8-260; AR 40-590. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Officer Instructor and Assistants. 
Equipment. Bandages of various kinds; a dressing tray or carriage, 
fully equipped. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference and Application. Surgical Dressings 
and Dressing of Surgical and Other Wounds. 
1. The healing process, 
2. Factors that facilitate healing. 
3. Factors that prevent and delay the healing of wounds. 
4. General principles underlying the treatment of wounds. 
5. Infection—causes, symptoms. 
446 6. Dressings. 
a. Types (give examples of when used). 
(1) Dry dressings. 
(2) Wet dressings. 
(3) Hot wet dressings. 
b. Care (sterile technique), 
7. Dressing of wounds. 
a. Preparation of patient. 
b. Preparation of equipment. 
(1) In dressing room. 
(2) Dressing tray. 
c. Proper technique in handling dressings. 
d. Meaning of “sterile.” 
8. Application under close supervision of procedures described. 
(29f Clr.) 
(29f Clr.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
CLEARING COMPANIES 
(Nursing and Ward Management) 
Instructor (s) 
Seventeenth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. TM 8-220; TM 8-260. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Officer instructors. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Review and Examination. Conduct a general re 
view and examination in the use of surgical dressings. 
447 (29f Clr.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
CLEARING COMPANIES 
(Nursing and Ward Management) 
Instructor (s) 
Eighteenth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. TM 8-220; TM 8-285. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Officer instructors. 
Equipment. Bath and preparation tent, with equipment of a clear- 
ing station. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline of Conference, Demonstration and Application. 
Treatment of Gas Casualties. 
1. Discuss symptomatology and treatment of; 
a. Lung irritants. 
(1) Phosgene. 
(2) Diphosgene. 
(3) Chlorine. 
(4) Chlorpicrin. 
b. Vesicants. 
(1) Mustard. 
(2) Lewisite. 
c. Lacrimators. 
(1) Chloracetophenone. 
(2) Brombenzylcyanide. 
d. Irritant gases or smokes (sternutators). 
e. Paralysants. 
(1) Hydrocyanic acid. 
(2) Carbon monoxide. 
f. Incendiaries. 
(1) White phosphorus. 
(2) Thermits. 
(3) Solid oils. 
2. Demonstrate technique in care of gas casualties. 
3. As far as possible have men apply these principles in treatment of 
simulated gas casualties. 
448 (29f Clr.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
CLEARING COMPANIES 
(Nursing and Ward Management) 
Instructor (s) 
Nineteenth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Any recognized medical text on treatment of shock; 
TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Assistant instructors. 
Equipment. Erect a shock tent and install the equipment usually 
found in such a treatment tent. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. Symptoms and Treatment of Shock. 
1, Symptoms of shock. Describe in detail the condition of shock, 
when it may be expected and the signs that precede it. 
2. Treatment of shock. 
a. Call medical officer. 
b. Place patient in proper position. 
c. Application of heat. 
(1) Blankets (demonstrate shock litter). 
(2) Massage. 
(3) Hot water bottles. 
(4) Hot drinks. 
(5) Hot enemas. 
d. Stimulants. 
e. Morphine. 
f. Fluid, by mouth, subcutaneously and intravenously. 
g. Blood or plasma intravenously. 
449 (29f Clr.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
CLEARING COMPANIES 
(Nursing and Ward Management) 
Instructor (s) 
Twentieth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Classroom. 
Text Reference. Chap. 4, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Officer instructors. 
Equipment. Medical equipment and supplies necessary to demon 
strate procedures listed below. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference and Demonstration. Therapy. 
1. Hypodermoclysis. 
2. Proctoclysis. 
3. Treatments. 
a*. Application of heat. 
(1) Some indications. 
(2) Hot packs, hot water bottles. 
(3) Hot baths. 
(4) Foot baths. 
(5) Sitz baths. 
(6) Precautions to be taken in application of heat, 
b. Application of cold. 
(1) Some indications. 
(2) Cold compresses. 
(3) Ice cap. 
(4) Alcohol sponge bath. 
4. If time permits, have men prepare some of the above-mentioned 
treatments. 
450 (29f Clr.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
CLEARING COMPANIES 
(Nursing and Ward Management) 
Instructor (s) 
Twenty-first Period: Two Hours 
Place. Classroom. 
Text Reference. Chap. 4, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Officer instructors. 
Equipment. Medical equipment and supplies necessary to demon 
strate procedures listed below. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference and Demonstration. Treatments Con 
tinued. 
1. Discuss the preparation and use of: 
a. Hot water bags. 
b. Hot wet dressings. 
c. Poultices. 
d. Turpentine stupes. 
e. Ice caps. 
f. Cold compresses. 
2. Demonstrate these procedures. 
3. Arrange applicatory exercises for the men. 
451 (29f Clr.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
CLEARING COMPANIES 
(Nursing and Ward Management) 
Instructor (s) 
Twenty-second Period: Two Hours 
Place. Classroom. 
Text Reference. Chap. 4, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Assistant instructors. 
Equipment. Medical equipment and supplies necessary to demon- 
strate procedures below. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference, Demonstration. 
Treatments Continued. 
1. Enema. 
a. Evacuant. 
(1) Equipment necessary. 
(2) Types. 
(3) Method of administration. 
b. Retention. 
(1) Uses. 
(2) Amount of fluid given . 
(3) Preparation. 
(4) Types. 
2. Enteroclysis. 
3. Gastric lavage. 
4. Gastric gavage. 
452 (29f Ch.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
CLEARING COMPANIES 
(Nursing and Ward Management) 
Instructor (s) 
Twenty-third Period; One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. All previous references. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Officer instructors. 
Equipment. Index cards. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline of Oral Quiz. Nursing and Ward Management. 
1. Stress important aspects in a general way. 
2. Use card system of oral examination. 
453 (29i Clr.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
CLEARING COMPANIES 
(Selection and Occupation of Clearing Station Sites and the 
Functioning of Such Stations.) 
Instructor (s) 
First Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Sect. IV, Chaps. 8, 4, and 5, and Sect. V, Chap. 6, FM 
8-5; Sect. V, Chap. 2, FM 8-10; Chap. II, FM 100-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Company officers. 
Equipment. Blackboard. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. Selection and Occupation of Clear- 
ing Station Sites. 
1. Discuss selection of clearing station sites. 
a. Necessary features, 
b. Desirable features. 
c. Undesirable features. 
2. Discuss: 
a. Ground plan. 
b. Laying out field. 
c. Marking. 
d. Packing and unpacking equipment. 
e. Loading and unloading transport. 
f. Erection of tentage. 
g. Possibilities and advantages of using permanent buildings. 
454 TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
CLEARING COMPANIES 
(29i Clr.) 
(Selection and Occupation of Clearing Station Sites and the 
Functioning of Such Stations.) 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period: Four Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. See first period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All company officers. 
Equipment. Unit equipment of Clearing Company. 
Transportation. Transportation of Clearing Company. 
Individual Equipment. Full field equipment. 
Suggested Outline of Practical Exercise. Occupation and Operation of 
the Clearing Station. 
Procedure. 
a. Select a suitable site for a clearing station. Have the 1st pla- 
toon establish and operate the station. 
b. The other platoon of the company will furnish patients and 
details for marking, splinting, bandaging and transporting 
patients to clearing station. One detail may act as corps or 
army evacuation service of clearing station. 
c. Patients should be received at a fairly rapid rate. Types of 
casualties should be varied. 
d. Messages pertaining to the following should be sent through 
message center at frequent intervals. 
(1) Changes in the tactical situation. 
(2) Supply. 
(3) Requests for information on number of casualties. 
(4) Bring out through these messages some administrative 
problems. 
e. Each wounded man is to be processed through the clearing 
station as would be done in actual Warfare. 
455 (29i Clr.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
CLEARING COMPANIES 
(Selection and Occupation of Clearing Station Sites and the 
Functioning of Such Stations.) 
Instructor (s) 
Third Period: Four Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. See First Period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All company officers. 
Equipment. Unit equipment of Clearing Company, 
Transportation. Transportation of Clearing Company. 
Individual Equipment. Full field equipment. 
Suggested Outline of Practical Exercise. Occupation and Operation of 
the Clearing Station. Repeat Second Period, alternating the platoons 
so that the other half of the company will act as the application 
group. 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
CLEARING COMPANIES 
(29i Clr.) 
(Selection and Occupation of Clearing Station Sites and the 
Functioning of Such Stations.) 
Instructor(s) 
Fourth Period: Three Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. See first period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All company officers. 
Equipment. Unit equipment of the Clearing Company. 
Transportation. Transportation of the Clearing Company. 
Individual Equipment. Full field equipment. 
456 (29i Clr.) 
Suggested Outline of Practical Exercise. Occupation and Operation of 
the Clearing Station During Darkness. 
1. In this exercise each platoon will operate a clearing station and 
function independently. 
2. Procedure. Have each platoon proceed at night with lights: 
a. Select station site. 
b. Mark field, 
c. Erect tentage. 
d. Install equipment. 
e. Simulate a few patients. 
f. Close station. 
g. Load equipment. 
(29i Clr.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
CLEARING COMPANIES 
(Selection and Occupation of Clearing Station Sites and the 
Functioning of Such Stations.) 
Instructor (s) 
Fifth Period: Three Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. See first period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All company officers. 
Equipment. Unit equipment of the Clearing Company. 
Transportation. Transportation of the Clearing Company. 
Individual Equipment. Full field equipment. 
Suggested Outline of Practical Exercise. Occupation and Operation of 
the Clearing Station During Darkness. 
1. Rotate personnel assignments so they are different than in the 
Fourth Period. 
2. Procedure. Repeat Fourth Period. 
457 (29j Clr.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
CLEARING COMPANIES 
(Forward Displacements and Withdrawals During Action) 
Instructor (s) 
One Period: Five Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. Sect. IV, Chaps. 3, 4 and 5, and Sect. V, Chap. 6, FM 
8-5; Sect. V, Chap. 2, FM 8-10; Chap. 11, FM 100-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All company officers. 
Equipment. Unit equipment of a Clearing Company. 
Transportation. Transportation of a Clearing Company. 
Individual Equipment. Full field equipment. 
Suggested Outline of Practical Exercise. Forward Displacement and 
Withdrawal of the Clearing Station. A tactical situation involving 
a forward displacement and a withdrawal should be originated. 
The situation should be explained to the company as action pro- 
gresses. 
1. The company first establishes the clearing station. 
2. Assume patients have been received for one hour, close the sta- 
tion and make one displacement forward. Prior to displace- 
ment, the company commander should make a reconnaissance 
of the route forward and of the vicinity in which the clearing 
station is to be reopened. 
3. Establish the station at the new site and prepare to receive 
patients. 
4. Stress importance of establishing just so much of station as is 
necessary to properly care for patients. (Mobility is of funda- 
mental importance). 
5. In the second phase of this exercise, execute a withdrawal under 
similar conditions. 
(291 Clr.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
CLEARING COMPANIES 
(Battalion or Regimental Training) 
Instructor (s) . 
20 Hours 
The procedure as outlined for the hours devoted to Battalion or 
Regimental Training is common for all elements and will be found 
under Regimental Tactical Training (291 all units) on pages 482 and 
483. 
458 (29a Amb.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
AMBULANCE COMPANIES 
(Functions and Combat Dispositions of Sections- of 
Ambulance Elements.) 
Instructor (s) 
First Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Sect. Ill, Chaps. 3, 4 and 5, FM 8-5; Sect. IV, Chap. 4, 
FM 8-5; Sect. IV, Chap. 2, FM 8-10; T/O 8-35, and T/O 8-67; FS 
8-21, Second Bn. (Ambulance) Med. Regt. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Organizational and functional assignment charts. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. Organization of the Ambulance Bat- 
talion and Ambulance Company. 
1. Introductory remarks on the ambulance battalion. 
a. Organization of battalion. 
b. Functions of battalion. 
c. General nature of the ambulance service in the division, on 
the march, in camp and in combat. 
2. Ambulance company. 
a. Organization. 
(1) Personnel. 
(2) Equipment. 
(3) Transportation. 
b. Functional or operating organization. 
(1) Company headquarters. 
(2) 1st Platoon. 
(3) 2d Platoon. 
COMMANDERS OF COLLECTING COMPANIES (MEDICAL 
BATTALION) : See note on Page 359. 
459 (29a Amb.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
AMBULANCE COMPANIES 
(Functions and Combat Dispositions of Sections of 
Ambulance Elements.) 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. See first period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Blackboard. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. Functions of the Ambulance Com- 
pany. 
1. Employment of Ambulance Company. 
a. General. 
b. In camp. 
c. On the march. 
d. In combat. 
e. Transportation of collecting company personnel. 
2. Establishing ambulance station. 
a. Selection of site. 
(1) Essential features. 
(2) Desirable features. 
(3) Undesirable features. 
b. Ground plan. 
(1) Company headquarters. 
(2) Message center. 
(3) .Kitchen. 
(4) Latrines. 
(5) Motor park. 
(6) Shelter tents. 
3. Operation of station. 
a. Ambulance shuttle. 
b. Message center. 
c. Messing. 
d. Emergency road repairs 
e. Directional signs. 
f. Supply. 
460 (29a Amb.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
AMBULANCE COMPANIES 
(Functions and Combat Dispositions of Sections of 
Ambulance Elements.) 
Instructor (s) 
Third Period: Three Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. See first period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Company officers. 
Equipment. Placards for individual functional assignments; Am- 
bulance Company unit equipment. 
Transportation. Ambulance Company transportation. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline of Demonstration. Functions of the Ambulance Com- 
pany. 
1, Organization. 
a. Organize the ambulance company as per Tables of Organiza- 
tion 8-35. 
b. The placards to show individual functional assignments. 
c. Form the ambulance company by platoons and sections. Line 
up the transportation behind each respective section. 
d. Review briefly the organization of the company, 
e. Point out and discuss briefly the duties of each individual. 
2. Ambulance station. 
a. The company now establishes the ambulance station—use 
signs to mark the following: 
(1) Company headquarters. 
(2) Message center. 
(3) Motor park and maintenance. 
(4) Kitchen. 
(5) Shelter tent area. 
461 (29a Amb.) 
3. Ambulance shuttle. Two sections of ambulances leave to form 
the ambulance shuttle. 
4. Operation of ambulance station. Demonstrate the operation of 
the station. 
a. Ambulances pass by station on the way to front and to rear. 
b. All ambulances stop momentarily at message center. Driver 
tells clerk number of lying and sitting wounded he is trans- 
porting. 
c. Messages are received and dispatched. 
d. Ambulance arrives for repairs. A replacement is provided 
for it in the shuttle. 
e. Supplies are received. 
(29a Amb.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
AMBULANCE COMPANIES 
(Functions and Combat Dispositions of Sections of 
Ambulance Elements.) 
Instructor(s) 
Fourth Period: Five Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References, See first period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Company officers. 
Equipment. Ambulance Company unit equipment. 
Transportation. Ambulance Company transportation. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline of Practical Exercise. Tactical Functions of the Am- 
bulance Company. 
1. Organize the company as per Tables of Organization 8-35. 
2. Have the group establish the station and take posts in accord- 
ance with their functional assignments. 
3. Patient casualties must be assumed unless regiment can furnish 
personnel from other units for this purpose. 
4. Simulate a tactical situation and evacuate patients from desig- 
nated collecting stations to a clearing station. 
5. Inject messages which will indicate road blocks, motor difficul- 
ties, supply problems, and other variable situations in the ex- 
ercise. 
5. Question personnel concerning their assignments and duties. (29a Amb.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
AMBULANCE COMPANIES 
(Functions and Combat Dispositions of Sections of 
Ambulance Elements.) 
Instructor (s) 
Fifth Period: Five Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. See first period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Company officers. 
Equipment. Ambulance Company unit equipment. 
Transportation. Ambulance Company transportation. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline of Practical Exercise. Functions of the Ambulance 
Company, 
1. Repeat the Fourth Period over different terrain and rotating 
personnel and functional assignments. 
2. It may be advisable to conduct this period under cover of dark- 
ness. 
(29b Amb.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
AMBULANCE COMPANIES 
(Reconnaissance, Use of Cover and Concealment) 
Instructor (s) 
This course of instruction is common tactical training for all units. 
Instructors teaching this subject should read the Instructors’ Guide 
shown on pages 359 to 362, inclusive, under Reconnaissance, Use of Cover 
and Concealment, Medical Detachments (29b Med. Det.). 
The time allotted for this training is 10 hours. Instructional periods 
should be arranged when practicable in accordance with the training 
guides for the Medical Detachments, as applied to the Ambulance Com- 
panies. 
463 (29d Amb.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
AMBULANCE COMPANIES 
[Ambulance Driving Shuttle (Day and Night) ] 
Instructor (s) 
First Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text Reference. Sect. IV, Chapter 2, FM 8-10. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Blackboard; chart showing ambulance shuttle. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. Ambulance Shuttle. 
Illustrated lecture by diagrams and drawings, covering prin- 
ciples of function, composition, objectives, advantages, flexibility 
and application of ambulance shuttle system. 
1. Definitions. 
a. Ambulance loading post. 
b. Ambulance relay post. 
c. Basic relay post. 
d. Ambulance control point. 
■ e. Advance ambulance shuttle. 
2. Establishing the shuttle. 
a. General. 
b. Location of relay posts. 
c. Distances between relay posts. 
d. Number of ambulances at each relay post. 
e. Camouflage of relay posts. 
3. Operation of the shuttle. 
a. General. 
b. Control. 
c. Forwarding messages and supplies. 
4. Advantages of shuttle system. 
464 (29d Amb.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
AMBULANCE COMPANIES 
[Ambulance Driving Shuttle (Day and Night)] 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period: Two Hours 
Place. Field. Select adequate terrain where the company has clear ob- 
servation for at least 300 yards to right and left. 
Text Reference. See first period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Unit equipment—Ambulance Company. 
Transportation. Twelve ambulances. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline. Demonstration—Ambulance shuttle. 
1. Establish a complete ambulance shuttle with greatly reduced 
distances. Let 100 yards represent one mile. 
2. Designate two points as collecting stations and begin the shuttle 
at these points. Have the two routes converge about 200 yards 
in rear of collecting stations. 
3. Point out and discuss the following: 
a. Ambulance loading post (at collecting station). 
b. Ambulance relay post. 
c. Ambulance control point. 
d. Basic relay post. 
e. Clearing station. 
4. Operate the shuttle, showing: 
a. Replacement of ambulances at each post. 
b. Operation of message center. 
c. Operation of basic relay post. 
d. Method of control. 
e. Replacement of ambulance in shuttle because of motor failure. 
5. Establish an advance ambulance shuttle ahead of one collecting 
station. 
a. Discuss the operation of advance ambulance shuttles, 
b. Advantage. 
c. Responsibility. 
d. Precautions. 
465 (29d Arab ) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
AMBULANCE COMPANIES 
[Ambulance Driving Shuttle (Day and Night)] 
Instructor (s) 
Third Period: Four Hours 
Place. Field. Select a suitable terrain and designate two collecting sta- 
tions and a clearing station. Establish the ambulance station and 
ambulance shuttle. 
Text Reference. See first period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Company officers. 
Equipment. Unit equipment—Ambulance Company. 
Transportation. Transportation—Ambulance Company. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline of Practical Exercise. The Ambulance Shuttle. 
1. Operate the shuttle—rotate personnel so that about one half of 
the company will drive an ambulance over the entire distance 
from front to rear. 
2. Part of company to be utilized as patients. One detail to load 
and unload ambulances. 
3. Inject messages which will indicate road blocks, motor failures, 
requests for supplies and other variable situations into the exer- 
cise. 
4. Question personnel on the organization and function of the shut- 
tle. 
466 (29d Amb.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
AMBULANCE COMPANIES 
[Ambulance Driving Shuttle (Day and Night)] 
Instructor (s) 
Fourth Period: Four Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text Reference. See first period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Company officers. 
Equipment. Unit equipment—Ambulance Company. 
Transportation. Transportation—Ambulance Company. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline of Practical Exercise. The Ambulance Shuttle. 
1. Repeat procedure of the Third Period. 
2. Use different terrain. 
3. Rotate personnel so that the assistant drivers may take part as 
ambulance drivers. 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
AMBULANCE COMPANIES 
(29d Amb.) 
[Ambulance Driving Shuttle (Day and Night)] 
Instructor (s) 
Fifth Period: Four Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text Reference. See first period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Company officers. 
Equipment. Unit equipment—Ambulance Company. 
Transportation. Transportation—Ambulance Company. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline of Practical Exercise. The Ambulance Shuttle Dur- 
ing Darkness, 
1. Repeat procedure of the Third Period under cover of darkness. 
2. Use different terrain. 
3. Operate the ambulances with and without lights. 
4. Establish advance ambulance shuttles as far forward as tactical 
situation will permit. 
467 (29e Amb.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS. 
AMBULANCE COMPANIES 
[Ambulance Driving Convoy (Day and Night)] 
Instructor (s) 
First Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom, 
Text Reference. Chapter 3, FM 25-10 (Motor Transport), 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Officer instructor. 
Equipment. Blackboard. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. Convoys—March Technique for 
Motor Marches. 
1. Characteristics of motor movements. 
2. Principal elements of motor movements. 
3. Definitions (see page 35, FM 25-10). 
4. Types of motor marches. 
a. Infiltration .type. 
b. Close column type. 
c. Open column type. 
d. Other types. 
5. March technique. 
a. Infiltration. 
(1) Object. 
(2) Unit. 
(3) Formation. 
(4) Speeds and distances. 
(5) Control. 
(6) Bivouac or assembly areas 
b. Close column, 
(1) Object. 
(2) Mechanics. 
(3) Methods. 
c. Open column. 
468 (29e Amb.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
AMBULANCE COMPANIES 
[Ambulance Driving Convoy (Day and Night)] 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text Reference. Chapter 3, FM 25-10 (Motor Transport). 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Officer instructor. 
Equipment. Blackboard. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. Organization of Motor Movements 
(see page 48, FM 25-10). 
1. Reconnaissance party. 
2. Pioneer work. 
3. Route marking. 
4. Traffic control. 
5. Quartering party. 
6. Command and communication. 
7. Motor maintenance. 
8. Supply. 
9. Evacuation of bivouac areas and supervision of the tail of col- 
umns. 
a. Clean-up party. 
b. Salvage of disabled vehicles. 
10. Escorts. 
(29e Amb.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
AMBULANCE COMPANIES 
[Ambulance Driving Convoy (Day and Night)] 
Instructor(s) 
Third Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom, 
Text Reference. Chapter 3, FM 25-10 (Motor Transport), 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Officer instructors. 
Equipment. Blackboard; large march graph. 
Transportation. None. 
469 (29e Amb.) 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. Logistics of Motor Movements (see 
page 52, Section V, FM 25-10). 
1. In general. 
2. Road space and time length. 
3. Average day’s march. 
4. Rates of march. 
5. Road capacities and double staggered columns. 
6. March graphs and march tables. 
7. Entrucking and detrucking. 
8. Shuttling. 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
AMBULANCE COMPANIES 
(29e Amb.) 
[Ambulance Driving Convoy (Day and Night)] 
Instructor (s) 
Fourth Period; One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Chapter 3, FM 25-10 (Motor Transport) ; FM 5-20 
(Camouflage). 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Officer instructor. 
Equipment. Blackboard. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. Defense Against Aircraft and Mech- 
anized Forces (page 83, Section VIII, FM 25-10). 
1. Protection against hostile aircraft. 
a. Passive defense, 
(1) Concealment. 
(2) Dispersion. 
(3) Deception. 
(4) Halts. 
(5) Security. 
(6) Speed. 
b. Active defense—Weapons. 
2. Defense against mechanized units. 
a. Reconnaissance. 
b. Security. 
c. Delaying action. 
d. Resistance. 
470 (29e Amh ) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
AMBULANCE COMPANIES 
[Ambulance Driving Convoy (Day and Night)] 
Instructor (s) 
Fifth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text Reference. Chapter 3, FM 25-10 (Motor Transport). 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Officer instructor. 
Equipment. Blackboard. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. Execution of a Motor March 
1. Time of starting. 
2. Cold weather marching. 
3. Entrucking. 
4. Initial points. 
5. Halts. 
a. Selection of halting sites, 
b. Method of halting. 
c. Duties at halts. 
6. Refueling. Methods (5). 
7. Messing. 
8. Accidents. 
a. In war. 
b. In peace. 
9. Reversing direction. 
10. Maintenance personnel. 
11. Wrecks. 
12. Bivouac or assembly areas. 
13. Night marches. 
471 (29e Amb.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
AMBULANCE COMPANIES 
[Ambulance Driving Convoy (Day and Night)] 
Instructor (s) 
Sixth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Page 17, Section III, Chapter 1, FM 25-10; Section V, 
Chapter 11, FM 22-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Officer instructor. 
Equipment. Blackboard; mimeograph copies of convoy hand sig- 
nals. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline. Conference, Demonstration and Application. 
Ambulance convoy signals. 
(See Sect. V, Chap. 11, FM 22-5 for list of arm and hand signals 
for motor vehicles). 
Procedure. 
a. Conference and demonstration. 
(1) Explain and demonstrate each hand signal. 
(2) Discuss each signal and show by example where each 
may be used. 
(3) Have a mimeograph or printed copy of the entire set of 
signals for each driver. 
b. Application (practical exercise). 
(1) Form all the drivers in line with their backs to the in- 
structor. The instructor will designate a movement and 
all drivers will execute the signal for that movement, 
(2) Repeat the process until all drivers are thoroughly fa- 
miliar with each signal. 
(Note—A set of convoy hand signals should be printed on cards and 
placed in view in the driver’s compartment of each vehicle.) 
472 (29e Amb.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
AMBULANCE COMPANIES 
[Ambulance Driving Convoy (Day and Night)] 
Instructor (s) 
Seventh Period: Two Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. Page 17, Section III, Chapter 1, FM 25-10; Chapter 
11, FM 22-5. 
Instructional Aids.- 
Personnel. Platoon leaders. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. Unit transportation—Ambulance Company. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline of Practical Exercise. Ambulance Convoy Hand Sig- 
nals. 
1. Issue a simple march order, including : 
a. Place and time of departure. 
b. Formation. 
c. Rate of march. 
d. Control information. 
e. Route or routes. 
f. Regulating points. 
g. Destination. 
h. Column and serial commanders. 
2. This first convoy problem should be relatively simple. 
a. The rate of march should be slow and the route should be 
over good roads. 
b. The column should be opened and closed several times while 
on the march. 
c. Frequent halts should be made. 
d. Road discipline should be carefully checked. 
e. Drivers should inspect vehicles in accordance with paragraph 
21, page 11, FM 25-10. 
nals. 
473 (29e Amb.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
AMBULANCE COMPANIES 
[Ambulance Driving Convoy (Day and Night)] 
Instructor (s) . 
Eighth Period: Four Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. Page 17, Section III, Chapter 1, FM 25-10; Chapter 
11, FM 22-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Platoon leaders. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. Unit transportation—Ambulance Company. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline of Practical Exercise. Ambulance Convoy Hand Sig- 
nals. 
1. Issue a more complete march order, adding the following: 
a. Reconnaissance party. 
b. Traffic control officer and detail. 
c. Motor maintenance officer and detail. 
d. Supply officer. 
2. This march should be longer and more complicated than the pre- 
vious one. 
a. The route should include several towns and some secondary 
roads. 
b. Routes should be selected to bring out the necessity for and 
the importance of proper traffic control and road marking. 
3. Since convoy movements are controlled almost entirely by of- 
ficers, the platoon leaders will profit most by this training. 
4. After the officer assignments are made, and prior to the march, 
it would be well to have an officers’ conference and discuss the 
duties of the following: 
a. Column commander. 
b. Serial commanders. 
c. Traffic control officer, 
d. Motor maintenance officer. 
e. Advance agent or quartering officer. 
474 (29e Amb.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
AMBULANCE COMPANIES 
[Ambulance Driving Convoy (Day and Night)] 
Instructor (s) 
Ninth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. Page 17, Section III, Chapter 1, FM 25-10; Chapter 
11, FM 22-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Platoon leaders. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. Unit transportation—Ambulance Company. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline of Practical Exercise. Operation, Ambulance Con- 
voy During Darkness. 
Organize a two-hour night convoy movement. See paragraph 113, 
page 96, FM 25-10 (Motor Transport). 
Note—Additional convoy experience will be gained by the men 
during the instruction in forward displacements and withdrawals 
and also during selection and occupation of station sites. 
475 (29i Amb.j 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
AMBULANCE COMPANIES 
(Selection and Occupation of Ambulance Station Sites and the 
Functioning of Such Stations.) 
Instructor(s) 
First Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text Reference. Sect. IV, Chap. 2, FM 8-10. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Officer instructor. 
Equipment. Blackboard. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. Selection and Occupation of Am 
bulance Station Sites. 
1. Definition. 
2. Location. 
a. Essential features. 
b. Desirable features. 
c. Undesirable features. 
3. Establishment. 
a. Method. 
b. Duties of company commander. 
4. Message center. 
5. Messing. 
6. Directional signs. 
7. Closing station. 
476 (29i Amb.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
AMBULANCE COMPANIES 
(Selection and Occupation of Ambulance Station Sites and the 
Functioning of Such Stations.) 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. See first period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Officer Instructor. 
Equipment. Blackboard. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. Functioning of Ambulance Stations 
1. Functioning of ambulance station. 
a. General responsibilities of the unit commander, 
b. Plans and orders. 
c. Liaison. 
(1) With the collecting units. 
(2) With the clearing units. 
d. Emergency treatment of patients en route. 
e. Protection of ambulances and patients. 
2. Transportation of collecting unit personnel. 
3. Operation of message center. 
4. Operation of mess. 
a. Class I supplies. 
b. Difficulties encountered. 
5. Operation of motor maintenance. 
6. Forwarding medical supplies. 
7. Operation of property exchange. 
8. Closing station. 
477 (29i Amb.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
AMBULANCE COMPANIES 
(Selection and Occupation of Ambulance Station Sites and the 
Functioning of Such Stations.) 
Instructor(s) 
Third Period: Two Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. See first period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Platoon leaders. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. Unit transportation—Ambulance Company. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline of Demonstration. Operation of the Ambulance Sta- 
tion. 
1. This demonstration should be preceded by a reconnaissance. The 
company commander or platoon leaders should select several sites 
for ambulance stations, both desirable and undesirable. 
2. Proceed to these selected sites by platoons. 
3. Discuss each site; point out the features which make it a desirable 
or undesirable site. 
4. Ask questions concerning the exact location of elements of the 
ambulance station at each site. 
(29i Amb.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
AMBULANCE COMPANIES 
(Selection and Occupation of Ambulance Station Sites and the 
Functioning of Such Stations.) 
Instructor (s) 
Fourth Period: Three Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. See first period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Platoon leaders. 
Equipment. Unit equipment—Ambulance Company. 
Transportation. Unit transportation—Ambulance Company. 
Individual Equipment. Full field equipment. 
Suggested Outline of Practical Exercise. Selection and Operation of the 
Ambulance Station. 
478 (29i Amb.) 
1. Assume a tactical situation which progresses by subsequent orders 
from the battalion commander. 
2. Proceed to the vicinity specified in the order; select the station 
site; establish the station; assume collecting station sites and estab- 
lish the ambulance shuttle. 
3. Spot about 20 patients at each collecting station site and evacuate 
them to a simulated clearing station indicated by marker only. 
4. Operate the following: 
a. Message center, 
b. Property exchange. 
c. Motor maintenance. 
d. Forwarding of supplies. 
e. Liaison between company and assumed units. 
f. Emergency road repair. 
g. Camouflage of relay stations. 
(29i Amb.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
AMBULANCE COMPANIES 
(Selection and Occupation of Ambulance Station Sites and the 
Functioning of Such Stations.) 
Instructor(s) 
Fifth Period: Eight Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. See first period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Platoon leaders. 
Equipment. Unit equipment—Ambulance Company. 
Transportation. Unit transportation—Ambulance Company. 
Individual Equipment. Full field equipment. 
Suggested Outline of Practical Exercise. Selection and Operation of the 
Ambulance Station During Darkness. 
1. Repeat the Fourth Period, using: 
a. Different terrain, 
b. Different personnel on functional assignments, 
2. This exercise should be conducted in the afternoon and continued 
into hours of darkness. 
3. Inject an occasional order necessitating a change of ambulance 
routes. 
4. It is suggested that a forward shuttle be operated at some time 
during the exercise. 
5. Simulate motor failures, accidents, etc., necessitating delay and 
replacement of vehicles and men. 
479 (29j Amb.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
AMBULANCE COMPANIES 
(Forward Displacements and Withdrawals During Action) 
Instructor (s) 
First Period: One Hour 
Place. Field. 
Text References. Chap. 11, FM 100-5; Sect. IV, Chap. 2, FM 8-10. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Officer Instructor. 
Equipment. Blackboard. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Illustrated Conference. Forward Displacement 
and Withdrawal of the Ambulance Company, 
1. Forward displacement of the Ambulance Company. 
2. Relieving the Ambulance Company. 
3. Retrograde movements. 
a. Night withdrawal. 
b. Daylight withdrawal. 
c. Delaying action. 
d. Retirement. 
4. Closing the Ambulance Station. 
(29j Amb.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
AMBULANCE COMPANIES 
(Forward Displacements and Withdrawals During Action) 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period: Four Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. See first period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Platoon leaders. 
Equipment. Unit equipment—Ambulance Company. 
Transportation. Unit transportation—Ambulance Company. 
Individual Equipment. Full field equipment. 
480 (29j Amb.) 
Suggested Outline of Practical Exercise. Forward Displacement and 
Withdrawal of the Ambulance Company. 
1. Assume a tactical situation and subsequent orders. 
2. Establish the station and after a few patients have been evacuated, 
assume the front line has made a rapid advance. Displace the 
station forward bringing out the essential features of the move- 
ment and extension of the shuttle. 
3. Assume the enemy has counter attacked and a withdrawal is ne- 
cessitated. 
4. Execute the withdrawal, bringing out the essential character- 
istics and difficulties of this movement. 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
AMBULANCE COMPANIES 
(291 Arab.) 
(Battalion or Regimental Training) 
Instructor (s) 
20 Hours 
The procedure as outlined for the hours devoted to Battalion or 
Regimental Training is common for all elements and will be found under 
Regimental Tactical Training (291 all units) on pages 482 and 483. 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF MEDICAL FIELD UNITS 
PROFESSIONAL UNITS 
(29f Prof.) 
(Nursing and Ward Management) 
Instructor (s) 
[Refer to Instructors’ Guide (29f Clr.) “Nursing and Ward 
Management”] 
Suggested Outline for Course in Nursing and Ward Management. 
The training guide for the course in Nursing and Ward Manage- 
ment as outlined for the Clearing Company (29f Clr.) is well adapted 
for use in training the Professional Units. 
Since additional time is available the instruction can be made 
more thorough and added application of the principles taught will 
render it more effective. The instructor can, with discretion, select 
those phases of Nursing and Ward Management which he believes 
will warrant further study. Only through constant repetition will 
481 (29f Prof.) 
many of these extremely important procedures be made under- 
standable to the men. 
The entire 95 hours of technical and tactical employment of 
medical field units (professional) is devoted to Nursing and Ward 
Management. The scope of this instruction is the same as that for 
junior medical and surgical technicians. (See paragraph 8, Sec. II, 
Chap. 1.) 
(291 All Units) 
BATTALION OR REGIMENTAL TRAINING 
Instructor(s) 
First Period: Four Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. Sect. II, Chap. 2, FM 8-10; Chap. 2, FM 8-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Battalion or Regimental medical equipment. 
Transportation. Battalion or Regimental transportation. 
Individual Equipment. Full Field Equipment. 
Suggested Outline for Field Exercises. 
1. Prepare field exercises on local terrain for the employment of 
headquarters and service company and collecting, ambulance 
and clearing battalions on the march, in bivouac, and during 
combat. 
2. These exercises should be so designed as to further the training 
with the regiment or battalion as a whole. 
3. When patients are necessary to simulate evacuation, men not 
occupying key positions will be employed as patients. 
4. Medical detachments should simulate collection of casualties 
from front-line combat units, and prepare them for collecting 
elements. This will require coordination with collecting com- 
panies. 
5. All units in the chain of evacuation should function during this 
exercise. 
(291 All Units) 
BATTALION OR REGIMENTAL TRAINING 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period: Eight Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. See First Period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
482 Equipment. Organization equipment. 
Transportation. Unit transportation. 
Individual Equipment. Full field equipment. 
Suggested Outline of Field Exercise. 
The Medical Regiment or Battalion will function as in actual 
combat during offensive action. Patients will be evacuated. Use 
least essential men to simulate the casualties. The midday meal 
will be prepared in the field. 
This exercise will illustrate the medical service of the division in 
offensive combat. 
(291 All Units) 
(291 All Units) 
BATTALION OR REGIMENTAL TRAINING 
Instructor(s) 
Third Period: Eight Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. See First Period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Organization equipment. 
Transportation. Unit transportation. 
Individual Equipment. Full field equipment. 
Suggested Outline of Field Exercise. 
This will be a problem in which the Medical Regiment or Bat- 
talion will function as in actual combat. It should consist of two 
phases: 
First Phase : Defensive situation. 
Second Phase: A withdrawal. 
Use least essential men to simulate casualties. 
(30) 
TROOP MOVEMENTS BY MOTOR 
Purpose and Scope. The purpose of this instruction is to give the Medi- 
cal Department soldier practical experience in motor movements. 
The scope of this instruction covers day and night movements 
which terminate in a unit bivouac area. 
Actual Time Allotted. 16 hours. 
Text References. FM 25-10; FM 100-5. 
Method of Instruction. Practical Exercises. 
483 (30) 
Standard of Proficiency. Each enlisted man should have sufficient prac- 
tical knowledge of troop movements under day and night conditions 
so that he will observe: 
1. Rules of entrucking, detrucking, and halts. 
2. Traffic regulations. 
3. Methods of establishing bivouac. 
4. Methods of concealment. 
5. Methods of feeding troops. 
6. Sanitary measures. 
TROOP MOVEMENTS BY MOTORS 
(30) 
(Daylight Movement) 
Instructor(s) 
First Period: Eight Hours 
Place. Improved roads. 
Text References. FM 25-10; FM 100-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment, None. 
Transportation. Cargo trucks, motor ambulances and motorcycles. 
Individual Equipment. Stripped packs. 
Suggested Outline. Practical exercise. 
1. Units to observe all rules of entrucking, detrucking and halts. 
The convoy to observe all traffic regulations. 
2. The march to include establishing bivouac, the preparation and 
serving of a meal, construction of camp expedients, and practic- 
ing concealment to include camouflage. 
(30) 
TROOP MOVEMENTS BY MOTORS 
(Night Movement) 
Instructor(s) 
Second Period; Eight Hours 
Place. Improved roads. 
Text References. See first period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. None. 
484 (30) 
Transportation. Cargo trucks, motor ambulances and motorcyles. 
Individual Equipment. Full field equipment. 
Suggested Outline. Practical exercise. 
1. Units to observe all rules of entrucking, detrucking and march 
discipline. The convoy to observe all traffic regulations and 
movements to be conducted without lights (see paragraphs 112 
and 113, FM 25-10). 
2. Procedure. The march to begin under cover of darkness and 
terminate in unit assembly areas. The assembly area should be 
large enough to allow dispersion and concealment from ground 
and air. Motor vehicles should be provided with hard standing 
and dispersed with at least 75 yards between any two vehicles. 
Troops should establish bivouac and construct such camp ex- 
pedients as are necessary. The movement should be completed 
prior to daylight. 
(31) 
INSPECTIONS 
Purpose and Scope. The unit commander inspects his troops to deter- 
mine for himself their physical condition, appearance, military fit- 
ness and state of training. The men in turn are impressed by his 
personal interest, and strive to meet his standards. Thus inspec- 
tion is an important morale factor. 
Actual Time Allotted. 17 hours. 
Text References. Field Manual 7-5; TM 10-545; Field Manual 21-5; 
FM 21-15; Army Regulations 40-205. 
Method of Instruction. Application. 
Standard of Proficiency. The men should know the importance of in- 
spection, how to prepare for inspection and how to conduct them- 
selves while being inspected. 
485 INSPECTIONS 
(31) 
Instructor (s) 
For All Periods: One Hour and Two Hours 
Place. Drill field and barracks. 
Text References. As given in introduction, 
instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. As prescribed by commanding officer. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. As prescribed by commanding officer. 
Procedure. The one-hour periods should be used for unit inspection, 
indoor or outdoor, carried out in the squad rooms or on the drill 
field. 
The two-hour periods (4th, 6th, 7th and 9th weeks) may be 
used for battalion inspection. At this time the men should pitch 
their shelter tents and display their equipment outdoors. 
The inspector will note the condition of the individual as to 
personal appearance, cleanliness, neatness, hair and beard, posture, 
uniform, brass and leather. The individual equipment will be care- 
fully inspected. 
During the indoor inspection the condition of the squad room, 
beds, lockers and individual equipment as displayed on the beds 
is noted. 
486 SECTION IV 
(11 Vet.) 
VETERINARY TRAINING 
MEDICAL DEPARTMENT MOBILIZATION TRAINING PROGRAM 
8-1 AS ADAPTED TO VETERINARY UNITS 
Generally, the training program of Veterinary Units is similar to that 
of other Medical Department Units as outlined in Mobilization Training 
Program 8-1. In certain instances, however, it has been necessary to 
substitute courses of instruction specifically designed for Veterinary Units. 
These courses are listed below, with index numbers which correspond to 
comparable courses and index numbers in the training program, para- 
graphs 7a, b and c, Section II, Chap. I. 
(11 Vet.) — Elementary Anatomy and Physiology. 
(13 Vet.) — Veterinary Field Records. 
(15 Vet.) — Ambulance (Animal) Loading and Unloading. 
(18 Vet.) — Medical and Surgical Nursing (Animal). 
(22 Vet.) — Medical Aid (Splints and Splinting; Bandages and 
Dressings). 
(29 Vet.) — Technical and Tactical Employment of Veterinary 
Units. 
(29a Vet.) — Functions and Combat Dispositions of Veterinary 
Elements. 
(29b Vet.) —Reconnaissance, Use of Cover and Concealment. 
(29c Vet.) — Collection and Evacuation of Casualties from the 
Field. 
(29e Vet.) —Ambulance Driving Convoy (Day and Night), and 
Miscellaneous Veterinary Unit Training: 
Protection of Animals against Chemical Attack, 
Equitation. 
Lead Line Drill. 
(29j Vet.)—Foward Displacements and Withdrawals During 
Action. 
(291 Vet.) —Battalion or Regimental Training. 
The subject matter and procedure for training Veterinary Units in 
all other courses will be the same as for Medical Units, and will be 
found in Sections I, II and III of Chapter 3. 
(See paragraph 10, Sec. II, Chap. I, Veterinary Technicians Basic 
for a detailed program of the above subjects.) 
487 (11 Vet.) 
ELEMENTARY ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 
Instructor (s) 
First Period: Two Hours 
Place. Instructional area. 
Text References. FS 8-38, General Structure of the Horse; Chapter 3, 
FM 25-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Unit commander and all available noncommissioned of- 
ficer assistants. 
Equipment. A horse for demonstration purposes. Anatomical charts 
of man and horse. Cross sections and longitudinal sec- 
tions of bones. Specimens of common types of joints. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Outline of Conference and Demonstration. The Skeletal System. 
1. Names of bones of animal body. 
2. Give relationship of bones to each other. 
3. Correlate skeletal structure, man and animals. 
4. Discuss joints, 
5. Demonstrate surface anatomy of a horse. 
(11 Vet.) 
ELEMENTARY ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period: One Hour 
Place. Instructional area. 
Text References. Paragraph 4, AR 40-2250; FM 25-5; FS 8-38, Gen- 
eral structure of the horse. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One sergeant. 
Equipment. One horse, preferably black, with regions outlined with 
a paste made of bismuth subnitrate and water. Issue 
mimeographed nomenclature charts to each individual. 
Transportation. None. 
488 Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Outline of Conference, Demonstration and Oral Quiz. Regional Nomen- 
clature. 
1. Description of external regions of the horse. 
2. Demonstrate concurrently with the description. 
3. Require identification of areas by individuals without reference to 
charts, using outlined horse. 
(11 Vet.) 
ELEMENTARY ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 
(11 Vet.) 
Instructor (s) 
Third Period; One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Paragraph 4, AR 40-2250; FM 25-5; FS 8-38, Gen- 
eral structure of the horse. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Procedure. Examination on Skeletal System and External Regions of 
the Horse. 
The card system of examination may be used. 
Note; Requirements of this period should be based on general 
knowledge of the skeleton, the names of the more prominent 
bones, their location, and corresponding bones of the human 
skeleton. 
489 (11 Vet.) 
ELEMENTARY ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 
Instructor (s) 
Fourth Period; Two Hours 
Place. Instructional area. 
Text References. Any standard text; FS 8-38, General structure of the 
horse. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Charts of man and horse if available; dissected speci- 
mens; horse. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Outline of Conference and Demonstration. The Muscular System. 
1. Types of muscle. 
2. Functions of muscles. 
3. Relation of muscles to the skeletal system, 
4. Demonstrate location of muscles (surface anatomy). 
5. Correlate functional musculature of horse and man. 
6. Use charts and dissected specimens as instructional aids. 
Two Hours 
(11 Vet.) 
ELEMENTARY ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 
Instructor (s) 
Fifth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Any standard text; Section III, Chapter 2, TM 8-220 
Med. Dept. Soldiers’ Handbook. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Charts, 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Outline of Conference and Demonstration. The Nervous System. 
1. Brain. 
a. Name parts. 
b. Description (elementary). 
c. Functions. 
2. Spinal cord. 
a. Relation to brain. 
b. Relation to peripheral nervous system. 
3. Function of the principal nerve trunks. 
490 (11 Vet.) 
ELEMENTARY ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 
Instructor (s) 
Sixth Period; Two Hours 
Place. Instructional area. 
Text References. Reference material previously used. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Demonstrator with horse. 
Equipment. Charts. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Outline of Review and Practical Examination. The Muscular and Nerv- 
ous Systems. 
1. Review muscular and nervous systems. Stress the most practical 
aspects of the course. 
2. Have students ask questions, 
3. Oral examination using all instructional aids. 
(11 Vet.) 
ELEMENTARY ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 
Instructor (s) 
Seventh Period; Three Hours 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Reference material previously used; Section III, Chap. 
2, TM 8-220, Med. Dept Soldiers’ Handbook; FS 8-38, General 
Structure of the Horse. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Blackboard; charts. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Outline of Conference and Demonstration. The Digestive System. 
1. Description of digestive system. 
a. Location 
b. Size 
c. Function 
of various structures. 
2. Demonstrate by all available graphic means. 
3. Oral quiz during last hour. 
491 (11 Vet.) 
ELEMENTARY ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 
Instructor (s) 
Eighth Period: Three Hours 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Any standard text; FS 8-38, General Structure of the 
horse; TM 8-220 Med. Dept. Soldiers’ Handbook. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Charts; blackboard; trachea, bronchi and lungs if 
available. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Outline of Conference and Demonstration. The Respiratory System. 
1. Description of the respiratory system. 
a. Location 
b. Size 
c. Function 
of various structures. 
2. Use charts for demonstration purposes. 
3. Discuss reactions of respiratory system as affected by exercise, 
heat, cold, age and disease. 
4. Oral quiz. 
(11 Vet.) 
ELEMENTARY ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 
Instructor (s) 
Ninth Period: Three Hours 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Any standard text; FS 8-38, General Structure of the 
horse; TM 8-220 Med. Dept. Soldiers’ Handbook. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Charts; blackboard; heart and large vessels if avail- 
able. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
492 (11 Vet.) 
Outline of Conference, Demonstration and Examination. The Circula- 
tory System. 
1. Description of the circulatory system. 
a. Heart (action, location, rate of beat) 
b. Arteries. 
c. Veins. 
2. Differences between arterial and venous circulation. 
a. Vessels. 
b. Blood. 
3. Surface anatomy (location of principal vessels), special attention 
to be directed to the differences between arteries and veins in living 
animals and means of detection). 
4. Discuss reaction of circulatory system to exercise, disease and 
other influences. 
5. Oral quiz. 
(11 Vet.) 
ELEMENTARY ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 
Instructor(s) 
Tenth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text Reference. Any standard text. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Charts; blackboard. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Outline of Conference and Demonstration. The Urogenital System. 
1. Description of the urogenital system. 
2. Location of organs that make up this system (use charts). 
3. Functions of urogenital tract. 
4. Discuss reaction to disease or other influences. 
493 (11 Vet.) 
ELEMENTARY ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY 
Instructor (s) 
Eleventh Period; Two Hours 
Place. Outdoor area. 
Text References. Any standard text; FS 8-38, General Structure of the 
horse; Section III, TM 8-220, Med. Dept. Soldiers’ Handbook. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Several quiet horses; blackboard; sectional specimens 
of normal and diseased feet. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Outline of Conference and Demonstration. Arthrology and the Hoof. 
1. Structures of the hoof. 
a. Bones. 
b. Joints. 
c. Tendons. 
2. Relationship of hoof, pastern and fetlock joints. 
3. Use all visual means of instruction. 
4. Discuss conditions resulting from injury and disease. 
5. Oral quiz. 
(13 Vet.) 
FIELD VETERINARY RECORDS 
Instructor (s) 
First Period; One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. AR 40-2000 series; FM 8-5; TM 8-220, Medical 
Department Soldiers’ Handbook; TM 8-450 Veterinary Administra- 
tion. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Book of Emergency Veterinary Tags, Form 115b, M.D. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
494 (13 Vet.) 
Outline of Conference and Demonstration. The Emergency Veterinary 
Tag. 
1. The data to be entered on the Emergency Veterinary Tags: special 
reference directed to expected variations from normal. 
2. The uses of the Emergency Veterinary Tag. 
a. All animal patients must be tagged. 
b. The tagging of an animal. 
c. Communicable disease. 
d. The disposition of the original and copies of the Emergency 
Veterinary Tag. 
(13 Vet.) 
FIELD VETERINARY RECORDS 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period: Two Hours 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. AR 40-2000 series; FM 8-5; TM 8-220, Medical 
Department Soldiers’ Handbook; TM 8-450 Veterinary Administra- 
tion. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Noncommissioned officers. 
Equipment. Emergency Veterinary Tags, original, duplicate, trip- 
licate. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Pencil. 
Outline of Practical Exercise. The Emergency Veterinary Tag. 
1. Have men practice the entry of data on the Emergency Veterinary 
Tags. 
2. Stress the conformity of data with the prescribed procedure set 
forth in Army Regulations. Furnish the diagnoses but do so in 
such a manner that men will understand the exactness required in 
writing the diagnosis. 
3. Review the disposition of the Emergency Veterinary Tag and 
copies. 
495 (IB Vet.) 
FIELD VETERINARY RECORDS 
Instructor (s) 
Third Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Section III, AR 40-2245; TM 8-220, Medical Depart- 
ment Soldiers’ Handbook; TM 8-450 Veterinary Administration. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Supply of blank Forms 102 MD (Veterinary Report of 
Sick and Wounded Animals). 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Pencil. 
Outline of Conference, Demonstration and Application. 
1, Conference and demonstration. 
a. Explain and demonstrate the data entered on the Report, 
b. Use. 
c. Disposition of the original and duplicates. 
2. Application. Have the men fill in blanks, using some logical 
problem as a basis. Conduct a recitation and discussion on dif- 
ferent phases of the problem. 
(13 Vet.) 
FIELD VETERINARY RECORDS 
Instructor (s) 
Fourth Period. One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Section III, AR 40-2245; TM 8-220, Medical Depart- 
ment Soldiers’ Handbook; TM 8-450 Veterinary Administration, 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Supply of blank Statistical Reports of Sick and Wound- 
ed. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Pencil. 
496 (13 Vet.) 
Outline of Conference, Demonstration and Application. 
1. Conference and demonstration. 
a. Explain and demonstrate the data entered on the report. 
b. Use of Statistical Reports of Sick and Wounded. 
c. Disposition of the original and duplicates. 
2. Application. Have the men fill in blanks, using some logical 
problem as a basis. Conduct a recitation and discussion on different 
phases of the problem. 
(15 Vet.) 
AMBULANCE (ANIMAL) LOADING AND UNLOADING 
Instructor(s) 
First Period: One Hour 
Place. Stable area. 
Text Reference. None. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One demonstrator with horse. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Outline of Conference, Demonstration and Application. The Proper Ap- 
proach and Leading of Animals. 
1. Conference and demonstration. 
a. Approaching a horse. 
(1) Speaking in low audible voice. 
(2) Calm and confident attitude. 
(3) Avoid any demonstration of fear. 
b. Handling the horse. 
(1) Avoid handling animal’s head. 
(2) Avoid untying or putting on the halter shank before de- 
taching animal. 
(3) Proper method of leading out. 
(4) Avoid looking back while leading animal. 
2. Precautions necessary to prevent injury to individuals when 
handling refractory animals. 
3. Application of principles demonstrated. 
497 (15 Vet.) 
AMBULANCE (ANIMAL) LOADING AND UNLOADING 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period: One Hour 
Place. Stable area. 
Text Reference. None. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Demonstrator with horse. 
Equipment. Bandages; blankets. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Outline of Conference and Demonstration. Preparation of patients pri- 
or to loading. 
1. Proper application and adjustment of packs and bandages prior 
to loading. 
2. Blanketing of animals with general disturbances including shock, 
respiratory afflictions, etc. 
a. Prevention of exposure resulting from excessive sun or heat. 
b. Protection against cold weather. 
(15 Vet.) 
AMBULANCE (ANIMAL) LOADING AND UNLOADING 
Instructor (s) 
Third Period: One Hour 
Place. Stable area. 
Text References. Chapter 8, FM 25-5; Chapter 8, FM 8-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All personnel of one section of a platoon. 
Equipment. Demonstrators with medical kits; Emergency Veteri- 
nary Tag, Form 115 b MD. 
Transportation. 2Vk ton truck, stake rack body. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
498 (15 Vet.) 
Outline of Conference and Demonstration. Loading and Unloading of 
Animals. 
1. Describe and demonstrate loading of animals indisposed to loading. 
a. Special attention directed to restraint and support of loaded 
patients. (Use acceptable measures only.) 
b. Special precautions necessary to prevent injury to patients. 
c. Special precautions necessary to prevent injury of personnel 
incident to refractory patients. 
2. Review and demonstrate use of Emergency Veterinary Tags. 
Note. If animal ambulances are not available improvise by adapt- 
ing available truck for this purpose. 
(15 Vet.) 
AMBULANCE (ANIMAL) LOADING AND UNLOADING 
Instructor (s) 
Fourth Period: Seven Hours 
Place. Stable area. 
Text References. Reference material previously used. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All staff sergeants and sergeants. 
Equipment. Medical kits. 
Transportation, ton trucks, stake rack bodies. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Outline of Applicatory Period. Loading and Unloading animal am- 
bulances. 
1. Application by soldiers of procedures described and demonstrated 
in third period. 
2. Use the last part of this period for a problem and inspection. 
Note. If animal ambulances are not available improvise by adapt- 
ing trucks available for this purpose. 
499 (18 Vet.) 
MEDICAL AND SURGICAL NURSING (ANIMAL) 
Instructor (s) 
First Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text Reference. Section VI, TM 8-220, Medical Department Soldiers1 
Handbook. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Outline of Conference. The horse in health. 
Discuss appearance of healthy animal as to: 
a. Posture. 
b. Expression. 
c. Mucous membranes. 
d. Appetite. 
e. Skin. 
f. Pulse. 
g. Respiration. 
h. Temperature. 
(18 Vet.) 
MEDICAL AND SURGICAL NURSING (ANIMAL) 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period; One Hour 
Place. Veterinary Hospital. 
Text Reference. None. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Sergeant assistants. 
Equipment. One horse—VERY GENTLE. Large wooden model 
clinical thermometer with sliding scale, Several ther- 
mometers, Hot water bath. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
500 (18 Vet.) 
Outline of Conference, Demonstration and Application. Handling and 
reading thermometers. Taking temperatures. 
1. Method of approach. 
a. Common errors. 
b. Unruly animals. 
2. Technique. Proper procedure in using the clinical thermometer. 
a. Application in taking temperature. 
b. Reading of temperatures. 
c. Interpretation. 
(1) Normal. 
(2) Variations in health. 
(3) Variations in disease. 
MEDICAL AND SURGICAL NURSING (ANIMAL) 
(18 Vet.) 
Instructor (s) 
Third Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom and stable area. 
Text Reference. Sect. Ill, Chap. 2, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Sergeant assistants. 
Equipment. Horse. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Outline of Conference, Demonstration and Application. Taking the 
pulse and respirations. 
1. The pulse. 
a. Explanation and description. 
b. Rate in health and disease. 
c. Quality. 
2. Application. Have class take each other’s pulse. 
3. Describe and demonstrate the pulse on the horse. 
4. Application. Taking the pulse of a horse both before and after 
exercise. 
5. Respirations 
a. Explanation and description. 
b. Rate in health and disease. 
6. Application. Have class take each other’s respiratory rate. 
7. Demonstrate. Respiration of the horse. 
8. Application. Take the respiratory rate of a horse both before 
and after exercise. 
501 (18 Vet.) 
MEDICAL AND SURGICAL NURSING (ANIMAL) 
Instructor (s) 
Fourth Period: One Hour 
Place. Stable area. 
Text References. FM 25-5 ; AR 40-2080 ; AR 40-2085. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Outline of Conference and Demonstration. General Sanitary Measures. 
1. Ventilation. 
2. Feeding. 
3. Watering. 
4. Bedding. 
5. Forage. 
6. Grain. 
7. Grooming. 
8. Fire precautions and special measures for protection of animals. 
(18 Vet.) 
MEDICAL AND SURGICAL NURSING (ANIMAL) 
Instructor(s) 
Fifth Period; Two Hours 
Place. Hospital. 
Text References. FM 25-5; AR 40-2080; Sect. VI, Chap. 3, TM 8-220 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Outline of Conference and Demonstration. Injuries and lameness. 
1. General nursing procedures. 
a. Open wounds. 
b. Scratches. 
c. Thrush. 
2. Detection of lameness. 
a. Checking of all feet for penetrating objects. 
b. Procedure when penetrating objects are found. 
502 MEDICAL AND SURGICAL NURSING (ANIMAL) 
(18 Vet.) 
Instructor (s) 
Sixth Period; Two Hours 
Place. Classroom and Veterinary Hospital. 
Text References. AR 40-2090; AR 40-2095; FM 25-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Outline of Conference and Demonstration. Communicable Diseases. 
1. In teaching the nursing of animals affected with communicable 
diseases, and the actions required in the several diseases, stress 
the following: 
a. The best interests of the patient. 
b. Protection of other animals. 
c. Self protection. 
d. Sanitary measures including disposal of carcass. 
2. During the second hour demonstrate the care and treatment of 
cases representing communicable disease patients, the handling of 
suspects, etc. 
(18 Vet.) 
MEDICAL AND SURGICAL NURSING (ANIMAL) 
Instructor (s) 
Seventh Period; One Hour 
Place. Classroom and stable area. 
Text References. AR 40-2125; AR 40-2135; Sect. V, Chap. 3, FM 25-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
503 (18 Vet.) 
Outline of Conference and Demonstration. Skin Diseases. 
1. Animal nursing in respect to mange, ringworm, lice, etc. 
a. Cause. 
b. Treatment. 
c. Prevention. 
d. Handling of patients. 
e. Quarantine. 
f. Clean up and disinfection. 
2. Emphasize the responsibility of the individual in careful inspection 
of animals while grooming them. Any abnormal or unusual con- 
dition should be promptly reported. 
(18 Vet.) 
MEDICAL AND SURGICAL NURSING (ANIMAL) 
Instructor (s) 
Eighth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Classroom and stable area. 
Text References. Standard text; Sect. V, Chap. 3, FM 25-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Outline of Conference and Demonstration. Noncommunicable Diseases. 
1. Conference. Immediate measures to be observed in cases of 
thumps, heat exhaustion, colic, and azoturia and their after care. 
Special emphasis to be placed upon the recognition of these con- 
ditions. 
2. Demonstration. The second hour will be used for a practical 
demonstration. Whenever the opportunity presents itself to have 
actual cases demonstrated, time should be taken to use the oppor- 
tunity to its fullest extent. 
504 MEDICAL AND SURGICAL NURSING (ANIMAL) 
(18 Vet.) 
Instructor (s) 
Ninth Period: One Hour 
Place. Veterinary Hospital or Dispensary. 
Text Reference. TM 8-220, Medical Department Soldiers’ Handbook. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One assistant in white uniform. 
Equipment. Small operating case, sterilizer, several hand basins 
for solutions, antiseptic agents, green soap, rubber 
gloves, etc. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline. 
1. Discuss. 
a. The cleanliness of operating and dressing rooms. 
b. The preservation and care of surgical equipment. 
c. The sterilization of instruments. 
d. Cleansing of operator’s hands. 
e. Nomenclature and care of common surgical instruments and 
appliances used in dressing and operating rooms. 
2. Demonstration. 
a. Demonstrate sterilization of surgical instruments. 
b. Operator’s preparation for surgery. 
MEDICAL AND SURGICAL NURSING (ANIMAL) 
(18 Vet.) 
Instructor (s) 
Tenth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Veterinary Hospital. 
Text Reference. Standard texts. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Sergeant assistants. 
Equipment. Stomach tube, balling gun, drenching bottle, dose sy 
ringe, one horse-—very gentle. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
505 (18 Vet.) 
Outline of Conference, Demonstration, Application. Administration of 
drugs. 
1. Conference. Discuss: 
a. The routine administration of drugs. 
b. Indications of methods to be employed. 
2. Demonstration. Demonstrate the use of: 
a. Stomach tube. 
b. Balling gun. 
c. Drenching bottle. 
d. Dose syringe. 
3. Precautions necessary. 
4. Application. Supervise practical application of above methods. 
(18 Vet.) 
MEDICAL AND SURGICAL NURSING (ANIMAL) 
Instructor (s) 
Eleventh Period: One Hour 
Place. Veterinary Hospital. 
Text Reference. None. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Procedure. Practical examination. 
Prepare cards with questions concerning various procedures 
and distribute these to individuals. Call on members of class to 
satisfy the requirements of their individual cards. 
506 (18 Vet.) 
MEDICAL AND SURGICAL NURSING (ANIMAL) 
Instructor (s) 
Twelfth Period: One Hour 
Place. Veterinary Hospital. 
Text References. All previous references. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Procedure. Practical examination. 
Prepare cards with questions on directives for various proce- 
dures, and distribute these to the men. Call on the men to satisfy 
the requirements on their individual cards. 
(22 Vet.) 
MEDICAL AID (SPLINTS AND SPLINTING; 
BANDAGES AND DRESSINGS) 
Instructor (s) 
First Period: One Hour 
Place. Instructional area. 
Text References. Standard text; FM 25-5, Animal Transport. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Assistants as needed. 
Equipment. Patients with typed wounds; cloth; objects causing in 
jury. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
507 (22 Vet.) 
Outline of Conference and Demonstration. Classification of wounds. 
1. Discuss types of wounds as follows: 
a. Incised wounds or cuts. 
b. Lacerated wounds or tears. 
c. Punctured wounds or holes. 
d. Contused wounds or bruises. 
2. Demonstrate wounds by showing methods of occurence, using 
cloth and causative objects. 
3. Demonstrate and discuss comparable wounds of patients avail- 
able. 
(22 Vet.) 
MEDICAL AID (SPLINTS AND SPLINTING; 
BANDAGES AND DRESSINGS) 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period: Two Hours 
Place. Stable area. 
Text Reference. Paragraph 137, FM 25-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Demonstrator with horse. 
Equipment. Twitch; sideline; blinds; muzzle; rope; knee-straps; 
etc. 
Transportation. 2J/2 ton truck, stake rack body. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Outline of Conference and Demonstration. Use of Various Restraining 
and Supporting Devices. 
• 
1. Use of restraining devices. 
a. Twitch 
b. Sidestick 
c. Muzzle 
d. Crosstie 
e. Blinds, hoods 
f. Knee-straps 
g. Sideline 
h. Hobbles 
i. Slings 
j. Casting harness 
2. Caution against injury from use of the above. 
3. Assistance to cast animals. 
4. Improvising sling supports for ambulatory cases. 
508 (22 Vet.) 
MEDICAL AID (SPLINTS AND SPLINTING 
BANDAGES AND DRESSINGS) 
Instructor(s) 
Third to Eighth Periods: One Hour Each 
Place. Stable area. 
Text Reference. Paragraph 137, FM 25-5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Noncommissioned officers. 
Equipment. Twitch, sidelines, blinds, muzzle, rope, knee-straps, 
etc.; several quiet horses. 
Transportation. 21/? ton trucks, stake rack body. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Outline of Practical Exercise. Restraint. 
1. Members of class to apply various methods of restraint and 
supportive measures for specified cases or conditions. 
2. Correction of errors. 
3. Stress methods of protecting individuals from injury. 
(22 Vet.) 
MEDICAL AID (SPLINTS AND SPLINTING; 
BANDAGES AND DRESSINGS) 
Instructor (s) 
Ninth Period: One Hour 
Place. Stable area. 
Text Reference. Sec. VI, Chapter 3, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Demonstrator with horse. 
Equipment. Gauze; canton flannel; rest bandages; cotton and 
packs. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
509 (22 Vet.) 
Outline of Conference and Demonstration. Bandaging of the Metacar- 
pal and Metatarsal Regions. 
1. Types of dressings used on metacarpal and metatarsal regions. 
a. Medicated dressings. 
b. Wet packs. 
c. Rest bandages. 
2. Demonstrate preparation of these dressings. 
3. Demonstrate approach to the animal and application of the pack. 
(22 Vet.) 
MEDICAL AID (SPLINTS AND SPLINTING; 
BANDAGES AND DRESSINGS) 
Instructor (s) 
Tenth to Fourteenth Periods, Inclusive: One Hour Each 
Place. Stable area. 
Text Reference. Sec. VI, Chapter 3, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Noncommissioned officers. 
Equipment. Bandages; packs; rest or derby bandages; canton flan- 
nel bandage. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Outline of Applicatory Periods. Bandaging, Metacarpal and Metatarsal 
Regions. 
1. Preparation of the various types of bandages for metacarpal and 
metatarsal regions by individuals. 
2. Application of bandages by individuals. 
a. Stress proper approach and handling of the animal. 
b. Efficient application. 
3. Rotate groups so that each individual will have practice in the 
application of all types of bandages on these regions. 
4. Use the thirteenth period for practical examination. 
510 MEDICAL AID (SPLINTS AND SPLINTING; 
BANDAGES AND DRESSINGS) 
(22 Vet.) 
Instructor (s) 
Fifteenth Period: One Hour 
Place. Stable area. 
Text Reference. Sec. VI, Chapter 3, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Demonstrator with horse. 
Equipment. Bandages: gauze; derby; canton flannel; cotton; 
packs. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Outline of Conference and Demonstration. Bandaging of the Fetlock 
and Tail regions. 
1. Preparation of bandages used on the fetlock. 
2. Demonstration of methods of application of bandages. 
a. Without twisting. 
b. With twisting. 
c. Stress suitable looseness of bandages or packs. 
(22 Vet.) 
MEDICAL AID (SPLINTS AND SPLINTING; 
BANDAGES AND DRESSINGS) 
Instructor (s) 
Sixteenth to Twentieth Periods, Inclusive: One Hour Each 
Place. Stable area. 
Text Reference. Sec. VI, Chapter 3, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Noncommissioned officers. 
Equipment. Bandages: gauze; derby; canton flannel; cotton; 
packs; several quiet horses. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
511 (22 Vet.) 
Outline of Applicatory Procedure. Bandaging of the Fetlock and Tail 
Regions. 
1. Preparation by individuals of packs and dressings for fetlock and 
tail regions. 
2. Proper application of the various types of packs and dressings to 
the fetlock and tail regions. 
3. Practical examination during twentieth period. 
(22 Vet.) 
MEDICAL AID (SPLINTS AND SPLINTING; 
BANDAGES AND DRESSINGS) 
Instructor (s) 
Twenty-first Period: One Hour 
Place. Stable area. 
Text Reference. Sec. VI, Chapter 3, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Demonstrator with horse. 
Equipment. Bandage material; cotton; packs. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Outline of Conference and Demonstration. Bandaging of the Pastern 
Region. 
1. Follow same procedure as of previous periods; i.e., description and 
demonstration of bandages of the pastern region. 
2. Discuss supportive bandages. 
3. Discuss the use of a few turns of gauze in pastern region as in the 
treatment of a case of scratches. 
512 MEDICAL AID (SPLINTS AND SPLINTING; 
BANDAGES AND DRESSINGS) 
(22 Vet.) 
Instructor (s) 
Twenty-second Period: Two Hours 
Place. Stable area. 
Text Reference. Sec. VI, Chapter 3, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All noncommissioned officers. 
Equipment. Bandaging materials: horses. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Outline of Applicatory Period. Bandaging of the Pastern Region. 
1. Preparation and bandaging the pastern region. 
2. Application of supportive bandages. 
3. Correction of errors. 
(22 Vet.) 
MEDICAL AID (SPLINTS AND SPLINTING; 
BANDAGES AND DRESSINGS) 
Instructor (s) 
Twenty-third Period: Two Hours 
Place. Hospital area. 
Text Reference. Section V, Chapter 3, FM 25-5, Animal Transport. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Demonstrator with horse. 
Equipment. Tourniquet. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Outline of Conference and Demonstration. Methods of arresting hem 
orrhage. 
1. Distinguish between venous and arterial hemorrhage. 
2. Use of the tourniquet. 
a. When indicated. 
b. Where used. 
. c. How used (time limit). 
d. Types of tourniquets, including improvised tourniquets, 
3. Tight compresses of tincture of ferric chloride. 
4. Other methods of arresting hemorrhage. 
513 (22 Vet.) 
MEDICAL AID (SPLINTS AND SPLINTING; 
BANDAGES AND DRESSINGS) 
Instructor (s) 
Twenty-fourth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Hospital area. 
Text Reference. Same as for twenty-third period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Noncommissioned officers. 
Equipment. Several quiet horses, bandages, compresses, tourni- 
quets, etc. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Outline of Practical Exercise. Methods of arresting hemorrhage. 
1. Members of class to apply various methods for arresting hem- 
orrhage according to requirements for specified cases or conditions 
2. Correction of errors. 
MEDICAL AID (SPLINTS AND SPLINTING; 
BANDAGES AND DRESSINGS) 
(22 Vet.) 
Instructor(s) 
Twenty-fifth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Instructional area. 
Text References. See first period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Assistant in white uniform. 
Equipment. Small instrument case, bandages, cotton, antiseptic 
solution. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Outline of Conference and Demonstration. Preparation and prelimi 
nary treatment of wounds. 
1. Cleansing of the wound. 
2. Removal of foreign bodies. 
3. Arresting of hemorrhage. 
4. Preparation for suturing. 
5. Drainage. 
6. Dressings. 
514 (22 Vet.) 
MEDICAL AID (SPLINTS AND SPLINTING; 
BANDAGES AND DRESSINGS) 
Instructor (s) 
Twenty-sixth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Instructional area. 
Text References. See first period. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Assistants with several quiet animals, actual cases if 
possible. 
Equipment. Small instrument cases, bandages, cotton, antiseptics. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Outline of Applicatory Period. Preparation and Preliminary treatment 
of wounds. 
1. Simulate various wounds and have individuals prepare area for 
treatment. 
2. Apply methods for arresting of hemorrhage of simulated wounds. 
3. Application of dressings. 
(22 Vet.) 
MEDICAL AID (SPLINTS AND SPLINTING; 
BANDAGES AND DRESSINGS) 
Instructor (s) 
Twenty-seventh Period: One Hour 
Place. Instructional area. 
Text Reference. Standard text. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel, Assistant with quiet animal. 
Equipment. Common repellants, pine tar, gauze etc. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Outline of Conference and Demonstration. Protection of wounds against 
insect infestation. 
1. Methods used to repel insects by medical agents. 
2. Detection of infestation Lucillia Macillaria). 
3. Mechanical protection. 
4. Methods of removal from wounds, sheath, etc. 
515 (22 Vet.) 
MEDICAL AID (SPLINTS AND SPLINTING; 
BANDAGES AND DRESSINGS) 
Instructor (s) 
Twenty-eighth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Previous text references. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One assistant instructor for each squad. 
Equipment. Small instrument cases, bandages, cotton, antiseptic 
solutions. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline. Proficiency test. 
1. First hour. Quiz on the following subjects; 
a. Define wound. 
b. Classification of wounds. 
c. What is sepsis. 
d. Antiseptics, name several. 
e. Discuss sterilization. 
f. Discuss disinfection. 
g. Discuss dressings. 
2. Second hour. Practical application in the preparation and treat- 
ment of wounds. 
(22 Vet.) 
MEDICAL AID (SPLINTS AND SPLINTING; 
BANDAGES AND DRESSINGS) 
Instructor(s) 
Twenty-ninth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Instruction area. 
Text Reference. Sec. VI, Chapter 3, TM 8-220- 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Two demonstrators with animals. 
Equipment. Saddles, officers’ type, and McClellan; pack harness, 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. Abrasions from ill-fitting equipment 
1. Discuss abrasions caused by; 
a. Ill fitting saddle; 
b. lil fitting harness. 
2. Discuss and demonstrate types of animals commonly affected 
3. Discuss prevention. 
4. Treatment of abrasions caused by ill fitting equipment. 
516 (22 Vet.) 
MEDICAL AID (SPLINTS AND SPLINTING; 
BANDAGES AND DRESSINGS) 
Instructor (s) 
Thirtieth Period: One Hour 
Place. Veterinary dispensary. 
Text References. None. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Demonstrator and assistant with horse. 
Equipment. Stomach tube, pump, warm water and pail 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Outline of Conference and Demonstration. Enema. 
1. Types. 
2. Indications. 
3. Methods used to control and restrain an animal. 
a. Approach. 
b. Administering the enema. 
c. Common errors, 
d. Cautions. 
MEDICAL AID (SPLINTS AND SPLINTING; 
BANDAGES AND DRESSINGS) 
(22 Vet.) 
Instructor(s) 
Thirty-first Period: One Hour 
Place. Veterinary dispensary. 
Text Reference. Standard text. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Horseshoer with horse. 
Equipment. Horseshoer’s equipment; bandages; sacks; etc. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Outline of Conference and Demonstration. Removal of Shoe, Trimming 
the Hoof, Bandaging the Hoof. 
1. Removal of shoes. 
2. Proper trim of a horse’s foot. 
3. Meaning of balance of foot. 
4. Method of relieving corns. 
5. Proper bandaging of the foot. 
6. Use of the hoof plate. 
7. Demonstrate these procedures while they are being described. 
517 (22 Vet.) 
MEDICAL AID (SPLINTS AND SPLINTING; 
BANDAGES AND DRESSINGS) 
Instructor(s) 
Thirty-second to Forty-first Periods, Inclusive: One Hour Each 
Place. Stable area. 
Text References. Sec. VI, Chapter 3, TM 8-220; TM 2-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Noncommissioned officers. 
Equipment. Hoof knives; plates; oakum; muslin bandage; grain 
sacks; horses as required. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Outline of Applicatory Periods. Trim of Hoof, Hoof Packs, Bandage 
and Plate. 
1. Have individual progressively cover each feature of preceding 
period, 
2. Supervision and correction of errors is important. 
(22 Vet.) 
MEDICAL AID (SPLINTS AND SPLINTING; 
BANDAGES AND DRESSINGS) 
Instructor (s) 
Forty-second to Forty-fifth Periods, Inclusive; One Hour Each 
Place. Stable area. 
Text Reference. Sec. VI, Chapter 3, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Demonstrator. 
Equipment. Bandages; packs; horse required for application. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Outline of Conference, Demonstration and Application. Bandaging of 
the Hock. 
1. Describe and demonstrate technique of bandaging the hock. Use 
the supportive bandage below (one hour). 
2. Application of these bandages by individuals (through forty- 
fifth period). 
the Hock. 
518 MEDICAL AID (SPLINTS AND SPLINTING; 
BANDAGES AND DRESSINGS) 
(22 Vet.) 
Instructor (s) 
Forty-sixth to Fiftieth Periods, Inclusive: One Hour Each 
Place. Stable area. 
Text Reference. Sec. VI, Chapter 3, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Demonstrators. 
Equipment. Bandages; packs. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Outline of Conference, Demonstration and Application. Bandaging knee. 
1. Description and demonstration of knee packs and dressings. In- 
clude supportive bandages, (one hour), 
2. Application of these bandages by individuals (through fiftieth 
period). 
MEDICAL AID (SPLINTS AND SPLINTING; 
BANDAGES AND DRESSINGS) 
(22 Vet.) 
Instructor (s) 
Fifty-first Period; Two Hours 
Place. Stable area. 
Text Reference. Sec. VI, Chapter 3, TM 8-220. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Demonstrator. 
Equipment. Gauze, bandages, cotton, scissors. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None, 
Outline of Conference, Demonstration and Application. Bandaging of 
the head. 
1. Describe and demonstrate technique of bandaging and applying 
packs or dressings to the head. 
2. Indications for the application of bandages and packs, 
3. Have men apply head bandages. 
519 (22 Vet.) 
MEDICAL AID (SPLINTS AND SPLINTING; 
BANDAGES AND DRESSINGS) 
Instructor (s) 
Fifty-second Period: Two Hours 
Place. Stable area. 
Text Reference. Standard text. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Assistants as needed. 
Equipment. Gauze, bandages, cotton, scissors. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Outline of Applicatory Exercise. Bandaging of the head. 
1. Have individuals progressively cover each feature of preceding 
period, 
2. Supervision and correction of errors to be emphasized. 
MEDICAL AID (SPLINTS AND SPLINTING; 
BANDAGES AND DRESSINGS) 
t22 Vet.) 
Instructor (s) 
Fifty-third Period; Three Hours 
Place. Classroom. 
Text Reference. TM 8-233, Methods for Pharmacy Technicians. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Balances and scales, measures, charts showing sys- 
tems of weights and measures. Necessary materials for 
preparing simple antiseptic solutions and mixtures for 
wound applications or dressings. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Outline for Conference. Principles of Pharmacology. 
1. Definitions: common terms. 
2. Classification of common drugs. 
3. Dosage of drugs frequently used. 
4. Discuss use of balances and scales. 
5 Discuss prescription. 
6 Discuss common preparations. 
7. Pharmacy management. 
8. Precautions. 
520 MEDICAL AID (SPLINTS AND SPLINTING; 
BANDAGES AND DRESSINGS) 
(22 Vet.) 
Instructor (s) 
Fifty-fourth Period; Two Hours 
Place. Veterinary dispensary. 
Text References. All previous references. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Bandages; packs; derby bandages; tourniquets; hoof 
instruments; enema equipment; horses as necessary for 
procedures covered. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Outline of Applicatory Period. Examination. 
1. Prior to this period prepare cards with exercises directing per- 
formance of various procedures. 
2. Cards to be distributed to enlisted men, each man being required 
to satisfy the requirements indicated on his card. 
3. Those not meeting the standard of proficiency required will 
utilize open hours for further study. 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF VETERINARY UNITS 
(29a Vet.) 
v functions and Combat Dispositions of Veterinary Elements) 
Instructor (s) 
First Period; One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. FM 8-5; FM 8-10; T/O 2-11; T/O 6-11. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
521 (29a Vet.) 
Suggested Outline of Conference. The Organization, Function and Com- 
bat Disposition of the Veterinary Section of a Regimental Medical 
Detachment with Field Artillery and Cavalry Regiments. 
The following points should be covered: 
1. Organization. 
2. Equipment. 
3. Disposition and function in combat. 
4. Function on the march. 
5. Function in camp or bivouac. 
6. Records. 
(29a Vet.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF VETERINARY UNITS 
(Functions and Combat Dispositions of Veterinary Elements) 
Instructor(s) 
Second Period: Two Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. FM 8-5; FM 8-10; T/O 6-11; T/O 2-11. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Unit instructors; demonstration troops. 
Equipment. Veterinary dispensary equipment; demonstration 
troops mounted with medical kits. 
Transportation. Unit transportation. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline of Demonstration. 
1. All points covered in the first period should be demonstrated. It 
is suggested that organization and equipment be first demon- 
strated so that individuals will have a good understanding of the 
veterinary section personnel and equipment. 
2. Demonstration should now proceed to show how the veterinary 
section functions during combat, on the march, and while in camp 
or bivouac. 
3. Necessary records should run concurrently with the demonstra- 
tion. 
T/O 6-11; T/O 2-11. 
522 (29a Vet.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF VETERINARY UNITS 
(Functions and Combat Dispositions of Veterinary Elements) 
Instructor(s) 
Third Period: Three Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. FM 8-5; FM 8-10; T/O 2-11; T/O 6-11. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Unit equipment. 
Transportation. All unit transportation. 
Individual Equipment. Mounted with full field equipment. 
Suggested Outline of Application. 
1. Follow the same procedure as demonstrated in second period, using 
members of the group. 
2. Careful consideration must be given to all phases of this subject 
in order to avoid confusing the class as to the difference in the 
veterinary sections of regimental medical detachments. While the 
organization and type of equipment varies, careful explanation 
will show that such differences are due to the functional require- 
ments in each case. 
(29a Vet.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF VETERINARY UNITS 
(Functions and Combat Dispositions of Veterinary Elements) 
Instructor (s) 
Fourth Period; One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. FM 8-5; FM 8-10; T/O 8-89. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None, 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
523 (29a Vet.) 
Suggested Outline of Conference. Organization, Function, Combat Dis- 
position of the Veterinary Troop. T/O 8-98. 
1. Organization. 
2. Equipment. 
3. Function of troop elements. 
4. Disposition and function in combat. 
5. Function with cavalry division in camp or bivouac. 
6. Records. 
(29a Vet.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF VETERINARY UNITS 
(Functions and Combat Dispositions of Veterinary Elements) 
Instructor (s) 
Fifth Period; Two Hours 
Place. Demonstration area. 
Text References. FM 8-5; FM 8-10; T/O 8-89. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Unit instructors and demonstration troops. 
Equipment. Unit equipment. 
Transportation. Unit transportation. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline of Demonstration. The Veterinary Troop. T/O 8-89. 
1. Explain and demonstrate the organization and equipment of the 
Veterinary Troop. T/O 8-89. 
2. Demonstrate the operation of the Veterinary Troop as outlined in 
the fourth period. 
524 TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF VETERINARY UNITS 
(29a Vet.) 
(Functions and Combat Dispositions of Veterinary Elements) 
Instructor(s) 
Sixth Period: Three Hours 
Place: Demonstration area. 
Text References. FM 8-5; FM 8-10; T/O 8-89. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Unit Equipment. 
Transportation. Unit transportation. 
Individual Equipment. Full field equipment. 
Suggested Outline of Application. The Veterinary Troop. T/O 8-89. 
1. Organize the class into a Veterinary Troop assigning selected 
men to act as noncommissioned officers. 
2. Conduct the application along the same lines as the demonstration 
of the previous period. 
(29a Vet.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF VETERINARY UNITS 
(Functions and Combat Dispositions of Veterinary Elements) 
Instructor(s) 
Seventh Period ; One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. FM 8-5; FM 8-10; FM 8-15; T/O 8-99. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. Organization, Functions, and Com- 
bat Dispositions of the Veterinary Company (Separate). T/O 8-99. 
1. Organization. 
2. Equipment. 
3. Evacuation of the clearing station. 
4. Evacuation of regimental veterinary aid station. 
5. Function of p,dtoon headquarters and records. 
6. Function of company headquarters and records. 
525 TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF VETERINARY UNITS 
(29a Vet.) 
(Functions and Combat Dispositions of Veterinary Elements) 
Instructor(s) 
Eighth Period: One Hour 
Place. Demonstration area. 
Text References. FM 8-5; FM 8-10; T/O 8-99. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Unit instructor; demonstration troops. 
Equipment. Unit equipment. 
Transportation. Unit transportation. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline of Demonstration. Evacuation of a clearing station 
1. Demonstration personnel to be organized as a platoon of the Vet 
erinary Company (Separate). 
2. Demonstrate organization and equipment. 
3. Demonstrate the evacuation of a clearing station. 
4. Stress the function of a contact agent. 
5. Demonstrate record transactions. 
(29a Vet.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF VETERINARY UNITS 
(Functions and Combat Dispositions of Veterinary Elements) 
Instructor(s) 
Ninth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Demonstration area. 
Text References. FM 8-5; FM 8-10; T/O 8-99, 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Unit instructor; demonstration troops 
Equipment. Unit equipment. 
Transportation. Unit transportation. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
526 (29a Vet.) 
Suggested Outline of Demonstration. Evacuation of the Veterinary Aid 
Stations of Field Artillery Regiments by the Veterinary Company 
(Separate). 
1. Maintenance of contact by individual sections. It is suggested 
that a noncommissioned officer (a section leader or assistant sec- 
tion leader or other section personnel could be mounted on a 
horse and the function of contact be thus maintained. For the 
purpose of demonstration, three veterinary aid stations may be 
set up, and the platoon to function with all of its sections simul- 
taneously employed. 
2. Emphasis to be placed upon the location of platoon headquarters 
to effect supervision over operating sections. 
3. Demonstrate evacuation of aid stations using a combination of 
lead lines and ambulances; all sections to operate simultane- 
ously. 
4. Other points of the demonstration should be carried on as in the 
preceding period. 
(29a Vet.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF VETERINARY UNITS 
(Functions and Combat Dispositions of Veterinary Elements) 
Instructor(s) 
Tenth Period: Four Hours 
Place. Field. 
Text References. FM 8-5; FM 8-10; T/O 8-99. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. All unit instructors. 
Equipment. Unit equipment. 
Transportation. Unit transportation. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline of Application. Employment of Veterinary Company 
(Separate). 
1. The first application should be the evacuation of a clearing sta- 
tion of the veterinary troop following the procedure demon- 
strated in the eighth period. 
2. The second application should be the evacuation of veterinary aid 
stations using the procedure demonstrated in the ninth period. 
527 (29b Vet.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF VETERINARY UNITS 
(Reconnaissance, Use of Cover and Concealment) 
Instructor(s) 
10 Hours 
This course of instruction is common tactical training for all units. 
Instructors teaching this subject should read the Instructors’ Guide 
shown on pages 359 to 362, inclusive, under Reconnaissance, Use of 
Cover and Concealment, Medical Detachments (29b Med. Det.). 
The time allotted for this training is 10 hours. Instructional period 
should be arranged, when practicable, in accordance with the training 
guides for the Medical Detachments as applied to the Veterinary Elements. 
(29c Vet.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF VETERINARY UNITS 
(Collection and Evacuation of Casualties from the field) 
Instructor(s) 
First Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. FM 8-5; FM 8-10; T/O 2-11; T/O 6-11. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. Collection of Casualties by the Vet- 
erinary Section of the Regimental Medical Detachments Serving With 
the Cavalry and Field Artillery. 
1. Features of desirable site for veterinary aid station. 
2. Installation and operation, 
3. The Emergency Veterinary Tag. 
a. Its use. 
b. Disposition. 
4. Triage. 
528 (29c Vet.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF VETERINARY UNITS 
(Collection and Evacuation of Casualties from the field) 
Instructor (s) 
Second Period: Two Hours 
Place. Demonstration area. 
Text References. FM 8-5; FM 8-10; T/O 2-11; T/O 6-11. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Unit instructor; demonstration troops. 
Equipment. Simulated casualties (animal) ; Emergency Veterinary 
Tags; indelible pencil. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline of Demonstration and Application. 
1. First hour to be devoted to a demonstration of the installation and 
operation of a veterinary aid station. 
2. Second hour to be used in organizing the group into a veterinary 
section and installing and operating a veterinary aid station. 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF VETERINARY UNITS 
(29c Vet.) 
(Collection and Evacuation of Casualties from the field) 
Instructor(s) 
Third Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. FM 8-5; FM 8-10; T/O 8-89. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. Evacuation of Casualties by the 
Veterinary Troop. 
1. Contact agents and their functions. 
2. Evacuation of veterinary aid stations. 
a. Use of leadlines. 
b. Use of ambulances. 
3. Triage. 
4. Disposition of stray animals. 
5. Disposition of the Emergency Veterinary Tag, Form 115b M.D., by 
the veterinary troop. 
529 (29c Vet.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF VETERINARY UNITS 
(Collection and Evacuation of Casualties from the field) 
Instructor(s) 
Fourth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Field, 
Text References. FM 8-5; FM 8-10; T/O 8-89. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Demonstrators. 
Equipment. Mounts; leadlines. 
Transportation. Ambulances. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline of Demonstration and Application. Evacuation of 
Casualties by the Veterinary Troop. 
The following points of demonstration are suggested: 
1. The employment of contact agents; their efficient operation to be 
emphasized. 
2. Actual employment of methods of evacuation. 
3. All record transactions. 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF VETERINARY UNITS 
(29c Vet.) 
(Collection and Evacuation of Casualties from the field) 
Instructor(s) 
Fifth Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. FM 8-5; FM 8-10; T/O 8-99. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
530 (29c Vet.) 
Suggested Outline of Conference. Evacuation of Casualties by the 
Veterinary Company (Separate). 
1. Contact. 
2. Methods of evacuation. 
a. Use of leadlines. 
b. Use of ambulances. 
3. Ambulance loading posts. 
4. Disposition of the Emergency Veterinary Tag. 
5. Other record transactions. 
(29c Vet.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF VETERINARY UNITS 
(Collection and Evacuation of Casualties from the Field) 
Instructor(s) 
« 
Sixth Period: Three Hours 
Place. Demonstration area. 
Text References. FM 8-5; FM 8-10. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Demonstrators. 
Equipment. Leadline; simulated animal casualties properly tagged. 
Transportation. Ambulances. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline of Demonstration and Application. Evacuation of 
Casualties by the Veterinary Company (Separate). 
1. The employment of contact agents; their efficient operation to be 
emphasized. 
2. Actual employment of methods of evacuation. 
3. Establishment of animal loading posts, 
4. All record transactions. 
531 (29e Vet.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF VETERINARY UNITS 
[Ambulance Driving Convoy (Day and Night) 
Equitation and Lead Line Drill.] 
Instructor(s) 
First Period: Two Hours 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Section X, Field Manual 21-40, Defense against chemi- 
cal attack; TF 3-591, Horse Gas Mask, M4 and M5. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. Horse gas mask; horse ; chart showing vulnerable parts 
of the skin of the horse. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference and Demonstration. Protection of 
Animals Against Chemical Attack. 
. 1. Explanation of various chemical agents and their effect, together 
with appropriate protection and first aid measures. 
a. Symptoms and effect. 
b. Protection. 
c. First Aid. 
2. At the end of the conference, a short demonstration of the gas 
mask and appropriate first aid measures may be held. 
(29e Vet.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF VETERINARY UNITS 
[Ambulance Driving Convoy (Day and Night) 
Equitation and Lead Line Drill.] 
Instructor(s) 
Second Period: One Hour 
Place. Stable area. 
Text Reference. Field Manual 25-5, Animal Transport. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One Demonstrator. 
Equipment . One horse with complete saddle equipment 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
532 (29e Vet.) 
Suggested Outline of Conference and Demonstration. Saddling, Mount 
ing and Riding at the Walk. 
Explanation and demonstration of the following should be car- 
ried out concurrently: 
1. Preparation of animal for saddling. 
2. Fitting of horse equipment. Each stage of this process to be ex- 
plained and demonstrated in detail. 
3. Position of “stand to horse.” 
4. Position of “prepare to mount.” 
5. Mounting. 
6. The position of the soldier mounted. 
7. Gathering the horse and the aids. 
8. Final adjustments of equipment. 
9. Riding at the “walk”. 
10. The halt. 
11. Dismounting. 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF VETERINARY UNITS 
(29e Vet.) 
[Ambulance Driving Convoy (Day and Night) 
Equitation and Lead Line Drill.] 
Instructor(s) 
Third Period: Two Hours 
Place. Riding ring. 
Text Reference. Field Manual 25-5, Animal Transport. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Noncommissioned officers. 
Equipment. Horses and riding equipment. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Suitable riding clothes. 
Suggested Outline of Application. Equitation. 
Assign animals and issue riding equipment at beginning of period 
Practical exercise. 
a. Saddling. 
b. Mounting. 
c. Riding at a walk, 
d. Dismounting. 
533 (29e Vet.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF VETERINARY UNITS 
[Ambulance Driving Convoy (Day and Night) 
Equitation and Lead Line Drill.] 
Instructor(s) 
* Fourth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Instruction area. 
Text Reference. Field Manual 25-5, Animal Transport. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. One demonstrator. 
Equipment. Horses and riding equipment; leather cleaning equip- 
ment. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Leather cleaning equipment. 
Suggested Outline of Conference, Demonstration and Application. Un- 
saddling, Care of Leather. 
1. Conference and Demonstration. Explain and demonstrate the 
unsaddling of a horse, stressing the following sequence: 
a. Removal of the bridle; haltering the animal. 
h. Loosening the cinch. 
c. Proper arrangement of the stirrups and the cinch preparatory 
to removal of saddle. 
d. Removal of saddle. 
e. Removal of saddle blanket. 
f. Care of horse’s back. 
2. Application. All men will unsaddle their mounts in accordance 
with the foregoing instructions. Grooming of animals should 
take place before proceeding with cleaning and care of the 
leather equipment. 
3. Conference and Demonstration. Cleaning and care of leather 
equipment. 
4. Application. Cleaning and care of leather equipment. 
*Note. The two hours of this period should immediately follow the 
preceding two hours on equitation. 
534 (29e Vet.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF VETERINARY UNITS 
[Ambulance Driving Convoy (Day and Night) 
Equitation and Lead Line Drill.] 
Instructor(s) 
Fifth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Riding ring. 
Text Reference. Field Manual 25-5, Animal Transport. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Noncommissioned officers. 
Equipment. Horses and riding equipment. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Mounted uniform. 
Suggested Outline of Conference, Demonstration and Application on 
Equitation. Riding at the walk and the trot. 
1. Conference and Demonstration. Explain and demonstrate the 
following: 
a. Posting, 
b. Posting on the right or left lead. 
2. Application. Alternate two-minute walk with two-minute trot. 
It will be found that some will learn to post much more rapidly 
than others. Gradually increase the period of trotting as individ- 
uals become accustomed to posting. 
3. Correction of errors should be made during the application. 
(29e Vet.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF VETERINARY UNITS 
[Ambulance Driving Convoy (Day and Night) 
Equitation and Lead Line Drill.] 
Instructor(s) 
Sixth Period; Two Hours 
Place. Riding ring. 
Text Reference. Field Manual 25-5, Animal Transport. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Noncommissioned officers. 
Equipment. Horses and riding equipment. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Suitable mounted uniform 
535 (29e Vet.) 
Suggested Outline of Application on Equitation. 
1. All phases of saddling, mounting, the use of aids and the posi- 
tion of the soldier mounted will be stressed during these periods. 
2. As soon as possible, have the class ride in columns of twos and 
fours, teaching them column movements to be executed upon 
command. 
3. All errors should be corrected. Calisthenics while mounted 
should be employed. 
Note. Application of principles of equitation to be stressed in sub- 
sequent mounted periods. 
(29e Vet.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF VETERINARY UNITS 
[Ambulance Driving Convoy (Day and Night) 
Equitation and Lead Line Drill.] 
Instructor(s) 
Seventh Period: Three Hours 
Place. Riding ring. 
Text References. Field Manual 8-5; Field Manual 8-10; FS 2-8; FS 2-9 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Four experienced riders. 
Equipment. Veterinary lead line apparatus and animals. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. None, 
536 (29e Vet.) 
Suggested Outline of Conference, Demonstration and Application. As- 
sembly and Operation of the Lead Line. 
1. Conference and Demonstration. The following sequence should 
be observed in the assembly and operation of the lead line: 
a. Harnessing the lead line team. 
b. Adjustment of harness. 
c. The side riders. 
d. The side riders mounted with lead line not in operation. 
e. Dismounting and the preparatory procedure to assembling 
the lead line. 
f. The tying of animals to the lead line. 
g. The lead line in operation. 
h. The halt. 
i. Reversing the lead line. 
j. Operation of the lead line around a corner or obstacle. 
k. The halt and removal of animals, and detaching of lead line. 
2. Application. With one lead line use the remainder of the period 
to have successive groups of four operate the lead line in accord- 
ance with the demonstrated procedure. 
(29e Vet.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF VETERINARY UNITS 
[Ambulance Driving Convoy (Day and Night) 
Equitation and Lead Line Drill.] 
Instructor (s) 
Eighth to Eleventh Periods: Two Hours Each 
Place. Riding ring and outdoor area. 
Text References. Field Manual 8-5; Field Manual 8-10. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Noncommissioned officers. 
Equipment. Horses and riding equipment. 
Transportation. None, 
Individual Equipment. Suitable mounted uniform. 
Suggested Outline of Applicatory Period. Equitation and Lead Line 
Drill. 
The class may now continue its equitation and lead line drill 
simultaneously. Personnel should be changed on the lead line team 
as often as possible so that all may gain some experience. Prompt 
'•orrection of all errors must continue to be made. 
537 TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF VETERINARY UNITS 
(29e Vet.) 
[Ambulance Driving Convoy (Day and Night) 
Equitation and Lead Line Drill.] 
Instructor(s) 
to Fifteenth Periods: Two Hours Each 
Place. Field and roads. 
Text Reference. FM 25-10, Chap. 3. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Noncommissioned officers and drivers. 
Equipment. Unit equipment. 
Transportation. Sufficient animal ambulances. 
Individual Equipment. None, 
Suggested Outline of Conference, Demonstration and Application. Ani- 
mal Ambulance Driving. 
*These periods should be conducted similarly to those of (29e 
Amb.), adapting procedure to the animal ambulance. 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF VETERINARY UNITS 
(29j Vet.) 
(Forward Displacements and Withdrawals During Action 
by the Veterinary Section.) 
Instructor(s) 
First Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Field Manual 8-5; Field Manual 8-10; Appropriate 
Tables of Organization. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Full field equipment. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. Forward Displacements. 
Discuss: 
1. Forward displacements in general. 
2. Selection of a position or successive positions for displacing for- 
ward. 
8. The methods used in displacing station forward. 
4, Essential liaison from old to new station. 
5. Necessary reconnaissance. 
One Hour 
538 TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
(29j Vet.) 
EMPLOYMENT OF VETERINARY UNITS 
(Forward Displacements and Withdrawals During Action 
by the Veterinary Section.) 
Instructor(s) 
Second Period: Three Hours 
Place. Demonstration area. 
Text References. Field Manual 8-5; Field Manual 8-10; Appropriate 
Tables of Organization. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Unit instructor. 
Equipment. Unit equipment. 
Transportation. Unit transportation. 
Individual Equipment. Full field equipment. 
Suggested Applicatory Exercise. 
1. Organize your unit as per appropriate Tables of Organization. 
2. Establish appropriate station, receive animal patient tagged 
with EVT. 
3. Assume tactical situation requiring forward displacement and 
execute at least two displacements forward. 
(29j Vet.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF VETERINARY UNITS 
(Forward Displacements and Withdrawals During Action 
by the Veterinary Troop.) 
Instructor(s) 
Third Period: One Hour 
Place. Classroom. 
Text References. Field Manual 8-5; Field Manual 8-10; appropriate 
Tables of Organization. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. None. 
Equipment. None. 
Transportation. None. 
Individual Equipment. Notebook and pencil. 
Suggested Outline of Conference. Withdrawals During Action. 
1. Mission and purpose of a withdrawal. 
2. Maintenance of contact. 
3. Evacuation of non-effectives. 
4. Methods of withdrawal, 
5. Reconnaissance. 
539 TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF VETERINARY UNITS 
(29j Vet.) 
(Forward Displacements and Withdrawals During Action 
by the Veterinary Troop.) 
Instructor(s) 
Fourth Period: Two Hours 
Place. Demonstration area. 
Text References. Field Manual 8-5; Field Manual 8-10; appropriate 
Tables of Organization. 
Instructional Aids. 
Personnel. Unit Instructors. 
Equipment. Unit equipment. 
Transportation. Unit transportation. 
Individual Equipment. None. 
Suggested Outline of Applicatory Exercise. 
1. Organize your unit as per appropriate tables of organization. 
2. Establish appropriate veterinary installation assuming opera- 
tion of the station by means of Emergency Veterinary Tags. 
3. Assume tactical situation requiring withdrawal (execute at 
least two withdrawals). 
(291 Vet.) 
TECHNICAL AND TACTICAL 
EMPLOYMENT OF VETERINARY UNITS 
(Battalion or Regimental Training) 
Instructor (s) 
20 Hours 
The procedure as outlined for the hours devoted to Battalion or 
Regimental Training is common for all elements and will be found under 
Regimental Tactical Training (291 All Units) on pages 482 and 483. 
540 APPENDIX I 
LIST OF TEXT REFERENCES FOR INSTRUCTORS’ GUIDE 
Field Manuals 
FM 1-5 Employment of Aviation of the Army 
FM 2-5 Horse Cavalry 
FM 2-10 Mechanized Elements 
FM 2-15 Employment of Cavalry 
FM 4-5 Seacoast Artillery: Organization and Tactics 
FM 4-10 Gunnery 
FM 5-5 Troops and Operation 
FM 5-15 Field Fortifications 
FM 5-20 Camouflage 
FM 6-5 Organization and Drill 
FM 6-20 Tactics and Technique 
FM 6-40 Firing 
FM 6-180 Reference Data 
FM 7-5 Organization and Tactics of the Rifle Battalion and Com- 
ponents 
FM 7-35 Antitank Company, Rifle Regiment 
FM 8-5 Mobile Units of the Medical Department 
FM 8-10 Medical Service of Field Units 
FM 8-25 Medical Service in Joint Oversea Operation 
FM 8-35 Transportation of the Sick and Wounded 
FM 8-40 Field Sanitation 
FM 8-45 Records of Morbidity and Mortality (Sick and Wounded) 
FM 8-50 Splints, Appliances, and Bandages 
FM 8-55 Reference Data, Medical Department 
FM 10-5 Quartermaster Operations 
FM 11-5 Mission, Functions, and Signal Communication in General 
FM 11-10 Organization and operations in the Infantry Division 
FM 21-5 Military Training 
FM 21-6 List of Publications for Training 
FM 21-10 Military Sanitation and First Aid 
FM 21-15 Equipment, Clothing and Tent Pitching 
FM 21-20 Physical Training 
FM 21-25 Map and Aerial Photograph Reading 
FM 21-26 Advanced Map and Aerial Photograph Reading 
FM 21-30 Conventional Signs, Military Symbols and Abbreviations 
FM 21-40 Defense Against Chemical Attack 
FM 21-45 Protective Measures Individuals and Small Units 
FM 21-50 Military Courtesy and Discipline 
FM 21-100 Soldiers’ Handbook 
FM 22-5 Infantry Drill Regulations 
FM 23-5 U. S. Rifle, Caliber .30, Ml. 
FM 23-10 U. S. Rifle, Caliber .30, M1903. 
FM 23-15 Browning Automatic Rifle, Caliber .30, M1919A2 with Bipod 
541 APPENDIX I (Continued) 
FM 23-20 Browning Automatic Rifle, Caliber .30, M1918A2 without Bi- 
pod 
FM 24-5 Signal Communication 
FM 25-5 Animal Transport 
FM 25-10 Motor Transport 
FM 26-5 Interior Guard Duty 
FM 30-30 Identification of U. S. Government Aircraft 
FM 31-25 Desert Operations 
FM 31-35 Aviation in support of ground forces. 
FM 100-5 Field Service Regulations, Operations 
FM 100-10 Field Service Regulations, Administration 
FM 101-5 The Staff and Combat Orders 
FM 101-10 Organization, Technical and Logistical Data 
Technical Manuals 
I'M 1-240 Artie Manual 
TM 2-220 The Horseshoer 
TM 3-205 The Gas Mask 
TM 3-215 Military Chemistry and Chemical Agents 
TM 3-305 Use of Smokes and Lacrimators in Training 
TM 5-400 Military Railways and Inland Waterways 
TM 8-220 Medical Department Soldier’s Handbook 
TM 8-233 Manual for Pharmacy Technicians 
TM 8-260 Fixed Hospitals of the Medical Department (General and 
Station Hospitals) 
TM 8-285 Treatment of Casualties from Chemical Agents 
TM 8-405 Manual on Dental Administration 
TM 8-450 Veterinary Administration 
TM 8-500 Hospital Diets 
TM 10-545 Motor Transport Inspections 
TM 12-250 Administration 
542 APPENDIX II 
LIST OF INSTRUCTIONAL AIDS, BASIC TRAINING 
Training Films 
TF 3-2, Defense Against Chemical Warfare 
TF 3-216, Adjustment of the Service Gas Mask 
TF 3-217, Inspection of the Service Gas Mask 
TF 3-218, Adjustment of the Training Gas Mask 
TF 5-145, Armored Combat Vehicles 
TF 5-146, Means of Anti-Mechanized Defense 
TF 5-147, The Anti-Tank Mine M-l 
TF 5-148, Anti-Tank Obstacles 
TF 5-149, Road Blocks 
TF 7-35, Infantry Hasty Field Fortifications 
TF 7-109, Defense Against Attack Aviation (Columns) 
TF 7-110, Defense Against Attack Aviation (Areas) 
TF 7-143, Infantry Drill - The Squad 
TF 7-144, Infantry Drill - The Platoon 
TF 7-233, Determining Direction in the Field 
TF 7-236, Weapons of the Infantry Division 
TF 7-248, Instruction of the Soldier Dismounted, Without Arms, 
Positions and Facings 
TF 7-249, Instruction of the Soldier Dismounted, Without Arms, 
Steps and Marchings 
TF 8-33, First Aid 
TF 8-150, First Aid - Part IV 
TF 8-154, Sex Hygiene 
TF 8-155, Personal Hygiene 
TF 8-304, First Aid for Gas Casualties 
TF 11-157, Military Courtesy and Customs of the Service 
TF 11-184, Conduct of Physical Training 
TF 11-204, Safeguarding Military Information 
TF 11-225, Interrogation of Prisoners 
TF 11-235, Articles of War 
TF 11-382, Know Your Enemy 
TF 11-383, Friend or Foe 
TF 11-553, The Motor Vehicle Driver, Elementary Driving Instructions 
and Inspections. 
TF 11-559, The Motor Vehicle Driver, Loading, Trouble-shooting, Re- 
ports and Vehicle Abuse 
Film Strips 
FS 3-1, Defense Against Chemical Attack 
FS 3-2, Effects of Weather, Terrain, Weapons and Tactics 
FS 3-3, Protection and Protective Equipment 
FS 3-4, Nomenclature and Air Flow System of the Standard Service 
Gas Mask 
FS 3-5, Nomenclature and Air Flow System of the Standard Train- 
ing Gas Mask 
543 APPENDIX II (Continued) 
FS 3-6, Nomenclature and Parts of Miscellaneous Gas Masks 
FS 3-7, Principles of Gasproofing for Shelters 
FS 4-2, Identification of Aircraft 
FS 7-23, Manual of the Guidon 
FS 8-6, Venereal Disease Control 
FS 8-7, First Aid 
FS 8-24, Shelter Tent Pitching 
Chart, Standard Rules of First Aid 
Chart, Anatomical, Item No. 77490, Medical Department Supply Cata- 
logue 
Chart showing Essentials of Personal Hygiene (see Sec, 2, Chap. V, TM 
8-220) 
Chart, Characteristics of Chemical Agents (see page 6, FM 21-40). 
Chart to show breakdown of measures employed for Individual Defense 
Against Hostile Aircraft and Mechanized Units (see Chap, 6, FM 
100-5) 
Chart, Interior Guard (page 2, FM 26-5) 
Chart, Schematic, showing Correct Arrangement of Individual Equipment, 
Bed, Trunk Locker and Wall Locker (see pages 79 and 86, this volume) 
Set, Gas Identification, Instructional 
Set, Gas Identification, Detonation 
Blackboards, chalk and erasers, one for each platoon 
First Aid Packets, Item No. 20310 (Instructional), Medical Department 
Supply Catalogue 
(See latest edition of FM 21-6 for additional instructional aids.) 
544 APPENDIX 111 
LIST OF INSTRUCTIONAL AIDS, TECHNICAL TRAINING 
Training Films 
TF 5-237 Portable Water Purification Unit Model - 1940 
TF 7-35 Individual Hasty Field Fortifications 
TF 7-234 Use of Natural Cover and Concealment 
TF 7-236 Weapons of the Infantry Division 
TF 8-26 The Medical Regiment 
TF 8-150 First Aid - Part IV, Injuries and Accidents 
TF 8-304 First Aid for Gas Casualties 
Film Strips 
FS 3-1 Defense Against Chemical Attack — Chemical Agents and 
First Aid 
FS 5-3 Camouflage 
FS 5-12 Military Water Supply 
FS 7-7 Infantry Weapons and Their Characteristics 
FS 7-18 Pitching and Striking The Pyramidal Tent 
FS 8-1 First Aid and Sanitation — Disposal of Waste 
FS 8-2 Communicable Disease Control; Control of Respiratory 
Diseases 
FS 8-3 Control of Intestinal Diseases: A—Water Supply and Puri- 
fication 
FS 8-4 Control of Intestinal Diseases : B—Food Control 
FS 8-5 Control of Insect-borne Diseases 
FS 8-6 Venereal Disease Control 
FS 8-7 First Aid 
FS 8-8 Principles of Military Epidemiology; Control of Respira- 
tory Diseases; Selection of Camp Sites 
FS 8-9 Control of Intestinal Diseases: A—Water Supply and Puri- 
fication 
FS 8-10 Control of Intestinal Diseases: B—Food Control 
FS 8-11 Control of Intestinal Diseases: C—Disposal of Wastes in 
Camps and Bivouacs 
FS 8-12 Control of Insect-borne Diseases 
FS 8-13 Sanitary Inspection, Reports, Orders, and Surveys; Statis- 
tical Methods 
FS 8-14 Organization of the Field Army 
FS 8-15 Army Leg Splint, Half-Ring, Hinged 
FS 8-16 Ambulance Loading and Unloading 
FS 8-17 Unit Medical Service (Medical Detachments) 
FS 8-18 Sec. I - Division Surgeon’s Office 
FS 8-18 Sec. II - Medical Regiment 
FS 8-23 The Medical Battalion 
FS 8-25 Gunshot Wounds of the Face and Jaw 
545 APPENDIX III (Continued) 
FS 8-26 Roller Bandage (Barton, Modified Barton, and Parker) 
FS 8-27 Roller Bandage (Circular, Modified Gibson, Knotted, Re- 
current Bandage of Head) 
FS 8-28 Roller Bandage (Four-Tailed, First Aid Packet, Figure-of- 
Eight, Crossed (One Eye), Crossed (Both Eyes) 
FS 8-29 Emergency Bandaging of Face and Jaw Wounds 
FS 8-30 Triangular Bandage (Face and Jaw Wounds) 
FS 8-31 Roller Bandage (Face and Jaw Wounds) 
FS 8-32 Extra-Oral Traction Appliances 
FS 8-33 Clearing of Air Passages 
FS 8-34 Intra- and Extra-Oral Splints 
FS 8-35 Control of Hemorrhage (Face and Jaw Wounds) 
FS 8-36 Care and Treatment of Face and Jaw Wounds 
FS 8-37 Immobilization of Fractures 
FS 8-38 General Structure of the Horse and Mule 
FS 8-39 Heavy Tent Pitching 
FS 8-41 Emergency Measures for Wounds and Their Immediate 
Complications 
FS 8-42 Preparation and Administration of Intravenous Solutions 
FS 9-1 * Ordnance Materiel—General—Small Arms 
FS 9-2 * Ordnance Materiel—General—Infantry and Cavalry Wea- 
pons 
Chart, Anatomical (Item 77490, M.D. Supply Catalog). 
Chart, large, and mimeographed reproductions of an Emergency Medical 
Tag (Form 52b, MD, revised January 31, 1940) 
Chart, large, and mimeographed reproductions of a Field Medical Card and 
a Field Medical Jacket (Forms 52c and 52d, MDI 
Chart, large, and mimeographed reproductions of a Report Sheet (Form 
51, MD) 
Chart, large, and mimeographed reproductions of a Station Log (Form 86e, 
MD) (Page 163, FM 8-45). 
Chart, large, and printed reproductions of “Chemical Agents” (see para- 
graph 6, FM 21-40). 
Chart, large, showing Relation Between Sources of Disease and Trans- 
mitting Agencies (See: Figure 1, page 5, Essentials of Field Sanita- 
tion; Figure 1, page 6, FM 21-10). 
Chart, large, showing Control of Respiratory Diseases (See: Figure 2, page 
9, Essentials of Field Sanitation; Figure 1, page 12, FM 8-40; Figure 
2, page 14, FM 21-10; Figure 1, page 31, Dunham’s Military Preventive 
Medicine). 
f Film strips being processed but not yet assigned a number by the Signal 
Corps. 
* Optional. Use if desired for appropriate periods. 
546 APPENDIX 111 (Continued) 
Jhart, large, showing Factors in Control of Intestinal Diseases (See: Figure 
5, page 15, Essentials of Field Sanitation; Figure 5, Page 19, FM 
8-40). 
Chart, large, showing Ward Arrangement (Figure 16, page 141, Military 
Preventive Medicine, 3rd Edition). 
Chart, large, of General Rules for Ward Management (Pages 54 to 60, in- 
clusive, paragraphs 127 to 157, inclusive, Array Medical Bulletin No. 
54, October 1940). 
Chart, large, showing Layout of Wards and Adjoining Rooms in a Typical 
Army Hospital. 
Chart, large, and mimeographed reproductions of Form 55a, MD, Admission 
Card. 
Chart, large, and mimeographed reproductions of Form 72, MD, Ward 
Morning Report. 
Chait, large, and mimeographed reproductions of Form 73, MD, Diet Card. 
Chart, Showing standard types of Hasty Defense Works. 
Chart, large, and mimeographed reproductions of Form 75, MD, Patient’s 
Property Card. 
Chart, large, and mimeographed reproductions of Form 76, MD, Patient’s 
Property Tag. 
Chart, large, showing Clinical Thermometer Scale. 
Chart, large, showing graphic recording of “Pulse, Temperature and Res- 
piration.” 
Charts, large, to show Security Measures of Infantry. (See Chap. 6, FM 
100-5) 
*Chart, large, showing Organization of the Regimental Medical Detach- 
ment of Infantry. 
* Chart, large, showing Organziation of the Artillery and its Medical De- 
tachment. 
* Chart, large, showing Organization of Cavalry and its Medical Detach- 
ment. 
:i'Chart, large, showing Division Organization and illustrating Tactical Em- 
ployment of the Combined Arms. 
*Charts, large, showing Organization Setup of the Armored Units, Engi- 
neers, Signal Corps, Air Corps, 
*Chart, large, showing Organization of the Clearing Units- 
*Chart, large, showing Organization of the Collecting Units. 
*Chart, large, showing Organization of the Ambulance Units. 
*Chart, large, showing Organization of the Headquarters and Service 
Units. 
large, showing Functional Organization of the General Hospital 
the Surgical Hospital and the Evacuation Hospital. 
Chart, large, showing Microscopic Anatomy of Bacteria (select from typi- 
cal illustrations in standard text books. 
547 APPENDIX III (Continued) 
Chart, large, showing Steps and Application of the Army Leg Splint. 
(Page 304 this volume). 
Skeleton, Human. 
Ballopticon or Delineoscope. 
Anatomical Pictures. 
Anatomical Specimens. 
Medical Department Supply Catalog. 
List of Basic Equipment for Training of Surgical, Evacuation and General 
Hospitals. 
Tables of Basic Allowances, Medical Regiment and Battalion, 1942. 
Set, Gas Identification, Instructional. 
Set, Gas Identification, Detonation, Instructional. 
Venereal Prophylactic Set. 
U. S. Pharmacopeia. 
National Formulary. 
Sample Prescription Blanks. 
Medicines, Apparatus and Drugs as required for Materia Medica and Phar- 
macy. 
Model, wooden, large, of a Clinical Thermometer. 
Improvised leg splints. 
First Aid Dressings, instructional (Item 20310, M.D. Supply Catalog). 
* The subject material for these charts may be obtained from the mimeo- 
graphed Tables of Organization, Medical Department, Medical Field 
Service School, July, 1942. 
(See latest edition of FM 21-6 for additional instructional aids.) APPENDIX IV 
LIST OF INSTRUCTIONAL AIDS, 
TACTICAL AND LOGISTICAL TRAINING 
Training Films 
TF 5-12, Map Reading 
TF 7-13, Signal Communications within the Infantry Regiment. 
TF 7-234, Use of Natural Cover and Concealment. 
TF 8-26, The Medical Regiment. 
Film Strips 
FS 5-1, Map Reading 
FS 5-2, Aerial Photograph Reading 
FS 5-B, Camouflage. 
FS 5-10, Present Day Camouflage. 
FS 8-17, Unit Medical Service (Medical Detachments). 
FS 8-19, Headquarters and Service Co., Medical Regt. 
FS 8-20, 1st Battalion (Collecting) Medical Regt. 
FS 8-21, 2nd Battalion (Ambulance) Medical Regt. 
FS 8-22, 3rd Battalion (Clearing) Medical Regt. 
FS 11-1, Basic Signal Communications. 
Chart, graphical, showing number of trucks required for troop movements 
by motor transport (See Fig. 7, page 57, FM 25-10). 
Chart, schematic, showing functional organization of a collecting company. 
(See—Tables of Organization—Medical Dept., MFSS, July, 1942), 
Chart, schematic, showing ground plan of a collecting company. (See: 
Figure 3, page 64, FM 8-10). 
Charts, showing grouping of various diseases as to mode of transmission. 
(See page 12, FM 8-40). 
Charts and diagrams showing arrangement of departments and tents of 
clearing station. (See: Figure 13, page 77, FM 8-5). 
Chart, showing a prismatic compass. (See: Figure 5, p. 12, FM 21-35). 
Chart, showing a simple written message and sketch. See: Appropriate 
figures in FM 7-5). 
Chart, showing agencies of signal communication. (See Sec. II, Chap. 2, 
FM 11-10) 
Chart, showing simple line route map of an infantry division, brigade, regi- 
ment and battalion. (Figure 10, p. 23, FM 11-10). 
Chart; showing unit journal. (See: Form 20, paragraph 75, page 122, Staff 
Officers’ Field Manual [FM 101-5]). 
Chart, organizational and functional assignments. (See: Tables of Or- 
ganization—Medical Dept., MFSS, July, 1942). 
549 APPENDIX IV (Continued) 
Chart, showing ambulance shuttle, (See Figure 12, page 91, FM 8-10, 
March 28, 1942). 
Charts, large, showing: 
Syphilitic Register, Form No. 78, MD. 
Form 52a MD, Index Record of Patients. 
Form 55a MD, Clinical Record Brief. 
Form 52b MD, Emergency Medical Tag, revised January 31, 1940 
(see: Model EMT inside the front cover of a book of Emergency 
Medical Tags) 
Form 52c MD, Field Medical Card. 
Form 52d MD, Field Medical Jacket. 
Form WD, AGO No. 5, Daily Sick Report. 
Form WD, AGO No. 21, Enlistment Record. 
Form WD, AGO No. 38, Report of Physical Examination of Enlisted 
Man Prior to Discharge or Retirement. 
Form WD, AGO No. 63, Report of Physical Examination. 
Form WD, AGO No. 258, Record of Illness, Injury, Etc. 
Form 77 MD, Venereal Prophylaxis Slip. 
Form 81 MD, Immunization Record. 
Blank mimeographed copies of the above forms. 
Blanks, Ward Morning Report (MD Form 72). 
Placards showing grade and functional assignment of individual personnel 
of respective units. (See T/O Med. Dept., MFSS, July, 1942)- 
Message books containing Form M-105, Message Blanks. 
Message delivery lists. 
Tables of Allowances. 
Tables of Basic Allowances. 
Tables of Organization. 
March graph, large. (See pages 63 & 65, FM 25-10). 
Mimeographed copies of convoy hand signals. (See paragraph 29, FM 
25-10). 
Wooden model of clinical thermometer, large, with a sliding scale and 
graduated marks. 
Lapboards for Map Reading Course, 20" x 16" 
Coordinate Scales 
Prismatic Compasses 
(See latest edition of FM 21-6 for additional instructional aids.) 
550 APPENDIX V 
LIST OF INSTRUCTIONAL AIDS, VETERINARY TRAINING 
Training Film 3-591, Horse Gas Mask, M4 and M5. 
Film Strip 2-7, Horsemanship—Instruction Mounted—Suppling Exercises 
and Riding Hall Movements. 
Film Strip 2-8, Horsemanship, Instruction Mounted, Jumping and Cross 
Country Riding. 
Film Strip 2-9, Horsemastership, Instruction, Shoeing Animals. 
Film Strip 8-38, General structure of horse. 
Chart, Anatomical, Veterinary (See: Figure 11, page 60, Field Manual 
25-5). 
Chart of Skeleton of horse and man. 
Chart showing regions of horse. 
Charts showing Functional Organization of the Veterinary Sections of the 
Regimental Medical Detachments (T/O 2-11 and T/O 6-11). 
Chart showing Functional Organization of the Veterinary Troop, Medical 
Squadron (T/O 8-89). 
Chart showing Functional Organization of the Veterinary Company (Sep- 
arate) (See page 171, FM 8-5, Jan. 12, 1942), 
Chart showing Schematic Diagram, Veterinary Service, Field Army. 
Chart showing Position of the Soldier Mounted (See: Figure 1, page 5, 
Field Manual 25-5). 
Chart showing Nomenclature of the Saddle (See: Figure 3, page 12, Field 
Manual 25-5). 
Chart showing Nomenclature of the Parts of the Bridle (See: Figure 4, 
page 13, Field Man ial 25-5). 
Chart showing Proper Methods of Holding Reins (See: Figure 6, page 18, 
Field Manual 25-5), 
Chart showing Anatomy of Pastern and Foot (See: Figure 14, page 133, 
Field Manual 25-5). 
Chart showing Composting of Manure (See: Figure 252, page 779, Dun- 
ham’s Military Preventive Medicine, 3rd Edition). 
Chart, Multiple, showing Protection of Equines against Chemical Attack. 
a. Upper respiratory system (See: Figure 47, page 114, FM 21-40). 
b. Vulnerable areas of skin (See: Figure 48, page 114, FM 21-40), 
c. Areas of lower extremities vulnerable to vesicants (See: Figure 49, 
page 115, FM 21-40). 
Chart showing Horse Gas Mask, Mill, and Carrier (See: Figure 51, page 
120, FM 21-40). 
Charts, large, and mimeographed reproductions of Form 115b, Emergency 
Veterinary Tag, and Form 102, MD, Veterinary Report of Sick and 
Wounded Animals. 
Model, Clinical Thermometer, large wooden. 
Mask, Gas, for animals. 
Carlisle Barracks Pa., 10-14-42—4,200 
551 INSTRUCTORS’ GUIDE 
For 
Medical Department 
Mobilization Training Program 
8-1 
Published at the 
Medical Field Service School 
Carlisle Barracks, Pennsylvania 
SEPTEMBER 1942 War Department 
Washington, February 23, 1942 
Instructors’ Guide for Medical Department, MTP 8-1 is pub- 
lished for the information and guidance of all concerned. 
[AG. 381. (1-30-42) PC-C] 
By order of the Secretary of War: 
G. C. Marshall, 
Chief of Staff 
Official: 
E. S. Adams, 
Major General, 
The Adjutant General